MEP and Finishing Works (PK4)

Booklet 4 of 7
Volume 3 – Technical Specifications (IFC)
J17006-0100D – November 2018
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01100 SUMMARY
01125 MULTIPLE CONTRACTS SUMMARY
01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
01330 SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES
01352 HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01420 REFERENCES
01433 MOCKUPS
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01635 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01700 EXECUTION
01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01781 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS
01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01783 WARRANTIES
01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01831 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION

02240 DEWATERING
02300 EARTHWORK
02584 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
02780 UNIT PAVERS

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE

03300 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03371 SHOTCRETE
03544 CEMENT-BASED SCREED

DIVISION 04 MASONRY

04200 UNIT MASONRY

04721 STONE BALUSTRADE
04862 ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER

DIVISION 05 METALS

05051 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METALS

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05530 GRATINGS
05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL
05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 1 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-TOC-GN-PMC-01 R03
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS

06105 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06615 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
06620 CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07130 EPDM SHEET WATERPROOFING
07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07136 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
SYSTEM
07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07161 MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
07180 TRAFFIC COATINGS
07190 WATER REPELLENTS
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
07418 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
07420 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07422 EXTERIOR CLADDING:LIGHT WEIGHT CEMENT BOARD
07531 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07710 ROOF SPECIALTIES
07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07841 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07920 JOINT SEALANTS
07950 EXPANSION CONTROL

DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08163 SLIDING ALUMINUM FRAMED GLASS DOORS
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08346 SOUND-CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
08380 TRAFFIC DOORS
08411 ALUMINIUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08463 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08521 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08712 DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)
08800 GLAZING
08830 MIRRORS
08840 PLASTIC GLAZING
08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
08962 OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
09230 SOUND ABSORBING PLASTER SYSTEM
09250 GYPSUM BOARD
09310 CERAMIC TILE
09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09513 ACOUSTIC METAL PAN CEILING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 2 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-TOC-GN-PMC-01 R03
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

09661 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

09680 CARPET
09810 ACOUSTICAL UNDERLAYMENT
09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING
09912 INTERIOR PAINTING
09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10213 FIXED LOUVERS
10221 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
10265 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
10270 ACCESS FLOORING
10505 METAL LOCKERS
10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT

11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
11460 UNIT KITCHENS
11521 PROJECTION SCREENS

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS

12000 FURNITURE
12241 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

13342 FABRICATED DOME STRUCTURES
13735 SECURITY SCREENING SYSTEM (SSS)
13915 FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13921 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, HORIZONTAL FIRE PUMPS
13956 FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
13967 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15051 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING
15055 MOTORS
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15081 DUCT INSULATION
15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15122 METERS AND GAGES
15181 HYDRONIC PIPING
15182 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 3 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-TOC-GN-PMC-01 R03
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS

15186 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
15191 FUEL OIL PIPING
15194 FUEL GAS PIPING
15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15441 WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS
15444 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
15445 SEWAGE PUMPS
15446 SUMP PUMPS
15450 POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
15465 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT
15469 WATER SOFTENERS
15481 COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING
15485 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
15487 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
15490 SWIMMING POOL
15491 JACUZZI
15495 DECORATIVE FOUNTAIN
15513 CONDENSING BOILERS
15515 STEEL WATER-TUBE BOILERS
15520 FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT
15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
15585 DEAERATORS
15600 INDOOR POOL DEHUMIDIFIER
15672 AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
15684 ROTARY-SCREW CHILLERS
15710 HEAT EXCHANGERS
15725 CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15732 ROOFTOP UNITS
15734 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15739 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15752 HUMIDIFIERS
15761 AIR COILS
15763 FAN-COIL UNITS
15769 RADIANT HEATING PANELS
15785 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
15815 METAL DUCTS
15816 HVAC CASINGS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15834 AIR CURTAINS
15836 AXIAL FANS
15837 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
15838 POWER VENTILATORS
15845 AIR TERMINALS
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15856 INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
15861 AIR FILTERS
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 4 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-TOC-GN-PMC-01 R03
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

16051 COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16138 UNDERFLOOR RACEWAY
16139 CABLE TRAYS
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
16264 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
16265 CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
16280 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
16289 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES
16441 SWITCHBOARDS
16442 PANELBOARDS
16450 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
16482 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
A1 APPENDIX A1 – PART 1
A1 APPENDIX A1 – PART 2
A2 APPENDIX A2

SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO FOH INTERIOR DECORATION WORKS

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS (SUPPLEMENT)

05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS (SUPPLEMENT)
05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS (SUPPLEMENT)
06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06615 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS (SUPPLEMENT)
08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES (SUPPLEMENT)
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS (SUPPLEMENT)
08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES (SUPPLEMENT)
08712 DOOR HARDWARE (SUPPLEMENT)
08800 GLAZING (SUPPLEMENT)
08830 MIRRORS (SUPPLEMENT)
09250 GYPSUM BOARD (SUPPLEMENT)
09310 CERAMIC TILE (SUPPLEMENT)
09385 DIMENSION STONE TILE
09640 WOOD FLOORING
09661 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS (SUPPLEMENT)
09680 CARPET (SUPPLEMENT)
09720 WALL COVERINGS
09912 INTERIOR PAINTING (SUPPLEMENT)
10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS (SUPPLEMENT)
10221 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS (SUPPLEMENT)
10280 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES (SUPPLEMENT)
11460 UNIT KITCHENS (SUPPLEMENT)
12000 FURNITURE (SUPPLEMENT)
13038 SAUNAS
13039 STEAM ROOMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 5 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-TOC-GN-PMC-01 R03
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15710 - HEAT EXCHANGERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes shell-and-tube heat exchangers and plate heat exchangers for HVAC
applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for
designing bases.
2. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to
supported equipment.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for seismic restraints for heat
exchangers.

D. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Tube-removal space.
2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Heat Exchanger: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of heat exchanger anchorage devices on which certification is based and
their installation requirements.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger. Documentation that shell-and-
tube heat exchangers comply with "TEMA Standards."

G. Source quality-control reports as per Quality Assurance clause requirements.

HEAT EXCHANGERS 15710 / Page 1 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Commissioning Report: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate

and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional requirements of
heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment selected. Other manufacturers' products
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate, test and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

C. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before
shipment.

D. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. All components of PHE including frame support, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods & gaskets
shall be manufactured in the country of origin , boxed up & shipped as a one piece ready for hook
up

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over

Certificate”.

a. Shell-and-Tube, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1) Tube Coil: One year.

2) Other Components: One year.

b. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1) Brazed-Plate Type: One year.

2) Plate-and-Frame Type: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
HEAT EXCHANGERS 15710 / Page 2 of 5
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Alfa Laval Thermal, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. FlatPlate, by GEA PHE Systems.
4. Harsco Industrial Patterson-Kelley
5. ITT Fluid Handling; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
6. Mueller: Paul Mueller Co.
7. Taco, Inc.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design seismic restraints for heat exchangers.

B. Seismic Performance: Heat exchangers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫” دة ا‬.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the
seismic event."
2. Component Importance Factor is 1.0.

2.3 SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Description: Packaged assembly of tank, heat-exchanger coils, and specialties.

B. Configuration: Two pass, U-tube.

C. Shell and Head Materials: Steel shell and fabricated-steel head.

D. Tube and Tube Sheet Materials: Seamless, minimum 20-mm (3/4-inch) OD copper tubes with steel
tube sheets. Tube diameter shall be determined by manufacturer based on service.

E. Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger shell. Attach
tappings to shell before testing and labeling.

1. DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and
stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

F. Support Saddles:

1. Fabricated of material similar to shell.

2. Fabricate foot mount with provision for anchoring to support.
3. Fabricate attachment of saddle supports to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough
to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-exchanger saddles are
anchored to building structure.

2.4 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

HEAT EXCHANGERS 15710 / Page 3 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Configuration: Brazed assembly consisting of embossed or pressed stainless-steel plates brazed

together and two end plates, one with threaded nozzles and one with pattern-embossed plates.

B. End-Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.

C. Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless-steel shell.

D. Threaded Nozzles: Type 316 stainless steel.

E. Brazing Material: Copper

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural
rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.

B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 HEAT EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Install heat exchangers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install shell-and-tube heat exchangers on saddle supports with provisions to drain shell.

C. Heat exchangers shall be insulated. Comply with requirements of section 230716 “HVAC
Equipment Insulation”. Coordinate with manufacturer’s recommendations as necessary.

D. Provide factory fabricated aluminum removable and reusable insulation shroud for each heat
exchanger. The insulation shroud shall be designed for easy removal and replacement to facilitate
cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.

E. Provide insulated galvanized, drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat exchanger. The
drip tray consists of 0.75 mm hot galvanized steel plates, 50 mm polyurethane foam, supports, and
a draining valve.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. Install piping
connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.

C. Install piping with threaded or flanged connections at heat exchangers.

D. Install shutoff valves at heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections.

HEAT EXCHANGERS 15710 / Page 4 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Install relief valves on heat exchanger heated-fluid connection.

F. Install vacuum breaker at heat exchanger steam inlet connection.

G. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on heating-
fluid inlet and outlet piping.

H. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report results in
writing.

B. Verify that heat exchangers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

C. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.

D. Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.

E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

END OF SECTION 15710

HEAT EXCHANGERS 15710 / Page 5 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15725 - CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes constant-volume, variable-volume, central-station air-handling units with

coils for indoor or outdoor installations as applicable.

B. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at design cubic meters
per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated above.

C. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use of a smaller fan
motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation, a smaller motor may be
approved in the interest of energy conservation. Such a deviation shall not qualify for any value
engineering incentive claim or reward.

D. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the peak of static
efficiency.

E. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 133
percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection of L/200
where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings.

C. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫” دة ا‬.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified, and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each central-station air-handling unit specified, including the following:

1. Submittals for AHUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, humidifiers, sound attenuators,
mixing box with outside/return air dampers, filter housings, and all other related accessories.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 1 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. The Contractor shall provide custom drawings showing total air-handling unit assembly
including dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates, flexible connections, door swings,
control penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights, duplex outlets, switches, wiring, utility
connection points, unit support system, vibration isolators, drain pan, and rigging points.
Submittal drawings of section or component only, will not be acceptable. The Contractor
shall also submit performance data including performance test results, charts, curves or
certified computer selection data; data sheets; fabrication and insulation details; and the
number of pieces that each unit will have to be broken into to meet shipping and job site
rigging requirements.
3. Submit certified fan-sound power ratings showing sound power levels in each octave band
for fan and at entrance and discharge of AHUs at both present and future scheduled
conditions. Include sound attenuator capacities and itemized internal component attenuation.
Internal lining of supply air ductwork with sound absorbing material is not permitted.
4. Provide certified fan curves showing cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute), static
pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for both present and future design point of operation
and at maximum of present and future design cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute)
and 110 percent of design static pressure.
5. Submit total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for AHU including total, inlet and
discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal losses and unspecified internal losses.
Refer to air-handling unit schedule on drawings.
6. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
7. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
8. Material gages and finishes.
9. Filters with performance characteristics.
10. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraints indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for
equipment mounting.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.

D. Seismic Qualification Certification: For air-handling units, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.

E. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

F. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Submit with Shop
Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each
support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 2 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

H. Operation and Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1.

1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed,

fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A - 2008, "Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems."

B. AHRI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested
according to the applicable portions of ANSI/AHRI 430, "Performance Rating of Central-Station
Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heating and
Refrigeration Institute (AHRI).

C. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labeled by UL and comply
with applicable NEMA standards or equivalent characteristics in accordance with applicable parts
of IEC 60034.

D. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any section of air
handler when unit is operating at design conditions, the Contractor shall replace or repair unit to
correct the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component accessibility and future repairability
and inherent access for maintenance. All repairs shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest and
relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.

G. Equipment Country of Origin (manufacturing country) shall be clearly indicated and limited to
European and Middle East origins.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."

B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of central-station air-handling units with piping
and ductwork and with other installations.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air-handling unit as a factory-assembled module with protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 3 of 14
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.

B. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

B. Filters: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit.

C. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit fan.

D. Gaskets: Furnish 1 for each sectional joint of each central-station air-handling unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.

2. Euroclima
3. Trane; member of Ingersoll Rand Group.
4. York International Corporation; member of Johnson Controls, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL

A. AHUs shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction. Galvanizing shall be hot dipped
conforming to A653/A653M and shall provide a minimum of 0.275 kg of zinc per square meter
(0.90 oz. of zinc per square foot) (G90). Aluminum constructed units may be provided subject to
the Engineer’s approval and documentation that structural rigidity is equal or greater than the
galvanized steel specified.

B. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly, coils,
damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, mixing dampers, and discharge collars with flexible duct
connectors.

C. The Contractor and the AHU manufacturer shall be responsible for insuring that the unit will not
exceed the allocated space shown on the drawings, including required clearances for service and
future overhaul or removal of unit components. All structural, piping, wiring, and ductwork
alterations of units, which are dimensionally different than those specified, shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.

D. AHUs shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance with the
arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be assembled into the largest sections possible
subject to shipping and rigging restrictions. The correct fit of all components and casing sections
shall be verified in the factory for all units prior to shipment. Factory tested units shall be fully
assembled, tested and then split to accommodate shipment and job site rigging. On units not shipped
fully assembled, the manufacturer shall tag each section and include airflow direction to facilitate
assembly at the job site. Lifting lugs or shipping skids shall be provided for each section to allow
for field rigging and final placement of unit.
CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 4 of 14
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. The AHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing, caulking, and all screws, nuts, and
bolts required for assembly.

F. The manufacturer shall provide a local representative at the job site to supervise the assembly and
to assure the units are assembled to meet manufacturer's recommendations and requirements noted
on the drawings. Provide documentation that this representative has provided this service on similar
jobs to the Engineer. If a local representative cannot be provided, the manufacturer shall provide a
factory representative.

G. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal airtight and retain their
structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly of bolted panels
and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a more permanent
gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.

H. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors."

I. Air-handling units intended for outdoor installation shall be of the weather proof type. They shall
have protective pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish.

J. Air handling units with DX coils shall be completed with condensing units, specified separately in
other sections.

2.3 BASE

A. Provide a heavy-duty steel base for supporting all AHU major components. Bases shall be
constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams, channels, or minimum 152 mm (6 inch) high 3.5 mm (10
gauge) steel base rails. Welded or bolted cross members shall be provided as required for lateral
stability. The Contractor shall provide supplemental steel supports as required to obtain proper
operation heights for cooling coil condense drain trap as shown on drawings.

B. AHUs shall be completely self-supporting for installation on concrete housekeeping pad, steel
support pedestals, or suspended as shown on drawings.

C. The AHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be cleaned, primed with a rust inhibiting
primer, and finished with a rust inhibiting exterior enamel.

D. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to air-handling unit
sections, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces
when air-handling unit frame is anchored to building structure.

2.4 CABINET

A. General: AHU shall be designed and constructed such that removal of any panel shall not affect the
structural integrity of the unit. Plug panels may be used to enhance structural stability provided
access space is not reduced.

B. Materials: Formed and reinforced, double wall construction, galvanized steel panels, fabricated to
allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. The
outer wall of the double skin panel shall be precoated with oven baked polyester paint finish. Units
for outdoor installation shall have protective pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish. Units
with 100% outdoor air shall have internal sides protected with corrosion resistant paint finish.
1. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1.6 mm.
2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1 mm.
3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, 3.5 mm.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 5 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing panels shall not exceed
0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/(h. square feet. degree F).

D. Condensation Requirements: AHUs shall be designed to ensure that there is no condensation on the
exterior of the unit based on outside design conditions. Through metal connections between inner
and outer panels shall be kept to an absolute minimum. If tubular structural members are used inside
of tube shall be insulated equal to casing.

E. Unit sections shall be tightly joined in the field through the use of all-thread rod or casing brackets
and shall be gasketed to make airtight.

F. Exterior and interior panels shall be secured to the support channels with stainless steel screws and
gaskets installed around the panel perimeter. Screw spacing shall not be greater than 229 mm (nine
inches). Panels shall be completely removable to allow removal of fan, coils, and other internal
components for future maintenance, repair, or modifications. Welded exterior panels are not
acceptable.

G. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for penetrations through casing
for power and temperature control wiring and pneumatic tubing. Coordinate number and location
with electrical and temperature control subcontractors. Coordinate lights, switches, and duplex
outlets and disconnect switch location and mounting. All penetrations and equipment mounting shall
be provided in the factory. All field penetrations shall be performed neatly by drilling or saw cutting.
No cutting by torches will be allowed. Neatly seal all openings airtight.

H. Insulation: CFC free polyurethane insulation, complying with NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke
generation requirements, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," for insulation.

1. The walls, roof and floor of the AHU shall be insulated. Insulation shall be held securely in
position between the inner and outer skin of casing.
2. Thickness: 50 mm.
3. Insulation shall have 44 kg/cubic meter minimum density rigid glass fiber. Insulation shall
meet ASTM C1071 requirements.
4. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the
internal surface of section panels downstream from and including the cooling coil section.

I. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete with hinges, latches,
handles, and gaskets. Provide in each access section. Doors shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24
inches) wide and shall be the full casing height up to a maximum of 1850 mm (6 feet). Doors shall
be gasketed, hinged, and latched to provide an airtight seal. Each door shall include a minimum 150
mm x 150 mm (6 inch x 6 inch) double thickness reinforced glass or Plexiglas window in a gasketed
frame.

1. Hinges: Manufacturers standard, designed for door size, weight and pressure classifications.
Hinges shall hold door completely rigid with minimum 45 kg (100 pound) weight hung on
latch side of door.
2. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for positive cam action,
operable from either inside or outside. Doors that do not open against unit operating pressure
shall be provided with safety "Vent lock"-style latches which allow the door to open
approximately 75 mm (3 inches) and then require approximately 0.785 radian (45 degrees)
further movement of the handle for complete opening. Latch shall be capable of restraining
explosive opening of door with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12 inches water) of
differential static pressure or 1-1/2 times operating differential pressure whichever is greater.
3. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct compression with no
sliding action between the door and gasket. Secure with high quality mastic to eliminate
possibility of gasket slipping or coming loose.
4. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and located to allow
periodic maintenance and inspections.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 6 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J. Floor:

1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support a minimum of
488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed load without permanent
deformation or crushing of internal insulation.
2. Provide adequate structural base members beneath floor in service access sections to support
typical service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit floor or internal insulation.
3. Unit floors in casing sections, which may contain water or condensate, shall be watertight
with drain pan.
4. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing floors shall not
exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/(h. square feet. degree F).

K. Drain Pans: Formed sections of insulated stainless steel (316), sheet based. Fabricate pans in sizes
and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return
bends) when units are operating at maximum cataloged face velocity across cooling coil. Depth of
drain pan shall be at least 43 mm (1.7 inches) and shall handle all condensate without overflowing.
Drain pan shall be sloped to drain. Drain pan shall be continuous metal or welded watertight. No
mastic sealing of joints exposed to water will be permitted. Drain pan shall be placed on top of
casing floor or integrated into casing floor assembly. Maximum overall thermal conductance of
floor/drain pan assembly shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter K (0.12 Btu/(h. sq. ft. degree F).

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture
tight.
2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough to collect
condensate from top coil.
5. Cooling coil ends shall be enclosed by cabinet and shall be factory insulated against sweating
or shall drain to a drain pan.
6. All pans shall have a double slope to the drain point.

L. Electrical and Lighting: Wiring and equipment specifications shall conform to Division 16 Sections.

1. Provide factory installed vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style with glass globe
and cast aluminum guard shall be installed in each access section, fan, coil, filter and mixing
box sections.
2. A switch shall control the lights in each compartment with pilot light mounted outside the
respective compartment access door. Wiring between switches and lights shall be factory
installed. All wiring shall run in neatly installed electrical conduits and terminate in a
junction box for field connection to the building system. Provide single point 230 volt - one
phase connection at junction box.
3. Install compatible 100 watt bulb in each light fixture.
4. Provide a convenience duplex outlet next to the light switch.
5. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted disconnect switch.
Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.

M. Inspection Windows: Provide factory installed 150mm glass inspection windows on fan and filter
plenum section access panels of air handling units.

2.5 FAN SECTION

A. Fan-Section Construction (supply and return fans sections as applicable): Belt-driven centrifugal
fans, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
and support structure, equipped with formed-steel channel base for integral mounting of fan, motor,
and casing panels. Mount fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, and motor on structural-steel frame,
with frame mounted on base with vibration isolation.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 7 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Housings: Fabricate from formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with
shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allow entry to internal parts and
components.

C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor power. Fan wheel shall be double-width, double-inlet type
with backward-curved as indicated.

1. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
2. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back plate,
backward-curved blades, and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
3. Shafts: Hot-rolled steel; turned, ground, and polished, and having keyway to secure to fan
wheel hub.
4. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball or roller
bearings with the following:

a. Rated Bearing Life: ANSI/ABMA STD 9 or ABMA STD 11, L-50 of 200,000 hours.

5. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.

a. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.

6. Pulleys: Cast iron or steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
7. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch, selected so pitch adjustment is at middle of adjustment
range at fan design conditions.
8. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt drives.
9. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements, 2.7 mm thick, 20-mm diamond-
mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
10. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
11. Accessories: Provide the following:

a. Variable inlet vanes.

b. Discharge dampers.

12. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators, PVC coated, minimum 25
mm static deflection, with side snubbers. Allowable vibration tolerances for fan shall not
exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 0.005 m/s (0.20 inch per second) RMS
when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and
axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.

D. Fan-Section Source Quality Control: The following factory tests are required.

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to ANSI/AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings
seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and
efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans
for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

2.6 MOTORS

A. General: Refer to Section "Motors" for general requirements.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 8 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Provide internally vibration isolated fan, motor and drive, mounted on a common integral bolted or
welded structural steel base with adjustable motor slide rail with locking device. Provide vibration
isolators and flexible duct connections at fan discharge to completely isolate fan assembly. Fan drive
and belts shall be factory mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment to be made by the
Contractor after installation.

C. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.

D. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range.

E. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty
at full load (Class A Insulation).

F. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.

G. Motor Construction: ANSI/NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

1. Bases: Adjustable.

H. Bearings: The following features are required:

1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.

2. Grease lubricated.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial
thrust in motor.

I. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:

1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.

J. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.

K. Noise Rating: Quiet.

L. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled according to

IEEE 112, Test Method B. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than
"average standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B.

M. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, and

special features.

N. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 16 Sections.

2.7 COILS

A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized steel casings for heating and cooling
coils. Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to
assure full airflow through coils.

1. Multizone Units: Provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow across coils.

B. Coil Construction: Rigidly supported across full face, pitched to allow drainage.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 9 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes.

2. Tubes: Seamless copper, minimum thickness: 0.035 inches.
3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel.
4. Headers for Steam and Water Coils: Steel, cast iron, or copper with connections for drain
valve and air vent, and threaded piping connections.

C. Water Coils: Drainable with threaded plugs, serpentine with return bends in smaller sizes and with
return headers in larger sizes.

D. Coil face area velocity is not to exceed 2.5 meters per second at specified air quantity. Coil to have
number of rows and fins per cm to satisfy required capacity at specified condition, with not more
than 5 fins per cm.

E. Number of circuits to be such that water velocity satisfies specified conditions without exceeding
specified maximum water pressure drop through coil. Water velocity through tubes is not to exceed
1.8 meters per second and not less than 0.76 meters per second.

F. Steam Coils: Steam-distributing type with concentrically supported distributing tube.

G. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils: ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standard for

Refrigeration Systems”, with the following features:

1. Suction Headers and Distributor Tubes: Seamless copper.

2. Refrigerant Distributor: Design for low pressure drop, for down feed with solder
connections, and with maximum of 12 circuits for each distributor.

H. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed surface coils for
rating according to ANSI/ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."

2.8 DAMPERS

A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500-D, " Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for
Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face velocity through
damper and 1000-Pa (4-inch wg) pressure differential.
1. Damper operators shall be electrically operated.

B. Face and Bypass Dampers: Opposed-blade galvanized steel dampers, with steel operating rods
rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized steel frame, and with
operating rods connected together with a common linkage. Break-form damper blades, provide
gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten to operating rod.

C. Zone Dampers: Two single-blade galvanized steel dampers offset 90 degrees from each other on
steel operating rod rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized steel
frame. Break-form damper blades, provide gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten to
operating rod.

D. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades mechanically fastened to steel
operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage
and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

E. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades mechanically

fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with
common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. Cabinet support
members shall hold 50-mm thick, pleated, flat permanent or throwaway filters. Provide hinged
access panels or doors to allow removal of filters from both sides of unit.

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 10 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.9 FILTER SECTION

A. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

C. Filter Housing: Provide filter media holding frames arranged for flat, angular orientation, or big
filters, minimum thickness, 14 gage steel with baked finish inside and out. Joints shall be
continuously welded. Flange shall have a fixed air-sealing gasket with hollow cross section, closed
cell rubber or resilient neoprene, suitable for repetitive reuse. Cabinets shall have flanged ends for
connection to adjacent ducts. Hinged access doors on both cabinet sides. Provide access doors with
fixed air sealing gaskets to be airtight at the static pressure expected in service. Weld test ports into
each filter cabinet or plenum. Test port shall not penetrate to filter frame or media.

D. Pre-filters: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers flat panel with cardboard frame and perforated metal
retainer, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch wg) at face velocity of 2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and
ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1-1992 filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.

E. Permanent Filters: Washable, cleanable, 50 mm thick, with aluminum- or stainless-steel media and
stainless-steel frames, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch wg) at face velocity of 2.54 m/s
(500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.

F. Permanent Filters: Bag type, viscous coated fiber, 450mm long with holding stainless steel frames
and fasteners, and ASHRAE filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.

G. Construction Filters for pre-commissioning: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers encased in

fiberboard cell with perforated-metal media support, clean airflow resistance of 37 Pa at face
velocity of 1.52 m/s and ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 70 to 82 percent.

H. Filter Gage:

1. 90-mm- (3-1/2-inch-) diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case.

2. Vent valves.
3. Black figures on white background.
4. Front recalibration adjustment.
5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy.
6. Range: 0 to 1000 Pa (0- to 4.0-inch wg).
7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 6-mm (1/4-inch) plastic
tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves.

2.10 ENERGY RECOVERY SECTION

A. Heat Recovery Wheels, or Heat Pipes shall be factory installed within Air Handling Units, as per
design requirements where needed.

B. Refer to Section “Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Units”

2.11 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS

A. Variable air volume Air Handling units shall be provided with Variable Speed Drives, as specified
in Division 16.

2.12 TESTING
CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 11 of 14
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. General:

1. AHRI certified AHUs: AHUs selected by the Engineer for testing shall be factory assembled
and tested prior to shipment and shall be shipped prior to any untested units.
2. Non-AHRI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in accordance with specified
Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit capacities, ensure correct fit of
all components and minimize field assembly labor.

B. Factory Test:

1. The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those methods specified in
Division 15 Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing”; however test methods including
instruments used must be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to initiating testing.
The AHUs shall be tested for air volume, static pressure for AHU and each component, fan
RPM and power consumption for the maximum of present or future design conditions.
Submit fan curves showing test results.

C. Approval:

1. Factory tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer’s and Employer’s representative. The team
will comprise at least three persons from the Client’s side. All expenses to be borne by the
Contractor . The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a minimum two-week notice
prior to proposed schedule test.
2. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and re-testing
of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for compliance with installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of central-station air-handling units.

B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, condensate drainage piping, and electrical to verify actual
locations of connections before installation.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

1. Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads. Secure
units to anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 12 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 100 mm
larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.

B. Form concrete bases with steel channels conforming to ASTM A36/A36M, size and location as
indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab.

C. Form concrete bases with framing lumber with form-release compounds. Chamfer top edge and
corners of base.

D. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units.

E. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement conforming to ASTM
C150/C150M, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.

F. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-
preventive metal primer and paint.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect condensate drain pans. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep
trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.
3. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing
valve and union or flange at each connection.
4. Steam and Condensate Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section
"Steam and Condensate Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff
valve and union or flange at each connection.
5. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Refrigerant
Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange
at each connection.

B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with factory-provided duct collars and flexible connections.

C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections.

1. Connect fan motors to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and
terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris,
and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 13 of 14
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan
wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the

following:

1. Inspect field assembly of components and installation of central-station air-handling units

including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.

B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following before startup:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify that proper thermal overload protection
is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan
wheel rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and
install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to fully open position for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
8. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
11. Verify that manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position.

C. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated rpm.

a. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix
in final position after balancing is achieved.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.

D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air-handling system testing,
adjusting, and balancing.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain central-station air-handling units. Refer to Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15725

CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 15725 / Page 14 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15732 - ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rooftop heating and cooling units.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design RTU supports to comply with wind and seismic performance
requirements, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Wind-Restraint Performance:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 50 m/s.

2. Building Classification Category: III
3. Minimum 48.8 kg/sq. m (10 lb/sq. ft) multiplied by the maximum area of the mechanical
component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees
either side of normal.

C. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according
to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫” دة ا‬.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated
capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer:

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating
requirements with roof membrane system.
ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 1 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating
requirements with roof membrane system.
3. Wind- and Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and seismic
restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth
of penetration of anchors.

D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached.

2. Roof openings
3. Roof curbs and flashing.

E. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate

and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies of checklists.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.

G. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. AHRI Compliance:

1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for
RTUs.
2. Comply with AHRI 270 or AHRI 370 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems.”

C. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70 - 2007, Article 100.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.

ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 2 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.

C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for
unloading and moving to final location.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof
construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and countersigned
by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, within the
specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation,
and maintenance have been followed.

1. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.issuance of

“Taking Over Certificate”.
2. Warranty Period, Heat Exchangers: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.issuance
of “Taking Over Certificate”.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.

2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carrier; member of the United Technologies Corporation.
2. Engineered Air.
3. Lennox Industries Inc.
4. McQuay International.
5. Trane; member of Ingersoll Rand Group.
6. York International Corp.

2.2 ROOFTOP UNITS SMALLER THAN 21 kW (6 TONS)

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of
compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and
temperature controls, filters, and dampers.

B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection coating and

exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to
ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 3 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

internal parts, minimum 13-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping
connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.

C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-
resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized or stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 50

mm (2 inches) deep.

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture
tight.
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating for galvanized steel pans: Corrosion-resistant compound.

E. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.

F. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor bearings.

G. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor. Coils shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy coating.

H. Compressors: Hermetic with integral vibration isolators, overcurrent and high-temperature

protection, internal pressure relief and crankcase heaters.

I. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
6. Minimum off-time relay.
7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.
8. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.
9. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves
with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

J. Air Filtration:

1. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

a. Glass Fiber: Minimum 80 percent arrestance, and MERV 5.

b. Pleated: Minimum 90 percent arrestance, and MERV 7.

K. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with magnehelic
gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with adjustable mixed-
air thermostat and automatic changeover.

L. Low Ambient Control: Head-pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures as low as minus
1 deg C (30 deg F).

ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 4 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

M. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.

2.3 ROOFTOP UNITS, 26 TO 70 kW (7-1/2 TO 20 TONS)

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of
compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and
temperature controls, filters, and dampers.

B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection coating and

exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to
internal parts, minimum 13-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping
connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.

C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-
resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized or stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 50

mm (2 inches) deep.

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture
tight.
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating for galvanized steel pans: Corrosion-resistant compound.

E. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves or direct-drive
fans; and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.

F. Exhaust/Relief Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal or propeller type, directly driven with

permanently lubricated motor bearings.

G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor bearings.

H. Air Filtration:

1. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

2. Prefilter: permanent washable aluminum type, 50mm thick with minimum 75 percent
arrestance, and MERV 4.
3. Bag Filter: Class 1 type with minimum 98 percent arrestance, and MERV 14, in galvanized
steel frame.

I. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor. Coils shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy coating.

J. Compressors: Serviceable, fully hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators, overcurrent
and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief and crankcase heaters.

K. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 5 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
6. Minimum off-time relay.
7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.
8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.
9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.
10. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
11. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves
with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

L. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers

mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet.
Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate
simultaneously.

1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
with bird screen and hood.

M. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with magnehelic
gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with adjustable mixed-
air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-control device.

N. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller and electronic-

control system.

O. Low Ambient Control: Head-pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures as low as minus
1 deg C (30 deg F).

P. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.

Q. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to de-
energize unit.

R. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and communicates
with central control processor.

1. Control Outputs: 2-stage heating, 2-stage cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation
and economizer damper operation.
2. Control Sensors: Return-air-temperature sensor, fan airflow-proving switch, dirty-filter
switch, discharge-air-temperature sensor, room-temperature sensor, and night-setback-
override switch.
3. Control Features: Day/occupied modes for high or low enthalpy and night/unoccupied mode.

2.4 ROOFTOP UNITS LARGER THAN 70 kW (20 TONS)

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of
compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and
temperature controls, filters, and dampers.

B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof, double-wall construction with corrosion-protection

coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to
internal parts, minimum 25-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping
connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 6 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-
resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized or stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 50

mm (2 inches) deep.

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture
tight.
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating for galvanized steel pans: Corrosion-resistant compound.

E. Evaporator Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.

F. Return-Air Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.

G. Exhaust/Relief: Barometric damper.

H. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor bearings.

I. Air Filtration:

1. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

a. Prefilter: permanent washable aluminum type, 50mm thick with minimum 75 percent
arrestance, and MERV 4.
b. Bag Filter: Class 1 type with minimum 98 percent arrestance, and MERV 14, in
galvanized steel frame.

J. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 3110 kPa (450 psig) and
leak tested to 2070 kPa (300 psig) with air under water. Insulate coil section. Coils shall have baked
phenolic or cathodic epoxy coating.

K. Compressors: Semihermetic or hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators, overcurrent

and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heaters that de-energize
during compressor operation.

L. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
2. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced coil refrigerant circuiting with circuit for each compressor.
3. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
4. Refrigerant filter/dryer and sight glasses.
5. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
6. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
7. Minimum off-time relay.
8. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.
9. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.
10. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.
11. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.
12. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 7 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

13. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves
with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

M. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers

mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet.
Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate
simultaneously.

1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
with bird screen and hood.

N. Economizer Dampers: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers with damper operator and control
package.

1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 54 L/s per kW (400 cfm per
ton) with 250-Pa (1-inch wg) pressure differential.
2. Damper Operator: 24 V, with gear train sealed in oil with spring return.

O. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with magnehelic
gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with adjustable mixed-
air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-control device.

P. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller; supply-air static-

pressure controller with damper operator operating variable-inlet-fan vanes.

Q. Temperature Control: Factory-installed, demand-oriented, solid-state control system with minimum

of 2 cooling steps and 2 heating steps, including solid-state room thermostat with dead band, and
subbase with system and fan switches. Include the following:

1. Discharge-air-temperature reset with space-temperature override.

2. 7-day programmable clock, with power-failure carryover, for remote mounting.
3. Warm-up cycle.

R. Remote-Control Panel: Contains controls and indicator lights as follows:

1. Heat-cool-auto system switch.

2. On-off fan switch.
3. Minimum outside-air damper potentiometer position LCD.
4. Supply-fan operating indicator light.
5. Mechanical cooling malfunction indicator light.
6. Clogged filters indicator light.

S. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to de-
energize unit.

T. Electrical Convenience Outlet: 220-V, ac fused outlet, separately fused, located in unit cabinet or
in roof curb perimeter.

U. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and communicates
to central control processor.

1. Control Outputs: Heating, cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and
economizer damper operation.
2. Return-air-, discharge-air-, outdoor-air-, space-, control set-point temperature LCD.
3. Outdoor enthalpy LCD.
4. Filter pressure drop LCD.
ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 8 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

5. Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, operating mode.

6. Inlet-vane and economizer-damper position LCD.
7. Duct static-pressure LCD.
8. Alarm LCD.
9. Control Features: Day/occupied and night/unoccupied modes, temperature reset.

2.5 ROOF CURBS

A. Manufacturer's standard, insulated with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, factory-installed

wood nailer, according to NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.

b. Thickness: minimum 25 mm (1 inch).

2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface
of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as
recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a
temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric
depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

3. Curb Height: Minimum 400 mm.

4. Isolation Curb: Rigid upper and lower steel structure with vibration isolation springs and
vertical and horizontal restraints; with elastomeric waterproof membrane. 50-mm static
deflection.

B. Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match
RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site.

2.6 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: ANSI/NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance for units smaller than 39.6 kW: Rate capacity according to AHRI
210/240, " Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment."

B. Verification of Performance for units larger than 39.6 kW: Rate capacity according to AHRI
340/360, " Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat
Pump Equipment."

ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 9 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AHRI 270, "Standard for Sound Performance Rating of
Outdoor Unitary Equipment."

D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI 370, "Standard
for Sound Performance Rating of Large Air-Cooled Outdoor Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning
Equipment."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and
performance of rooftop units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level. Install and secure rooftop units on curbs
and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.

D. Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing
with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:

1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.

B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate return-air
duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of unit.

C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 10 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report results in
writing:

B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.

C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:

1. Level unit on housekeeping base, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans.
5. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
6. Check that labels are clearly visible.
7. Clean condenser and inspect for construction debris.
8. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
9. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
10. Verify that filters are installed.
11. Adjust vibration isolators.
12. Connect and purge gas line.
13. Check acoustic insulation.
14. Check operation of barometric dampers.

D. Lubricate bearings on fan.

E. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.

F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Perform starting of refrigeration in summer only.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

H. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.

I. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.

J. Calibrate thermostats.

K. Adjust and check high-temperature limits.

L. Check internal isolators.

M. Check outside-air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return- and relief-air dampers.

N. Check controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and
emergency shutdown.

O. Start refrigeration and measure and record the following:

1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.
4. Air-cooled-condenser, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

P. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.

ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 11 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Supply-air volume.
2. Return-air volume.
3. Relief-air volume.
4. Outside-air intake volume.

Q. Simulate maximum cooling demand and check the following:

1. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

2. Short circuiting air through condenser or from condenser to outside-air intake.

R. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Check the
following:

1. High-limit heat exchanger.

2. Warm-up for morning cycle.
3. Freezestat operation.
4. Free-cooling mode, outside-air changeover.
5. Alarms.

S. After starting and performance testing, replace filters with new, clean filters, change vacuum heat
exchanger and cooling and condenser coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and check
operation of power vents.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop units. Refer to Division 1.

1. Schedule at least eight (8) hours of training.

END OF SECTION 15732

ROOFTOP UNITS 15732 / Page 12 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15734 - COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes air-conditioning units and their accessories intended specifically for
computer-room applications, in the following arrangements:

1. Floor-mounted unitary units.

2. Ceiling mounted unitary units
3. Small-capacity upright units

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Computer-room air conditioners shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫ا و‬ ‫دة ا‬
‫” زل‬.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, shipping,
installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that computer-room air-

conditioning units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 1 of 10
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.

D. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate

and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies of checklists.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.

F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety
Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air

Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate Procedures," and
Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than
prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shells to comply with 2010 ASME
Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and suspension components with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof
construction.

C. Coordinate installation of computer-room air-conditioning units with computer-room raised floor

installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and countersigned
by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation,
and maintenance have been followed.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 2 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.issuance of

“Taking Over Certificate”.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.

2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Compu-Aire, Inc.
2. Liebert Corp.
3. Stulz Investment Corp. of America; Stulz-America Div.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Furnish a computer room process cooling self-contained units complete, including all temperature
controls, filters, fans and other system components as specified, all assembled and tested at the
factory prior to shipment in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 51 or AMCA 210. Ratings shall
comply with AHRI 430. Total static pressure and coil face area classification shall conform to
AMCA 99.

B. The system shall include an automatic temperature control panel and electric panel with main
disconnect operable from the exterior of the room unit. Cooling capacity of unit shall meet the
sensible heat requirements and total heat requirements shown. In selecting unit size, make true
allowance for "sensible to total heat ratio" to satisfy required sensible cooling capacity.

C. Design the separate assemblies to be used together and base ratings on the use of the matched
assemblies:

1. Self-contained direct expansion cooling units.

2. Water Cooling Coil.
3. Infrared humidifier.
4. Electric reheat coil.
5. Factory fabricated floor stand.
6. All units shall have automatic controls and shall be a complete factory assembled, piped and
wired package.

D. Corrosion Prevention: All equipment fabricated from ferrous metals shall be coated with epoxy
finish or a zinc coating or a duplex coating of zinc and paint. If accepted by the Engineer, equipment
fabricated from ferrous metals that do not have a zinc coating or a duplex coating of zinc and paint
shall be treated for prevention of rust with a factory coating or paint system that will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall be tested for 500 hours.
The salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117 using a 20 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the coating shall show no signs of blistering,
COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 3 of 10
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 3 mm (1/8-inch) on either side of the scratch mark.

E. Unit Cabinet:

1. Unit frame shall be minimum 14 gage (2.0 millimeter) welded steel tubes or steel angles and
shall be mill-galvanized or coated with an epoxy finish, or as specified above.
2. Exterior panels shall be furniture grade steel sheet, minimum of 20 gage (1.0 mm), mill-
galvanized or coated with a corrosion-inhibiting epoxy finish, or an approved equivalent
finish. Mill galvanized sheet metal shall be coated with not less than 1.25 ounces of zinc per
square foot (380 gram of zinc per square meter) of two-sided surface. Mill rolled structural
steel shall be hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted. Cut edges, burns and scratches in
hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with galvanizing repair coating.
3. Provide removable panel for access to controls without interrupting airflow. Panels shall be
gasketed to prevent air leakage under system operating pressure and shall be removable for
service access without the use of special tools. Condensate pans shall be minimum 22 gage
(1.0 millimeter) Type 316 stainless steel and shall be piped to drain.
4. Exterior surfaces of cabinets constructed of mill-galvanized steel shall be finished by the
manufacturer's standard enamel finish in the required color as directed by the Engineer.
5. Unit manufacturer's standard cabinet materials and finishes will be acceptable if considered
equivalent to the above requirements by the Engineer.

F. Cabinet Interiors Sound Attenuation:

1. Provide a factory-installed sound attenuation system in the interior of the unit cabinet.
2. Unit cabinet panels interior shall be provided with 25 millimeters of 24 kilogram per cubic
meter (one inch of 1 1/2 pound per cubic foot) neoprene-coated fiberglass insulation on
interior of cabinet panels. Insulation shall be applied to the cabinet panels with 100 percent
adhesive coverage and both the insulation and the adhesive shall conform to NFPA 90A.
3. Fans and compressors located in the unit interior cabinet shall be provided with vibration
isolators between their respective support frames and the cabinet framing.

G. Each unit shall be provided complete with the following:

1. Heating Coil Interlock: An interlock shall be provided to de-energize the electric heating coil
in the event of airflow failure.
2. Air Sensor: Air sensing devices shall be installed to indicate clogged filters and loss of
airflow.
3. Water Sensor: A water sensor shall be mounted on the main floor directly below the unit and
shall activate the alarm system if it detects the presence of moisture.
4. Smoke Detector: Smoke detector shall be located in the return air stream and shall shut down
the air-handling unit and activate the alarm when smoke is detected. Alarm shall be
connected to building alarm system.
5. Thermostat: Thermostat shall be an electronic solid state device with its element located in
the filtered return air stream. Thermostat shall have a minimum range of 16 to 27 deg. C (60
to 80 deg. F) and shall be accurate to within 0.5 deg C (1.0 deg F) degrees at the set point.
6. Humidistat: Humidistat shall be an electronic solid state device with its element located in
the filtered return air stream entering the unit's coils. Humidistat shall have an accuracy of
plus or minus 5 percent in reading relative humidity and shall have a minimum adjustable
dead band of plus or minus 5 percent. Humidistat shall have a minimum operating range of
35 to 65 percent relative humidity and shall be adjustable over the full range.

2.3 MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY TEST PLANS

A. For each unit, submit a factory test plan which when followed during factory testing shall verify that
the performance scheduled on the drawings is met by the produced unit models.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 4 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. The manufacturer shall perform factory tests on the actual units produced for this project. The test
reports shall document the performance tests conducted on the factory assembled computer-room
air-conditioning units. Performance testing on the individual computer-room air-conditioning unit
components, not factory assembled, is not acceptable.

C. Submit the required test plans for review and approval to the Engineer at least 30 calendar days
before scheduled factory test date.

D. Test Procedure: Indicate in each test plan the factory acceptance test procedures. Procedures shall
be structured to test all modes of operation to confirm that the controls through all modes of control
to confirm that the controls are performing in accordance with the intended sequence of control.
Controllers shall be verified to be properly calibrated and have the proper set point to provide stable
control of their respective equipment. Include in each test plan a detailed step-by-step procedure
for testing automatic controls provided by the manufacturer.

2.4 FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS

A. Description and Assembly: Packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of
cabinet, fans, filters, humidifier, and controls.
1. Assembly: Downflow air delivery, in blow-through configuration.

B. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel suitably braced for rigidity, supporting compressors and other
mechanical equipment and fittings with floor stand with adjustable legs and vibration isolation pads.

1. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets, hinges, and concealed
fastening devices.
2. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior with 25-mm thick duct liner.
3. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on, textured vinyl enamel.

a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Evaporator Fans: Double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal, statically and dynamically balanced.

1. Drive: Steel shaft with self-aligning ball bearings; and V-belt drive with cast-iron or steel
sheaves, variable- and adjustable-pitch motor sheave, minimum of 2 matched belts, with
drive rated at a minimum of 2.0 times the nameplate rating of motor.
2. Motor: Dripproof, permanently lubricated ball-bearing motor with built-in current and
overload protection.

D. Compressors: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, oil sight glass, internal motor
protection, low-pressure switch, and manual-reset high-pressure switch.

1. Refrigeration Circuits: 2, each with hot-gas mufflers, thermal-expansion valve with external
equalizer, liquid-line solenoid valve, liquid-line filter-dryer, refrigerant sight glass with
moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and accumulator sized for liquid
seal under light load.
2. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.

E. Evaporator Coil: Alternate-row or split-face circuits, direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless

copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins, mounted over stainless-steel drain pan.

F. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-tube aluminum-fin

coils arranged for 2 circuits, multiple direct-drive propeller fans with permanently lubricated ball
bearings, and single-phase motors with internal overload protection. Provide capacity control by
cycling fans.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 5 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Extended-Surface, Disposable, Panel Filters: Pleated, lofted, nonwoven, reinforced cotton fabric;
supported and bonded to welded-wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame.

1. Nominal Thickness: 100 mm.

2. Dust-Spot Efficiency: 25 to 30 percent.
3. Weight Arrestance: 90 to 92 percent.
4. Initial Resistance at 2.54 m/s (500-FPM) Face Velocity: 75 Pa (0.30-inch wg).
5. Recommended Final Resistance: 250 Pa (1-inch wg).

H. Refrigerant Reheat Coil: Hot-gas refrigerant coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins with 3-way solenoid valve on first-stage refrigerant circuit.

I. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Enclosed-fin electric elements arranged for minimum of 3 stages,
with primary and secondary thermal switches, manual-reset overload protection, and branch-circuit
overcurrent protection.

J. Infrared Humidifier: High-intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless-steel evaporator pan,
serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections; prepiped and using
condensate water from cooling coils with stainless-steel or brass float-valve mechanism; located in
bypass airstream; with flush-cycle timer and solenoid drain valve.

K. Integral Electrical Panel: Unit mounted NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure, with piano-hinged door,
grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover
interlock, and fusible control-circuit transformer.

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonautomatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle accessible with
panel closed and capable of preventing access until switched to off position.

L. Microprocessor-Control System: Continuously monitors operation of process cooling system;

continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity; sounds alarm on system
malfunction and simultaneously displays problem. If more than one malfunction occurs, system
displays fault in sequence with room temperature and continues to display fault when malfunction
is cleared until system is reset.

1. Malfunctions: Power Loss, Loss of Airflow, Clogged Air Filter, High Room Temperature,
Low Room Temperature, High Humidity, Low Humidity, Smoke/Fire, Water-under-Floor,
Supply Fan Overload, Compressor No. 1--Overload, Compressor No. 1--Low Pressure,
Compressor No. 1--High Pressure, Compressor No. 2--Overload, Compressor No. 2--Low
Pressure, and Compressor No. 2--High Pressure.
2. LED Display: Control Power On, System On, Humidification, Dehumidification Taking
Place, Compressor No. 1 Operating, Compressor No. 2 Operating, Heat or Reheat Operating,
Economy Cooling.
3. Push Buttons: Provide to stop process cooling system, start process cooling system, silence
audible alarm, push-to-test LED indicators, and display room relative humidity.
4. Remote Signaling: Provide termination for remote signaling of system status and alarms.

2.5 CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of cabinet, fan,
filters, controls; for horizontal ceiling mounting to fit 600-by-1200-mm T-bar ceiling opening.

B. Cabinet: Welded steel with baked-enamel finish and insulated with 15-mm thick, acoustic duct
liner.

C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven by 2-speed motor.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 6 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, internal motor overload
protection, low-pressure switch, and manual-reset high-pressure switch.

E. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins, with thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid-line filter-dryer, service shutoff
valves, and charging valves. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan.

F. Air-Cooled Condenser: Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin coil with fan driven by double-shafted
evaporator fan motor.

1. Split System: Provide suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and refrigerant piping for
field interconnection.

G. Filter: 25-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber media.

H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor, dehumidification

relay, and high-temperature-limit switch.

I. Atomizing Humidifier: Centrifugal atomizer with stainless-steel pan, demister pad, and solenoid
valve.

J. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor, compressor
start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state temperature- and humidity-
control modules, humidity contactor, time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-temperature
thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounted control panel with start-stop switch, adjustable
humidity set point, and adjustable temperature set point.

2.6 SMALL-CAPACITY UPRIGHT UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of cabinet, fan,
filters, controls; for vertical floor mounting in upflow or downflow configuration.

B. Cabinet: Welded tubular-steel frame with removable steel panels with baked-enamel finish and
insulated with 25-mm thick, acoustic duct liner.

C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, with adjustable V-belt drive, 1400-rpm motor.

D. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, internal motor overload
protection, low-pressure switch, and manual-reset high-pressure switch.

E. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins, with thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid-line filter-dryer, service shutoff
valves, and charging valves. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan.

F. Air-Cooled Condenser: Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin coil with fan driven by double-shafted
evaporator fan motor.

G. Filter: 100-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber media with 20 percent dust-spot efficiency.

H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor and temperature-
limit switches.

I. Infrared Humidifier: High-intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless-steel evaporator pan,
serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections; prepiped and located in
bypass airstream; with flush-cycle timer and solenoid drain valve.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 7 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J. Air-Cooled Condenser: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-tube aluminum-fin coils, direct-drive

propeller fans with motors with internal overload protection; capacity control to minus 34 deg C
(minus 30 deg F).

1. Split System: Provide suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and refrigerant piping for
field interconnection.

K. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor, compressor
start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state temperature- and humidity-
control modules, humidity contactor, time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-temperature
thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounted control panel with start-stop switch, adjustable
humidity set point, and adjustable temperature set point.

2.7 FLOOR STANDS

A. For computer-room raised access flooring applications, provide floor mounted computer-room air-
conditioning units with factory matched, seismic floor stands. Coordinate size and height of floor
stands with computer-room raised access flooring installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.

B. Verify that flooring system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on
Shop Drawings.

C. Verify that ceiling system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on Shop
Drawings.

D. Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install units level and plumb.

C. Install air-cooled condenser on vibration isolation.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:

1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 8 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Water and Drainage Connections: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15

Sections. Provide adequate connections for water-cooled units, condensate, and humidifier
flushing system.
3. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Refrigerant
Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in ANSI/UL 486A-486B - 2004.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two
visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report results in
writing:

B. After installation, check the following:

1. Components are not damaged.

2. Unit is level.
3. Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
4. Vibration isolation and flexible connections are installed correctly.
5. Makeup water is connected.
6. Humidifier water piping is connected.
7. Ductwork is connected.
8. Bearings are lubricated.
9. Filters are installed and clean.

C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete manufacturer's startup checks.

D. After starting and performance test, replace filters with new, clean filters and flush humidifier.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 9 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain computer-room air-conditioning units. Refer to Division 1.

1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

END OF SECTION 15734

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 / Page 10 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and
compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and
may be connected to ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for
cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.

B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a
refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms
of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of units
showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.

F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 / Page 1 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system
units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal
performance characteristics may be considered.

B. ASHRAE Compliance

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 and 34 Package “Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems.”

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

E. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable of
working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.

F. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating speed
selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not exceed 40dBa at low speed and 48dBa
at high speed.

G. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the test
procedures specified in ANSI S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units provided with factory-
fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models
will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation between
models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Each
unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.

H. Local Certification: Units should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Section "Roof Accessories."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over
Certificate”.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 / Page 2 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall
not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall
be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work included, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Carrier Corp.; member of the United Technologies Corporation Family.

2. Trane ; member of Ingersoll Rand Group.
3. York International Corp.; member of Johnson Controls, Inc.

2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on
back of panel.

1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

2. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with polystyrene.

a. Fabricated with minimum one percent slope in at least two planes to collect
condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and
return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection.

1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1.
2) Depth: A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
b. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate
from top coil.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
AHRI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.

D. Fan Motor: Multispeed, PSC type.

E. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.

2. Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2.
3. Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both
sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 / Page 3 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.3 WALL- OR CEILING-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Engineer,
and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
AHRI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral overload
protection; resiliently mounted.

D. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.

2. Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2.
3. Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both
sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

2.4 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes
for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage
ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay,
and contactor.

1. Compressor Type: Scroll.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
AHRI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Refrigerant: R-410A.

E. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.

F. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

G. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

H. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 7 deg C .

I. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.5 KITCHEN DEEP COOLING UNITS

A. Refrigeration System:
1. Hermetic units:
a. Condensing unit can be used for temperatures between 12 C and -25 C.
b. Tropicalized units can operate at ambient temperature of 43 C.
c. Condensing units are IP24 class and can be installed outdoor.
d. Safety: all the CUs have a pressure valve to stabilize the condensation temperature
and a safety vacuum pressure valve.
e. Refrigerant gas R404A
f. Max. Ambient temperature 45 C.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 / Page 4 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

g. Electrical defrost.
h. Standard equipment;
1) Pre cabled e. board with microprocessor, prepared for alarm and televise.
2) Pipe connection
3) Crate for plant.

2. Semi hermetic units;

a. Condensing units: Made in very thick galvanized sheet steel and epoxy powder
enabling the atmospheric agents to ruin the products.
b. IP55 protection level.
c. Evaporator. in copper and aluminum, forced fan with electrical relays for automatic
defrosting-stirrups for wall fitting of the evaporator-the thermostatic calve and where
necessary, the liquid gas exchanger are fitted and ready to be connected to the units
by means of piping.
d. Control panel on the moto condensing unit.
e. Control panel on cold room;
1) With IP55 protection for the following operations:
a) Control and recording of temperature.
b) Automatic defrosting unit
c) End of defrosting control
d) Lighting of cold room
e) Prepared for serial televises
f) Prepared for remote control alarm
f. Standard equipment :
1) Pre cabled e. board with microprocessor, prepared for alarm and televise.
2) Pipe connection
3) Crate for plant.
4) Regulation of condensation

B. Temperature Monitoring System: Electronic monitoring and remote audible alarm system that warns
when temperatures register 10 deg F (6 deg C) above or below set temperature.

C. Closure Panels and Trim: Include closure panels and trim.

D. Electrical Service: Equip unit for connection to service voltage 415V or 240V as directed by
electrical engineer.

E. Self-evaporating built in tray for mono block units side/roof mounted.

F. Exterior Condensing Units: Include winter control, crankcase heater, and enclosed weatherproof
housing.

G. Operating Temperature: as per project requirements.

Refrigeration units shall be similar to that provided by Misa or approved equal.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Low voltage with sub-base to control compressor and evaporator fan.

B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 / Page 5 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on minimum 100 mm thick, reinforced

concrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are
specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

D. Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Section

"Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static

deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

F. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow
access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and
to prepare a written report of inspection.

B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service, and report results in
writing.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 / Page 6 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.

D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:

1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.

2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration transmission
to structure.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain split-system air-conditioning units. Refer to Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15738

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 / Page 7 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15739 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete
installation of the multi-split system inverter driven heat pump air conditioners with multi indoor
units and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Extent of Air-conditioning units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section. Types of air-conditioning units specified in
this section include the following:

a. Indoor Units
b. Outdoor units
c. Refrigerant Piping

2. Provide factory-mounted and wired controls and electrical devices as specified in this
section.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards and reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is more stringent.

1. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of packaged heating and cooling

reverse cycle units in accordance with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE , “Safety Standards
for Refrigeration Systems.”

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms
of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 1 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of units
showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to units.
Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for
final installation of units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each packaged unit,
control and accessory, including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product
data in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle air-conditioning units and components carefully to prevent damage,
breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged air-conditioning units or components; replace
with new.

B. Store air-conditioning units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,
water, construction debris and physical damage.

C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air-conditioning
units, and moving units to final locations for installation.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND
34 PACKAGE , “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”

C. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable of
working at outdoor ambient temperature of 40 deg. C.

D. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating speed
selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not exceed 40dBa at low speed and 48dBa
at high speed.

E. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the test
procedures specified in ANSI S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units provided with factory-
fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models
will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation between
models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Each
unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 2 of 8
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Section "Roof Accessories."

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace components of air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over
Certificate”.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Variable Refrigerant Volume Air Conditioning Units:

a. Daikin Industries, Ltd.

b. LG
c. Samsung
d. Trane

2.2 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install multi split system inverter driven heat pump air conditioner for application with
R410A or R-407C refrigerants and consisting of outdoor unit and matching multi indoor evaporator
blowers. Each unit shall provide the total cooling capacity shown on the drawings. Indoor units shall
be of the type shown on drawings.

B. Units to be certified for capacity rating by an approved international institute.

C. Multi splits system shall be suitable for the existing static height between the condensing units
located on roof and the indoor units located in attic of each apartment.

D. The split system shall be complete with a distribution refrigeration cycle, electrical controls, wiring
and enclosing cabinets.

2.3 OUTDOOR UNIT

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 3 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Cabinet

1. The cabinet shall be constructed of weatherproof casing constructed from rust-proof

galvanized steel sheet, baked with synthetic resin or baked enamel finish paint.
2. The service panel shall be easily removable for service access to the electrical components
and the compressor section.

B. Refrigeration Cycle

1. Each refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with minimum of 2 scroll compressors, solenoid
valves, shut-off valves, heat exchangers, accumulators, 4-way valves. All compressors shall
be inverter driven. Allowable pipe length shall exceed 150m. COP of system in cooling mode
shall exceed 3.60.

C. Compressor Protection

1. The compressor shall be protected against breakdown by a quick response over current relay,
a high pressure switch, a wrap-around type oil heater and a discharge gas thermistor.
Compressors shall be installed on vibration isolators to be isolated from the cabinet floor.

D. Outdoor Fan and Fan Motor

1. The outdoor fan shall be the plastic propeller type, dynamically balanced, and the fan shall
be directly driven by a suitable motor for vertical-flow air discharge. The fan motor shall be
permanently lubricated and be protected from ingress of water. The fan motor shall be of DC
inverter type.

E. Outdoor Heat Exchanger

1. The heat exchanger shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type, equipped with highly-
efficient aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to oxygen-free copper tubes. Aluminum fins
shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film. The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested
for leakage at the factory. The heat exchanger space shall be separated from compressors
space to have accurate diagnostics readings when needed.
2. Outdoor units installation should allow for side by side installation.

2.4 INDOOR UNIT

A. Cabinet

1. The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet or finished steel sheet, baked with
synthetic resin-paint, with panel assembly constructed of galvanized steel sheet for the
ceiling duct type unit.
2. Type of cabinet shall be as indicated on drawings.
3. All indoor units shall be of the low profile type with depth ≤ 250mm

B. Refrigeration Cycle

1. The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with a heat exchanger, an electronic expansion
valve, solenoid valves and flare connections.

C. Indoor Fan and Fan Motor

1. The indoor fan shall be the multi-blade centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced,
and directly driven by suitable motor. The fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated.
Three operating positions Hi, Medium and low can be selected according to the required
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 4 of 8
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

conditions. Fan capacity and motor ratings shall be as indicated on drawings and
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Unit selection shall be based on medium speed fan capacity.

D. Indoor Heat Exchanger

1. The heat exchanger shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type, equipped with highly
efficient aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to seamless, oxygen-free copper tubes. The
fins shall be spaced at no more than 12 fins per 25.4 mm. The coil shall be cleaned,
dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.

E. Air Filters

1. Air filters shall be nylon fiber or cellular plastic material and shall have a minimum efficiency
of 60%.

2.5 CONTROL

A. All electrical control devices shall be enclosed in the indoor and outdoor units.

B. Controls and Thermostats shall be manufactured by the same selected VRV Manufacturer.

C. In addition to the compressor protection devices, the indoor fan motor shall be equipped with an
internal thermostat. The outdoor fan motor shall be protected by an internal thermostat. The indoor
fan motor shall be directly supplied with the power source from the control circuit. The functions of
these control devices shall compose an electrical sequence of manual starting and stopping,
automatic continuous operation whenever the room thermostat requires, and the protection devices
allow the operation.

D. The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet.

E. Various operation data for the last 30 minutes shall be kept inside the control PCB of outdoor unit.

F. Test run mode to check and prevent installation errors.

G. Automatic back up operation shall be available; even if one compressor fails another compressor
will back up and automatically keep the system in operation without interruption.

H. Connectivity to central controllers shall be available with no need to interface devices.

I. Provide interlock between indoor unit and balcony doors when applicable. Indoor units to be
switched off when balcony doors open.

J. Availability of interface units for communication with standard BMS systems.

2.6 REMOTE CONTROLLER.

A. Provide remote controller with each indoor unit.

B. The remote controller shall be able to set temperature, mode of operation, fan speed. Also remote
controller shall read room temperature. Filter sign must be included to indicate when the filter shall
be cleaned. The remote controller shall provide as standard feature a weekly timer witch allows one
week operation schedule to be registered.

C. Controller must store operation data for cumulative hours of operation.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 5 of 8
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.7 REFRIGERATION CYCLE

A. The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with multi kit on all pipes branching as recommended by
air-conditioning unit’s manufacturer.

B. Circuits shall include but not limited to liquid and gas shut off valves and solenoid valves.

C. All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safety operation of the system. The
following shall be part of the outdoor unit:

1. High Pressure Switch

2. Overload Relay
3. Inverter Overload Protector
4. Fusible Plugs

D. Outdoor unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery systm to ensure stable operation with long
refrigerant piping.

2.8 REFRIGERANT PIPES

A. Refrigerant pipes shall be of seamless copper tube type "L", coated with PVC tape, jointed by silver
brazing, using 45% silver brazing alloy. All copper pipes shall be marked with manufacturer name
or trademark.

B. Pipe carrying cold refrigerant gas (RS & RL) shall be insulated as recommended by air-conditioning
unit’s manufacturer.

C. Size of refrigerant lines between condensing unit and evaporator blowers shall be as recommended
by the manufacturer and shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

2.9 CABLES

A. Electric power shall be supplied to the condensing unit and to the indoor units by the electrical
contractor. Mechanical contractor shall supply and install control cables between condensing unit,
evaporators and thermostats.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Section

"Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

D. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static

deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

E.
Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow
access to unit.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 6 of 8
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
ANSI/UL 486A-486B.

E. Electrical Wiring

1. Obtain from manufacturer all required devices not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish
copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram.
2. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment startup
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment manufacturer.

F. Ductwork

1. Refer to Section "Ductwork". Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct
connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size.
2. Connect condenser supply and exhaust ducts to unit with flexible connections.

G. Drain Piping: Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. Provide trap at drain pan,
construct at least 1 inch deeper than fan pressure in inches of water.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and
to prepare a written report of inspection.

B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 7 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain variable refrigerant volume air conditioning units. Refer to
Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15739

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15739 / Page 8 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15752 - HUMIDIFIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following type[s] of humidifiers:

1. Steam-injection humidifiers for application on ducted HVAC systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating weights, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of humidifiers. Include piping details, plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and dispersion tubes.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate
and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For humidifiers to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

B. Comply with AHRI 640, "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Humidifiers."

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Supply one replacement electrode cylinder with each self-contained humidifier.

1.6 COORDINATION

HUMIDIFIERS 15752 / Page 1 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Coordinate location and installation of humidifiers in ducts and air-handling units. Revise locations
and elevations to suit field conditions and to ensure proper humidifier operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Armstrong International, Inc.
2. Carnes Co., Inc.
3. Dri-Steem Humidifier Co.
4. Nortec Industries, Inc.
5. Pure Humidifier Co.

2.2 STEAM-INJECTION HUMIDIFIERS

A. Description: Steam valve, separator, and dispersion tube extending across entire width of duct and
equipped with mounting brackets for both ends of tube.

B. Dispersion Tube: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel, jacketed; insulated with 13-mm fiberglass
and stainless-steel jacket.

C. Control Valve: Normally closed valve, with seat and stem matched to deliver required steam flow.

1. Actuator: Electric, modulating, with spring return.

2. Actuator: As specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."

D. Steam Separator: Separate from control valve.

1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel.

E. Steam Trap: Inverted-bucket type, sized for maximum condensate flow.

F. Optional Accessories: Include the following:

1. Wall-mounted or return-duct-mounted humidistat.

2. Duct-mounted, high-limit humidistat.
3. Temperature switch to prevent cold operation.
4. In-line on-off steam control valve for automatic and total shutdown of humidifier.
5. In-line strainer.
6. Airflow switch to prevent humidifier operation when there is no airflow.

2.3 SELF-CONTAINED HUMIDIFIERS

A. Description: Electric-resistance or electrode-type, electric immersion heaters within a cylinder to

generate steam. Enclosure cabinet contains equipment components.

1. Remotely mounted with flexible hose connecting dispersion tube in duct airstream.

B. Heater Cylinder: Replaceable or cleanable type.

HUMIDIFIERS 15752 / Page 2 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Dispersion Tube: Stainless-steel tube extending across entire width of duct and equipped with
mounting brackets for both ends of tube.

D. Cabinet: Sheet metal enclosure for housing heater cylinder, electrical wiring, components, controls,
and control panel. Enclosure shall include baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard colors,
hinged or removable access door, and threaded outlet in bottom of cabinet for drain piping.

E. Control Panel: Factory-wired disconnect switch; liquid-crystal display, programmable keyboard;

set-point adjustment; warning signal indicating end of replaceable cylinder life; low-voltage control
circuit; diagnostic, maintenance, alarm, and status features; and high-water sensor or float to prevent
overfilling.

F. Controls: Solenoid-fill and automatic drain valves shall maintain water level and temper hot drain
water; field-adjustable timer shall control drain cycle for flush duration and interval.

1. Water-Level Controller: Conductivity probe or mechanical float.

G. Optional Accessories: Include the following:

1. Humidistat: Solid-state, electronic-sensor controller capable of full modulation.

2. Duct-mounted, high-limit humidistat.
3. Control interface capability with building control system.
4. Airflow switch to prevent humidifier operation when there is no airflow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine ducts, air-handling units, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
humidifier installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 HUMIDIFIER INSTALLATION

A. Install with required clearance for service and maintenance. Maintain path, downstream from
humidifiers, clear of obstructions as required by ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Install galvanized steel drain pan under each manifold mounted in duct.

1. Connect to condensate trap and drainage piping.

2. Extend drain pan upstream and downstream from manifold a minimum distance
recommended by manufacturer but not less than required by ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Seal humidifier dispersion-tube duct penetrations with flange.

D. Install humidifier manifolds in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA’s
“HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.”

E. Install dispersion tubes pitched to drain condensate back to housing.

HUMIDIFIERS 15752 / Page 3 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Install drip leg upstream from steam trap, a minimum of 300 mm for proper operation of trap.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer in humidifier supply line.
3. Install backflow prevention device in humidifier supply line.
4. Connect piping with a minimum of 25-mm air gap in fill line to prevent backflow into supply
line.

B. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted.

C. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.
Report results in writing.

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain humidifiers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

END OF SECTION 15752

HUMIDIFIERS 15752 / Page 4 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15761 - AIR COILS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Water coils
2. Refrigerant coils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities of selected models; pressure drop; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; installation instructions; and startup instructions for each type of product
indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating coil location and
ceiling-mounted access panels.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

B. Comply with AHRI 410, "Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils," for
components, construction, and rating.

1. Certify coils to AHRI 410, "Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating
Coils."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

AIR COILS 15761 / Page 1 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Aerofin Corporation.
2. Carrier; member of United Technologies Corporation.
3. Coil Company Inc.
4. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
5. INDEECO.
6. Trane Co.; member of Ingersoll Rand Group.
7. USA Coil and Air.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Coil Casings:

1. Casing shall be flanged on four sides for bolted assembly, except as otherwise specified.
2. Where coils are stacked, casing shall be of double-bend construction.
3. Coil mounting within housing shall be either fixed or slide-out type, except as otherwise
specified.
4. Coils shall be slide-out type for ceiling-suspended package units, and for other package units
whose capacity exceeds 15,000 cubic feet per minute (7 cubic meter per second).

B. Coil Tubes:

1. Coil tubes shall be parallel and shall have sufficient intermediate full coil depth supports to
prevent sagging of unsupported span due to working fluid pressures and temperatures and
summer and winter coil-ambient conditions.
2. Sagging shall be unacceptable if tube centerline is displaced by more than 3/16 inch (5
millimeter) from centerline of tube connection at outlet header when coils are more than two
rows deep and when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Provisions for expansion and contraction shall be adequate to preclude sagging and distortion
under thermal loads applied in indicated or specified service.
4. Tubes shall be sloped to be free draining.
5. Coil face tube spacing for cooling coils shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches (38 millimeter) on
center.
6. Tubes shall be straight, turns shall be made through headers or return U-bends, and
connections and joints shall be brazed, except as otherwise specified.

C. Coil Circuiting:

1. Standard or full-circuited water coils shall have as many full-length tubes in each circuit as
the number of tubes in the depth of the coil face; double-circuit water coils shall have twice
as many as standard coils; and half-circuit water coils shall have half as many as standard
coils and to the next larger whole number where odd numbers are involved.
2. Coils more than two rows deep shall be counterflow type, except that in the case of double-
or half-circuit coils, reasonable deviation from counterflow arrangement will be permitted,
provided the pressure drop and capacity requirements are met.

D. Drainable Coils:

1. Drainable coils shall be capable of being purged free of water with compressed air.
AIR COILS 15761 / Page 2 of 5
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Self-draining coils shall have a drain point at the end of every tube and shall be pitched to
that point. Drain provisions shall include: drained headers; U-bends with integral plugs; or
nonferrous plugs in cast-iron headers. Each tube shall drain substantially dry by gravity
alone when drains and vents are open.
3. Where necessary, the coil shall be filled with water to the end of the manufacturer's header
connections and drainage volume shall be checked against the manufacturer's data.

2.3 WATER COILS

A. Description: Cleanable coil fabricated to AHRI 410.

B. Dampers: Arrangement of coil segments with face-and-bypass dampers and downstream damper.

1. Arrangement: Horizontal coils.

2. Dampers: Extruded-aluminum blades with full-length drive rod.

C. Piping Connections: Threaded, on same end.

D. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75M (ASTM B 75).

1. Tube Diameter: [15.9 mm (0.625 inch)] [19.0 mm (0.75 inch)] [25.4 mm (1.0 inch)].

E. Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing 3.18 mm (0.125 inch).

F. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.

G. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.

H. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 1.6 mm (0.0625 inch).

I. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.

1. Working Pressure Ratings: 1380 kPa (200 psig), 163 deg C (325 deg F).

J. Source Quality Control: Test to 2070 kPa (300 psig), and to 1380 kPa (200 psig) underwater.

2.4 REFRIGERANT COILS

A. Description: Coil designed for use with refrigerant, fabricated to AHRI 410, connected with
soldered fittings.

1. Refrigerant Type: R-407C, R-410A, or HFC-134a.

B. Capacity Reduction: Circuit for row control.

C. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75M (ASTM B 75).

1. Tube Diameter: [15.9 mm (0.625 inch)] [12.7 mm (0.50 inch)] [9.5 mm (0.375 inch)]
[19.0 mm (0.75 inch)] [25.4 mm (1.0 inch)].

D. Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing 3.18 mm (0.125 inch).

E. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.

AIR COILS 15761 / Page 3 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints.

G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 1.6 mm (0.0625 inch).

H. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.

1. Working Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa (300 psig).

I. Source Quality Control: Test to 3110 kPa (450 psig), and to 2070 kPa (300 psig) underwater.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine ducts, plenums, and units to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before coil
installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install coils level and plumb.

B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."

C. Install galvanized-steel drain pan under each chilled-water coil.

1. Construct drain pans with connection for drain; insulated and complying with
ASHRAE 62.1.
2. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width and to connect to condensate
trap and drainage.
3. Extend drain pan 125 mm upstream from coil face.
4. Extend drain pan 250 mm downstream from moisture eliminator.
5. Extend drain pan under coil headers and exposed supply piping.

D. Install moisture eliminators for chilled-water and refrigerant coils.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.

AIR COILS 15761 / Page 4 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A - 486B.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Straighten bent fins on each air coil.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean inside
of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.

END OF SECTION 15761

AIR COILS 15761 / Page 5 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15763 - FAN-COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 15 Section "AIR COILS" for coils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories for each unit type and configuration.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed units.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available
for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fan coil units, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.

FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 / Page 1 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate
and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:

1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest and
relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish 10% spare filter[s] for each filter type installed.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish 10% spare fan belt[s] for each unit installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall
not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall
be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Carrier Corp.; member of the United Technologies Corporation Family (U.S.A.)

2. Trane ; member of Ingersoll Rand Group . (U.S.A. or France)
FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 / Page 2 of 6
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. York International Corp.; member of Johnson Controls, Inc. (U.S.A.)

2.2 GENERAL

A. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

B. Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed models.

C. Units shall have three speeds switch and shall be selected at medium speed.

D. Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with auxiliary water coil,
valve and piping package, drain pans, air filter, fan motor, and motor control.

E. All thermal and acoustical insulation shall be contained within a double walled enclosure or sealed
with a coating that is impervious to moisture.

F. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating speed
selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed the following values at the midfrequency
of each octave band:

OCTAVE BANDS

Frequency
(hertz) 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000

Power Level 60 55 53 50 48

G. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the test
procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units provided with
factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet
models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation
between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts.
Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.

H. Capacity of he units shall be as indicated. Room fan-coil units shall be certified as complying with
AHRI 440 and shall meet the requirements of UL 1995.

I. Units shall be of the low profile type (h ≤ 270mm).

2.3 CONFIGURATION

A. Concealed Units: An enclosed, horizontal type assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis, coil, drain
pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic cooling coil and hydronic heating
coil with inlet and outlet duct collars.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.

B. Coil Section Insulation: 13-mm (1/2-inch) duct liner (coated glass fiber or foil-covered, closed-cell
foam) complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 / Page 3 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-
spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84
by a qualified testing agency.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements
in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be insulated with
polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall extend to underside of valves, strainers and
accessories, and be formed to slope from all directions to drain connection.

D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.

1. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and attached
with safety chain; with cast-aluminum discharge grilles.

E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with manufacturer's
standard paint, in color selected by Engineer, applied to factory-assembled and -tested fan-coil unit
before shipping.

F. Enclosure shall be constructed of not lighter than 18-gage, 1.3 millimeter, galvanized steel, properly
reinforced and braced. Front panel of enclosure shall be removable and provided with 1/2-inch (13
millimeter) thick insulation conforming to NFPA 90A, to prevent condensation. Discharge louvers
shall be four-way adjustable and shall be designed to properly distribute air throughout the
conditioned space. All ferrous-metal surfaces shall be galvanized. All exposed-to-view enclosure
corners and edges shall be rounded. Discharge louvers shall be mounted in a top panel that is
removable for coil cleaning. Access doors shall be hinged and shall be provided for all piping and
control compartments. Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer's standard in color selected by the
Engineer.

2.5 WATER COILS

A. Cooling/Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer
than 2.5 mm and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of
1378 kPa (200 psig) and a maximum entering water temperature of 104 deg C (220 deg F).

2.6 FAN

A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized steel or
thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor. Fan shall be suitable for
these speed operation. Fan-coil capacity shall be based on medium speed. The noise level shall not
exceed NC30 unless otherwise specified.

2.7 FAN MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 15055: “Motors”.

B. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral thermal-
overload protection and resilient mounts.

C. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled, with hinged mount, adjustable motor
pulley and permanently lubricated bearings.

D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit. Connect
motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 / Page 4 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.8 CONDENSATE PUMP

A. To be used wherever gravity collection and removal of condensate from air conditioning equipment
is not possible or practical.

B. Vertical centrifugal pump with minimum 0.5 gallon collection tank.

C. Tank shall be equipped with safety overflow switch.

D. Motor shall be thermally protected.

E. Housing, tank and volute shall be made of ABS.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen.

B. Steel subbase, height as indicated.

C. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.

D. Filters: 25-mm thick, washable type, aluminum filters and frames.

E. Dampers: Steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade length and having factory-
mounted electric operators for 25 percent open cycle.

2.10 CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Four-Pipe, Valve Cycle: Wall-mounted electronic thermostat, with electronic fan-speed switch and
electronic cycling of valves, suitable to be connected to the central building control system.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and rate units according to AHRI 440.

B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-coil
unit installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 / Page 5 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers).
Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic
Restraints."

D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls at heights to match lighting controls.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground equipment.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A - 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:

1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and
unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are
made.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

END OF SECTION 15763

FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 / Page 6 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15769 - RADIANT HEATING PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electric radiant heating panels for space-heating applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, specialties, and accessories for each product indicated.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Detail
equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product and for each color and finish required.

E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For radiant heating panels to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

G. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

RADIANT HEATING PANELS 15769 / Page 1 of 3

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of radiant heating panels and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace electric radiant heating panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over

Certificate”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Electric Radiant Heating Panels:

a. INDEECO.
b. Markel Products Co.
c. Omega Engineering, Inc.
d. SSHC, Inc.; Solid State Heating Division.
e. Weil McLain Co.; Berko Electric Mfg Div.

2.2 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATING PANELS

A. Description: Sheet-metal enclosed panel with powdered-graphite heating element sandwiched

between sheets of dielectric insulation, suitable for lay-in installation flush with T-bar ceiling grid,
surface mounting or recessed mounting as shown on drawings.

1. Fabrication: 0.7-mm thick, galvanized steel sheet back panel riveted to 1.0-mm thick,
galvanized steel sheet front panel with fused-on crystalline surface.
2. Nominal Size: as shown on drawings.
3. Furnish with nonheating leads factory connected to embedded heating cables.
4. Factory apply silk-screened finish to match architectural pattern of acoustical ceiling tiles.
5. Factory apply two coats of flat polyester paint, manufacturer's standard color as selected by
Engineer.

B. Wall Thermostat: Bimetal sensing elements calibrated from 2 to 32 deg C (35 to 90 deg F), with
contacts suitable for 24-V circuit and with manually operated, snap-acting off switch with
contactors, relays, and control transformers for 24-V control circuit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
RADIANT HEATING PANELS 15769 / Page 2 of 3
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Examine areas to receive radiant heating panels for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before radiant heating
panel installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install radiant heating panels level and plumb.

B. Hang or support cabinet unit heaters according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match
lighting controls.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following field quality-control

testing and report results in writing:

1. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical
connections.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are
made.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing panels, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain radiant heating panels. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration
and Training."

END OF SECTION 15769

RADIANT HEATING PANELS 15769 / Page 3 of 3

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15785 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Heat wheels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, operating characteristics, weights
(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and startup
instructions.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.

C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

E. Maintenance data for each energy recovery unit, control, and accessory to include in the operation
and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. AHRI Compliance:

1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with AHRI 1060,
"Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation
Equipment."
2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling
and Air-Heating Coils."

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and

Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84,
"Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 / Page 1 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. NRCA Compliance: Provide roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment constructed according to
recommendations of NRCA.

D. UL Compliance:

1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted
Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery Ventilators."
2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling
Equipment."

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties
are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

B. Filters: Furnish one set of each type of filter specified.

C. Fan Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.

D. Wheel Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each heat wheel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Heat Wheels:

a. Munters Cargocaire.
b. SEMCO Inc.
c. Wing: L.J. Wing, Mestek, Inc.
d. Klingenburg (GmbH)

2.2 HEAT WHEELS

A. Casing: Steel with manufacturer's standard paint coating. Include the following:

1. Integral purge section.

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 / Page 2 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Casing seals on periphery of rotor, on duct divider, and on purge section.

3. Support rotor on grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings. Mount
horizontal wheels on tapered roller bearing.

B. Rotor: Corrugated aluminum strengthened with radial spokes, with nontoxic, noncorrosive silica-
gel desiccant coating. Construct media for passing maximum 800 micron solids and maximum 0.04
percent cross contamination by volume of exhaust air. Drive rotor with belt around outside of rotor.

C. Drive: Variable-speed, fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer, with speed changed from
SCR (silicon-controlled rectifier) controller.

D. Controls: Panel, factory mounted and wired to motor with airstream thermostat and manual motor
starter for field wiring; with pilot-light indication of rotor rotation and provisions for setting
maximum and minimum speed.

E. Changeover Control: Electronic automatic summer changeover system for field mounting of room
and outdoor air temperature sensors, to provide maximum rotor speed when room air temperature
is less than outdoor air temperature.

F. Rotation Detection: Electronic control module, electromagnetic sensor, and iron shuttle factory
wired and mounted, with alarm bell for field wiring and mounting, and remote alarm capability.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive energy recovery units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of energy recovery units. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install energy recovery units as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust flow in opposite directions and rotation is from exhaust
side to purge section to supply side.

1. Provide access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for
access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
2. Provide removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building side
for bypass during startup.

C. Install floor-mounted units on 100-mm high concrete housekeeping base.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.

F. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC pipe and
solvent-welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.

3.3 CONNECTIONS
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 / Page 3 of 4
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Ducts and fan installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect and clean exposed
finishes. Remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to commission units as

specified below, and report results in writing.

1. Energize and verify correct rotation of heat wheels and fans.

2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

B. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air recovery units. Refer to Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15785

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 / Page 4 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa (minus
2- to plus 10-inch wg).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168.
In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at
the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.

1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -distribution
equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system
must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer. Accompany requests for layout modifications
with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without
increasing system total pressure.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible"

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For duct liner and adhesives, sealants and gaskets.

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 1 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating configuration, liner material, pressure classifications and sizes on
plans.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction.
6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
7. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels.
8. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
9. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation,
seismic restraints, and duct attachment.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers
and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate
and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

F. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for
hangers and supports; AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum
supporting members; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.

B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing different system pressure
classifications. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated
for completed Work:

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 2 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:

a. Two transverse joints.

b. One access door.
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.

3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup construction and
perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging
the completed Work.
6. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may
become part of the completed Work.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with
labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.

C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained
through fabrication and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled,
exposed matte finish.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts
exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with
standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for concealed ducts.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for carbon steel and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.

2.2 DUCT LINER

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 3 of 11
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

A. General: Non-fibrous Closed Cell Flexible Elastomeric Foam Acoustical Duct Liner, with
impervious face o permit cleaning, that complies with ASTM C534, Type II for sheet material and
ASTM C1534 for duct liner.

1. Thickness: 5025 mm.

2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed
rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the
interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.
Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA
for use in HVAC systems.
5. Solvent or Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and
ASTM C 916.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as
recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.

a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 23-kg tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to

duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting
more than 3 mm into airstream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
7. The minimum acoustic absorption coefficient shall be as follows:
Sound absorption coefficients at octave band center frequencies, Hz
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
0.14 0.62 0.44 0.43 0.51 0.45 0.50
7.8. Area of application:
a. Full length of supply and return ducts in all Hotel front of house areas served by fan
coil units.
b. Full length of supply and return ducts in all Residences front of house areas.
c. All plenum boxes.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets
shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when
tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

1. Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.

2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and
a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable,
airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying
with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 4 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for building materials.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs
more than 100 mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, all-threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod.

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with
duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-
rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
and discolorations.

B. Fabricate grease hood exhaust ducts with 1.46-mm thick, carbon-steel sheet for concealed ducts and
2.5-mm thick stainless steel for exposed ducts. Continuous weld seams and joints. Comply with
NFPA 96.

C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick stainless steel. Continuous weld seams
and joints.

D. Fabricate indoor pool and pool bromine and chlorine storage room ductwork with 1.3-mm thick
stainless steel. Continuous weld seams and joints.

E. Fabricate locker room shower exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick aluminum. Continuous weld seams
and joints.

F. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:

1. Supply Ducts, Constant Volume and Upstream of Terminal Units: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg).
2. Supply Ducts, Downstream of Terminal Units: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).
3. Return Ducts: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative pressure.
4. Exhaust Ducts: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative pressure.

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 5 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

G. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480 mm and larger and 0.9
mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.

H. Smoke Extract Ducts, Pressurization Ducts and Car Park Ducts: shall be constructed of galvanized
steel sheet with 2mm thickness, welded longitudinal joints, flanged sectional joints, reinforced with
girders, and sealed with fire rated sealants.

I. Smoke Extract Ducts, Pressurization Ducts, Car Park Ducts and other ducts crossing fire rated walls
without fire dampers shall be fire proofed ducts. Contractor shall submit clear method statement for
the constructing of fire/ smoke rated ducts for approval, such as applying fire resistant coating
similar to products of PROMAT (UK) or approved equal, which reacts in contact with fire by
forming an insulating barrier to separates two contiguous areas, or by other proven and approved
methods. Smoke extract ducts should be two hours fire rated at 400 deg. C.

2.6 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at
liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.

E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless
duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7 m/s (2500 fpm).

G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding 300 mm
transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 450
mm longitudinally.

H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:

1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.

I. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies,
and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional;
when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire
dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.

2.7 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of round
duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of spiral seam, galvanized steel according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 6 of 11
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

C. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-welded
longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."

D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with spiral seam outer shell
and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean temperature.

2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate
outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation, and in metal thickness
specified for single-wall duct.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate
insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or uninsulated
components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to inner liner diameter.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:

a. Ducts 75 to 200 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with standard spiral seam construction.

b. Ducts 225 to 1070 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with single-rib spiral seam construction.
c. Ducts 1120 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 0.55 mm with single-rib spiral seam
construction.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2235 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm with standard spiral seam
construction.

5. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from
dislocation by mechanical means.

2.8 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION

A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam
straight duct.

B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material
projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.

C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of
die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500 Pa (minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg):

a. Ducts 75 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 685 to 915 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 940 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 500 to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg):

a. Ducts 75 to 355 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 7 of 11
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

b. Ducts 380 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.

c. Ducts 685 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.

4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal
seam flat-oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems
for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using
1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows, 200 mm and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree
elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-
angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows, 225 through 355 mm: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and
90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-
angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
8. Round Elbows, Larger Than 355 mm, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows,
unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200 mm and All Pressures: 1.0 mm thick with two-
piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct specified above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355 mm and Pressures through 2490 Pa (10-Inch wg): 0.55
mm.

D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell and
an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean temperature.

2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate
outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation. Use the same metal
thicknesses for outer duct as for uninsulated fittings.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate
insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or uninsulated
components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to nominal single-wall
size.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:

a. Ducts 75 to 865 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 890 to 1475 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 1525 to 2235 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.

5. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from
dislocation by mechanical means.

2.9 FIRE STOPPING

A. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through
penetration fire stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors,
having fire resistance ratings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 8 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7 m, unless interrupted by fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25 mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless
specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and
similar finished work.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M. Where ducts are exposed to view in machine rooms and in spaces without suspended ceiling, cover
with aluminum jacketing to protect against accidental damage.

N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides
by at least 38 mm.

O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers
are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation
methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.2 UNDERSLAB DUCT INSTALLATIONS

A. Verify undamaged conditions of duct before enclosure with fill or encasement.

B. Install underslab ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible" and as indicated.

C. Protect ducts from damage by equipment used in placing concrete on or around ducts.

D. Protect duct openings.

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 9 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

3.3 GREASE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS

A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 1100 deg C (2000 deg F)
temperature range.

B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues, unless traps have continuous or
automatic residue removal.

C. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from grease hood.

D. Install access openings at each change in direction, at base of vertical riser, at sprinklers, at 3.6-m
intervals in horizontal ducts and at every floor of vertical riser; locate on sides of duct a minimum
of 38 mm from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of same material as duct.

E. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies.

3.4 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS

A. Install dishwasher exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."

B. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from dishwasher.

3.5 LOCKER ROOM SHOWER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS

A. Install locker room shower exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from shower.

3.6 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Pressure Classification Less Than 500 Pa (2-Inch wg): Transverse joints.

C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.

3.7 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Support horizontal ducts within 600 mm of each elbow and within 1200 mm of each branch
intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 5 m and at each floor.

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure
(proof-test) load.

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 10 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November2018

E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Do not
use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than
100 mm thick.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing
and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of
system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round
and flat-oval ducts, and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 500 to 2490 Pa
(2- to 10-inch wg).

D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.

E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."

F. Perform leakage test on supply ducts constructed to pressure higher than 500 Pa (2-inch wg).

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.

3.11 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system.
Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

END OF SECTION 15815

METAL DUCTS 15815 / Page 11 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15816 - HVAC CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes HVAC casings for field-erected, air-handling systems and for housing
mechanical equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for external insulation for HVAC casings.
2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for lighting within HVAC casings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168.
In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at
the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.

1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For factory-fabricated casings, sealing and gaskets materials, acoustic liner and
adhesives materials and Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work:

1. Detail HVAC casing assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Sheet metal thickness(es).
3. Reinforcement and spacing.
4. Seam and joint construction.
5. Access doors, including frames, hinges, and latches.
6. Filter, coil, humidifier, and other apparatus installation.
7. Locations for access to internal components.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation,
seismic restraints, and casing attachment.
9. Interior lighting.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casings certifying that the acoustic performance
of factory-fabricated casings complies with requirements.

HVAC CASINGS 15816 / Page 1 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Show sound-absorption coefficients in each octave band lower than those scheduled, when
tested according to ASTM C 423.
2. Show airborne sound transmission losses lower than those scheduled, when tested according
to ASTM E 90.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual fabrication and installation details of HVAC casings
and accessories.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for
hangers and supports; AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum
supporting members; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL CASING FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Chapter 9, "Equipment and Casings," for acceptable materials, material
thicknesses, and casing construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall
be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

1. Fabricate casings with more than 750-Pa (3-inch wg) negative static pressure according to
SMACNA's "Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards."
2. Casings with more than 500-Pa (2-inch wg) positive static pressure may be fabricated
according to SMACNA's "Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards."

B. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating:

1. Apply to the interior sheet metal surfaces of casing in contact with the airstream. Apply
untreated clear coating to the exterior surface.
2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA
for use in HVAC systems.
HVAC CASINGS 15816 / Page 2 of 7
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H minimum when
tested according to ASTM D 3363.
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-
developed index of 50 according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
5. Applied Coating Color: Standard.

C. Sealing Requirement: SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal
Class A. Seal all seams, joints, connections, and abutments to building.

D. Penetrations: Seal all penetrations airtight. Cover with escutcheons and gaskets, or fill with suitable
compound so there is no exposed insulation. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified
in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." Provide shaft seals where fan shafts penetrate
casing.

E. Access Doors: Fabricate access doors according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 9-15, "Casing Access Doors - 2-inch wg (500 Pa)," and
Figure 9-16, "Casing Access Doors - 3-10-inch wg (750-2500 Pa)"; and according to pressure class
of the plenum or casing section in which access doors are to be installed.

1. Size: minimum 600 by 1500 mm.

2. Vision Panel: Double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety glass with an airspace between panes
and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals.
3. Hinges: Piano or butt hinges and latches, number and size according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
4. Latches: Minimum of two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside.
5. Neoprene gaskets around entire perimeters of door frames.
6. Doors shall open against air pressure.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.

2.3 CASING LINER

A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA AH124 "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner
Standard."

B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass
fibers.

1. Thickness: 25 mm.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed
rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to surface of the liner that will form the
interior surface of casing to act as a moisture repellent and an erosion-resistant coating.
Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA
for use in HVAC systems.
HVAC CASINGS 15816 / Page 3 of 7
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A and ASTM C 916.

C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 2.6-mm diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated with integral 38-mm galvanized carbon-steel washer.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.41-mm thick, galvanized
steel, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less
than 38 mm in diameter.

2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets
shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when
tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 2500 Pa (10-inch wg), positive or negative.
7. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
8. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel or stainless steel.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single component, acid curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.
3. Grade: NS.
4. Class: 25.
5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.5 SINGLE WALL CONSTRUCTION CASINGS

A. Shop fabricate casings to greatest extent possible with a minimum of joints and to minimize field
fabrication and assembly.

B. Fabricate casings with standing seam construction and angle reinforcement. Fabricate close-off
sheets from casing sides, top, and bottom to damper, coil, and filter frames. Fabricate close-off
sheets at joints between stacked coils. Bolt close-off sheets to frame flanges and housings. Support
coils on stands fabricated from galvanized steel angles or channels.

C. Reinforce casings with galvanized or painted steel angles.

D. Seal joints with liquid-type, high-pressure duct sealant to eliminate air leakage.

E. Fabricate drain pans for cooling coils, humidifiers, and eliminator blade sections in casings with
external connection and vented deep-seal trap for drainage piping with a 20-mm pipe connection.

HVAC CASINGS 15816 / Page 4 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

Fabricate and reinforce drain pans of same material and thickness as housing, 50 mm deep with
rolled edges. Solder seams.

F. Fabricate casings with reinforced openings for access doors at least 500 mm wide by 1200 mm high
and located for access to each item of equipment housed. Refer to Division 15 Section "Duct
Accessories" for access doors.

G. Fabricate casings to receive flexible or outlet connectors for fans. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors.

H. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate HVAC casings to the

following:

1. Before Fans: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).

2. After Fans: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg).

2.6 DOUBLE WALL CONSTRUCTION CASINGS

A. Description: Double-wall, insulated, pressurized equipment casings.

B. Panel Construction: Solid, galvanized, sheet steel exterior shell; and solid or perforated, galvanized,
sheet steel interior shell; with a 50- or 100-mm space, as indicated.

1. Fabricate with a minimum number of joints.

2. Weld exterior and interior shells to perimeter, to interior longitudinal galvanized steel
channels, and to box-end internal closures. Paint welds.
3. Exterior Shell Thickness: 1.0 mm minimum.
4. Interior Shell Thickness: 0.85 mm minimum.
5. Fabricate perimeter and interior longitudinal channel members with galvanized steel shapes.
6. Fill each panel assembly with insulating material that is noncombustible, inert, mildew
resistant, and vermin proof, and that complies with NFPA 90A.
7. Fabricate panels with tongue-and-groove construction, with continuous self-locking joints
effective inside and outside each panel joint interface.

C. Trim Items: Fabricate from a minimum of 1.3-mm galvanized, sheet steel, furnished in standard
lengths for field cutting.

D. Access Doors: Fabricate personnel access doors at least 600 mm by 1500 mm in size, and other
access doors in size indicated.

1. Fabricate doors of same thickness as panels, with a minimum 1.0-mm solid interior and
exterior galvanized, sheet steel shell.
2. Install a minimum of two ball-bearing hinges and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable
from inside and outside. Install doors to open against air pressure differential. Install
neoprene gasket around entire perimeter of door frame.
3. Fabricate windows in doors consisting of double-glazed wire-reinforced safety glass with an
air space between and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals.

E. Structural Performance: Design entire plenum installation to be self-supporting and capable of

withstanding internal static pressures as scheduled, without exceeding deflection of any panel joint
of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casing structure.

1. Design outdoor casings with weatherproof coating and for wind loading of 720 N/sq. m and
snow loading of 1440 N/sq. m.
2. Acoustic Performance: Certified testing data from independent acoustic agency listing
sound-absorption and transmission-loss characteristics of panel assembly.
HVAC CASINGS 15816 / Page 5 of 7
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean temperature.

F. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate HVAC casings to the

following:

1. Before Fans: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).

2. After Fans: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg).

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS HVAC CASING MATERIALS

A. General: Miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes required to comply with HVAC
casing system requirements, including proper connection of ducts and equipment.

2.8 SHOP-APPLIED LINER

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11,
"Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

B. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at
liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.

C. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.

D. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

E. Fold and compress liner in corners of casings or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

F. Do not apply liners with longitudinal joints, except at corners of casings, unless casing size and
standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

G. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in casings.

H. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding 300 mm
transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse joints; and at intervals not exceeding 450
mm longitudinally.

I. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from casing wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:

1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined casing preceding unlined casing.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in casings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment bases and roof curbs for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting
installation and performance of HVAC casings. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

HVAC CASINGS 15816 / Page 6 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.2 CASING INSTALLATION

A. Install casings according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Follow recommended spacing of sheet metal screws, duct sealer placement, and trim positioning
requirements.

B. Field-cut openings for pipe and conduit penetrations; insulate and seal according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

C. Support casings on floor or foundation system. Secure and seal to base.

D. Support components rigidly with ties, braces, brackets, seismic restraints, and anchors of types that
will maintain housing shape and prevent buckling.

E. Align casings accurately at connections, with 3-mm misalignment tolerance and with interior
surfaces smooth.

F. Maintain duct seal class integrity throughout casing. Apply sealer to joints, connections and
mountings.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of
system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

B. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for leakage classification of ducts
connected to casing.

C. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.

D. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean dust and debris from each casing section as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of foreign
substances that might deteriorate metal or interfere with painting or insulating of casings.

END OF SECTION 15816

HVAC CASINGS 15816 / Page 7 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual-volume dampers.
4. Motorized volume dampers.
5. Fire dampers.
6. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
7. Duct silencers.
8. Turning vanes.
9. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
10. Flexible ducts.
11. Flexible connectors.
12. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product:

1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout
noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection.
Detail the following:

1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.

2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and
panels.
3. Duct security bars.
4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power levels;
and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 1 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet
metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.

C. Comply with AMCA 500-D "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating" for dampers
rating.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled,
exposed matte finish.

C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with
standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Description: Gravity balanced, suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. Dampers shall not
produce noise while in operation.

B. Frame: 1.3-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

C. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, 0.6-mm thick, roll-formed aluminum, maximum 150-mm
width, with sealed edges.

D. Blade Action: Parallel.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 2 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

I. Bearings: Galvanized steel ball.

J. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage (1.0-mm) minimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum.
6. Screen Material: Aluminum.
7. Screen Type: Bird.
8. 90-degree stops.

2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

B. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or
mechanically attached and mounting flange.

C. Blades:

1. Multiple, 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.

2. Maximum Width: 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Eccentrically pivoted.

D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

E. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.

F. Tie Bars and Brackets:

1. Material: Galvanized steel.

2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.

G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

H. Bearings: Bronze.

I. Accessories:

1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 3 of 10
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.4 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS

A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for
stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.
Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classifications of 500 Pa (2-Inch wg) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for
ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as

indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical
applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 1.6 mm thick, with
mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and
flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 1.6-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

C. Jackshaft: 25-mm diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing assembly mounted
on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of a

multiple-damper assembly.

D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 2.4-mm thick zinc-
plated steel, and a 19-mm hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod
size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Dampers: UL555 labeled, AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 2.8 -mm minimum,
galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 1.6 -mm
galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 200 mm, and with edge seals.

1. Dampers to be dynamic type upstream of VAV boxes and medium pressure ductworks, and
static type downstream of VAV boxes and low pressure ductwork.
2. Blades shall be secured to 13 -mm diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware,
with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed
against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
3. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 93 deg. C(minus 40 to plus 200
deg F).
4. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
5. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade
edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 51 L/s per sq. m (10 cfm
per sq. ft.) of damper area, at differential pressure of 995 Pa (4 inches wg) when damper is
being held by torque of 5.6 N x m; when tested according to AMCA 500D
6. Frame: Curtain type with blades in air stream only for non-ducted fire dampers.
7. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside air stream for all ducted fire dampers.
8. Mounting Sleeves: Factory installed sleeves shall only be allowed. Field installed sleeves
shall not be permitted.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 4 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. General: Labeled to UL 555.

B. Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.

C. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.85-mm thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3 mm or 3.5 mm thick as indicated, and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with
sleeve requirements.

E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking
blades, use full-length, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.

G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.

H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 or 100 deg C (165 or 212 deg F) rated.

2.7 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S.

B. Fire Rating: 3 hours.

C. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and
mounting flange.

D. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.

E. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

F. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking 1.6-mm-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

G. Leakage: Class I.

H. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

I. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or
floor application.

J. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.

K. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.

L. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 15055 "Motors".

1.Motor Sizes: large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor
range above 1.0.
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 5 of 10
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.

Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque
rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to
make motors weatherproof.
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for
running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x
lbf (34 N x m).
6. Electrical Connection: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.

M. Accessories:

1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practical.

2.8 DUCT SILENCERS

A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance

characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.

B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire
ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested according to
ASTM E 84.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1

D. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.85-mm thick, solid galvanized sheet
metal for outer casing and 0.55-mm thick, perforated galvanized sheet metal for inner casing.

E. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thicknesses for diameters listed below:

1. Up to 600 mm: 0.85 mm.

2. 650 through 1000 mm: 1.0 mm.
3. 1050 through 1300 mm: 1.3 mm.
4. 1350 through 1500 mm: 1.6 mm.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm and designed for minimum aerodynamic
losses.

F. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3-mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.

G. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than
5 percent compression.

H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to
system pressure variations.

1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities
and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.

I. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 6 of 10
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both directions
through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels, for
both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise in opposite
directions) with an airflow of at least 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 1500-
Pa (6-inch wg) static pressure, whichever is greater.

2.9 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 38-mm wide, curved blades set 19 mm o.c.; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set 50 mm o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in
ducts.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and
fibrous-glass fill.

2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more chrome-plated enamel
painted steel hinges and quick fastening locking devices. Provide doors as large as practical.
Include vision panel where indicated. Include 25-by-25 mm butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
Access doors up to 300 X 300 mm shall have two cam locks, larger sizes shall have four cam locks.

B. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. As an alternative, removable access
doors may be used.

C. Access doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an inner and outer door
panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door shall consist of two panels spot-welded
together which totally encapsulate insulation identical to corresponded ductwork insulation. The
inner and outer doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded handles in such a configuration that the
panels can be drawn together to secure the door to the duct in a sandwich fashion.

D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical springs shall be used
between the door panels to facilitate installation and removal of the door. Fireproof neoprene gasket
shall be used around the outside edge of the inner or outer panel, but not both, to seal the door.

E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat-oval ductwork.

F. Insulation: 25-mm thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with

UL 181, Class 1.

B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide attached
to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets.
Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 7 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 146 mm wide
attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum
sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide attached
to two strips of 111-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets.
Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 84 N/mm in the warp, and 63 N/mm in the filling.

F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a
synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone environment.

1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 93 N/mm in the warp, and 77 N/mm in the filling.

G. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber and having
a minimum weight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile strength of 50 N/mm in the warp, and 32 N/mm in the
filling.

H. High-Corrosive-Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with a chemical-

resistant coating.

1. Minimum Weight: 474 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 79 N/mm in the warp, and 60 N/mm in the filling.

2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.

C. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.

D. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing
38-mm thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.

1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous-
glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

E. Pressure Rating: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg) positive, 125 Pa (1/2-inch wg) negative.

F. Maximum Air Velocity: 20 m/s (4000 fpm).

2.13 ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct
insulation thickness.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 8 of 10
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 6-mm, zinc-plated operating rod;
and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-head set screw.

C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action, in sizes 75 to 450 mm to suit duct size.

D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and
grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from
larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat
channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

E. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.

H. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.

I. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.

1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,
adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
3. Install access panels adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or
reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links
shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed
upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from
dampers.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 9 of 10
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 1500-mm
(60-inch) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

O. Label access doors according to Section "Mechanical Identification." Section.

P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing."

END OF SECTION 15820

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 / Page 10 of 10

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15834 - AIR CURTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes air curtains.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each unit.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations of exterior
walls.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available
for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of same
thickness and material indicated for the Work.

F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and any other information
specified or required by Engineer.

G. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate
and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

H. Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

AIR CURTAINS 15834 / Page 1 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of air
curtains that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

C. Comply with AMCA 220, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtain Units for Aerodynamic
Performance Rating," for airflow, outlet velocity, and power consumption.

D. Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways for Food and Food Service Establishments."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system components with other
construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.

B. Coordinate installation of wall penetrations and louvers. These items are specified in Division 10
Section "Louvers and Vents."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace components of air curtains that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.

B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completionissuance of “Taking Over
Certificate” for non-heating air-curtain units.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.

1. Furnish one set of filters and fan belts for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Berner International Corp.
2. Cambridge Engineering, Inc.
3. King; an Applied Air Co.
4. Loren Cook Co.
5. Markel Products
AIR CURTAINS 15834 / Page 2 of 5
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

6. Mars Air Systems.

7. TMI, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel finish over
powdered mirror.

B. Housing Materials: One-piece, molded, high-impact, white polymer material.

C. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, electroplated-zinc steel with welded construction and polyester
coated finish.

D. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, aluminum construction.

1. Anodized Finish: Match finish and color of adjacent architectural metals. Comply with
NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
a. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish:
nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating:
architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating
0.010 mm or thicker).

3. Mounting Brackets: Steel, for wall or ceiling mounting.

E. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and capable of reducing
air-outlet velocity by 60 percent with louver in totally closed position.

F. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, wedge shaped, containing adjustable air-directional
vanes with 40-degree sweep front to back.

2.3 FANS

A. Fans: Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet; statically and dynamically balanced.

B. Fan Drives: Direct.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Motor Type: Multispeed, resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed, air over, with
integral thermal-overload protection.

B. Motor Sizes: Large enough so driven loads will not require motor to operate in service factor range
above 1.0.

C. Motor shall be resiliently mounted and of continuous duty, with integral thermal-overload
protection.

D. Bearings: Permanently sealed, life-time, prelubricated, ball bearings.

E. Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.

AIR CURTAINS 15834 / Page 3 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.5 FILTERS

A. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters

with holding frames.

1. Media: Interlaced glass-fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive in galvanized-steel

frame.

B. Washable Panel Filters: Removable, stainless-steel, baffle-type filters with spring-loaded fastening;
with minimum 2-mm thick, stainless-steel filter frame.

C. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable for bolting
together into built-up filter banks.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Automatic Door Switch: Remotely installed in door area to activate air curtain when door opens
and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.

B. Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.

C. Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air curtain to operate from 1 to 300
seconds after door closes.

D. Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 220-V ac transformer with primary and
secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure.

E. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A - 486B.

AIR CURTAINS 15834 / Page 4 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing, and report results in writing:

1. After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check of individual
components.
2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor rotation and unit
operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest units until satisfactory results are achieved. Operate
electric element through each stage and verify proper operation of electrical connection.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust belt tension.

B. Adjust motor and fan speed to achieve specified airflow.

C. Adjust discharge louver and dampers to regulate airflow.

D. Adjust air-directional vanes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain air curtains. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training"

END OF SECTION 15834

AIR CURTAINS 15834 / Page 5 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15836 - AXIAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Propeller fans.
2. Tubeaxial fans
3. Jet fans

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment schedule(s) on
the Drawings.

D. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous operation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale. Submit with
Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each
support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 1 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.

1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed
and labeled by UL where available.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use
the AMCA Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of fans through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fans
have been commissioned.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad.
Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 2 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.

2. Aerovent, Inc.
3.1. Carnes Co.
4. Loren Cook Co.
5.2. Greenheck Fan Corp.
6.3. ILG Industries, Inc.
7. NuTone Inc.
8.4. York/PennBarryLoren Cook Co.
9.5. Trane Co. (The).

2.2 PROPELLER FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan blades, hub,
housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.

B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel
finish coat after assembly.

C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

D. Cast-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub.

Factory set pitch angle of blades.

E. Extruded-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-

aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.

F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, statically and dynamically
balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours.

4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 3 of 8
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades with nylon
bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA specifications, removable
for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than
50 percent.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.3 VANEAXIAL FANS

A. Description: Vaneaxial fans consisting of fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section,
factory-mounted motor, an inlet cone section, and accessories. Variable features indicated in
equipment schedule include belt driven or direct drive as indicated, and variable or adjustable pitch.

1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted pneumatic actuator, externally mounted positive

positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator for variable-volume operation.

B. Housings: Galvanized steel with inlet bell and diffuser sections.

1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges; inlet cone shall
be welded to the fan raceway.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from the fan wheel designed to
straighten the airflow.
3. Sound-Trap Housing: Housing incorporating perforated steel inner liner, 2 inch (50 mm)
fiberglass duct liner sandwiched between the inner and outer shell, and steel bands sealing
the insulated cavity.

C. Wheels Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with threaded bearing wells
to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-aluminum blades; factory mounted and
balanced.

D. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: [1.2]

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70 percent
of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.

b. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 100,000 hours.
c. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.

AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 4 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Accessories:

1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan, of same
material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet and outlet allowing
access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same material as housing.
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out from duct for
cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling or Vertical mounting clips welded to fan housing, of
same material as housing.
6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing, of same
material as housing.
8. Inlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material as
housing.
9. Outlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material as
housing.
10. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the discharge
of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section, of same material as housing.
11. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall and signaling
control devices.
12. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of fan to detect and
signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control devices and sequence of
operation are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow Instruments" and Section 230993.11
"Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."
13. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg F (148 deg C).
14. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material as housing.
15. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of airstream,
bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for manual or automatic
operation, of same material as housing.
16. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as housing.
17. Inlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.
18. Outlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.
19. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same material as housing.
20. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to
disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Extend lubrication lines to outside of
casing and terminate with grease fittings.

F. Factory Finishes:

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized.

a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.

2.4 JET FANS

A. Fan Housing: 3mm rolled hot dip galvanized steel plate with oval or round shaped flanges with
silencer at each end. Fan exterior shall be covered with Aluminum-Zinc plating to form a whole
with the silencers. Motor suspension shall incorporate a guide vane to improve performance.

B. Motor shall be squirrel type reversible double speed, 50 Hz rating, pad mounted, with selflubricating
ball bearings of L10 life, continuously air stream rated and complying fully with BS5000: Part 99

AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 5 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

or IEC 34-1 with Class F insulation. The motor shall be suitable for handling smoke laden air at 300
Deg C for 1 Hour.

C. Fan shall be delivered complete with suspension system for direct ceiling mounting.

D. Blades and hub shall be cast from aluminum-silicone alloy in accordance with BS 1490 or ISO 3522
and ISO 7720, grade LM6 and LM25. Hub shall have a core of cast steel machined for direct
mounting on the motor shaft. Impeller shall be dynamically balanced on two planes.

E. Silencers shall be tubular directly mounted on inlet and outlet of fan, of stainless steel inner casing
with galvanized steel outer casing welded to hot dip galvanized ends and bellmouth, fitted with
stainless steel perforated line and galvanized steel aerodynamic pod, and solid and galvanized steel
wire mesh at inlet/outlet. The sound absorbing material shall be nonflammable and water resistant.

F. Quality assurance: goods shall be produced in accordance with BS 5700:Part, ISO 9001 and EN
29001. All impeller cast aluminum components shall be X-rayed to established standards.

2.5 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.

D. Motors shall be provided with dual speed starter, where indicated on drawings, and related control
panel capable to change the speed of the motor as indicated in the drawings, complete with all
protection means and all related accessories, wires, cables from the starter to the motor, etc ...

1. Starter enclosure shall be NEMA 12 for indoor installation and NEMA 3 for installations in
wet and outdoor areas and provided with necessary ventilation fans.
2. Starter shall be provided with 3 pole overload relay, under voltage protection (for non-
emergency motors only), unless otherwise required by local regulations or shown on
drawings.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 6 of 8
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable for high temperature application
as per design requirements.

C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The overall
efficiency shall be minimum 60%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are specified
in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation springs and seismic
restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section " Mechanical Vibration
Controls and Seismic Restraints."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with
flexible connector.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A - 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the

field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and electrical connections, and
to report results in writing.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 7 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris,
and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan wheel
and cabinet.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup, and report
results in writing:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel
free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust
belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-handling-
system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in final
position after balancing is achieved.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan units. Refer to
Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15836

AXIAL FANS 15836 / Page 8 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor installations.

B. Kitchen ecology units

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Performance Criteria:

1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design
static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at 110 percent
pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use of a
smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation a smaller
motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:

a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.

D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed to
operating and maintenance personnel.

E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation. Noise level for all ceiling
mounted equipment shall not exceed NC35.

F. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.

G. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous operation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 1 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale. Submit with
Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each
support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.

1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed
and labeled by UL where available.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use
the AMCA Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of fans through one source from single manufacturer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 2 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fans
have been commissioned.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad.
Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
Section.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.

2. Aerovent, Inc.
3.1. Carnes Co.
4.2. Greenheck Fan Corp.
5.3. ILG Industries, Inc.
6.4. Loren Cook Co.
7. PennBarry Co.
8.5. Trane Co. (The).
9. Twin City Fan & Blower Co.

2.2 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS

A. General

1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall be the
result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall be
the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of sound pressure level
ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards
contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets shall
include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be constructed in

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 3 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation shall be such that fan
vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.

B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with minimum
two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the
minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359
adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G153 weathermeter.

C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be provided for the
adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-quantity balancing operations.
Facilities provided shall be one of the following:

1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed necessary for proper air
balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed necessary for proper
air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan speed has been
determined.

2.3 FAN UNITS

A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and
characteristics.

B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor
and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.

2.4 HOUSINGS

A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scroll housings with
shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and
components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate fans downstream from humidifiers.

1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting
fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and reinforced-steel
panels with welded seams and the following:

a. Outlet guide vanes.

b. Motor disconnect switch.
c. Spun inlet cone with flange.
d. Outlet flange.
e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

2.5 WHEELS

A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back plate,
backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub
riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 4 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Forward Curved: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, back plate,
shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to
flange and back plate; cast-steel hub swaged to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

C. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange; heavy back plate; hollow die-
formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel
hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

2.6 SHAFTS

A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum rated
fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.

B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of
lubricating oil.

C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the fan's speed
range.

2.7 BEARINGS

A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.

B. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; tapered roller bearings with
double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 50,000 hours.

C. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; ball or roller bearings with
adapter mount and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 120,000 hours.

2.8 BELT DRIVES

A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.

B. Drives:

1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard belt
section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40 horsepower
(30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or variable-sheave type, with
a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave, high-
capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be aligned
by the four-point method.
CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 5 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.

C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.

D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment
range at fan design conditions.

E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.

1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm thick, 20-mm
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure
to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provision for
adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and gaskets.

B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections.

C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.

D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2 permanently lubricated
bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-
width fans.

E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently lubricated bearings.
Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single control lever with control shaft for
double-width fans.

1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.

F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2 plates formed around
and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of air stream to
single control lever.

1. Configuration: Parallel blade.

2. Configuration: Opposed blade.

G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft bearings.

H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.

I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft.

J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.

K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.

L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.

2.10 MOTORS
CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 6 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
3. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).

D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as otherwise specified.
Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with fixed-sheave standard belt section drives
shall be provided with adjustable, pivoted motor bases wherever equipment configuration permits
proper installation.

E. Motors shall be provided with dual speed starter, where indicated on drawings, and related control
panel capable to change the speed of the motor as indicated in the drawings, complete with all
protection means and all related accessories, wires, cables from the starter to the motor, etc ...

1. Starter enclosure shall be NEMA 12 for indoor installation and NEMA 3 for installations in
wet and outdoor areas and provided with necessary ventilation fans.
2. Starter shall be provided with 3 pole overload relay, under voltage protection (for non-
emergency motors only), unless otherwise required by local regulations or shown on
drawings.

2.11 SMOKE EXHAUST FAN

A. General Description: Belt-driven mixed flow, dual speed, fully weatherproofed and constructed of
corrosion resistant materials. Structural steel support components to be zinc plated and suitable for
smoke exhaust. Fans to be UL listed for smoke removal with operation temperature of 260°C for a
minimum of four hours continuous operation or shall be classified F400 (400°C for 2 hours) as per
EN 12101-3.

B. Fan Housing: Heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication, designed to provide easy
access from roof level to all moving parts including motor, without dismantling unit.

C. Fan wheels: Heavy gauge steel, multi-blade, mixed flow, non-overloading, non-stall type, fully
balanced at factory.

D. Motor: Explosion proof, type Class H insulation, continuously rated, provided with permanently
lubricated sealed ball bearings not requiring lubrication for 25000 hours of operation and in-built
thermal overload protection.

E. Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels less than 50 db measured on the A-scale of a
standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.

F. Accessories: Fan to be complete with the following: fusible link damper lifter to provide heat and
smoke relief in the event of an electrical power fail are factory wired safety disconnect switch
mounted inside housing, flexible conduit to receive field wiring, all around expanded aluminum bird
and protection screen, neoprene foam sealing strip for air seal between base and curb and fixings to
roof curb.

G. Fusible Link Lifter: Fusible link damper lifter automatically opens the butterfly dampers when air
temperature below the damper blades exceeds 74 deg. C to provide smoke and heat relief with no
electrical power required.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 7 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.12 KITCHEN FUME ROOF EXTRACT FAN

A. Fan: multispeed belt-driven motor, Upblast discharge, centrifugal, vertical discharge, fully
weatherproofed, all durable rust-free aluminum construction and corrosion-resistant protection. Fan
shall be spark-resistant. Fans shall be spark resistant, UL and cUL listed for grease removal and high
static pressures operation and listed for commercial cocking equipment exhaust applications.

B. Sound Power Level: Select to give sound levels less than 60 dB measured on the A-scale of a
standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.

C. Fan Housing: heavy gauge durable rust-free steel with lock formed seams permitting no air leakage
. Fan housing to be designed for easy access from roof level to internal parts including motor, V-
belt drives and magnetic shutter.

D. Fan Impeller: Steel with backward inclined blades with non-overloading characteristics, spark proof
and non corroding, keyed and locked to drive and shaft, with the whole rotating element precision
balanced at the factory.

E. Shaft to be stainless steel mounted on two heavy duty self-aligning, permanently lubricated and
sealed pillow block ball bearing.

F. Motor: Explosion proof, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated ball bearings and
in-built thermal overload protection. The motor is to be protected and isolated from the air-stream
and to be forced cooled by uncontaminated air which is drawn into the motor housing through breath
tubes. Motor is to be mounted on vibration dampeners on a slotted base for belt tension adjustment.
Sheave is to be adjustable to allow field changes in fan speed. Motor is to be class F insulation.

G. Motor to incorporate an under voltage relay complete with timer.

H. Accessories: Fan is to be complete with magnetic shutters, factory wired safety disconnect switch
mounted inside housing, automatic shutters to prevent air recirculation through stand-by fan,
flexible tubing to receive field wiring, hinged access door, 25 mm drain connection and
weatherhood.

I. Automatic Change Over Panel: sheet steel painted grey, houses two contactors, over load relay,
selector switch, two indicator lights and reset buttons.

2.13 KITCHEN HOODS EXHAUST FANS (ECOLOGY UNIT)

A. Fan Unit: A package consisting of a backward inclined exhaust fan with heavy duty bearings, fan
isolators, sound attenuation, two grease sheaves, filter and odor reducing sections.

B. Ecology unit shall be UL or ETL listed for kitchen grease exhaust and comply with NFPA – 96.

C. Ecology unit shall conform to ANSI/UL STD867 & UL STD 710 where applicable or approved
equal.

D. Pre-filter Section: The pre filter section shall include 2 inch deep steel washable permanent filters
according to ASHRAE 52-76 filters. Filter frames shall be constructed of steel.. All filters shall be
removable without the use of tools through side access doors with lift and turn latches. Filters are to
be cleanable with a water hose and soapy water.

E. Second stage filtration: 525 mm bag filter 90% ASHRAE 52-76 filters arranged in a v-bank
configuration to increase filter area and reduce static pressure.

F. Third stage filtration: Absolute HEPA filter 305 mm DOP filter 99.97% ASHRAE 52-76 filters.
CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 8 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Fan: Single width, single inlet, airfoil centrifugal fan statically and dynamically balanced.

H. Fan Shaft: The fan shall be mounted on a heavy duty turned ground and polished steel shaft
internally isolated. Pre-lubricated heavy duty bearings.

I. Motor: Squirrel cage, induction type with in-built thermal overload protection. Motor is to be class
F insulation for motors outside air stream and class H insulation for motors inside airstream.

J. Odor Control Module: Odor control section shall be one of the following;
1. Pellets: The section consists of metal cells filled with activated alumna pellets impregnated
with potassium permanganate. The odor is controlled through a combination of sorption and
a chemical modification of the gaseous contaminates. The odour media is non-toxic and non-
flammable. The pellets are contained in perforated cells located in a separate odour reduction
section normally located between the filter box and the tan box. All of the exhaust air is
drawn over the pellets whenever the fan is operating. The cells are removed through a side
access door on the odor section.
2. UV module: Self-cleaning inner surface. High output lamps designed to run for 13,000 hrs
at optimum capacity. Ozone regulation technology shall control ozone production in line
with cooking activity. Allows increases in air speed without significant effect on
performance.
3. Rigid, bonded, activated carbon panels shall be furnished to remove both base and acid odor
molecules. Carbon mass shall be applied at a minimum of 100 lbs. per 1,000 cfm (45.2 kg.
per 472 l/s) of exhaust air volume. Panels shall be held in place by gasketed, extruded
aluminum tracks arranged in a v-bank configuration.

K. Fan and Filter box Casing: 16 gauge steel, primed and painted suitably reinforced to ensure rigidity.
An access door is provided to the exhaust fan motor and drive section. The casing is wrapped with
25mm sound attenuation insulation. The exhaust fan section shall be internally /externally spring
isolated.

L. Control panel in stainless steel comprising on-off, PLC control, system status display, alarm buzzer,
silencing button, control relays, and terminal strip for field wiring.

2.14 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat aluminum parts.

B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat before assembly with
2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 9 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are specified
in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads or housed
spring isolators as indicated. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping
base.

C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation
springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 100
mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36), size
and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key
to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing
units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement conforming to
ASTM C 150/C 150M, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2 or SP 3
and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with
flexible connectors.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A - 486B.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 10 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the

field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and electrical connections,
alignment of fan shaft and motor shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt adjustments, and lubrication, and
to report results in writing.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris,
and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan wheel
and cabinet.

3.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup, and report
results in writing:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel
free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust
belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" Section for procedures for air-handling-system testing,
adjusting, and balancing.

D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in final
position after balancing is achieved.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION
CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 11 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fan units. Refer
to Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15837

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 / Page 12 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Utility set fans.

2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Axial roof ventilators.
4. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.
5. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
6. In-line ventilators.
7. In-line centrifugal fans.
8. Propeller fans.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted exhaust
fans.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment schedule(s) on
the Drawings.

D. Performance Criteria:

1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at 110 percent
pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use of a
smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation a smaller
motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:

a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.

E. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed to
operating and maintenance personnel.

F. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous operation.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 1 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.

C. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans drawn
accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Submit with
Shop Drawings. Show the following:

1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access
panels, and special moldings.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.

1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed
and labeled by UL where available.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use
the AMCA Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with applicable
NEMA standards.

E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.

F. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 2 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of fans through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fans
have been commissioned.

1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad.
Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Carnes Co.
2. Greenheck Fan Corp.
3. ILG Industries, Inc.
4. JencoFan, member of Soler & Palau Ventilation Group (S&P).
5.4. Loren Cook Co.
6.5. Trane Co. (The).
7. Twin City Fan & Blower Co.
8. York/PennBary

2.2 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS

A. General

1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall be the
result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 3 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall be
the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of sound pressure level
ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards
contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets shall
include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be constructed in
accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation shall be such that fan
vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.

B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with minimum
two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the
minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359
adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter

C. Bearings

1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified, with provisions
for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed by the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and shall have a
certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours. Bearings shall
have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron
unless otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude overheating due
to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check type. Where necessary,
manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be provided. Bearing and seal
construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite the supply fitting.
Relief fittings shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions
shall include extension tubes where necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel spiral wrapped
or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified materials and ABMA
9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by motors with a
power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)

D. Drives:

1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard belt
section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40 horsepower
(30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or variable-sheave type, with
a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave, high-
capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be aligned
by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.

E. Belts:

1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with cross section to suit
sheave grooves.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 4 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the factory. Selection
by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each belt set shall be
bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.

2.3 UTILITY SET FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor,
drive assembly, and accessories.

B. Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or welded to scroll
sheets.

1. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.

C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel inlet
cone, with hub keyed to shaft.

1. Blade Materials: Steel.

2. Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as scheduled.
3. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.

D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.

E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
AFBMA 9, L-50 of 200,000 hours.

F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum blades
and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable linkage.
4. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
5. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
6. Drain Connections: DN20 (3/4-inch) threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest
point of housing.
7. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive compartment.

2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel,

fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum
base with venturi inlet cone.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 5 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with
rain and snow drains.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.

E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than
50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory
set to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
b. Overall Height: 300 mm.

2.5 AXIAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive axial fans, as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel, fan
shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
hinged, aluminum base.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and blades.

D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable, 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory
set to close when fan stops.
4. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
b. Overall Height: 300 mm.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 6 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.6 UPBLAST PROPELLER ROOF EXHAUST FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel,

butterfly-type discharge damper, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
curb base, and accessories.

B. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced aluminum, containing aluminum
butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive assembly, and fan wheel.

1. Damper Rods: Steel with bronze bearings.

C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory
set pitch angle.

D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing; weatherproof housing of same
material as fan housing with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Motor Mount: On outside of fan cabinet, adjustable base for belt tensioning.

E. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation
adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 300 mm.

2.7 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel,

fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.

E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than
50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting.
5. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve;
factory set to close when fan stops.

2.8 IN-LINE VENTILATORS

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 7 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling, wall, duct, or for concealed in-line
applications.

B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.

C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel
shall be removable for service.

D. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor
plug-in.

E. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than 50
percent.

F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, or duct collars, and transition fittings.

2.9 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Description: In-line, belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans as indicated consisting of housing,

wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch,
mounting brackets, and accessories.

B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes; inlet and outlet
flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to disconnect located
on outside of fan housing.

D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around
belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.

E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for units not
connected to ductwork.

2.10 PROPELLER FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan blades, hub,
housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.

B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel
finish coat after assembly.

C. Extruded-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-

aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.

D. Fan Drive:

1. Resiliently mounted to the housing.

2. Statically and dynamically balanced.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 8 of 12
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP),
with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.
5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.4.
6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours.

8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with
larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at
fan design conditions.
10. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
11. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

E. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades with nylon
bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA specifications, removable
for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than
50 percent.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.11 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.

2.12 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.

2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 9 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high smoke temperature of 260 deg.
C (500 deg. F) for a minimum of four hours continuous operation or shall be classified F400 (400 C
for 2 hours) as per EN 12101-3.

C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The overall
efficiency shall be minimum 60%.

D. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen operation. Fans shall
be UL and cUL listed for grease removal, tested under high temperature exhaust of 190 deg. C (375
deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance with relevant NFPA standard. Fan coating shall be as
directed by the Engineer. Units shall include the following:

1. Bolted access door.

2. Drain connection.
3. Aluminum grease trap.
4. Weatherhood.
5. Upblast discharge.
6. Windband discharge cap with gravity damper.
7. Outlet guard where fan discharge is accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are specified
in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Control Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using housed spring
isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.
2. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.

3. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs, and seismic restraints.
4. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded rods or metal straps, and
neoprene washers.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 10 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 100
mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36), size
and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key
to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing
units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement conforming to
ASTM C 150/C 150M, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2 or SP 3
and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with
flexible connectors.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the

field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and electrical connections, and
to report results in writing.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris,
and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan wheel
and cabinet.

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 11 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup, and report
results in writing:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel
free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust
belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-handling-
system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in final
position after balancing is achieved.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilator units.
Refer to Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15838

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 / Page 12 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15845 - AIR TERMINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Single-duct air terminals.

2. Fan-powered air terminals.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for external insulation of air terminals.

2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices installed on
air terminals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. Include a schedule showing drawing
designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating air outlets with
other items installed in ceilings.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of air terminal and troubleshooting
maintenance guide to include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated air terminals specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

B. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminals according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of
Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

AIR TERMINALS 15845 / Page 1 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Comply with listed and labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency
acceptable to the Engineer.

D. The maximum noise level for any ceiling mounted item shall not exceed NC 35. Units shall meet
the airborne and radiated sound-power level (PWL) requirements scheduled, to attain the specified
NC levels. An 18-dB space attenuation shall be assumed in all octave bands or as recommended by
the manufacturer with consideration given to downstream duct construction and configuration in
determining airborne NC levels. Sound levels shall be tested in accordance with ANSI S12.23

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering air

terminals that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acutherm.
2. Air System Components; Krueger Div.
3. Air System Components; Tuttle & Bailey Div.
4. Air System Components; Titus Div.
5. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company.
6. Carnes Co., Inc.
7. Carrier Corp.
8. Nailor Industries Inc.
9. Trane Co. (The).
10. Trox USA, Inc.

2.2 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINALS

A. Configuration: Factory built and calibrated with controls mounted on unit, pressure independent,
factory set and field adjustable volume-damper assembly, suitable for single duct applications.

1. Each unit shall have factory set air volumes and numbered corresponding to contract
drawings.
2. Control components shall be factory mounted by air terminal manufacturer inside a
protective metal enclosure. All power control wiring shall be wired to factory mounted
terminal box.

B. Rating and Performance Certification: AHRI Industry Standard 880 I-P or 881 SI.

1. Maximum pressure drop: As shown on the drawings.

2. The inlet pressure should not be less than 374 Pa (1-1/2 inches water gage), unless shown
otherwise on drawings. Provide terminal sound attenuators where necessary to comply with
the noise criteria.

C. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:

1. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.6-mm steel.

2. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.45-mm steel.
3. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.8-mm aluminum.
4. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.63-mm aluminum.

AIR TERMINALS 15845 / Page 2 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass insulation; 24-
kg/cu. m density, complying with NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements.
Secure lining to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling.

1. Coat liner surfaces and edges with erosion-resistant coating or cover with perforated metal.

E. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

F. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.

G. Access: Removable panels to permit access to dampers and other parts requiring service,
adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.

H. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 500-Pa (2-inch wg) inlet static
pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.

I. Single Duct Terminals: Provide manufacturer's standard cataloged.

1. Low Velocity Boxes: Inlet valve shall be self-seating, and leakage in full closed position
shall not exceed 2 percent of unit rated capacity against inlet pressure of 2 inch wg (500
pascal) with all outlets sealed shut and inlets fully open.
2. Variable Air Volume Units (VAV): DDC controlled, variable air volume, with field
adjustable maximum and minimum set points complete with the following:

a. Pressure independent electronic controls, reset to modulate airflow between zero and
maximum cataloged CFM.

b. Multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensor, with a minimum of four measuring

ports. Minimum differential pressure signal of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inch water gage) at inlet
velocity of 2.6 m/s (500 fpm). Control signal accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent with
the same inlet size at any inlet condition. Velocity controller shall have a constant 2
degrees temperature reset span regardless of the minimum and maximum airflow
limit.

c. Reversible Actuator, 24-volts, directly connected, shaft mount type without linkage,
and equipped with magnetic clutch.

d. Class II, 24-volt transformer, and disconnect switch.

e. All controls shall be installed in approved NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

3. Constant volume single duct. Units shall contain within the casing a mechanical constant-air
volume control designed to operate by inlet air pressure without outside power. Regulators
shall be constructed of nonferrous parts and shall be guaranteed to maintain delivered air
volume at plus or minus 5 percent of unit specified airflow subjected to inlet pressure up to
1500 pa (6 inches water gage).

J. Attenuator Section: 1000 mm long, lined with 50 mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-
glass insulation.

K. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With 200-mm diameter collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.

L. Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.

AIR TERMINALS 15845 / Page 3 of 7
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

M. Hot-Water Heating Coil: 13-mm (1/2-inch) copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-
plate fins; leak tested underwater to 1380 kPa (200 psig); and factory installed.

N. Controls: Damper operator, thermostat, and other devices compatible with temperature controls
specified in other Division 15 Sections.

O. Controls: DDC type, microprocessor-based controls with integral airflow transducer and room
temperature sensor. DDC controller shall be furnished by VAC instrumentation and controls
manufacturer specified under other Division 15 Sections, mounted and calibrated by the VAV
manufacturer to meet the design parameters and to provide control with the following features:

1. Proportional plus integral control of room temperature.

2. Time-proportional reheat-coil control.
3. Occupied/unoccupied operating mode.
4. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
5. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
6. Communication with temperature-control system specified in other Division 15 Sections.

2.3 FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINALS

A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in series or in parallel arrangement inside unit
casing. Locate control components inside protective metal shroud.

B. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:

1. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.6-mm steel.

2. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.45-mm steel.
3. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.8-mm aluminum.
4. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.63-mm aluminum.

C. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass insulation; 24-
kg/cu. m density, complying with NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements.
Secure lining to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling.

1. Coat liner surfaces and edges with erosion-resistant coating or cover with perforated metal.

D. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

E. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.

F. Access: Removable panels to permit access to dampers and other parts requiring service,
adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.

G. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 500-Pa (2-inch wg) inlet static
pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.

H. Fan Section: Galvanized-steel plenum, acoustically lined, housing direct-drive, forward-curved fan
with permanent split-capacitor motor, air filter, and backdraft damper.

1. Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable with pneumatic-electric and electronic controls.

2. Isolation: Fan-motor assembly on rubber isolators.

I. Attenuator Section: Line with 50-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass insulation.

AIR TERMINALS 15845 / Page 4 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J. Hot-Water Heating Coil: 13-mm (1/2-inch) copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-
plate fins; leak tested underwater to 1380 kPa (200 psig); and factory installed.

K. Factory-mounted and -wired controls: Mount electrical components in control box with removable
cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source.

1. Factory-mounted transformer for control voltage on electric and electronic control units with
terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.
2. Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip, and terminal lugs to match
quantities, sizes, and materials of branch-circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in
terminal box sized according to NFPA 70.
3. Disconnect Switch: Factory-mounted, fused, disconnect switch.

L. Control Panel Enclosure: IP21 to IEC 60524, with access panel sealed from airflow and mounted
on side of unit.

M. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based controller with

integral airflow transducer and room sensor provide control with the following features:

1. Proportional plus integral control of room temperature.

2. Time-proportional reheat-coil control.
3. Occupied/unoccupied operating mode.
4. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
5. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
6. Communication with temperature-control system specified in other Division 15 Sections.

N. Factory-mounted electronic controls to accomplish the following sequence of operation:

1. With central system fan operating in occupied mode, sequence the controls as follows:

a. When primary duct pressure is sensed, thermostat and volume damper proportion
airflow from central system.
b. On reduced cooling demand, volume damper closes. At a field-adjustable point, fan
is energized.
c. As cooling demand increases, fan speed increases.
d. If central duct system pressure varies, volume damper maintains constant primary
airflow.
e. If no cooling or heating demand, control enters field-adjustable, no-load band.
f. On heating demand, heating coil is energized.

2. With central system fan operating in unoccupied mode, sequence the controls as follows:

a. Field-adjustable temperature setback.

b. On heating demand, terminal unit fan and heating coil are energized.
c. Volume damper is closed.

3. With central system fan operating in unoccupied mode, sequence the controls as follows:

a. Thermostat cycles fan.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: Test and rate air terminals according to AHRI 880 I-P or AHRI 881 SI,
"Performance Rating of Air Terminals."

AIR TERMINALS 15845 / Page 5 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Identification: Label each air terminal with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows, coil type, and AHRI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminals level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in
drawings, original design, and referenced standards; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal
service and maintenance.

B. Connect ductwork to air terminals according to Division 15 ductwork Sections.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to air terminals to allow service and maintenance.

B. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping," connect

heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return
with balancing valve and union or flange.

C. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract Documents.

B. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal manufacturer to achieve
proper performance.

C. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

D. Verify that control connections are complete.

E. Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

AIR TERMINALS 15845 / Page 6 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain air terminals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

END OF SECTION 15845

AIR TERMINALS 15845 / Page 7 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and
comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and
arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in
a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each
type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of
assembly of components.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show
locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings
and walls.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available
for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes,
showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.

E. Source quality control reports.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 / Page 1 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for
the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Air Systems Components; Kreuger Div.

2. Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America.
3. Carnes Co. Inc.
4. Hart and Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle and Bailey Div.
5. Nailor Industries Inc.
6. Titus.

2.2 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION

A. Air-diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration. Devices
shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for mounting in indicated surface
construction.

B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.

C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid. Dampers shall be
extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal velocity is not
to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer velocities through diffuser are not to exceed 3.0
m/s. Supply diffusers are to be able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below room temperature
without causing objectionable conditions.

E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the face of the device.
Volume adjustments shall be made by tamper-deterring device.

F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.

G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.

H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage), provide sponge-rubber
gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.

I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air quantity, as measured
on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless specified otherwise

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 / Page 2 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for
air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the
center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify
Engineer for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces
to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged
finishes.

3.5 CEILING DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE

A. Round Ceiling Diffuser:

1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum
3. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
4. Face Style: Three cone.
5. Mounting: Duct connection.
6. Pattern: Fully adjustable.
7. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.
8. Accessories:
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 / Page 3 of 7
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.

B. Square Ceiling Diffusers:

1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm).
5. Face Style: Three cone.
6. Mounting: Surface.
7. Pattern: Adjustable.
8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.
9. Accessories:

a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.

C. Plaque Square Ceiling Diffusers:

1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm).
5. Face Style: Plaque.
6. Mounting: Surface.
7. Pattern: Adjustable.
8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.
9. Accessories:

a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.

D. Louver Face Diffuser:

1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
4. Face Size: as shown on drawings
5. Mounting: Surface.
6. Pattern: Four-way.
7. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.
8. Accessories:

a. Square to round neck adaptor.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 / Page 4 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

b. Adjustable pattern vanes.

c. Throw reducing vanes.
d. Equalizing grid.
e. Plaster ring.
f. Safety chain.
g. Wire guard.
h. Sectorizing baffles.
i. Operating rod extension.

3.6 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS SCHEDULE

A. Linear Slot Diffuser :

1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material - Shell: Aluminum, insulated.
3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.
4. Finish - Face and Shell: Baked enamel, black.
5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.
6. Finish - Tees: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
7. Mounting: Ceiling or sidewall as shown on drawings, concealed flange and frame.
8. Slot Width: as shown on drawings.
9. Number of Slots: as shown on drawings.
10. Length: as shown on drawings.

B. Ceiling-Integral Continuous Diffuser:

1. Slot Width: as shown on drawings.

2. Straight and curved sections as required to accommodate layout.
3. Mitered tees and corners.
4. Pattern Controllers: 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
5. Material: Aluminum, extruded, heavy wall.
6. Finishes:

a. Exterior: Traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.

b. Interior: Standard black.

7. Throw: Standard or High as required.

8. Mounting: Ceiling or sidewall as shown on drawings, concealed flange and frame.
9. Plenum: Insulated.
10. Other Features:

a. Painted interior.
b. Blank-offs.

3.7 JET NOZZLES SCHEDULE

A. Jet Nozzle:

1. Airflow Principle: Extended distance for high airflow rates.

2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
4. Duct Connection: Round.
5. Duct Connection Size: As shown on drawings.
6. Face Size: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
7. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC35.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 / Page 5 of 7
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

8. Face Style: Round.

9. Air pattern: Adjustable, swivel deflection within +/- 30 degrees.
10. Mounting: Front mounting flange.
11. Accessories: Insulated supply air plenums.

3.8 REGISTERS AND GRILLES SCHEDULE

A. Adjustable Bar Register:

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
4. Core Construction: Removable.
5. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
6. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
7. Mounting: Concealed.
8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
9. Accessories:

a. Front and rear blade gang operator.

B. Adjustable Bar Grille:

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
4. Core Construction: Removable.
5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm)] wide.
6. Mounting: Concealed.

C. Fixed Face Register :

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch (13-by-13-by-13-mm) grid core.
4. Core Construction: Removable.
5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
6. Mounting: [Countersunk screw] [Concealed] [Lay in].
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.

D. Fixed Face Grille:

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch (13-by-13-by-13-mm) grid core.
4. Core Construction: Removable.
5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
6. Mounting: Concealed.

E. Linear Bar Grille:

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch (13-by-13-by-13-mm) grid core.
4. Distribution plenum.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 / Page 6 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

a. Internal insulation.
b. Inlet damper.

5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.

6. Mounting: Concealed.
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.

F. Zone Register Terminal

1. Description: Combination grille, register box, control damper, and flow regulator with on-
off control for on-demand ventilation similar to American Aldes (ZRT-1-4-120) or approved
equal.
2. Material: Heavy24 gauge G90 galvanized steel casing with integral duct collar (for rigid and
flexible duct attachment) and aluminum grille.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, traffic white (RAL 9016) to match wall paint color.
4. Mechanism: Single-blade damper operated by disconnecting type drive motor with normally
closed spring-return closure. When fully open, the damper shall rotate out of the air stream
on a solid through-blade shaft and pivot on permanently lubricated bearings.
4.5. Mounting: Flush
5.6. Allow to remove the entire damper assembly without disconnecting the duct or removing the
box from the ceiling.
7. Provide a permanently fixed perimeter gasket seal to prevent air noise and leakage at the
closed position.
6.8. Accessories:
a. Constant flow air regulator.
b. Integral damper end-switch.
c. Wireless communication relay for hotel.
d. Long-life 24 VAC actuator motor with spring return for damper.

END OF SECTION 15855

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 / Page 7 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15856 - INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of roof-mounting intake and relief ventilators:
1. Roof hoods.
2. Goosenecks.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Intake and relief ventilators shall be capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads, wind loads, seismic loads, and thermal movements without permanent deformation
of components, noise or metal fatigue, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include
printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For intake and relief ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
ventilator attachments to curbs and curb attachments to roof structure.

C. Coordination Drawings: Roof framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:

1. Structural members to which roof curbs and ventilators will be attached.

2. Sizes and locations of roof openings.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for intake and relief ventilators.

E. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain ventilators through one source from a single manufacturer where
indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of intake and relief
ventilators and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."

INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS 15856 / Page 1 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7
Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified or approved equal.

a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.

b. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan company.
c. Carnes.
d. Greenheck.
e. JencoFan.
f. Loren Cook Company.
g. Penn Ventilation.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 6 finish.

E. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made
from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times
the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing
per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS 15856 / Page 2 of 5
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Factory fabricate intake and relief ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant
joints.

C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.

2.4 ROOF HOODS

A. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figures 5-6 and 5-7.

B. Materials: Galvanized-steel sheet, minimum 1.62-mm- (0.064-inch-) thick base and 1.0-mm-
(0.040-inch-) thick hood suitably reinforced.

C. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 40-mm- (1-1/2-inch-) thick,
rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 40-mm- (1-1/2-inch-) wood nailer. Size as
required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 300 mm (12 inches).

D. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 12.7-mm- (1/2-inch-) square mesh, 1.6-mm (0.063-inch) wire

E. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 1.4-by-1.6-mm (18-by-16) mesh, 0.30-mm (0.012-inch) wire.

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to
ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over
it.
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated,
apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.025 mm (1 mil) for topcoat and an overall minimum dry film thickness of 0.05
mm (2 mils).

a. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS 15856 / Page 3 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.5 GOOSENECKS

A. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 5-5; with a minimum of 1.3-mm- (0.052-inch-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.

B. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 40-mm- (1-1/2-inch-) thick,
rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 40-mm- (1-1/2-inch-) wood nailer. Size as
required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 300 mm (12 inches).

C. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 12.7-mm- (1/2-inch-) square mesh, 1.6-mm (0.063-inch) wire.

D. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 1.4-by-1.6-mm (18-by-16) mesh, 0.30-mm (0.012-inch) wire.

E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to
ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over
it.
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated,
apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.025 mm (1 mil) for topcoat and an overall minimum dry film thickness of 0.05
mm (2 mils).

a. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install intake and relief ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Install goosenecks on curb base where throat size exceeds 230 by 230 mm (9 by 9 inches).

C. Install intake and relief ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses. Comply
with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.

F. Label intake and relief ventilators according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."

G. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a
heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or
dissimilar metals.

INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS 15856 / Page 4 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

END OF SECTION 15856

INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS 15856 / Page 5 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15861 - AIR FILTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove particulate
matter from air for HVAC applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights; required clearances
and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency
and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component assemblies
and attachments.

1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and
anchorages.

C. Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air Filter Performance Report for Extended Surface Filters:

1. Submit a test report for each Grade of filter being offered. The report shall be less than five
years old and will have been prepared by an independent testing laboratory using test
equipment, method and duct section as specified by ASHRAE Standard 52.1 and ASHRAE
Standard 52.2 for type filter under test and acceptable to Resident Engineer, indicating that
filters comply with the requirements of this Specification. Test for 150 m/min (500 fpm) will
be accepted for lower velocity rated filters provided the test report of an independent testing
laboratory complies with all the requirements of this Specification.
2. Selection procedures: All filters tested shall have been procured by the independent testing
laboratory from the open market independent of manufacturer of these filters and a statement
to this effect must accompany test report.

B. Nameplates: Each filter shall bear a label or nameplate indicating manufacturer's name, filter size,
rated efficiency, UL classification.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

AIR FILTERS 15861 / Page 1 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality";
Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of
testing and rating air-filter units.

D. Comply with AHRI 850 “Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment”.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest and
relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Provide one complete set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters, provide
only prefilters.
2. Provide one container of red oil for inclined manometer filter gage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Air Filters, Electrostatic Air Cleaners, and Filter-Holding Systems:

a. AAF International.
b. Airguard Industries, Inc.
c. Camfil Farr.
d. Flanders.

2. Filter Gages:

a. Airguard Industries, Inc.

b. Dwyer Instruments Inc.

2.2 CLEANABLE (WASHABLE) PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory fabricated, flat panel type, cleanable air filters with holding frames. Initial
pressure drop at a face velocity of 2.5 meter per second shall be 55 Pa. Average dust-spot efficiency
shall be 18 percent and arrestance shall be 87 percent when filter is operated to a final pressure drop
of 250 Pa. Under these circumstances, dust-holding capacity shall be 750 grams per square meter
of face area.

AIR FILTERS 15861 / Page 2 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Media: Filtering element shall be cleanable, washable, constructed of non-woven synthetic-fabric-

type, supported on rigid pleats of suitable grid material. Filter element shall be sealed into an
enclosing 16 GA galvanized steel frame of rigid chipboard, providing a unit that will not rack.

C. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel, 18 GA minimum, with gaskets and fasteners and
suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.3 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type, disposable air filters with holding
frames.

B. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.

C. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and with
pull and retaining handles.

D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable for
bolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.4 EXTENDED-SURFACE, GENERAL

A. Use factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported or non-supported
cartridges for removal of particulate matter in air-conditioning, heating and ventilating systems.
Filter units shall be of the extended surface type fabricated for disposal when the dust-load limit is
reached as indicated by maximum (final) pressure drop.

B. Filter Classification: UL approved Class 1 or Class 2 conforming to UL Standard 900.

C. Filter Grades, Percent, Nominal Efficiency and Application:

1. Grade A: 90-95 after-filter.

2. Grade B: 80-85 after-filter.
3. Grade C: 50-60 prefilter.
4. Grade D: 25-30 prefilter.

D. Filter Media:

1. Grade A, B and C Nonsupported (Bag) Type: Construct media of high-density glass fibers
or other suitable fibers. Enclose or pocket each pleat in woven or non-woven backing
material. Seal and fasten (stitch) to maintain pleat shape in a proper frame to insure no air
leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
2. Grade A, B and C Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of high-density
glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Fastening methods used to maintain pleat shape, (metal
backing or aluminum separators) shall be sealed in a proper enclosing frame to ensure no air
leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
3. Grade D (Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of synthetic/natural fibers. A metal grid
backing shall be bonded to the air leaving side of the media to maintain uniform pleat shape
and stability for proper airflow and maximum dust loading. The media frame shall be
constructed of high strength moisture resistant fiber or beverage board. Bond the pleated
media pack on all four edges to ensure no air leakage for the life of the filter. Staples and
stays are prohibited.

AIR FILTERS 15861 / Page 3 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Filter Efficiency and Arrestance: Efficiency and arrestance of filters shall be determined in
accordance with ASHRAE 52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2. Atmospheric dust spot efficiency and synthetic
dust weight arrestance shall not be less than the following:

Percentage of Initial Percentage of Average Percentage of Average

Efficiency Efficiency Arrestance
Grade A 75.4 86.4 99.0
Grade B 58.0 79.0 98.0
Grade C 25.0 53.0 97.0
Grade D Less than 20.0 22.0 89.0

F. Maximum initial and final resistance, Pa (inches of water), for each filter cartridge when operated
at 150 m/min (500 feet per minute) face velocity:

Initial Resistance Final Resistance

Grade A (Bag) 130 (0.52) 250 (1.00)
Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 185 (0.74) 250 (l.00)
Grade B (Bag) 100 (0.40) 250 (l.00)
Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 150 (0.60) 250 (l.00)
Grade C (Bag) 70 (0.28) 200 (0.80)
Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 85 (0.35) 200 (0.80)
Grade D (2-inch deep) 80 (0.32) 175 (0.70)
Grade D (4-inch deep) 65 (0.27) 175 (0.70)

G. Dust Holding Capacity: When tested to 250 Pa (l.00-inch water) at 150 m/min (500 fpm) face
velocity, the dust holding capacity for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area)
filter shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the dust holding capacity shall be
proportionally higher or lower to the face area.

Grade A (Bag) 300 grams

Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 90 grams
Grade B (Bag) 430 grams
Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 175 grams
Grade C (Bag) 910 grams
Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 250 grams
Grade D (2 inch deep) 150 grams
Grade D (4 inch deep) 300 grams

H. Minimum Media Area: The minimum net effective media area in square meter (square feet) for each
600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area) filter at 150 m/min (500 fpm) face velocity
shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the net effective media area shall be
proportionally higher or lower.

Grade A (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)

Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade B (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)
Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade C (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)
Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade D (2-inch deep) 1.4 (l4.8)
Grade D (4-inch deep) 2.1 (23.0)

AIR FILTERS 15861 / Page 4 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.5 EXTENDED-SURFACE, DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters with holding frames.

B. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid.

C. Media and Media-Grid Frame: Galvanized steel.

D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for
bolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.6 EXTENDED-SURFACE, NONSUPPORTED-MEDIA BAG FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting filters with holding frames.

B. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by flexible
internal supports under rated-airflow conditions.

C. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel.

D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for
bolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.7 ACTIVATED-CARBON PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated unit with activated-carbon media.

B. Media: Pleated, multilayer filter with inlet layer of cotton and synthetic fibers and layer of activated-
carbon granules bonded to synthetic fibers, formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-wire
grid, and housed in nonflammable cardboard frame.

C. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets and fasteners, capable
of holding media and media frame in place and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.8 ACTIVATED-CARBON FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated unit with activated-carbon trays in deep-V arrangement with

disposable panel prefilter.

B. Media: Activated carbon and mounted in removable carbon-cell trays of epoxy-coated steel.

1. Activated-Carbon Capacity: 5.4 kg of activated carbon per 236 L/s (500 cfm) of airflow.
2. Activated-Carbon Capacity: 4.0 kg of activated carbon per 944 L/s (2000 cfm) of airflow.

C. Housing: 1.6-mm thick, galvanized steel, for side servicing through gasketed access doors on both
sides. Equip housings with metal slide channel tracks to hold activated-carbon trays.

2.9 INERTIAL AIR FILTER

A. Provide all inertial air cleaners of number, size and capacity as indicated on the Drawings and as
hereinafter specified.

AIR FILTERS 15861 / Page 5 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. The air cleaner shall consist of housing, bleed air manifold, blade packs, bullnoses, inlet screen, and
bleed slots. All finished components shall be primed and painted with at least one coat of top coat.
1. Housing: All welded construction, 11-gauge steel, continuous standing flanges on inlet and
outlets with pre-drilled bolt holes.
2. Bleed Air Manifold: All welded construction, 11-gauge steel, continuous standing flange
with pre-drilled bolt holes. Manifold to be sized to provide uniform air flow through each
cell’s dust bin for proper balance and dust removal.
3. Blade Packs: 20-gauge steel with welded construction. Vanes are to be individually formed
and not stamped. Vanes shall provide a circuitous path for the air flow and redirect the air to
the clean outlet. Air passageway between blades shall be a minimum of 5 mm. Blade packs
shall be removable for service.
4. Bullnoses: Aerodynamically formed, 16-gauge steel at air inlets. One bullnose shall be
provided between adjacent blade packs.
5. Inlet Screens: 26-gauge, four-mesh, galvanized hardware cloth, supported by a double layer
of 16-gauge galvanized steel frame.
6. Bleed Slot: Integral to each dust bin. 16-gauge steel, rounded entry to minimize obstruction
or plugging under heavy dust concentrations.

C. Efficiency:
1. Not less than 93% on Standardized Coarse Air Cleaner Test Dust at a clean air flow rate of
1700 cubic meters per hour per single cell, bleed rate equal to 10% of inlet air flow.
2. Inlet to clean outlet resistance shall not exceed 300 Pa at 1700 cubic meters per hour clean
air flow.

2.10 FRONT- AND REAR-ACCESS FILTER FRAMES

A. Framing System: Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream (front) or
downstream (rear) filter servicing, cut to size and prepunched for assembly into modules. Vertically
support filters prevent deflection of horizontal members without interfering with either filter
installation or operation.

B. Prefilters: Incorporate a separate track, removable from front or back.

C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters to ensure seal between
gasketed filter elements to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.

2.11 SIDE-SERVICE HOUSINGS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, side-service housings, constructed of galvanized steel, with

flanges to connect to duct system.

B. Prefilters: Integral tracks to accommodate 50-mm disposable or washable filters.

C. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive-locking devices. Arrange so filter
cartridges can be loaded from either access door.

D. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter
cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.

2.12 FILTER GAGES

A. Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white
background, and front recalibration adjustment.

AIR FILTERS 15861 / Page 6 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Diameter: 50 mm.
2. Range: 0 to 750 Pa (0- to 3.0-inch wg).

B. Manometer-Type Filter Gage: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum scale, logarithmic-
curve tube gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to read from 0 to 750 Pa (0- to 3.0-inch wg),
and accurate within 3 percent of full scale range.

C. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding
frames to substrate.

C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.

D. Install filter gage for each filter bank.

E. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary
filters that were used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

F. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure pressure drop
through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible
position. Adjust and level inclined gages.

G. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components, filter and filter-frame installation. Report results in writing.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air-
distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.

END OF SECTION 15861

AIR FILTERS 15861 / Page 7 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives,
including the following:

1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains, branches,
and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included
in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment
installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan
speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to design quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air
velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a
person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.

E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed
system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 1 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan
when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.

K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence, submit 2
copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance"
Article below.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this
Section.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence, submit
2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified
in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on
this Project.

D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as
specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.

E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or
NEBB, or another agency acceptable to Engineer.

B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Employer's and the Engineer's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan
to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and
balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 2 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting
time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing,
adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.

D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's report
forms as approved by the Engineer.

E. .Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if

required by the instrument manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Employer Occupancy: The Employer may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Employer during testing, adjusting, and balancing
operations to minimize conflicts with the Employer's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support
and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 3 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems
and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract of the Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control
devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the
Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record (As-Built)
Documents."

D. Examine Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to
project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory.
To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and
6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been
performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such
as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings,
and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and
appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid
flows.

O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 4 of 23
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed
and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and
variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and
diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold
walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes
in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access
to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close
probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor
barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including
damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and
devices, to show final settings.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 5 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan
volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems.
Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-duct, induction-unit
supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in
other articles in this Section.

B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 6 of 23
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to
align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer. Make
required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate
fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating,
and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows
within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.

E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of
design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at
the air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract
Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Set mixing boxes at full-cold airflow position for setting the fan volume, after verifying that the
cooling coil is capable of full-system airflow.

B. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine
that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to overcome resistance in
the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.

1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase the airflow at the fan.

C. Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows:

1. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and observing the air
temperature and volume changes.
2. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments.
3. Adjust mixing box to design airflows within specified tolerances. Measure the airflow by
Pitot-tube traverse readings, totaling the airflow of the outlets; or by measuring static
pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by the box manufacturer.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 7 of 23
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Remeasure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine
that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to overcome resistance in
the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.

E. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-volume dual-duct

systems, and adjust each mixing-box maximum- and minimum-airflow settings.

3.7 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the fan design
airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition
until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the reduced
airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted,
adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that
simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the
critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge duct losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions to
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.

C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the
static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed,
and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 8 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure
to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same
as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.

D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at
minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly
among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at
maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated
airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units
the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same
as described for constant-volume air systems.

3.8 MULTIZONE SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.

B. Adjust each zone damper to design airflow.

3.9 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of
system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations
that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 9 of 23
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.10 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement
pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with the
pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the
pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point
on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended
impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump
and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than design flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over design
flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.

3.11 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow
through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 10 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.12 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.

3.13 HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature-control
valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves.

E. Record safety valve settings.

F. Verify operation of steam traps.

3.14 MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from
minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record
observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.15 CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of design
flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do
not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer.
Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
2. Condenser water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by the chiller manufacturer.
4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW.
5. The kW input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW.
6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
7. Air-Cooled Chillers: Verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan data, including number
of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

3.16 CONDENSING UNITS

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 11 of 23
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record
compressor data.

3.17 BOILERS

A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

3.18 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for less than
3540 L/s (7500 cfm).
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

3.19 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within
the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour
days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure
when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.20 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control
functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 12 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a
grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.21 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.22 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified

in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing
devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper
performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and
general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures
in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems
being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for
systems serving multiple floors.

3.23 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring
binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing
engineer.

1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 13 of 23
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with
single-line diagrams and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm (inches).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 14 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm (inches).

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
i. Outside airflow in L/s (cfm).
j. Return airflow in L/s (cfm).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c. (fins per inch).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
h. Tube size in DN (NPS).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Average face velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Air pressure drop in Pa (inches wg).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
h. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
i. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa (psig).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
o. Inlet steam pressure in kPa (psig).

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 15 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory startup
equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in kW (Btuh).
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm (inches).

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Air temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
e. Entering-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
g. Air static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Low-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
i. High-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
j. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg C (deg F).
l. Operating set point in kW (Btuh).
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in kW (Btuh).

I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-
station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in kW (Btuh).
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
i. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
j. Minimum face velocity in m/s (fpm).

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Heat output in kW (Btuh).

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 16 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

b. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

c. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.

J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm (inches).

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm (inches).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Suction static pressure in Pa (inches wg).

K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Duct size in mm (inches).
f. Duct area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
g. Design airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
h. Design velocity in m/s (fpm).
i. Actual airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
j. Actual average velocity in m/s (fpm).
k. Barometric pressure in Pa (psig).

L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 17 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.
c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. m (sq. ft.).

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in L/s (cfm).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in m/s (fpm).
e. Final airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
f. Final velocity in m/s (fpm).
g. Space temperature in deg C (deg F).

M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Water pressure drop in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).

N. Packaged Chiller Reports: For each chiller, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Make and model number.
c. Manufacturer's serial number.
d. Refrigerant type and capacity in L (gal.).
e. Starter type and size.
f. Starter thermal protection size.

2. Condenser Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Refrigerant pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Refrigerant temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 18 of 23
RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

d. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

e. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
f. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).

3. Evaporator Test Reports: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Refrigerant pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Refrigerant temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
f. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).

4. Compressor Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Make and model number.

b. Manufacturer's serial number.
c. Suction pressure in kPa (psig).
d. Suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Discharge pressure in kPa (psig).
f. Discharge temperature in deg C (deg F).
g. Oil pressure in kPa (psig).
h. Oil temperature in deg C (deg F).
i. Voltage at each connection.
j. Amperage for each phase.
k. The kW input.
l. Crankcase heater kW.
m. Chilled water control set point in deg C (deg F).
n. Condenser water control set point in deg C (deg F).
o. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in kPa (psig).
p. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in kPa (psig).

5. Refrigerant Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Oil level.
b. Refrigerant level.
c. Relief valve setting in kPa (psig).
d. Unloader set points in kPa (psig).
e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded.
f. Bearing temperatures in deg C (deg F).
g. Vane position.
h. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg C (deg F).

O. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrigerant
compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in kg (lb).
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg C (deg F).

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 19 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Inlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).

b. Outlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
g. Condenser water temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
j. Condenser water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
o. Suction pressure in kPa (psig).
p. Suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in kPa (psig).
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg C (deg F).
s. Oil pressure in kPa (psig).
t. Oil temperature in deg C (deg F).
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. The kW input.
x. Crankcase heater kW.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

P. Cooling Tower or Condenser Test Reports: For cooling towers or condensers, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Make and type.
c. Model and serial numbers.
d. Nominal cooling capacity in kW (tons).
e. Refrigerant type and weight in kg (lb).
f. Water-treatment chemical feeder and chemical.
g. Number and type of fans.
h. Fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
i. Fan motor voltage at each connection.
j. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
k. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm (inches).
l. Number of belts, make, and size.

2. Pump Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Make and model number.

b. Manufacturer's serial number.
c. Motor make and frame size.
d. Motor horsepower and rpm.
e. Voltage at each connection.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 20 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

f. Amperage for each phase.

g. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).

3. Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Water temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
d. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Leaving-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
f. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
g. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
h. Bleed water flow rate in L/s (gpm).

4. Air Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Duct airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Inlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Outlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
d. Average entering-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Average leaving-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Ambient wet-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).

Q. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For steam and hot-water heat exchangers, include the
following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Ratings.

2. Steam Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Inlet pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Condensate flow rate in kW (lb/h).

3. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).

4. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 21 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

R. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by plotting the
shutoff head on pump curves.

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
g. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Required net positive suction head in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in mm (inches).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Static head in kPa (feet of head or psig).

b. Pump shutoff pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
c. Actual impeller size in mm (inches).
d. Full-open flow rate in L/s (gpm).
e. Full-open pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
f. Final discharge pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
g. Final suction pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Final total pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Final water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.

S. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Fuel type and input in kW (Btuh).
g. Number of passes.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Operating pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Operating temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 22 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

d. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

e. Number of safety valves and sizes in DN (NPS).
f. Safety valve settings in kPa (psig).
g. High-limit setting in kPa (psig).
h. Operating-control setting.
i. High-fire set point.
j. Low-fire set point.
k. Voltage at each connection.
l. Amperage for each phase.
m. Draft fan voltage at each connection.
n. Draft fan amperage for each phase.
o. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).

T. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.

3.24 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual
conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during
near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting
during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 15990

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 / Page 23 of 23

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. General provisions applicable to Division 16 work and other Sections of the Specification
that refer to this Section.
2. Supporting devices for electrical components.
3. Electrical identification.
4. Covers, brackets and supports.
5. Electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
8. Touchup painting.

B. Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the complete electrical systems, equipment and materials shown on the
Drawings and/or described in the Specification together with all associated ancillary work, support
work and builder's work required to achieve full functionality as per the design intent.

C. The scope of electrical works shall include, but shall not be necessarily limited to the following:

1. Power Service and Distribution consisting of:

a. Medium voltage distribution:

1) MV switchgear & MV cabling. (coordination with JEPCO)
2) Power Transformers. (coordination with JEPCO)
3) Utility metering. (coordination with JEPCO)
4) SCADA system. (coordination with JEPCO)
b. Low voltage distribution network:
1) Main distribution boards.
2) Distribution panels.
3) Final branch circuit panelboards (LPs, PPs, etc.).
4) Automatic transfer switches.
5) Motor control centers / panels.
6) Power factor correction capacitors.
7) Feeders, sub-feeders and wires.
8) Conduits, cable trays, wireways and supporting systems.
9) Underground ducts and raceways.
c. Standby emergency power plant:
1) Diesel generator sets.
2) Synchronizing boards.
d. Lighting and small power installations:
1) Functional and decorative indoor lighting.
2) Building facade lighting.
3) Landscape lighting.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 1 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

4) Exterior lighting.
5) Emergency lighting and exit signs.
6) Lighting control and dimming systems.
7) Lighting control system for FOH areas ( refer to lighting sub consultant
(MBLD) submission )
8) Emergency Central Battery System (ECBS).
9) Wiring devices & miscellaneous equipment.
e. Other electrical systems:
1) Uninterruptible Power Supply,
2) Earthing & Lightning protection systems.

2. Communication, life safety and security systems consisting of:

a. Structured Cabling Network.

b. Data Communications Network.
c. Wireless Data Network.
d. Telephony
e. Audiovisual Systems and Equipment.
f. IP Television System (IPTV).
g. Public Address System (PAS).
h. Security Systems:
1) Access and Security Control System (SACS).
2) Security Audio Communication System (Intercom).
3) Perimeter Detection Systems.
4) Security Screening Equipment.
5) Parking Control Equipment.
6) Video Surveillance (CCTV).
i. Fire Detection and Alarm system.

3. Horizontal and Vertical Transportation Systems (HVTS) consisting of:

a. Passenger and service elevators.
b. Dumbwaiters.

1.3 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

A. Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of the local codes of
practice, local power authority regulations and Requirements for Electrical Installations – IET
Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) as published by the Institution of Engineering and Technology and
IEC Standards where not in contradiction with the local codes of practice and regulations, herein
referred to collectively as 'the Regulations'.

B. Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which material or
construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the Regulations, immediately
inform the Engineer in writing. Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the materials and
perform the work as though called for to minimum code standards.

C. Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall be manufactured and
installed in compliance with the relevant recommendations of the following or other equal and
approved standards:

1. IEC: The International Electro-technical Commission.

2. ISO: The International Standardization Organization.
3. CENELEC: European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization.
4. CCITT: The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee.
5. CCIR: The International Radio Consultative Committee.
6. CISPR: The International Special Committee on Radio Interference.
7. IET: The Institution of Engineering and Technology.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 2 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

8. BS: British Standards.

9. CIE: International Commission of Illumination.
10. ITU: International Telecommunication Unit.
11. NEBS: Network Equipment Building System.

D. In case of contradiction between enforced and relevant local regulations and International
Standards, the most stringent requirements shall prevail.

1.4 POWER SUPPLY

A. The Local Power Authority will provide incoming power supply and connection from 11/0.4kV
substations located within the building as shown on the Drawings.

B. Power Supply: Liaise with the Local Power Authority to confirm:

1. Characteristics of supply and system earthing.

2. Location of incoming supply shown on the Drawings.
3. Space requirements and associated builder's work for the Authority's installations.
4. Make necessary arrangements at the earliest opportunity to ensure connection as and when
required, and inform the Engineer in the event of any foreseen delay.

C. kWH-metering: Liaise with the Local Power Authority and provide necessary instrumentation,
enclosures and accessories required by them to effect a complete kWH-metering installation.

D. kWH-metering will be at as per JEPCO requirements unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

E. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:

1. Medium voltage: 11 kV, 3phase, 3 wire.

2. Low voltage: 400 V, 3phase, 4wire, solidly earthed neutral.
3. Frequency: 50 Hz.

F. Distribution systems shall be supplied or derived from the voltage system previously described, as
shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.

G. The Contractor shall ensure that system’s upstream protection device settings are re-calculated by
competent agency and changed as necessary to be compatible with the final approved load
conditions.

1.5 TELEPHONE PUBLIC EXCHANGE LINES

A. The Local Telephone Authority will bring telephone public exchange lines into the premises to the
location shown on the Drawings and/or to be agreed with the Authority. Liaise with the Local
Telephone Authority to confirm location of connection of public telephone exchange lines into the
premises.

1.6 MOTORS AND OTHER ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT

A. All electrical work from and including motor control centers / panels to motors and other
electrically operated equipment, which is included in Division 16 Section "Motor Control
Centers", form part of the Electrical Work.

B. Power supply to motors and other electrically operated equipment, which are not connected to a
motor control center / panels, is included in the Electrical Work and comprises power supply to

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 3 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

terminal box on equipment or nearby disconnecting or starting device, and includes the
disconnecting device, if individually provided, including the starting device or combination starter.

1.7 EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment Spaces and Rooms: Verify that dimensions, structure, ventilating and cooling
arrangements and other provisions in equipment spaces and rooms are suitable for installation,
operation and maintenance of proposed equipment. Note any discrepancies on the shop and
construction drawings.

B. Equipment shall be designed for the system voltage and frequency previously described, unless
otherwise specified. Special provisions shall be made for equipment sensitive to power supply
frequency and voltage variations and for equipment operated at other voltages/frequencies or by
direct current sources.

1.8 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

A. Climatic Conditions at Project’s Site:

1. Altitude: 960 m above sea level.

2. Maximum ambient temperature: 38.5degrees C (in the shade).
3. Minimum ambient temperature: -0.8 degrees C.
4. Maximum relative humidity: 70 %.

B. Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental conditions specified here
below encountered at the installed location without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of operating capability, unless otherwise specified. For devices located in harsh
environments such as interior uncontrolled or exterior environments, the Contractor shall provide
the necessary housings or enclosures to ensure proper equipment operation and performance.

1. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, installed in air-conditioned

temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in
ambient conditions of 10 to 40 deg C dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
2. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-air-conditioned
non-temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in
ambient conditions of 5 to 50 deg C dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
3. Exterior Environment, Under Direct Sunlight: System components installed in locations
exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of [5 to
70 deg C dry bulb and 10 to 100 percent relative humidity, condensing, when exposed to
winds up to 160 km/h.
4. Exterior Environment, Under Shade: System components installed in locations exposed to
weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 5 to 50 deg C dry
bulb and 10 to 100 percent relative humidity, condensing, when exposed to winds up to
160 km/h.

C. All electrical equipment including transformers, switchgears, cables, relays, lighting fixtures,
motors, etc. shall be designed or derated for continuous and trouble free service under the
following climatic conditions:
1. Interior,Controlled Environment – where installed indoors.
2. Exterior Environment – where installed outdoors.

D. Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are required for particular
equipment, they are described in the specification of the equipment concerned.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 4 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Equipment, apparatus, material accessories installed outdoors shall be corrosion and salinity proof.
UV stabilized requirement shall be applied for outdoor installations and their surface finish and
due certification shall be provided by manufacturer as necessary.

1.9 DRAWINGS

A. Equipment locations shown on the Drawings indicate approximate locations and general layout of
equipment. Exact and final locations and layouts together with dimensions, weights, mounting
methods and accessories, where relevant, shall be shown on Contractor's shop and construction
drawings.

B. Symbols: In order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity on the Drawings,
the symbols used for various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted devices, take up more
space on the Drawings than the device does on the wall. Because of drafting limitations these
locations must be considered as being indicative rather than exact physical locations of the
devices. The devices shall be installed with prime regard for convenience of operation and the
proper usage of the wall space rather than to coincide with the scaled locations of the symbols. In
locating the outlets, follow the criteria provided on detail Drawings where provided, and
coordinate with furniture. Do not scale from design Drawings.

C. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings shall be used as a guide only to defining basic positions,
circuiting, loading and switching arrangements. Actual layouts and details of routing of circuits
shall be shown on the Contractor's shop and construction drawings.

D. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical Work are shown for
convenience and reference only.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and construction
drawings and other information required by the Specification, before ordering equipment or
materials and before executing any related work on site.

B. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed product data such as model no., all relevant ratings,
country of manufacture, interface details as necessary, covers and supports.

C. Calculations: Submit for approval the manufacturer/supplier calculations for the following
systems, prior to ordering/manufacturing the material:
1. Indoor and outdoor lighting distribution, with necessary supporting documents and
photometric data of the lighting fixtures proposed and approved by the Contractor.
2. Circuit breakers selectivity and discrimination calculation study for a full selective and
discriminated distribution scheme.
3. Voltage drop and short circuit calculations after verification of cable and breaker sizes.
4. Generators sizing calculations.
5. Power factor correction capacitors sizing based on the final approved loads.
6. Battery bank calculations to fulfill the specification requirements provided for the specific
equipment.
7. Rating / derating calculations for the specified equipment.
8. Lightning risk assessment and energy coordination studies for surge protection.
9. Harmonic analysis.
10. Earthing.
11. Relay settings.
12. Design calculations associated with communications and security systems engineering,
power consumption and heat dissipation, link budget, fiber count, Quality of Service
(QoS), redundancy, reliability and service availability.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 5 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

13. Any required calculation necessary to define component/equipment sizes for the proper
operation of the electrical and ELV systems, and to confirm compliance with specified
Regulations and Standards.

D. Shop and Construction Drawings:

1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electrical equipment, as applicable.

2. Shop and construction drawings must demonstrate that the design requirements are
understood by indicating all equipment and material proposed to be supplied and installed
and by detailing fabrication and installation methods proposed to be used. Shop and
construction drawings shall clearly state the name and location of the work, the names of
Engineer and Contractor, submission date, cross-references to the Drawings and
Specification and the specific reference number, location, service and function of each
item.
3. Shop and construction drawings shall be submitted at a scale of 1:50 for general layout
plans, and 1:10, or 1:20 as approved by the Engineer for sections, details, elevations,
congested layouts, etc. Drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing

sleeves and openings for passage through floor structure.
b. Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric, showing locations of
cables, conduits, bus ducts, shafts, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
ceiling spaces and all other critical locations
c. Plans showing equipment layouts including all details pertaining to clearances,
access, sleeves, electrical connections, location and elevation of pipes, ducts,
conduits, etc.
d. Plans, sections and elevations of electrical spaces to illustrate compliance with
Standards for allocation of spaces for maintenance, movement, installation, etc.
4. Single Line Diagrams: Detailed single line diagrams and control schematics clearly
indicating all equipment ratings, frame sizes, cable sizes, nomenclature/identification
number shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval. The SLD’s shall include the MV
network as applicable.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements, and arrange for certification by manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized
representative.

F. Electrical installation shall be fully rated for the power source and load characteristics as also for
the fault conditions expected and protection selectively coordinated for full discrimination,
considering the different manufacturers products used in the system.

G. Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original catalogues or

catalogue cuts, characteristics, model number, application and operating criteria of all equipment
and materials, together with other information necessary to satisfy Engineer that proposed
equipment and systems are suitable and adequate.

H. List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials, including all items for which
choice of manufacturer is at own discretion, shall be submitted for approval.

I. Assembled Equipment: Any assembled equipment to be supplied for the project shall be
assembled by the manufacturer or his authorized assembler. Submit the necessary documents to
substantiate the above including the assembler staff training, quality control, etc. The Engineer
reserves the right to reject any local assembler if the information submitted is not sufficient. The
Engineer's rejection in that respect is final and not subject to discussion.

J. Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine test certificates and reports
for equipment and devices. Complete test results shall be submitted in clearly identified and
organised booklets, indicating item of equipment, make, model, type, date of tests, type of tests,

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 6 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

descriptions and procedures. Include in the test reports the Quality Assurance Certification, the
standards to which the equipment comply, and the standards to which the equipment was tested.

K. Factory Testing: Locally manufactured/assembled equipment shall comply with the relevant
standards recommendations and shall be witnessed by Engineer, where required in the relevant
Specifications Section. If the manufacturer's test certificates/tests are not complying with the
standards, then independent laboratory tests shall be carried out on equipment in accordance with
the Specification and the Standards, and as required by Engineer. The Engineer's requirements in
that respect are final and not subject to discussion.

L. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of spare parts to be provided, as
required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's unit price including
packaging and delivery to site.

M. Tools And Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of tools and
instruments to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

N. Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all equipment and
devices to be labeled and the suggested details, lettering, position and fixing methods of each label
indicating its application.

O. Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major items of equipment
for which samples cannot be submitted shall be demonstrated in existing installations or by
manufacturer's information, test certificates and reports.

P. As-Built (Record) Drawings: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit Record Drawings certified
by the Engineer on installed electrical systems, in accordance with requirements of the
Specification, Division 01. The As-Built (Record) Drawings, where applicable, shall include data
on existing works. The As-Built Records shall be made progressively as the Work proceeds.

Q. Submit CVs of electrical Engineers, electrical personnel, and quality personnel, for Engineer’s
review and approval.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with related Standards, specified therein.

B. Installations shall be carried out by qualified personnel.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange
in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that
follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow
of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the
building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 7 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services, including provision for electricity-metering components.
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company
providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished
surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
The locations of access panels shall be coordinated and proposed to ensure that all electrical
equipment are accessible within “hand-reach” through the access provided.

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate

installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

F. Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical identification markings and
devices, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

G. Locations of all ceiling lighting fixtures, fire alarm detectors, emergency lighting, CCTV cameras,
etc. shall be coordinated with false ceiling subcontractor and other mechanical services outlets, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and technical and functional requirements.

1.13 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in the work prior to
submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or materials cease to be available, submit
alternative items of equal quality and type for approval.

B. Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and material characteristics where
required are compatible with the requirements of the Local Power Authority or other Authorities
having jurisdiction and are acceptable to them. Inform Engineer of any modifications necessary to
comply with the Local Power Authority's requirements.

C. Manufacturers' Standards: Equipment shall be the latest standard product of the manufacturer.
Component parts shall be the product of a single manufacturer, unless otherwise approved and
provided that components made by other manufacturers are of a standard design and are
interchangeable.

D. Approved Manufacturers: Listing of approved manufacturers in the Specification does not

necessarily constitute approval of their standard products as equal to those specified. Ascertain
that listed manufacturers are able to supply equipment and material in conformity with the
Specification.

E. Factory Assembly: Equipment generally shall be supplied in complete factory assembled units
ready for installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for transportation or other purposes shall be
arranged to limit site work to simple re- assembly and inter-wiring of control and power cabling.

F. Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials shall be stored in an approved location, under
cover, free from humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment sensitive to heat and humidity
shall be kept in climatically conditioned areas until installed and handed over.

G. Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate operable defective equipment
during the Defects Liability Period until it can be removed from service for repair or replacement.

H. Warranty: Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the manufacturer
(including his agreement to replace promptly, defective equipment or parts thereof, as instructed
by the Engineer) covering materials and workmanship for the period stated in the Specification,
starting at Taking Over certificatesubstantial completion. Assign the benefits of such warranty to
the Employer.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 8 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

I. Spare Parts: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide spare parts required by the
Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.

J. Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide sets of tools and
instruments required by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing and
securing same.

K. Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices etc. to indicate duty,
service or function, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Labels shall be laminated anodized aluminum
discs with black surface and white core with incised lettering in English. Alternative methods of
labelling may be submitted for approval. Fix labels with non-corrodible screws to equipment, or
to adjacent permanent surfaces or as approved by Engineer.

L. Systems used before substantial completion shall have all consumable elements, such as lamps etc.
and defective equipment replaced by new, within 7 days prior to the date of substantial
completion.

M. All panels and electrical boards shall have designs permitting easy access of internal components
for maintenance and replacement without disturbing other components. All equipment shall be
designed for easy and simple operation.

N. Contractor shall be responsible to define the necessary power supplies, taking into account the
installed load of chosen equipment and final condition of installation, as well as any other
considerations as to allow the proper operation and maintenance of equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 14-mm diameter slotted
holes at a maximum of 50-mm centers in webs.

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type
hangers.

E. Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends for indoor installations from both sides and
flanged for outdoor installation from any side or penetration of water tanks or similar.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number
and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of
malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 9 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use
colors prescribed by these Specifications.

B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field
for each raceway and cable size to meet IEC Standards.

1. Type: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic

band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Color: Black letters on orange background.
3. Legend: Indicates voltage.

C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not
less than 25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick.

D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the
following features:

1. Not less than 150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.

E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted
numbers and letters.

F. Equipment Nameplates: Non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and firmly fixed to
equipment at factory. Nameplates shall indicate name and address of manufacturer, model, serial
number, basic characteristics and ratings of equipment and shall include elementary diagrams etc.,
all in accordance with the Standards. Equipment shall also be further identified after location at
site, indicating the nomenclature number as per approval. As a general practice, the identification
labels shall be suitably located on adjoining surface or on separate support and not on the electrical
device which could be removed and replaced.

G. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.

H. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1.6-mm minimum thickness for signs up to
129 sq. cm and 3.2-mm minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on
white background.

I. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or
drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.

J. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate

butyrate signs with 1-mm, galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to
the application. 6-mm grommets in corners for mounting.

K. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.3 COVERS FOR TRENCHES

A. Covers in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings,
shall be flanged checkered steel plates with angle or channel- section frames, suitably reinforced
to support anticipated loads, and finished with zinc chromate primer and two coats gray enamel.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 10 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.4 BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, RAILS AND TRACKS

A. Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations shall be galvanized steel,
fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic inserts and lead anchors are not
acceptable unless approved for specific light duty installations.

B. Covers shall be suitably dimensioned and matched to provide perfect level surface with flush-
mounted lifting handles. Cut edges of trench covers shall be provided with neoprene trims to avoid
sharp edges. Cable trench covers shall be supported with additional members at wide spaces.

C. All supports used in external locations, cable trenches and manholes shall be provided with an
additional coat of U.V resistant paint, of a color to Engineer’s approval.

2.5 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

B. Equipment Foundations and Bases: Reinforced concrete, as approved by Engineer after

submission of design calculations. Dimensions, levels and surface finishes shall be suitable for
equipment installed, as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.

C. Alternatively and where concrete bases are not possible, equipment can be anchored to steel-
channel sills 100 mm high (min and as necessary), arranged and sized according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and grout sills flush with
equipment mounting surface.

2.6 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY EMPLOYER

A. Meter: Electronic kilowatt-hour measuring to record electricity used.

1. Kilowatt-Hour Display: Digital liquid crystal.

2. Memory Backup: Self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72
hours, minimum.
3. Sensors: Current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum range
and accuracy for the ratings of the circuits indicated for this application.

a. Type: Solid core.

B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Recommended by metering equipment manufacturer for use with

sensors indicated.

2.7 ELECTRICAL CONTROL LOCATIONS

A. Equipment may be electrically controlled from a number of different control points as specified in
the appropriate sections of the Specification. The control positions shall be designated as follows:
1. Local Control: Located within or adjacent to the item of plant to facilitate maintenance,
inspection and emergency operation.
2. Remote Control: Located at a substation control room where specified items of Plant are
monitored and controlled by direct wire connection.
3. Supervisory Control: Located at a System Control Centre where principal items of plant at
a number of substations are remotely controlled via a telecontrol system.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 11 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.8 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Installations Generally:

1. Carry out Electrical Work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification and Regulations,
ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements, to provide safe and
protected systems with equipment readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
2. Installations shall be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated and coordinated
with all other work.
3. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types specified or
recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the equipment or accessories.

B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange
and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

C. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. Generally, all
cabling, power conductor routing shall be located above any piping, unless specifically approved
otherwise.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least
three or 90-kg concentrated load, whichever is more stringent.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-
bolts, clamps, attachments and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing
hanger rods and conduits.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 12 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

F. Install 6-mm- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried
entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support
sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used,
attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved
fastener not more than 600 mm from the box.

J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection
of concrete and masonry walls.

L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry
units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with
lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Comply with BS 822 and IEC 60034-8.

B. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.

C. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 13 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:

1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking

tape. Make each color band 50-mm wide, completely encircling conduit, and place
adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 15-m
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 8-m maximum intervals in congested areas.
3. Colors: As follows:

a. Fire Alarm System: Red.

b. Security System: Blue and yellow.
c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.

E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground
power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication
lines. Locate 150 to 200 mm below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a
common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 400 mm, overall, use a single line marker.

F. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where needed to ensure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-
laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or
equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

G. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background with
minimum 9-mm- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and
other emergency operations.

H. Labels: Labels shall be provided inside the boxes or cubicles to describe the functions of the
various items of equipment. Where the cubicle is divided into compartments each door shall have
an external label to identify the compartment.

3.5 FIRE STOPPING

A. Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Fire stopping materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 07 Section " Through-Penetration Firestop System."

3.6 CABLE SEGREGATION AND FIRE RISK

A. All cables shall be routed and connections designed to reduce fire risk, outage and damage to other
plant and buildings.

B. Cables shall be segregated to reduce damage if fire occurs and avoid faulty operation of equipment
due to induced voltages as follows:
1. Control and protection cables shall be separated from power cables to avoid damage in the
event of a power cable fault.
2. Telephone, communication, analogue and digital system cables shall not be at any point
less than 300 mm away from power cables, unless otherwise required by relevant Standards
and Regulations.
3. All cable holes through walls and floors shall be sealed with approved silicone foam fire
seals or other approved materials after the cables have been installed and the cost thereof is
deemed to be included in the Contract.

C. Each cable shall be run in one continuous length, straight through joints will not be permitted
unless specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 14 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Wherever cables/wires are routed with a likelihood of these being exposed to high temperature,
they shall be provided with additional “heat resistant” sleeves to Engineer’s approval.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than 100 mm
larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's
anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless
otherwise indicated. For concrete and reinforcement characteristics, refer to Division 03 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.8 SUPPORT FRAMES FOR SWITCHGEAR

A. Support frames for switchgear located over cable trenches, where shown on the Drawings or
required by equipment design, shall be installed prior to pouring concrete.

3.9 HOLES AND ANCHORS

A. Drilling for anchor bolts shall be carried out using appropriate electric drills and in approved
positions.

B. Holes and chases in in situ concrete shall be cast in. Do not cut hardened concrete or drill holes
larger than 10-mm diameter without prior approval.

C. Holes and Chases in Pre-cast Concrete: do not cut or drill pre-cast concrete without prior approval.

D. Holes in Structural Steelwork: Do not cut or drill structural steelwork without prior approval.

E. Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:

1. Size of holes: 300-mm square.

2. Depth of vertical chases: 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls, 1/3 leaf thickness.
3. Depth of horizontal chases: 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.

F. Cutting Masonry:

1. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.

2. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spalling, cracking or other damage to surrounding
structure.
3. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified dimensions.
4. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only; do not set back to back;
offset by a distance not less than wall thickness.

G. Preformed Holes in Masonry: Submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts etc. which
exceed 450-mm width.

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Before start of work, re-confirm from existing “As-builts” the
locations of existing services in the area and obtain approval for work notification. Perform cutting
by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 15 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire stopping has been disturbed. Repair and
refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

3.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Install equipment only in dust-free environment and maintain the condition with protective
covering as necessary. If air-conditioning is required, ensure it is available by installation time. In
general, ensure that locations are complete and ready to receive equipment.

B. Ensure that rooms where equipment are installed are provided with lockable doors.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.
3. Electricity-metering components.
4. Concrete bases.
5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
6. Touchup painting.

B. Test Employer's electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy, and usability of
output data.

1. Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by the metered
feeder.
2. Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the "off" condition.
3. Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a measurable
meter indication. Use a test load placement and setting that ensure continuous, safe
operation.
4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity
used based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply voltage
at the test load connection. Record test results.
5. Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup; then retest.
Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of entire system is verified.

C. Ensure that all warning signs and signages as dictated by the regulations are in place and the room
doors locked, once equipment is energized.

D. Field tests shall, in addition to those specified by regulation, specifically include the following:

1. Insulation resistance tests for all parts of the electrical system, irrespective of voltage class
and shall include individual measurement between the various live conductors as also
between the individual live conductors and ground.
2. Earthing resistance at each equipment.
3. Loop impedance of each circuit.
4. Earth leakage protection device test.

3.13 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 16 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit
the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.

3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and
cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 16050

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 / Page 17 of 17

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16051 - COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in this Specification “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”
shall be complimentary to and shall apply to the following SYSTEMS except where a particular
SYSTEM Specification calls for otherwise. In this case, the individual SYSTEM Specification
shall have precedence.

1. Security Systems

a. Division 13 - Security Screening Systems

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes common requirements for IT & Security Systems for the Project.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 02 - Underground Ducts and Utility Structures.

2. Division 16 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Division 16 – Conductors and Cables.
4. Division 16 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
5. Division 16 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
6. Division 16 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems
7. Division 16 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
8. Division 16 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
9. Division 16 - Voice and Data Communication Cabling
10. All Sections listed in Paragraph 1.1 B above.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a
specific edition date.

B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in
the text by basic designation only.

C. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s

instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean reference to the latest printed
edition of each.

D. Conflicts

1. Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which material or

construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the reference

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 1 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

standards, immediately inform the Engineer in writing. Consequent to Engineer's approval,

supply the materials and perform the work as though called for to minimum code
standards.

E. Codes and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the
applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:

1. Comply with the latest issue of several material and test standards, which have been
developed and published by Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) for
data communications industry.

2. Comply with the latest issue of several material and test standards, which have been
developed and published by Network Equipment Building System (NEBS). Level 1, Level
2, and Level 3 are applicable to this Section:

a. SR-3580: NEBS: Criteria Levels.

b. GR-63-Core: NEBS: Physical Protection.
c. GR-1089-Core: NEBS: EMC and Electronic Safety.
d. GR-3160: Data Centers.

3. Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

4. International Organization for Standardization (ISO).

5. Electrical equipment, devices and components shall comply with the requirements of EMC:

a. EN 61000-6-1, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Immunity

for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments.
b. EN 61000-6-3, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Emission
for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments.

6. Information Technology equipment, devices and components shall comply with the
requirements of:

a. EN 55022, Information technology equipment. Radio disturbance characteristics.

Limits and methods of measurement.
b. EN 55024, Information technology equipment. Immunity characteristics. Limits and
methods of measurement.

7. Code of Federal Regulations

a. 47 CFR - Telecommunication, Chapter I - Federal Communications Commission,

Part 15 - "Radio Frequency Devices."

8. All electrical works shall comply with the local Electricity Regulations. Refer also to
Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

F. System software, terminology, and modeling of Integration Systems shall be compliant with
ANSI/ISA-95 (S95).

G. Local regulations and standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over the
Standards.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 2 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Definitions

1. SYSTEM: The IT or Security System to which these Specifications apply.

B. Abbreviations

3DES: Triple Data Encryption Standard.

AC: Access Control.
ACL: Access Control List.
AGC: Automatic gain control.
AHU: Air Handling Unit.
API: Application Programming Interface.
BD: Building Distributor.
BIO: Biometric.
BMS: Building Management System.
BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.
B/W: Black and white.
CAN: Campus Area Network.
CCD: Charge-coupled device.
CCTV: Closed Circuit TeleVision.
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations.
CIF: Common Intermediate Format.
CLI: Command Line Interface.
CMS: Cable Management System.
CoS: Class of Service.
CPE: Customer Premises Equipment.
CPU: Central Processing Unit.
CR: Card Reader.
CRTP: Compressed Real Time Transport Protocol.
CU: Control Unit.
DDE: Dynamic Data Exchange.
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
dpi: Dots per inch.
DMZ: Demilitarized Zone.
DoS: Denial of Service.
DSL: Digital Subscriber Line.
DSP: Digital Signal Processing.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 3 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

EIA Electronic Industry Alliance.

ELV: Extra Low Voltage.
EMI: Electromagnetic Interference.
EOM: Emergency Operation Mode.
EQ: Environmental Quality.
FAS: Fire Alarm System.
FAT: Factory Acceptance Test.
FCC: Federal Communications Commission.
FPS: Frames Per Second.
FTP: File Transfer Protocol.
FTR: Floor Telecommunication Room.
FTTO: Fiber To The Office.
GPRS: General Packet Radio Service.
GTI: Guarantee Time of Intervention.
GTR: Guarantee Time of Resolution.
GUI: Graphical User Interface.
HMI: Human Machine Interface.
HSIA: High Speed Internet Access.
HTTPS: Hyper Text Transfer Protocol the Secured Version.
HVTS: Horizontal & Vertical Transportation Systems.
IB: Interface Box.
ICT: Information and Communication Technology.
ID: Identification.
IEC: International Electro-technical Commission.
I/O: Input/Output.
IP: Internet Protocol.
IPSec: IP Security Protocol.
IPTV: Internet Protocol Television.
ISDN: Integrated Services Digital Network.
ISO: International Standard Organization.
ISP: Internet Service Provider.
ITSM: Information Technology Service Management.
IVR: Interactive Voice Response.
KVM: Keyboard Video Mouse (switch).
LAN: Local Area Network.
LC: Line Card.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 4 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
LED: Light Emitting Diode.
LPR: License Plate Recognition.
LSZH/LS0H Low Smoke Zero Halogen
MAC: Moves, Adds and Changes.
MAN: Metropolitan Area Network.
MCS: Master Clock System.
MDF: Main Distribution Frame.
MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group.
MPLS: Multi-Protocols Label Switching.
MTR: Main Telecommunication Room.
MTTR: Mean Time To Repair.
MTBF: Mean Time Between Failures.
NAS: Network Attached Storage.
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
NIC: Not Included in Contract.
NIST: The National Institute of Science and Technology.
NIU: Network Integration Unit.
NMS: Network Management System.
NTP: Network Time Protocol.
NTSC: National Television System Committee.
ODBC: Open Data Base Connectivity.
OFE: Owner Furnished Equipment.
OIP: Officially Important Person.
OIW: Operator Interface Workstation.
OLE: Object Linking and Embedding.
ONVIF: Open Network Video Interface Forum.
OOG: Out-Of-Gauge.
OPC: Ole for Process Control.
OSPF: Open Shortest Path First.
PARCS Parking Access and Revenue Control System.
PABX: Private Automatic Branch Exchange.
PAL: Phase Alternating Line.
PAS: Public Address System.
PAX: Abbreviation for Passenger.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 5 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

PBX: Private Branch Exchange.

PC: Personal computer.
PDA: Personal Device Assistant.
PIACS: Personal Identification Access Control System.
PKI: Public Key Infrastructure.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
PMS: Property Management System.
PoE: Power over Ethernet
PRO: Public Relations Office.
PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network.
PTB: Push To Break.
PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.
QoS: Quality of Service.
RADIUS: Remote Access Dial-In User Service.
RAID: Redundant Array of Independent Disks.
RAM: Reliability, Availability and Maintainability.
RAS: Remote Access Services.
REX: Request to Exit.
RF: Radio frequency.
RMS: Resources Management System.
SACS: Security and Access Control System.
SAN: Storage Area Network.
SCN: Structured Cabling Network.
SCP: Secure Copy Protocol (Telephony).
SDK: Software Development Kit.
SLA: Service Level Agreement.
SMS: Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging).
SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNVT: Standard Network Variable Type.
SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol.
SQL: Structured Query Language.
TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.
TSP: Touch Screen Panel.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories.
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 6 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

USB: Universal Serial Bus

VDU: Video Display Unit.
VLAN: Virtual LAN.
VoIP Voice over IP (Internet Protocol).
VPN: Virtual Private Network.
VSE: Virtual Servers Environment.
VSS: Video Surveillance System.
WAN: Wide Area Network.
WMP: Windows Media Player.
WWW: World Wide Web.
X25: Protocol for Packet Switched WAN.
XML: Extensible Markup Language.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall provide, based on these specifications and design drawings, the final design
and construction documents and all equipment, software, material, labor and services required to
construct and install the SYSTEM infrastructure including, but not limited to:
1. All design services, drawings and specifications, equipment, software, materials, labor and
services, not specifically mentioned or shown, which may be necessary to complete the de-
sign and installation of the SYSTEM.
2. Proposal to upgrade the specified systems to the latest technology available, so as to bring
the specified items to the prevailing technology at the time of construction as detailed in
Article “QUALITY ASSURANCE” of this Section.
3. Hardware as specified for the system and any hardware that is specific to the Contractor’s
proposed system.
4. Software application and any other software that may be required to make the system fully
operational as specified including the provision of network management software, IP ad-
dresses, setup and configuration and any other required configuration.
5. Installation and setup of the system hardware and software as specified.
6. Integration of the SYSTEM with other systems and in coordination with the Employer.
7. Risk analysis of system design showing advantages and drawbacks.
8. Post deployment auditing.
9. Delivery of the “Interface Control Document - ICD”.
10. Final connection of hardware to power, infrastructure termination and patch cords connect-
ing system equipment to the data outlets and other network communication equipment.
11. Documentation: Licenses, Shop drawings, Specifications, As-built drawings, user’s manu-
al, operation and maintenance manuals, test reports, etc.
12. Handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts (along with current unit prices) for all
major components in the system for two (2) years fault-free operation.
13. Handover manufacturer’s recommended test equipment and tools (along with current unit
prices) required for system maintenance.
14. Test plan.
15. System testing and commissioning.
16. System roll-out.
17. System warranty as specified herein.
18. Training as specified herein.
19. Maintenance and support as specified herein.
20. Supply the licenses for all software, programs and modules provided for the works includ-
ing those developed and modified by the Contractor. The appropriate licenses supplied by

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 7 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

the Contractor shall enable the Employer to use, modify, and develop the software, pro-
grams and modules for the works supplied under this Contract.

B. Systems Integration

1. In addition to the above scope, a Contractor handling systems integration works shall:
a. Coordinate all integrated systems installation with the overall design.
b. Provide all additional studies to align works with other trades requirements.
c. Be in charge of the systems integration and migration of existing interfaces, as ap-
plicable.
d. Be in charge of coordination and systems integration with new systems.
e. Identify and report all required configurations for integrated applications and sys-
tems.
f. Provide and implement a proper coordination mechanism agreed upon and accepted
by the end users during Project execution.
g. Provide and implement a clear execution plan for the new configurations and/or up-
grades required on the integrated systems.
h. Provide documentation and submittals in compliance with Contract Documents.
i. Propose an integration strategy including a test plan philosophy, methodology and
assumptions.
j. Provide for all interfaces interface control documents (ICD) signed by all involved
system providers for approval to implement the described functionality.
k. Provide a fully functional test lab facility with simulation of the proposed facilities.
l. Provide all active and passive components required to perform integration within
the test lab.
m. Provide all additional studies in case of changes due to other systems modification
related to architectural needs.
n. Be in charge of coordinating with other systems to ensure that modifications do not
impact other systems and if that happens, he shall be in charge of additional study to
coordinate and propose a solution to the engineer for final approval.
o. Carry out full coordination with the concerned parties of Local Authorities and
other Contractors prior to commencing work and throughout that process.
p. Be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged equipment/accessories
at his own expense, if any, which are part of ongoing contracts or other contracts,
while carrying out the above specified works.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS

A. Refer to SYSTEM Specifications Sections listed under Article 1.1 “Related Documents” above for
requirements.

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. The Contractor shall respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of the Employer, his
employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to the extent necessary, consistent with
the legal responsibilities of the Employer policies.

B. Contractor shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by the requirements to keep
confidential all information concerning bid documents and this Project.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 8 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall not perform any part of the work requiring submittal and review of shop
drawings, product data or samples until Engineer / Employer has approved the respective
submittal. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals:

1. Product data: For each type of product.

2. Shop Drawings.

3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics.

4. System Operation: Include:

a. System Architecture and performance requirements.

b. Inter-connectivity patching of all network devices
c. Human Machine Interface (HMI) design for all categories of users.
d. Software Architecture and justification (e.g.: off-the-shelf and specific software,
etc.).

B. Submittals shall comply with Division 01 requirements including but not limited to Sections
“Submittal Procedures”, “Closeout Procedures” and “Record (As-Built) Documents”.

C. Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of equipment and /or software certifying that
furnished products comply with contract requirements.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For control consoles, equipment cabinets and racks,
accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Endorsement
1. Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s technical validation and endorsement of the design
documentation and implementation.

F. Contractor shall deliver signed Warranty.

1. Comprehensive cost structure according to committed GTI, GTR and MTBF.
2. Maintenance stock dimensioning.
3. Distinguish maintenance during and after Warranty period.
4. Teams' organizations (distinguish local and remote teams, give associated manpower).
5. Hardware repairs and software patch support procedures.

G. Testing Plan:
1. The Contractor shall provide Test Plan elaborating the testing methodologies and schedule
to be applied throughout various stages of the work. This shall also include the plan for
integrated tests for interface with other systems. The Contractor shall submit the Test Plan
for approval by the Employer.

H. Contractor shall submit the required Field Test Reports in the format and media specified, upon
completion of testing the installed system.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 9 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. The Contractor shall test all components and circuits of the SYSTEM active infrastructure
after installation to ensure functionality and performance meet industry approved
guidelines.
2. The Contractor shall provide and supply all necessary technical and skilled manpower,
tools, test equipment, materials and transportation required for performing system and
components testing.
3. The Contractor shall deliver calibration certificates of testing equipment indicating that
equipment calibration meets the appropriate levels by a qualified testing agency and that
equipment has been calibrated at least once in the year prior to the testing date.
4. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

I. Product data: For each type of product.

1. Factory Tests: All equipment and cables shall be tested at Manufacturer premises, and test
certificates, shall be submitted to Engineer before shipping and delivery to site.

2. Hardware including storage, computation, processor needs, operating system, display, etc.
as specified for the system and any hardware that is specific to the Contractor system.

a. Submit catalogue cut-sheets /Datasheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and
complete model number for each product specified. Model number shall be marked
with an arrow or underlined to indicate exact selection.
b. Identify applicable specification section reference for each product performance for
each component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation.
c. Submit point-by-point compliance statement to the specification, with necessary
supporting documents.
d. For each product, include manufacturer’s installation instructions,
e. Equipment Datasheets to include as a minimum the following:
1) Product performance and features,
2) Electrical and Environmental requirements (power supply, temperature,
humidity, etc.),
3) Software and hardware releases roadmap for the next two years,
4) Troubleshooting guide,
5) Standard tests passed and results,
6) Product certificates,
7) Product compatibility matrix with other manufacturers/vendors.
8) Specify type of testing: in operation or in laboratory.
9) MTBF.

3. Software application and any other software that may be required to make the system fully
operational as specified including the provision of network management software, IP
addresses, setup and configuration and any other required configuration.

4. Management software datasheets to include at least the following information:

a. Product performance and existing features,

b. Known limitations (number of network elements managed, number of
administrators, number of clients, size of the database, etc.),
c. Hardware requirements (storage, computation, processor needs, operating system,
display, etc.),
d. Features and software releases for the next two years,
e. Standardized tests passed and results and available product certificates,
f. Product compatibility matrix with other Manufacturers/Vendors (specify level of
testing in operation, lab test, declarative or theoretical).

J. Shop Drawings

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 10 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Shop drawings submittals to cover as minimum plan views and elevations of all work to be
installed:

a. Submit for approval diagrams showing layout of network components, schematic

diagrams, wiring diagrams, SYSTEM peripherals, etc.
b. Include data on electrical and physical characteristics of network components,
network management system, SYSTEM peripherals, etc.
c. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
d. Cable schedule: For each type of product indicated.
e. Include drawings for the Servers, consoles and peripheral I/O devices.

2. The Contractor shall make any corrections as required. The Engineer’s approval of such
drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations
from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called the Engineer’s attention to
such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for
errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules.

K. Qualifications

1. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the
requirements described in Article “QUALITY ASSURANCE”, included with, and at the
time of, bid submission.

L. Closeout Submittals (Record Documents):

1. The Contractor shall submit Record Documents for products and systems including but not
limited to:
a. Schematic network diagrams.
b. Parts lists.
c. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1) Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2) Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete
with data files.
3) Printout of software application and graphic screens.
4) All programming and source code shall be considered as a work for hire and
shall be the property of the Employer upon completion of the project.

d. Network devices inventory.

e. Device configuration details.
f. Recommended list of spare parts and components to be stocked at Project site.
g. Test Reports.
h. Training Manuals.
i. Warranties.
j. Record (As-Built) Drawings.

2. Record (As-Built) drawings shall include the components and cable numbers labeled.

a. Utilize normal recognized drafting procedures that comply with Division 01

requirements.

b. Graphical symbols and component identification on detail drawings should use

commonly understood, unique and unambiguous symbols (an example of such a
system is IEC 60617) - to the approval of the Engineer.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 11 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

c. The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the project identified
in, but not limited to, addenda, change notices, site instructions or deviations
resulting from site conditions.

M. Operations and Maintenance Manuals to include:

1. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
2. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
4. Installation and maintenance instructions.
5. Directory numbers, feature codes and special programming.
6. Safety precautions.
7. Diagrams and illustrations.
8. Testing methods.
9. Performance data.
10. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers, list of special tools and instruments
indicating sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing
organization.
11. List of qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including
addresses and certified qualifications.
12. Interface Control Document – ICD: The Contractor shall submit the Interface Control
Document (ICD) which will include details of interface signals and/or protocols and details
on communication between the SYSTEM and other Building Services Systems.
13. System Maintenance
a. Routine/Preventative Maintenance Schedule.
b. Trouble Shooting Guide.
c. Breakdown Maintenance Instructions.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials and Equipment

1. Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest issue of referenced industry standards,
publications, or regulations referenced in this Section, as applicable.
2. Materials and equipment shall comply with applicable local regulations and code
requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction. These shall have precedence over other
codes and standards indicated, unless otherwise approved by the Employer, in writing.
3. Source Limitation: For each category of technology used for the SYSTEM infrastructure,
obtain system components from one manufacturer who shall assume responsibility for the
system components and for their compatibility.
4. Materials and equipment shall be new and shall meet or exceed the latest published
specification of the manufacturer in all respects.

a. These specifications represent the prevailing technology at the time of design.

However, during construction, and because the technology may be rapidly evolving,
the Contractor is required to propose an upgrade of the specified systems to the
latest technology available, so as to bring the specified items to the prevailing
technology at the time of construction.

b. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to amend, as deemed necessary, any other

systems affected by the upgraded submission so as to allow for the complete and
proper functionality of all submitted state-of-the-art systems, equipment and
relevant products.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 12 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

c. All necessary additional works that result from the upgraded materials, systems,
equipment and the ancillary works are to be proposed and detailed in the shop
drawings.

d. The Contractor’s proposals must allow in the shop drawings for physical space,
electrical/mechanical support, network connectivity and other incidental items
required for the installation of the proposed updated systems and equipment.

e. The Employer shall review the proposal and shall decide whether or not such
substitutions will be appropriate and prices shall be adjusted to reflect increase or
decrease in cost to Employer.

5. Equipment shall generally be supplied in complete factory assembled units ready for
installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for transportation or other purposes shall be
arranged to limit site work to simple re- assembly and inter-wiring of control and power
cabling.
6. Equipment Country of Origin
a. Equipment Country of Origin (manufacturing country) shall be indicated in the
proposal at time of bid submission.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. A firm specializing in providing a SYSTEM, similar to that indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance for at least five years prior to
commencing the corresponding work for the Project.
2. Manufacturer's systems shall be, as often as possible, a standard "off-the-shelf" package
utilizing the latest hardware and software technology. Any major system development
effort necessary to meet specified requirements is unacceptable. Even if this system is a
new concept, it should not require huge development and shall be based on existing and
proven technologies.
3. Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a service center capable of
providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs for overall system with a
response time as detailed under “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING
WARRANTY PERIOD” Article of this Section.

C. Contractor’s Qualifications

1. Contractor with documented experience in the installation of the subject SYSTEM with a
minimum of 2 projects successfully executed. All projects must be of comparable size and
complexity to that of this Project and they must be verifiable and completed within the last
5 years prior to commencing the corresponding work for the Project.
2. The installer shall have at least one supervisory employee possessing a certification from
the manufacturer or another recognized organization or institution, providing formal
training in the implementation, configuration / programming and system diagnosis for the
specified equipment.
3. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Manager who shall be responsible for
system coordination and project scheduling, testing and commissioning and preparation of
documents related to Record (As-Built Documents) and Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. The Employer reserves the right to approve the Contractor's Project Manager.
4. The Contractor shall be authorized by the manufacturer of the components of the SYSTEM
to sell their products and initiate a Warranty service on the same items.
5. By submitting a Tender, the Contractor thereby certifies that he is qualified in all areas
pertaining to, either directly or indirectly, the works. In the event the Contractor becomes
unable to complete the works in accordance with the Contract Documents, or to the
satisfaction of the Employer, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to retain the

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 13 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

services of the applicable manufacturers' representatives to complete the works in

accordance with Project schedule and at no additional cost to the Employer.
6. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with and have a thorough understanding of all
local codes and contract conditions pertaining to this Project.
7. Installation team members shall have the following skills:
a. Good knowledge of operating systems to be able to configure accurately the servers
and verify their responses to critical events (power cut, disk crash, etc.).
b. Implementation experience on Projects of similar size and complexity.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Division 01, Section “Product Requirements”.

1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental

conditions specified under Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”
encountered at the installed location without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
operating capability as applicable to:

1. Interior, Controlled Environments.

2. Interior, Uncontrolled Environments.
3. Exterior Environments.

B. Operational Constraints: The SYSTEM will run 24 hours per day, all the days of the year.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, 25% spare capacity shall be required at all levels of the SYSTEM.

D. Power Supply

1. Power supply for all products shall be supplied or derived from the voltage system
described below, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.

2. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution system (AC voltage / No. of
Phases / Frequency / Earthing system) shall be as per local country standard. For details,
refer to Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty
1. The SYSTEM (comprising any associated hardware and software) shall be warranted by
the Manufacturer to be free from defects in equipment, software and workmanship for a
period defined below in paragraph “Warranty Period”.
2. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the Manufacturer and the
Installer agreeing to replace system devices and equipment that fail in materials or
workmanship and to provide software patch support and updates within specified warranty
period.
3. To maintain the manufacturer’s warranties, equipment shall be installed, commissioned and
serviced by those installers authorized by said manufacturer to perform those duties. If the
Contractor is not authorized, by the said manufacturer, it is his sole responsibility to make
the appropriate arrangements and bear all cost and consequences thereof.
4. All manufacturers’ equipment warranties shall be activated in the Employer’s name and
shall commence on the date indicated in paragraph “Warranty Period” below.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 14 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Experimental Period
1. There shall be an Experimental Period during which the Contractor shall undertake
supervision and responsibility for operation of the SYSTEM under actual site conditions. If
any malfunction or degradation in the performance is noted on the system during this
period, it shall be attended to immediately.
2. During this period, the Contractor shall fully demonstrate the system performance under
actual operation conditions. This demonstration is to confirm, to the satisfaction of the
Employer / Engineer that the SYSTEM is free of remarks and is ready for taking over.
3. The Experimental Period shall extend over three months and shall start following the
certification by the Engineer of the successful testing and commissioning of the system.
The Experimental Period shall, each time a malfunction is detected, be extended by three
months starting from the certification by the Engineer of the successful testing of the
system following the rectification of the malfunction.

C. Taking Over of the System

1. The system shall be considered ready for taking over by the Employer following:
a. The expiry, with no malfunctions being detected during the last three months, of the
Experimental Period (as may be extended), and
b. The submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer, of the documents
and information required from the Contractor for the use, occupation and
maintenance of the system in accordance with the Contract (updated as necessary to
reflect any rectification(s) introduced during the Experimental Period).

D. Warranty Period
1. The Contractor shall include a statement of warranty on the entire system and on the
individual pieces of equipment for two years from the date of taking over of the
systemcertificate.
2. During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall undertake Maintenance actions as defined
in the “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD” Article
below.
3. During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall provide all equipment, material, software
and labor needed to replace or repair defective products without any additional cost to the
Contract.

1.13 COMMISSIONING

A. Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation instructions,

will be used as a basis for quality control and final acceptance of the works.

B. In-System Commissioning

1. Equipment commissioning shall be done through demonstration of product capability and

compliance with requirements after being wired and configured in the system.

2. Test system and power supply redundancies by unplugging redundant links.

3. Check recovery times.

C. The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on site for each
individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly installed and adjusted on a
location by location basis and that the sub-system operates in every respect in accordance with the
Specifications.

1. During this commissioning phase, the equipment is powered and the automation and net-
working are gradually integrated layer by layer.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 15 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Any defects, which may become apparent during the course of these tests, shall be immedi-
ately rectified by the Contractor at his expense.

3. The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted
for Approval by the Engineer and Employer.

4. All Site Acceptance Tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer who shall
sign off the testing documentation on satisfactory completion of the tests.

5. The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall at every level, be subjected to configuration
management and change control by the Contractor.

6. If modification or reprogramming is required as a result of the tests, all affected parts of the
Site Acceptance Tests, as determined by the Employer, shall be re-tested.

7. The results of the Site Acceptance Tests, version of software and hardware tested, together
with any re-testing as a result of failure, shall be recorded and signed by the authorized per-
sonnel of the Contractor and the Employer.

D. Those tests shall be carried out over two phases.

1. Preliminary Testing:
a. Mechanical:
1) Mechanical tests,
2) Calibration of the components.
b. Automatism / Electrical:
1) Powering Tests with electricity,
2) Control of Input/Output,
3) Control of the safety measure either personal or material,
4) Test of local mode operation.
c. Network / Software Tests:
1) Test of the Network,
2) Test of the Supervision Workstation user interface,
3) Test of the portable Terminal user interface.

2. System Testing
a. The tests performed during this phase are performed with and without loading con-
ditions.
1) Testing the crippled mode (Safe shut down consecutive to loss of energy,
etc.).

1.14 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Support
1. The Contractor shall offer a comprehensive explanation of its Service Level Agreement
(SLA) policy. The SLA should cover at least the following performance terms:
a. 99.999% availability. GTI and GTR should be guaranteed accordingly.
b. Emergency level 24/24, 7/7 phone support shall be available. Distant intervention
on system shall be offered.
c. High-level problem investigation support shall be offered 5/7 during working hours.
d. Maintenance stocks shall be properly sized by the Contractor in order to match
operational quantities replacement needs based on Manufacturers MTBFs for each
component within the network.
e. The MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall include the diagnostic
time, active repair/replacement time and the adjustment/testing time on site, but
shall exclude the response time.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 16 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Maintenance service shall include:

a. Contract lifetime software patching for revealed problems during operations.
b. Contract lifetime hardware replacements on established malfunctions or weaknesses
generating repetitive loss of service quality.
c. Following receipt of a defective product, Manufacturer shall make reasonable
efforts to repair or replace equipment with new ones and return the equipment
within a reasonable time not exceeding four working days.

B. Maintenance Service
1. During the Warranty Period, Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a
service center capable of providing spare parts and emergency maintenance and repairs for
the overall system 7 days a week and 24 hours a day. Competent personnel shall be
dispatched to rectify stoppages at any time during the day or night when being called on by
the Employer.
2. The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to be sent to the Employer immediately
following every call out, indicating the time of call out visit, cause, remedial action taken
and the time that the service was restored.
3. A Maintenance Manpower Plan shall demonstrate the Contractor’s committed resource
level available for all types of activities to be carried out within the Warranty Period. Such
a plan shall be submitted for Approval three months before commencement of the
Warranty Period.
4. The Contractor’s response time, during the Warranty Period, shall not exceed 1 hour. The
response time is defined as the time that elapses between the reporting of a fault and the
maintenance personnel arriving at where the faulty equipment is located.
5. During the Warranty Period, the MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall
include the diagnostic time, active repair/replacement time and the adjustment/testing time
on site, but shall exclude the response time.
6. During the Warranty Period, the monthly average of the Repair Time shall be lower than or
equal to 6 minutes for each device. This performance will be monitored.
7. The Contractor shall provide at least four inspection visits at six-month interval during the
Warranty Period.
8. The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to be sent to the Employer immediately
following every inspection visit, indicating the time of call out visit, cause, remedial action
taken – if any - and the time that the service was restored.
9. The Contractor shall be responsible for clearing away from the Site all surplus materials,
rubbish, temporary works of every kind and leaving Project Site and installation clean and
in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the Employer /Engineer, upon completion
of repair, and maintenance works.

C. Maintenance Performance Data

1. Updates
a. The SYSTEM will have to be conceived to facilitate the updates that will take place
throughout its life. Software update process must be easy, rapid and without risk,
and must be reversible.
b. Update shall be transparent to the user and shall be done without interruption of the
service.
2. Corrections
a. In the event of error, the SYSTEM shall have, as soon as possible, to store in a file a
certain amount of information allowing the correction of this error, e.g. entries in
the transactions, faulty operations of the statistics, etc.
3. The Contractor commits himself to the three (3) main sizing data of maintenance:
a. Annual number hours of preventive maintenance.
b. Annual number hours of corrective maintenance.
c. Average Annual cost of spare parts (Average based on ten years).

D. Preventive Maintenance

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 17 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. The Contractor shall describe the selected operations for preventive maintenance as
planned during daily operation.

E. Curative Maintenance
1. The selected operations shall be chosen to correspond to a significant fraction of the
forecasted time devoted to curative maintenance.
2. For each defect incidence, the Contractor shall record:
a. Equipment identification.
b. The object of the Maintenance activity.
c. The type of Maintenance activity (planned or not).
d. The total man-hours spent for the activity.
e. The total down-time duration ascribable to the Maintenance activity (transportation
time, diagnosis time, repair time, restart time).

1.15 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. The manufacturer shall guarantee the flow and availability of the spare parts without a major
design change for at least ten years’ period from date of System Acceptance by Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabinets and
racks, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."

2.2 PROPOSED SOLUTION

A. The Contractor shall use well-proven technologies.

B. The proposed solution shall be already available in use on other Projects of similar application and
comparable size.

C. System and applications software shall be controlled and configured by working parameters stored
in tables and easy to change without programming.

D. The system shall be easy to deploy throughout the whole Project.

E. The system shall be able to accept multiple devices of different types, technologies and
manufacturers.

F. The Contractor shall ensure that the system does not cause any interference to other systems.

G. The Contractor shall point out in the point-by-point compliance to the Specifications, the
functionalities that :

1. Are implemented and can be easily adapted (i.e. by changing values in a database).
2. Are implemented and can be adapted by programming during project execution.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 18 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Are partially implemented.

4. Are not already implemented.

H. All functionalities that are partially or completely not implemented shall be quoted as “options”.

I. System Software

1. Manufacturer's standard software that is compatible with the SYSTEM performance and
that provides automatic facility monitoring, supervision, and remote control of SYSTEM
from one or more locations.

2. SYSTEM Performance
a. Software application shall use a popular and user-friendly platform, e.g. Microsoft
Windows.
b. The SYSTEM shall support both manual and automatic responses to alarms. Each
alarm shall be capable of initiating a number of different actions.
c. The system shall support definition of access levels with associated rights and
tracking through passwords assigned to each individual Operator from basic
monitoring to full control and programming of the system.
d. The programming shall be menu-driven and shall include on-line "Help" or
"Tutorial" information, as well as on-line data entry examples.

3. Features
a. Software shall provide reporting comprising:
1) Alarm history consisting of alarm lists.
2) Operator history consisting of database changes and log-ins by Operator.
b. A query function shall allow selected data to be sorted on not less than 3 selection
criteria.
c. Software shall allow a backup function.
d. All servers and workstations shall be fitted with the latest virus protecting software.

J. Licensing

1. The Contractor shall provide a Project wide license covering all relevant existing devices
and any future extensions of the Project.

2. There shall be no license limitation on the number of Servers and Clients.

3. There shall be no limitation on the number of concurrent users.

4. Customization of the software shall remain the property of the Employer and shall be made
available at no extra cost.

5. The Contractor shall detail the coverage of licensing in terms of: Maintenance, Revisions,
Upgrades, etc.

K. Communication network

1. All communications between the host workstation, secondary workstations and SYSTEM
equipment shall be via digital transmission through the Project Data Communications
Network backbone.

2. Provide Ethernet TCP/IP or the latest open communication protocol.

3. Data transmission:
a. The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers shall be bi-
directional using TCP/IP VLAN Network.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 19 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.3 NETWORK EQUIPMENT

A. General

1. System Architecture shall be based on a "Client-Server" configuration.

2. System software shall be controlled and configured by working parameters stored in tables
and easy to change without programming.

B. Servers

1. The Contractor shall design Servers architecture to fulfil, as a minimum, the following
requirements:
a. Separation of database and application servers.
b. Dual-redundant servers in clusters for high availability.
c. Servers located in separate rooms for disaster recovery.

2. Servers Configuration:

a. The servers shall consist of dual, redundant servers. The intent is to prevent a single
system point of failure.
b. The servers shall be identical, with one server acting as the primary and the second
server acting as a hot stand-by server with automatic fail over capabilities.
c. The two servers shall maintain synchronized databases automatically. Upon loss of
communication of the system with the primary host, the secondary server shall
automatically assume the control of the system and become the primary server.
Upon the re-establishment of communication with the server, the two servers shall
automatically re-synchronize without requiring re-booting of the servers.

3. The Contractor shall design servers that are able to cope with the foreseen workload:
a. The Contractor shall indicate the percentage increase of workload that the servers
will be able to cope with.

4. The Contractor shall deliver and configure the required servers.

a. Requirements for servers shall be given (in terms of operating system, memory,
CPU, storage, associated peripheral I/O devices, etc.)

C. End Users' Clients

1. The Contractor shall provide workstations on which the client will be able to operate.

2. Main characteristics shall be given in terms of Memory, CPU, Screen size, resolution, etc.

3. The Contractor shall deliver and configure required workstations.

4. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at the workstations and
terminal/data servers:
a. Keyboard and mouse
b. Flat panel LCD video display unit.

5. All PC’s shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be sourced from a
recognized manufacturer. Purchase of the PC’s shall be delayed until the latest time
possible without causing a delay in the construction schedule to ensure that they will be
state-of-the-art, based on the latest proven technology.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 20 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Equipment Mounting: Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall be
designed to mount in a 19-inch (483-mm) housing complying with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E.

E. Specifications of servers, workstations, printers and associated peripherals shall be confirmed by

the relevant SYSTEM manufacturer/supplier.

2.4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. All components of the SYSTEM shall operate on dual redundant UPS Units. The UPS shall be
provided by Electrical Contractor to cater for the load of all system components considering a
maximum of 80% loading and 20% spare capacity for future expansion.

B. Provide Power Strips, connected to the UPS Units. Locate the power strips in the equipment racks
and on the equipment backboards for powering all electronic systems in the Equipment Rooms.

C. Remote field-mounted components shall be fed from the nearest UPS source.

D. Coordinate UPS voltage, circuit size, and connection requirements with the Project Electrical
design.

E. Coordinate UPS configuration whether centralized or decentralized with the Project Electrical
design.

F. Ensure that the allocated space and environmental conditions are adequate for the adopted
configuration.

G. Connect the UPS Units to Project Emergency Generator. UPS units shall allow for normal
continuous operation for 15 minutes or until the Project emergency generators become online;
whichever occurs first.

H. Provide shutdown connections from the UPS to servers for graceful power down in the event of a
power failure.

I. Comply with Division 16 Section “Static Uninterruptible Power Supply”.

2.5 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS

A. General Cable Requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by system manufacturer
unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with the following Specification Sections – as applicable to power, control, data and
video signal transmission cables:

1. Division 16 Section “Conductors and Cables.”

2. Division 16 Section “Voice and Data Communication Cabling”.

C. Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) cables: for plenum installation as per adopted Standards for the
Project.

1. Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH/LS0H) cables shall comply with the following
standards:
a. Flame retardant: IEC 60332-1.
b. Halogen-free according to:
1) IEC 60754-1 for amount of halogen acid gas.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 21 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2) IEC 60754-2 for corrosiveness of combustion gases according to (degree of

acidity).
c. Low smoke density according to IEC 61034-2.

D. Fire Resistant Cables: For life safety installations interface. Refer to Division 16 Section "
Conductors and Cables".

E. Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems".

2.6 CONDUITS, TRUNKING, ENCLOSURES AND FITTINGS

A. Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall be designed to mount in a
19-inch (483-mm) housing complying with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E.

B. Comply with the following Division 02 & Division 16 Specification Sections:

1. "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems".

2. "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems".
3. "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General
1. All equipment shall be firmly secured in place unless requirements of portability dictate
otherwise.
2. Equipment is to be laid out properly in communication rooms in a way to reserve relevant
space for maintenance activities. This space shall also account for any future expansion of
the system.
3. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards, requirements,
manufacturers’ guidelines and any authorities having jurisdiction.
4. All boxes, equipment, etc. shall be plumb and square.
5. The Contractor shall take such precautions that are necessary to prevent and guard against
electromagnetic interference.
6. After the proper layout of all equipment is accomplished, all components are to be labeled,
and marked.
7. During installation, consideration shall be given to operational efficiency as well as the
overall aesthetic factors.
8. The Contractor shall supply and install all fittings and accessories, whether or not
specified, required for proper, safe, and reliable operation of the system.
9. The Contractor shall ensure that safe ingress and egress from all work areas are maintained
during movement and installation of equipment/materials.

B. Examination
1. Examine the areas to receive the works and the conditions under which the works would be
performed.
2. Examine all the communications rooms where equipment are to be deployed:
a. Identify equipment location,
b. Identify links on patch panels,
c. Identify and check general power supply and grounding,
d. Identify premises environmental characteristics (kW/m², air conditioning
characteristics, etc.),

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 22 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

e. Carry out heat dissipation calculations,

f. Confirm feasibility for each communications room before starting to deploy.
3. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cable trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Rack Mounted Equipment

1. The Contractor shall install rack mounted equipment according to locations, elevations, and
plan views developed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer.
2. Rack mounted equipment shall be bolted with at least 4 mounting screws for support.
3. Cable guide shall be installed between each 2U rack unit set of equipment to insure proper
patch cable run and adequate air circulation.
4. All distribution hardware shall be securely mounted in a manner that allows access to the
connections for testing and provides sufficient room for the doors or access panels to open
and close without disturbing the cables.
5. Distribution and backbone cables shall enter from rear of optical patch panels.
6. Cables shall be maintained with D-Rings.
7. Each cable shall enter patch panel through adequate bushings and inserts where required by
Manufacturer’s installation manuals/sheets.
8. Bond all metallic raceway, racks, cable runway, enclosure, and other metallic hardware to
the dedicated bus bar.
9. Ensure that bonding breaks through paint to bare metallic surface of all painted metallic
hardware.
10. All spare or unused space shall be obstructed through blank panels.
11. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible at rear
of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack without
disturbing other items or connections.

D. Wiring Methods
1. Comply with Division 02 & Division 16 Sections
a. “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.
b. “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”.
c. “Underground Ducts and Utility Structures”.

2. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.
3. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing
bars and distribution spools.
4. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
5. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations
only at outlets and terminals.
6. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,
and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced.
7. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm (30 inches) and not more than
150 mm (6 inches) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
9. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation.
10. Protect cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination.
11. After installation, and before termination, all wiring and cabling shall be checked and
tested to ensure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors or shields.
12. A V.O.M. shall be utilized to accomplish these tests and a reading of greater than 20 Mega
ohms shall be required to successfully complete the test.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 23 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

13. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure Class
EA performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

E. Cleaning
1. Inspect interior and exterior of installed devices. Remove paint-splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

F. Connections
1. Tighten connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
applicable Standards.

G. Weatherproof Equipment
1. For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where exposed to weather,
install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

H. Impedance and Signal Levels

1. Match input and output impedance and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching
networks where required.
2. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel
location.

I. Labeling and Marking

1. Provide a typed schedule of all data ports according to each related room jack designation
for all Telecommunications Rooms.
2. Patch wiring must be traceable: Keep a database of patch cords installation up-to-date
including details of physical and logical connections in coordination with the SCN
Contractor.

J. Firestopping
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".

K. Grounding
1. Comply with Division 16 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
2. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

L. Boxes and enclosures

1. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are
easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above
ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction
boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees
or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof
screws.

M. Push Buttons
1. Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be
stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with [6.4 mm (1/4-inch)] high text
and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller
associated with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate
electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device.

N. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 24 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.2 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. The Factory Acceptance Tests shall be carried out in a hardware and software environment, which
simulates the final configuration of the SYSTEM.

B. The Contractor shall carry out any Factory Acceptances Tests, in Manufacturer's factory itself,
before any site delivery, in order to make sure that the SYSTEM of both hardware and software
and the SYSTEM after integration of various sub-systems is able to satisfy site technical
requirements of the equipment specifications.

C. Test Plan

1. All tests are to be carried out, according to the methodology presented in the Test Plan
which has been submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Employer.

2. The tests are to cover every aspect related to the specification of the system and its
operation; including, but not limited to, visual inspections, measurements, and operation.

D. All Factory Acceptance Test Specifications shall be subject to configuration management and
change control by the Contractor at every level.

E. The results of the Factory Acceptance Tests, together with any re-testing as a result of failure,
shall be recorded and signed by the authorized personnel of the Contractor and the Employer.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist
in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and
that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify
that they comply with specified requirements.
3. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system
has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10
days' notice of test schedule.
4. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation
in all functional modes.

E. Record test results.

F. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until performance
requirements are met.

G. Integrated Tests with Other Contractors

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 25 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Make equipment available for testing and demonstrating various features specified.
2. Typical test segments shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
a. Communication Tests performed for the serial or LAN interface to ensure that
proper communication can be established between the interfacing systems.
b. Point-to-Point Tests performed on the SYSTEM equipment to the interfacing
systems to verify the functionality and correct animation of each I/O
point/command including alarm messages.
3. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest until total SYSTEM meets requirements of the
Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Prepare written records of tests.
4. Schedule testing with at least 14 days advance notice.

H. The SYSTEM will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

J. Experimental Period: As described under “WARRANTY” Article. Demonstrate successful

operation to confirm, to the satisfaction of the Engineer /Employer that the system is free of
remarks and is ready for taking-over.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to configure, program, adjust, operate, and maintain
SYSTEM equipment.

B. In order to provide a reliable training, Employer’s maintenance personnel who are involved in the
training program of this system, could be involved in the follow up of system installation as well.
The Contractor shall provide an installation agenda to the Employer and confirm with him any
coordination with assigned trainees.

C. Training Program
1. Scope: Training shall be in sufficient scope to ensure that all trainees who complete the
program will be certified as capable to operate and/or maintain the equipment, systems, and
facilities provided and installed under this Contract, and to ensure a smooth transition
between construction and operations activities.
2. Language: Training shall be conducted in English and Arabic.
3. Training Aids shall include:
a. Approved Operation and Maintenance (O & M) manual(s) prepared by the Contrac-
tor as part of this Contract,
b. Training manuals, including course outline, basic text of instructions modules, and
trainee workbook,
c. Films, slides, video tape(s),
d. Charts, models, hand-outs, catalogues,
e. Samples and other visual,
f. Written aids to complement instruction.
g. In addition, spare parts and other special hardware shall be provided to support
“hands-on” familiarization with the equipment or systems.
4. Training Manuals
a. Training manuals shall be provided for each training course covering both the class-
room and on-the-job phases.
b. The organization of the manuals shall follow the same sequence as the course’s
scheduled presentation of material, providing such additional background and sup-
plementary information, as a trainee may need to understand the O & M manuals.
c. There shall be as many Training Manual types as Trainees categories.
5. Training shall be performed in accordance with an approved training program. All training
aids shall be available and approved prior to start of training.
6. Course Contents

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 26 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

a. Training course can be broken down into modules either classroom lecture or ‘On-
the-job’ training.
b. In case of lecture, it is the Employer responsibility to provide the classroom for the
duration of the course.
c. No lecture module should exceed 2-hours interval.
d. “On-the-job” training can be scheduled for an entire 8 hour shift.
e. Handouts must support each module; the collation of the Handouts forms the Train-
ing Manual.
f. Laboratory equipment, spare parts, and mock-up models may be used for theoretical
orientation.
g. However, practical “hands-on” familiarization shall be provided on equipment that
is either installed and operable or ready to be installed and capable of being operat-
ed. SYSTEM spares of special hardware items may be used to support “hands-on”
familiarization as long as said spares are returned to inventory in satisfactory condi-
tion in accordance with approved procedures.
h. The Contractor shall provide a training environment of its SYSTEM, which can be
similar to the “test environment”. All future operations shall be reproduced in this
training environment with no consequences on the test or on the operational envi-
ronment.
i. Training schedules: the Contractor shall indicate the duration of all sessions, the
number of trainees and how they shall fit into the overall project planning.
j. Training facilities: the Contractor shall provide facilities for the training of the
maintenance staff, trainers and end-users including equipment, software and docu-
mentation.

D. The Contractor shall provide training for SYSTEM operational, maintenance and administration
staff:
1. Operators shall be provided with a thorough training in all aspects of system/sub-system
operation under both normal and abnormal conditions. This training shall include, but not
be limited to:
a. Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose, configuration, and
operations,
b. Terminology,
c. Operations theory and interface,
d. Equipment appearance, functions, concepts and operations,
e. Operating mode, practices, and procedures under normal and emergency conditions,
f. Safety precautions,
g. On-the-job operating experience covering all system/sub-system operating func-
tions, activities, and tasks including those associated with degraded operating
modes, failure recognition, and recovery processes,
h. Familiarity with content and use of O & M manuals and related reference publica-
tions.
2. Maintenance Training
a. Maintenance training shall cover all on-site routine, preventive, and remedial
maintenance of the system/sub-system.
b. This training shall include, but not be limited to:
1) Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose, configura-
tion, and operations,
2) Terminology,
3) Operations theory and interfaces,
4) Equipment appearance, layout, functions, concepts and operations,
5) Operating modes, practice, and procedures under normal and emergency
conditions,
6) Safety precautions,
7) Use of tools and test equipment,
8) Use of system utilities, diagnostic software and various software tools asso-
ciated with the system maintenance,

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 27 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

9) Preventive maintenance,
10) Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing,
11) Backup and restoration of software/configuration,
12) Assembly and disassembly,
13) Repair and parts replacement,
14) Parts ordering practices and storage,
15) Failure and recovery procedures,
16) System/sub-system cabling,
17) Familiarization with and use of O & M manuals and other reference materi-
als.
3. Administrator Training
a. Administrator course shall be provided so the system administration staff will be
able to:
1) Identify and remedy software faults,
2) Upgrade and implement data and software changes,
3) Production of revised or new displays.
b. This training shall include, but not be limited to:
1) Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose, configura-
tion, and operations,
2) Terminology,
3) Operations theory and interfaces,
4) Software design and organization,
5) Database structure, generation, and modification,
6) Assembly, compilation, linking, editing, debugging, distributing, testing and
integration of program modules,
7) Interface software design,
8) Configuration management and control of software,
9) Backup and restoration of software,
10) Use of system utilities, diagnostic software and various software tools asso-
ciated with the design, development, and maintenance of the System,
11) Familiarization with and use of O & M manuals and other reference materi-
als.

END OF SECTION 16051

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 16051 / Page 28 of 28

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The following Sections contain special requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for ground earth pits.
2. Division 13 Section "Lightning Protection" for additional grounding and bonding materials.
3. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
4. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes complete installations to earth every source of energy and to provide
protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based on the TN-S system arrangement, including:

1. Transformer neutral earthing.

2. Main earthing terminals or bars.
3. Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment.
4. Extraneous conductive parts.
5. Generator neutral earthing.

Earthing requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of

systems described in other Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and may be
used interchangeably: "earth" and "ground"; "earthing" and "grounding".

B. Earth: Conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is conventionally taken
as zero.

C. Earth Electrode: Conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing electrical
connection to, Earth.

D. Exposed Conductive Part: Any part which can be readily touched and which is not a live part, but
which may become live under fault conditions.

E. Extraneous Conductive Part: Any conductive part not forming part of the electrical installation
such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes, heating tubes etc. and
non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators, cooking ranges, metal sinks
etc. and non-insulating floors and walls.

F. Protective Conductor: Conductor used for some measure of protection against electric shock and
intended for connecting together any of the following parts:

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 1 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Exposed conductive parts.

2. Extraneous conductive parts.
3. Earth electrode(s).
4. Main earthing terminal or bar(s).
5. Earthed point of the source(s).
6. Samples of conductors connectors, or any other accessories as requested by the engineers.

G. Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: Earth electrodes located at such distance from one
another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly affect the
potential of the other(s).

H. Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: The terminal or bar provided for the connection of protective
conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if any to the
means of earthing.

I. Equipotential Bonding: Electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous conductive parts at a
substantially equal potential.

J. Earthing Conductor: Protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of an

installation to earth electrode or to other means of earthing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not limited to,
manufacturer’s catalogues for each type of product indicated including the following:

1. Ground rods.
2. Connecting clamps.
3. Earthing conductors, protective conductors, and bonding conductors.
4. Connectors and other accessories.
5. Exothermic welding kits and tools.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and other information
specified or required by Engineer.

C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:

1. Test procedures used and test conditions.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.

D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connections.
2. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-section, depth of
laying and covering.
3. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors.
4. Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms, switchgear,
distribution panelboards etc., indicating fittings used, insulation, plates and marking,
passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves, grooves, niches etc., giving
sizes and dimensions of component parts.

E. Records: Submit the following:

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 2 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all components of
earthing system.
2. Nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.
3. Date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used.

F. Samples: Submit samples of conductors, as requested by Engineer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing earthing
systems similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work
has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Standards: Carry out work in accordance with the following:

1. IEC 60364-1, IEC 60364-51, IEC 60364-5-55 and IEC 60364-4-41: Electrical Installations
in Buildings.
2. Latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations, BS 7671.
3. BS 7430: Code of Practice for Earthing.
4. TIA J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.

C. Comply with IEC 62305 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. BICC (U.K.)
2. Copperweld (U.S.A.)
3. Furse (U.K.)
4. Wallis (U.K.)

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Component parts of earthing system are to include the following:

1. Earth electrode (rods, tapes etc.)

2. Main earthing terminals or bars.
3. Earthing conductors.
4. Protective conductors.
5. Equipotential bonding conductors.
6. Electrically independent earth electrodes for special systems.
7. Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other materials.

B. Provide a common earth termination network for all services, consisting of bonding earthing
networks of all individual services. The resistance to earth should, in this case be the lowest value
needed for any of the individual services. Combined resistance to ground of the whole network is
not to exceed 2Ohms.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 3 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

Ground Electrode: Provide one or a combination of the following arrangements as necessary and/or
shown on the drawings:

C. Earth electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried earthing tape or
cable; distance between two rods is not to be less than twice the length of one rod driven depth.

D. Ring type earth electrode consisting of earthing conductors, in a closed loop, buried in exterior
wall foundations underneath the water-proofing, or alternatively buried at a depth of 0.5 m and a
distance of about 1 m around external walls, or as shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing
conductors to this ring. Insulated connection flags into the building, of same material as earthing
conductors, at locations specified in point (F) underneath are to terminate into bolt-type earth
points (studs) or test- links for connection of main earth bar(s). Additional earth rods connecting
with the earth ring are to be provided, as necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to the
specified value.

E. Alternative Earth Electrode: other types of earth electrode may be used, after approval, including:

1. Cast iron pipes with special surround material

2. Copper plate(s)
3. Tape mats (strips).

F. Main earthing bar is to be provided at point of service entrance or medium voltage, transformer,
generator, low voltage, low current, and mechanical distribution rooms; as described in the
Specification or shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing conductors, protective conductors
and bonding conductors to the main earthing bar. Provide two insulated main earthing conductors,
one at each end of the bar, connected via testing joints to the earth electrode at two separate earth
pits or as shown on drawings. Conductor is to be sized to carry maximum earth fault current of
system at point of application with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C for at 1
second for medium voltage systems and 0.4 seconds for low voltage systems. Main earthing
conductors are to be minimum 120 mm2 or as shown on drawings.

G. Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main earthing
conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.

H. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective conductor is common
to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be the largest of the conductor
sizes.

1. Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with Table 54.7 of IEE Wiring Regulations (BS
7671).

I. Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like. Where
armored cable is specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective conductor, if approved
and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.

J. Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective conductor from one piece of
equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive parts of equipment are
not to be used as protective conductors, but are to be connected by bolted clamp type connectors
and/or brazing to continuous protective conductors which are to be insulated by molded materials.

K. Ensure by calculation that Earth Fault Loop Impedance values for final circuits are to satisfy the
requirements of BS 7671 regulations.

L. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts of the building
such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting, metallic conduit and
raceways, cable trays and cable armor to nearest earthing terminals by equipotential bonding
conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding conductor shall not be less than half of the
protective conductor connected to respective earthing terminal with a minimum of 4-mm2.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 4 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

M. Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other metallic
service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to main earth terminal
or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable between point of entry/exit of
services and main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding is to be made on the premise
side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be less than half that of the earthing
conductor connected thereto, and minimum 6 mm2.

N. Identification: Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every bonding
conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in accordance with the Regulations, as
follows:

1. SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE.

O. Identification: Protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination of green-

and-yellow colors of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colors, as approved.

P. Identification: Source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) is to be identified along
its entire length by continuous black insulation labeled 'neutral earthing'.

2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Buried Earth Conductors: Bare annealed copper strip conductors 30 x 4 mm, or annealed stranded
copper conductors 120 mm2 cross-section, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

B. Earthing Conductors: Insulated or bare copper conductor as described in 2.2 (F).

C. Protective Conductors: Single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables, having rated
insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor forming part of a multi-
core cable, color coded.

D. Protective Bonding Conductors: Bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded copper cable or
flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in Article "General
Requirements" hereof.

E. Power Systems (transformer, medium voltage switchgear, generator, and main distribution board)
Main Earthing Bar: Consisting of hard drawn copper bar, 50 x 6 mm, unless otherwise indicated
on drawings. Earth bar is to be labeled 'Main Earth Bar' and is to be drilled, for connection of
conductors, at a spacing not less than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with copper alloy bolts, nuts
and washers and wall mounting insulators.

F. Telecommunication Systems Main Earthing Bar: similar to above but with minimum dimensions
100 x 6 mm for the main grounding busbar of the main telecommunication room, and 50 x6 mm
for equipment rooms grounding busbars.

2.4 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS AND EARTHING ACCESSORIES

A. Copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with points of connection,
and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity.

B. Bolted Connectors and Clamps: Bolted-pressure-type connectors and clamps, or compression type.
Bolts, nuts and washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze or copper silicon alloys.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written
instructions.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 5 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rod: 16-mm diameter high strength, low carbon steel core of high tensile strength (600
N/mm2), with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper molecularly bonded into steel core, 0.25 mm
minimum thickness. Driving head is to be high strength steel. Couplings are to be long length
silicon bronze, internally threaded. Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of
copper and strength. Earth rod is to be complete with couplings, head and bolted connector of
sufficient size, and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables terminated thereto.

1. Minimum Length of Rod: 2.4 m, extendible as necessary to obtain required earth

resistance.

B. Tape Mats (Earth Lattice): Where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth electrode is to consist
of parallel and perpendicular copperstrips, spacing interval as shown on drawings, burial depth
0.6m minimum, welded together by exothermic welds to form a 600 x 600 x 3 mm (6x6
matrix)grid. Tape is to be 25 x 3 mm strip conductor.

C. Earth Pit: Precast, square or circular section concrete handhole (minimum 450 mm internal
diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 150 mm below top of earth rod. Earth pit
is to be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing conductor. Cover is to have
inset brass plate with inscription 'Earth Pit - Do Not Remove'.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TRANSFORMER SUBSTATION EARTHING

A. Medium Voltage (MV) switchgear is to have a separate main earthing bar connected to MV
switchgear room earth bar by two insulated earthing conductors not less than 120mm2 for LSC2A
type switchgear, and 120mm2 for LSC2B, unless otherwise shown on drawings. MV switchgear
earthing shall be dobe in coordination with JEPCO to fulfil their requirements.

B. earthing bar connected to LV room earth bar by two insulated earthing conductors not less than
120 mm2, unless otherwise shown on drawings.

C. Transformer room is to have a separate MV main earthing bar, to which the transformer earthing
terminal is to be connected by insulated copper earthing conductor not less than 120mm2, unless
otherwise shown on drawings. Transformer earthing shall be done in coordination with JEPCO to
fulfil their requirements.

D. Transformer neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor (color black) to
transformer room MV main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be sized for maximum
earth fault current for 1 second with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C or sized
not less than 120 mm2 for transformer ratings below 500 kVA and 300 mm2 for higher ratings
unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Where a neutral is directly connected to earth electrode,
an insulated disconnecting device is to be provided at the transformer.

E. Outdoor package substation earthing is to comprise at least four earth rods, each providing a
connection point of an earthing conductor connected to one end of the earthing bars at MV and LV
switchgear sections respectively. The four rods are to be interconnected together and to the earth
electrode.

F. Lightning arresters are to be directly connected to earth electrode, following the shortest path.
Each lightning arrester is to be connected at a dedicated earth rod, unless otherwise shown on
drawings.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 6 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.2 EARTHING OF MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS, LIGHTING

INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. For earthing of main distribution boards, refer to item 3.1 (C).

B. Distribution, lighting and power panelboards are to be connected by protective conductors run
together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in panelboards with respective
main distribution board earthing bar.

C. Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch circuit and
connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket outlet terminal is to be
connected.

D. Final Ring Sub-Circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit is to be in the form of
a ring having both ends connected to earth terminal at origin of circuit in panelboard.

E. Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such as switches,
heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective earth conductors to earthing
terminals of respective panelboards.

3.3 GENERATOR PLANT EARTHING

A. Generator room is to have a separate main earthing bar, to which the generator neutral (star point)
is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor through the neutral earthing link or device.
Neutral earthing conductor is to be suitably sized to carry maximum earth fault current for time it
takes the system protection to operate with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C,
but not less than 120 mm2 for generator ratings below 500 kVA and 300 mm2 for higher ratings,
unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

B. Generator earthing terminal is to be connected to the generator room main earthing bar by
insulated copper conductor of cross section not less than 120 mm2, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings.

C. Switchgear (ATS) and Control Gear: Earthing terminals or bars of switchgear and control gear are
to be connected by separate protective conductors to respective normal and emergency main
distribution board earth bars.

D. Extraneous conductive parts including steel frames, battery racks, day-tank, pumps and piping are
to be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main earth bar in compliance with bonding
regulations.

3.4 MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY

A. Mechanical room is to have separate earthing bar(s) or loop conveniently located, and connected
by earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor control centre at its earthing bar, and
to motors, switches and other electrical equipment etc. at their earthing terminals, using copper
conductor with half size of the protective earth conductor and not less than 6 mm2, , unless
otherwise indicated on drawings. Conductors are to be securely fixed, recessed in floor grooves or
niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar or loop is to be securely fixed to
building wall with copper or brass saddles.

B. Earthing bar (40 x 4 mm) is to be connected by two insulated earthing conductors, one at each end
of the bar, through testing joints to the earth electrode [at two separate earth pits], or to the main
LV earth bar. Earthing conductors are to be minimum 70 mm2 or as shown on drawings.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 7 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Motor and other equipment earth terminals are to be connected also by protective earth conductors
of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel or distribution unit.

3.5 ROAD LIGHTING

A. Earthing Cables: separate protective earthing cables for lighting column circuits are to be run with
power circuit, terminated at LV supply position in lighting control panel and looped into column
earthing terminals. The last column is to be bonded via an earthing bolt to a single 14 mm
diameter copper covered steel rod, 2.4 m long, driven into ground adjacent to column. Bonding is
to be 16 mm2 stranded bare copper conductor, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

B. Connections between rods and earthing conductors are to be made by the Cadweld process
producing a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for connection to removable items of
equipment only.

3.6 SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

A. Signal and communication systems room is to have separate earthing bar conveniently located,
and connected by two insulated earthing conductors, one at each end of the bar, through testing
joints to the earth electrode at two separate earth pits or as shown on drawings , or to the main LV
earth bar. Earthing conductors are to be minimum 70 mm2 or as shown on drawings.

B. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide 16mm2
minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each
service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings or recommended by system provider.

3.7 INSTALLATION

A. Continuity: Ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and mechanically
secure.

B. Earth Rods: While siting earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with individual rods do
not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than 1 m horizontally from
foundations of buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient size is to be drilled
before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal filler that will
not corrode, is to be provided around the rod.

C. Buried earthing conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.5 m from ground surface unless
otherwise indicated on the drawing

D. Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main earthing terminals or
bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) fastened to building structure by approved supports and
extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be protected against mechanical damage and corrosion.

E. Protective Conductors: Separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable, are to be
fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.

F. Protective Bonding: Remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at threads,
contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings designed to make secure
bonds.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 8 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Protection against Corrosion: Protect bolted connections against corrosion either by filling with
Vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper capping.

B. Connections: Earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth connection is

permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be employed.

C. Connections: Where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use bimetallic
fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or compound, or by
wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.

D. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that

are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and checked against
specified resistance.

B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

C. Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and supplementary
equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.

D. Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against calculated
impedance figures.

E. Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.

3.10 GRADING AND PLANTING

A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as
soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of
dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil,
fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping."
Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.

END OF SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 / Page 9 of 9

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes low voltage (LV) feeder cables, branch circuit wiring, control and signal
cables, termination, jointing and splicing.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section “Fire stopping for fire stopping materials and installation equipment
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Division 16 Section "Cable Trays" with its related section.
4. Division 16 Section "Raceways and boxes" with its related section.
5. Division 16 Section "Under floor raceways" with its related section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities, de-
rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
4. Manufacturer's drawings showing the outline of the lugs and sleeve connectors together
with all pertinent dimensions. Any variation in these dimensions due to manufacturing
tolerances shall be indicated.

B. Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by Engineer, other accessories.

C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of trays, feeder, sub-feeder cables and branch
circuits, with indication of any equipment to show and verify coordination between various
trades.
2. Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.
5. Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with final
conduit routing.

D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by
manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards to which it complies and
test certificates. All test certificates shall comply with the test requirements of the relevant
standard to which the cable is manufactured.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 1 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test records for cables and
accessories in accordance with the Standards.

F. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

G. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications prior to
work commencing on site.

H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice and
terminate low-voltage cables.

B. Standards: Wires and cables shall comply with IEC or other equally approved standards and shall
bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured. Wires and cables
not having this identification will be rejected.

C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No change will
be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special conditions and approved by
Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying capacities and report any discrepancies or
insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver wires and cables properly packaged in factory packed or fabricated containers, wound on
factory reels.

B. Store wires and cables in dry areas, and protect from weather, fumes, water, debris, etc.

C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable
insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.

B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as
approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Low Voltage Cables:

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 2 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

a. B.I.C.C. (U.K.)
b. Nexans (France)
c. Prysmian (Italy / U.K.)
d. Lapp Kabel (Germany)
e. General Cables (U.S.A.)
f. Belden (U.S.A.)
g. The Okonite Co. (U.S.A.)
h. Draka (Holland)
i. Bahra Cables (K.S.A.)

2. Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drive Cables:

a. Lapp Kabel (Germany)

b. Nexans (France)
c. Prysmian (Italy / U.K.)
d. Leoni (Switzerland)
e. Belden (U.S.A.)
f. General Cables (U.S.A.)

3. Low Voltage Fire Resistant Cables:

a. Prysmian (Italy / U.K.)

b. Nexans (France)
c. Bahra Cables (K.S.A.)
d. Ducab (U.A.E.)
e. Draka (U.K.)

4. Cable Connectors:

a. Raychem (U.S.A.)
b. 3M (U.S.A.)
c. B.I.C.C. (U.K.)
d. Nexans (France)
e. Prysmian (Italy / U.K.)
f. Klauke (Germany / U.K.)

5. Cable Glands:

a. CMP (U.K.)
b. Hawke (U.K.)
c. Stahl (Germany)
d. Thomas & Betts (U.S.A.)
e. Prysmian (Italy / U.K.)

2.2 GENERALLY

A. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other feeders shall
have copper conductors. Cable conductors shall be stranded for sections 4 mm2 and above, based
on IEC 60228 Class 2. Signal and control cables shall have solid conductors unless otherwise
specified. Flexible cords shall have finely stranded conductors. Conductors of single-core cables
25-mm2 and above shall be compacted. Multi-core cables 35-mm2 and above shall be sectorial
shape.

B. Conductor sizes shall be metric and as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with cross-sectional
area smaller than specified will not be accepted.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 3 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Low voltage cables, cable terminations and building wiring insulation shall be color coded or
otherwise identified as required by the Regulations and as follows:

1. Neutral shall be black.

2. Protective earth shall be green/yellow striped.
3. Phase colors shall be red, yellow, blue or use color coding in accordance with local
regulations and standards.

D. Maintain color coding throughout installation. Phase-conductors for which outer jacket is not
color-coded shall have engraved alphanumeric mark (L1, L2, L3) or color coded heat-shrinkable
sleeves.

E. Buried Cables: Cables buried directly in the ground shall be armored type, unless otherwise
indicated in particular Sections of the Specification or on the Drawings.

F. Water tight cables shall be used for buried cables in high water content soil where indicated on the
drawings shall be provided with water blocking swellable tape above insulation as longitudinal
water barrier, PE laminated aluminum foil longitudinally applied with suitable overlap as radial
water barrier and an external outer sheath made of extruded black medium density polyethylene
compound. As an alternative, subject to Engineer’s approval, tree retardant cross linked
polyethylene (XLPE/TR) to ASTM D6097 insulated cables with an external outer sheath made of
extruded black medium density polyethylene compound can be used.

G. Outdoor cables exposed to sunlight shall be provided with ultraviolet resistant PVC sheath having
2.5% black carbon content.

2.3 LV WIRES AND CABLES

A. Single Core PVC Insulated Non-Sheathed Cables (Building Wires): Unless otherwise specified,
single conductor cables for wiring in conduit shall have annealed copper conductors, compacted,
generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant insulation to IEC 60332-1,
moisture and heat resistant PVC/E to IEC 60227-1 and 3, suitable for wet locations and for
conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables shall be 450/750 V grade.

B. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have annealed, copper conductors, compacted,
insulated with PVC/A to IEC 60502-1, moisture and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and
conductor temperatures of 70 deg. C, laid up, bedded with suitable filler and sheathed with flame
retardant PVC/ST2. Armored cables shall have single layer of galvanized steel wire armor with
flame retardant PVC/ST2 over-sheath. Cables shall comply with IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.

C. Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single-core circular stranded, annealed
copper conductors, compacted, insulated with moisture and heat resistant cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 90 deg. C. and
flame retardant PVC/ST2 over-sheath. Armored cables shall have taped bedding, single wire
aluminum armor and flame retardant PVC/ST2 over-sheath. Cables shall comply with IEC 60502-
1, IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.

D. Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Multicore annealed copper conductors,
compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C, laid up and bedded with
suitable non-hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation and flame retardant PVC/ST2
over-sheathed, color black. Armored cables shall have single layer of galvanized steel wire applied
helically over extruded flame retardant PVC/ST2 bedding (which may be an integral part of
filling) and over-sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST2, color black. Cables shall comply with
IEC 60502-1, IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.

E. Multi-Core Dual Shielded XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (minimum 0.6/1 kV) for Variable
Frequency Drives (VFD): To have stranded copper conductors, class 5 to IEC 60228, compacted,

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 4 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

adequately thick XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C. An overall tinned
copper braided screen in conjunction with an aluminium/polymer tape shield shall be provided to
achieve transfer impedance not exceeding 100 mOhm/m in the frequency range up to 100 MHz
calculated in accordance with IEC 61196-1 or ANSI/NEMA WC 61. Cable shall have a flame
retardant PVC/ST2 or LS0H over-sheath as shown on the drawings, LS0H over-sheath shall
comply with IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen acid gas content and
IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity of evolved gas, color black. Each feeder shall be provided with
3 nos. symmetrically arranged grounding conductors except for feeders less than 16 mm2 which
shall be four core having the fourth core acting as a ground conductor. Cables shall be used with
variable frequency drive applications. Cable length shall not exceed 40 m unless proper common
mode, (dv/dt), or sinus filters are specified in the VFD, or as otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Cables shall comply with IEC 60092 or IEEE 1580,
IEC 60502-1, IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.

F. VFD Cables Feeding Life Safety Equipment (Such as smoke / pressurization fans … etc.): Class 2
to IEC 60228, fire resistant type to IEC 60331-21 with LS0H over sheath to IEC 61034 for low
smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen acid gas content and IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity
of evolved gas.

G. Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) Cables: 600/1000 V grade, copper conductor, compacted,
insulated with extruded material to IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen
acid gas content and IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity of evolved gas. Cores and cross sectional
area shall be as shown on the Drawings. Phases shall be color coded in conformity with the
Standards, and overall cable sheath shall be extruded black LS0H material. Cables shall comply
with IEC 60332-3.

H. Flexible cable for connection to appliances, window fans, pendants etc. shall be 300/500 V grade
to IEC 60227-5, class 5 to IEC 60228, three or four core, with tinned finely stranded copper wires,
heat resistant with PVC/E insulation and PVC/ST10 sheath. As an alternative, EPR insulation,
twisted and sheathed with Chlorosulphonated Polyethylene (CSP) compound and with
strengthening cord may be used.

I. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR1 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type FP
100 , or approved equal): Single core stranded plain annealed copper conductors to IEC 60228,
fire resistant insulation category CWZ to BS 6387 for sizes up to 6 mm2, PH120 classified to BS
EN 50200, and 120 minutes rating when tested in accordance with BS 8434-2 when tested in 20
mm rigid steel conduit and Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) composite sheath to IEC 61034 and
IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame
retardant properties. Cable shall comply with BS EN 50363 and rated 450/750 V, capable of
accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 90 deg. C. Cable shall be
LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath . Cable shall be
used as branch circuits installed in steel conduits for use in central battery system, smoke curtains
and other similar loads where shown on the drawings.

J. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR2 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type FP
300, or approved equal) : Multi core solid or stranded plain annealed copper conductors to IEC
60228 (in sizes up to 16 mm2), dual layer insulation with fire resistant tape primary insulation
layer and XLPE secondary insulation layer, category CWZ to BS 6387, complying with BS EN
50363, LS0H composite sheath with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire to IEC 61034
and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60331 for fire resistant
characteristics at an enhanced temperature of 950 deg. C. and shall comply with IEC 60332-1-2
for flame retardant properties. Cable shall be rated 600/1000 V, capable of accepting voltage
surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 90 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB and
BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall be installed in
steel conduits for use in main incoming cable in central battery system and other life safety
equipment where shown on the drawings.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 5 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

K. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR3 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type FP
200 Gold, or approved equal) : Multi core solid or stranded plain annealed copper conductors to
IEC 60228 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation, galvanized steel wire armored,
category CWZ to BS 6387, PH60 classified to BS EN 50200, and 30 minutes rating when tested
with additional water spray in accordance BS EN 50200 Annex E and complying with BS EN
50363, laminated aluminum screen and LS0H composite sheath with tinned earth continuity
conductor/drain wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with
IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall be rated 300/500 V,
capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 70 deg. C.
Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath.
Cable shall be used for fire alarm, voice evacuation installations, branch circuits in central battery
system and other loads requiring category 1 circuits in accordance with BS 8519 including
buildings with evacuation time not exceeding 30 minutes unless otherwise specified under fire
alarm section and where shown on the drawings.

L. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR4 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type FP
Plus, or approved equal) : Multi core plain annealed copper conductors to IEC 60228 (in sizes up
to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation, galvanized steel wire armored, category CWZ to BS 6387, PH
120 classified to BS EN 50200, and 120 minutes rating when tested in accordance with BS 8434-2
and complying with BS EN 50363, laminated aluminum screen bonded to the sheath and LS0H
composite sheath with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754
or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant
properties. Cable shall be rated 300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV,
operating conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited
and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall be used for fire alarm, voice evacuation
installations, emergency voice communication systems, branch circuits in central battery system
and other loads requiring category 2&3 circuits in accordance with BS 8519 including buildings
with evacuation time higher than 30 minutes, such as high assembly and high rise buildings unless
otherwise specified under fire alarm section and where shown on the drawings.

M. Fire resistant LS0H Cable 600/1000 V, (abbreviated as FR6 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian -
Type FP-600S, or approved equal): Multi core plain copper stranded circular or shaped conductor
(sizes up to 400 mm2) complying with IEC 60228 with fire resistant insulation category F120 to
BS 7846 and tested in accordance with BS 8491 and complying with BS EN 50363 operating
conductor temperature 90ºC, single galvanized steel wire armour and extruded low smoke zero
halogen (LS0H) over sheath wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall
comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall be LPCB
and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath . Cable shall be used for
feeders of the fire pumps, smoke and pressurizing fans, fire fighting elevators and other
firefighting and life safety loads requiring category 2&3 circuits in accordance with BS 8519
including buildings with evacuation time higher than 30 minutes, such as high assembly and high
rise buildings and where shown on the drawings.

N. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FRE on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type FP
100, or approved equal): Single core stranded plain annealed copper conductors to IEC 60228, fire
resistant insulation to IEC 60331 and Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) composite sheath to IEC
61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category
C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall comply with BS EN 50363 and rated 450/750 V for
sizes up to 10 mm2 and 600/100 V for sizes greater than 10mm2, capable of accepting voltage
surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 90 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB and
BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall have
green/yellow striped color and shall be used as earth conductor for fire resistant feeders.

2.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES

A. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm2, 2.5 mm2 or stranded 4
mm2 plain circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/A to IEC 60502-1, rated for 70

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 6 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

deg. C, of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores shall be laid up together and filled with non-
hygroscopic material, and covered with copper wire or tape screen and over sheathed with flame
retardant PVC/ST1, to form compact and circular cable for use in switchgear, control gear and
generally for control of power and lighting systems. Armored cable shall have extruded PVC
bedding which may be an integral part of the filling, galvanized steel wire armoring, and over-
sheath of flame retardant PVC/ST1 to IEC 60502-1 and IEC 60332-1, color black. Core
identification shall be white printed numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. over black insulation.

B. Cables shall be certified to have passed IEC 60331 fire resistance and IEC 60332-1 flame
retardance and reduced flame propagation to category CWZ of BS 6387.

C. PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, shall be generally 300 V rating,
polyethylene insulated, color-coded, tinned copper conductors (0.6-mm diameter), twisted
together into pairs. Multi-pair core assembly shall be covered with binder tape, spirally wound
0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided with drain wire and overall PVC sheath.

D. Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables, shall be insulated
for same voltage grade.

E. Multi core PVC insulated cables (300/500 V) annealed copper conductors, solid conductors, up to
4 mm2 unless otherwise indicated, insulated with moisture and heat resistant PVC/C to IEC 60227
and with over sheath of flame redundant PVC type ST1 to IEC 60227 and IEC 60332-1.

2.5 TERMINATION AND SPLICE CONNECTORS (LV POWER)

A. Connector terminations and splices shall be of class A to IEC 61238-1.

B. Connectors shall be compression, barrel crimped type.

C. Connectors for copper conductors shall be made of electrolytic copper.

D. Connectors for aluminum conductors shall be made of aluminum alloy of purity not less than
99.5%.

E. All termination and splice connectors specified above shall be tin plated with minimum thickness
of 5 microns for copper material and 7 microns for aluminum material. Aluminum connectors
shall incorporate neutral grease to avoid aluminum oxidation

F. Termination connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist of barrel made of

aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5% and palm made of forged copper connected using a
friction stir welding.

G. Splice connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist of two barrels, one is made of
electrolytic copper and the other is made of aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5%
connected using a friction stir welding.

H. Splice connectors shall have a central stop to divide the connector into two equal parts to facilitate
the correct cable positioning.

I. Connectors shall be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints equal to cable in

characteristics, in terms of insulation, stress distribution and water-tightness. Materials and
methods of jointing shall be approved before confirmation of order.

J. Connectors shall be suitable for cable size used.

K. Connector - Type A-1: Heat shrinkable or cold shrinkable for making T-taps and splices on
conductors used in external lighting fittings connections.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 7 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

L. Connector - Type A-2: Pressure indent type, for terminating or making T-taps and splices on
conductors 10 mm2 and smaller. Connector shall be non-ferrous copper alloy applied to conductor
by mechanical crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating sleeves or phenolic insulating covers.

M. Connector - Type A-3: Bolted pressure split type for terminating or making T-taps and splices on
conductors 16 mm2 and larger. Connector shall be cast non-ferrous copper alloy applied to
conductor by clamping with minimum of two screws and provided with phenolic insulating cover.

N. Connector - Type B-1: Pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and fixture wiring. Connector
shall be steel encased spring with shell, insulated with vinyl cap and skirt.

O. All components of lugs and connectors shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s name, die
number, cable / conductor size, number of crimps and position.

2.6 CABLE GLANDS

A. Cable glands shall comply with BS 6121-1, BS 6121-5 and BS EN 50262.

B. Cable glands used with unarmored cables shall be made of brass, type A2 to BS 6121-5, with
mechanical retention class B to BS EN 50262, impact resistance category 8 to BS EN 50262 and
an environmental seal to the cable outer sheath. Glands shall be deluge protected, with IP66
degree of protection to IEC 60529.

C. Cable glands used with single steel wire armored cables shall be made of brass, type CW to BS
6121-5, with mechanical retention class B to BS EN 50262, impact resistance category 8 to BS EN
50262, electrical continuity via armor wire termination category B to BS EN 50262, earth tag to
BS EN 50262 and an environmental seal to the cable outer sheath. Glands shall have IP66 degree
of protection to IEC 60529.

D. Cable glands used with steel tape or wire braid armor shall have similar characteristics as specified
in paragraph 2.6C except gland type which shall be CX instead of CW to BS 6121-5.

E. Cable glands used with single steel wire armored cables where sprinkler / water mist firefighting
systems are used shall be made of brass, type E1W to BS 6121-5, with mechanical retention class
B to BS EN 50262, impact resistance category 8 to BS EN 50262, electrical continuity via armor
wire termination category B to BS EN 50262, earth tag to BS EN 50262 and an environmental seal
to the cable inner and outer sheaths. Glands shall be deluge protected, with IP66 degree of
protection to IEC 60529.

F. Cable glands used with steel tape or wire braid armor shall have similar characteristics as specified
in paragraph 2.6E except gland type which shall be E1X instead of E1W to BS 6121-5.

G. Cable glands for use in explosive hazardous areas shall be flame proof with protection Ex d to IEC
60079-1 and have same applicable characteristics according to cable type as above.

H. Stainless steel grade 316 cable glands shall be used in installations in chemical and extremely
corrosive areas and where stainless steel enclosures are used. Glands shall have same applicable
characteristics according to cable type as above.

I. Aluminum cable glands shall be used for cables with aluminum wire armor. Glands shall have
same applicable characteristics according to cable type as above.

J. Cable glands used with LS0H or fire resistant cables shall be of the applicable type as stated above
and provided with low smoke fume shroud.

K. Cable glands shall be suitable for cable size used.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 8 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine raceways and building finishes receiving wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and
cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Before pulling wires in conduit check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general) is free of
burrs and is dry and clean.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Building wires and cables shall be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts indoors and in
conduit outdoors, unless otherwise shown the Drawings.

B. Circuits: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, final branch circuit wiring shall be run inside
trunking or conduits, D.C. wiring shall be run in separate conduits from A.C. wiring, and
emergency lighting and power circuits shall be run in separate conduits from normal circuits.

C. Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards shall be arranged as shown on
the Drawings. Loads on various phases of panelboards shall be balanced. Ensure that the lighting
load and other loads are balanced with a difference of not more than 10% between the phases.

D. Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in conduit and
trunking indoors, and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.

E. Bunching of wires in raceways shall be in accordance with raceway filling factors permitted by the
Regulations.

F. Lubricants shall be used for pulling wire or cable if character of pull would otherwise damage
conductors, insulation or jacket. Lubricants shall be approved by the Engineer.

G. Pull conductors into raceways simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same
raceway.

H. Support: Cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers shall be supported at upper end of
risers and at intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve any stresses on conductors,
where required.

I. Wiring at Outlets: Leave a slack of at least 200mm at each outlet.

J. Extra Length: At every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through shall be left
slack to allow inspection and for connections to be made. Cables terminating in outlet boxes shall
be left with at least 250-mm extra length for terminations.

K. Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, shall be permanently accessible or made only in
boxes or cabinet gutters.

L. Insulating covers shall be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.

M. Switch legs for local wall switches shall have distinctive color, selected as complementary to cable
color coding used in the project.

N. Terminations: Conductors of wires and cables up to 6 mm2 for copper conductors and up to 10
mm2 for aluminum conductors shall be tightly twisted and where possible doubled back before

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 9 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

being clamped with set screws. Where two or more wires are looped into same terminal these
conductors shall be tightly twisted together before inserting into terminals. As an alternative, fork /
ring, compression / twisting type connectors may be used for cable termination. In no case bare
conductor shall be allowed to project beyond any insulated shrouding or mounting of a line
terminal. Cables sizes 10 mm2 and larger for copper conductors and 16 mm2 and larger for
aluminum conductors shall terminate in compression lug connectors.

O. Tagging: Tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of panelboards or
distribution cabinets. Tags shall identify cable or circuit number and conductor size in accordance
with the Schedules.

P. Tagging: Where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device, outlet box or ceiling
junction box, each circuit shall be tagged as a guide in making connections.

3.3 FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATION (0.6/1 KV)

A. Cables generally shall be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses, clamped to steel racks
or cable trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts shall be LS0H type or installed in steel
conduits.

B. Fixing: Single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces shall be fixed directly to
walls or ceilings but must be accessible. Where two or more cables are run in parallel, they shall
be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other approved special cable supporting and
protecting arrangement.

C. Clamps: Where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved galvanized cast
steel clamps (or nonmagnetic clamps for single core cables) shall be used at distances not
exceeding 20 diameters.

D. Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub-feeders. Cables shall be supplied in lengths
sufficient for straight-through un-jointed termination to termination pull.

E. Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, shall be laid in heavy
duty PVC duct banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in concrete, in masonry or in floor
finishing.

F. Buried cables liable to mechanical damage shall be drawn through PVC conduit or asbestos
cement pipe. If steel conduit is used, all three-phase conductors, neutral and protective earth
circuits shall be in the same conduit.

G. Exposure to Heat: Route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or to corrosive
agents. If such condition is unavoidable, cables shall be type designed for particular condition.

H. Insulating covers shall be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections. Insulating cover
shall be purpose made and shall provide minimum insulation level equal to that of conductor
insulation.

I. Glands for various single-core and multi-core cables shall be purpose made and suitable for rigid
mounting to equipment enclosure.

J. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping material according
to Division 07 Section " Through-Penetration Firestop Systems ".

K. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 10 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.4 CABLE CONNECTIONS, JOINTING AND TERMINATIONS

A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths are
available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or manholes.

B. Recommendations: Through joints and terminations shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct specified materials, boxes, tapes,
compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and bonds as applicable.

C. Jointing: Joints shall be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable manufacturer's
recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations and through-joints shall be
submitted prior to commencing work on site. Samples shall be constructed in the presence of the
Engineer and shall be available for test and inspection in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.

D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables shall be purpose made, to prevent damage to
insulation in general.

E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors shall be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit or
equal approved.

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements
are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with international standards.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Cable tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and
Standards.

B. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable. Use 500 V megger on
installations with nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on installations with nominal
voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V.

C. Insulation resistance for LV power and lighting installations shall be carried out in accordance
with BS 7671 (“The IEE wiring Regulations”).

D. Insulation resistance for control and signal cables shall be minimum 10000 Megohm-km for PE
insulated cables and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all measured core-core and core-
earth, in accordance with the Regulations.

E. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to
determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

F. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

G. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to
demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION 16120

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 / Page 11 of 11

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes boxes and raceways including conduits, wireways, and related installations
and accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders, branch circuit wiring
and wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 07 Section " Through-Penetration Firestop Systems "

2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box
supports.
3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, manufacturers' catalogues
with specifications of raceways including conduits, trunking, boxes, etc. and related accessories

B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/

manufacture’s authorized representative and the contractor.

C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Exact routing of conduits, trunking etc. with indication of boxes, accessories and
expansion joints, size and type of conduits and boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation of trunking, trays etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection of conduits to metal enclosure, connection
of flexible conduits, vapour-tight installations in cold rooms, weatherproof installations
outdoors etc. and earthing connections.
5. For prewired installations, submit drawings for approval showing the complete layout of
all products that make up the complete system for each floor prior to the installation of
raceway lengths, device type (power and data), locations and circuits identified.

D. Samples of each type of raceway, box, and accessory.

E. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed electrical
raceways and boxes, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 01.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 1 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Regulations and Standards: Conduits, wireways, cable trays and fittings shall be designed,
constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical protection for wires and
cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of products shall be as specified.

B. All products shall carry permanent marking by manufacturer.

C. All materials shall be stored in covered areas and protected from dust and dampness.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to
ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Steel Conduits:

a. Thomas & Betts (USA)

b. Cable Tek Inc. (USA)
c. Swift/Legrand (UK)
d. Allied Tube (USA)
e. Barton Eng’g (UK)
f. Walsall G.E.C. (UK)
g. Panasonic (Thailand)
h.g. International Metal Hose (USA)
i.h. Wheatland Tube (USA)

2. Flexible Steel Conduits:

a. Halex (USA)
b. Electri-Flex Co. (USA)
c. AFC (USA)

3. PVC Conduits and Fittings:

a. Dietzel-Univolt (UK)
b. EGA Tubes/M.K./Honeywell (UK)
c. Marshall Tufflex (UK)
d. Comat (UAE)
e. Interplast (UAE)
f. Clipsal (Australia)

4. Accessories and Fittings:

a. Hubbell (USA)
b. O.Z./Gedney (USA)
c. Steel City (USA)

5. Prewired Plug-In Lighting Trunking (Heavy Duty)

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 2 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

a. Legrand Salamndre (UK), of pre-designed sections (lengths) to meet modular

construction on site.

6. Plug-In Overhead Lighting Trunking (Light Duty)

a. Wiremold/Legrand (USA)

7. Metallic Outlet Boxes

a. Hubbell (USA)
b. O.Z./Gedney (USA)
c. Steel City (USA)

8. Moulded Plastic Outlet Boxes

a. Egatube/M.K./Honeywell (UK)
b. M.K./Honeywell (UK)

2.2 RIGID HEAVY GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT

A. Material: Heavy gauge drawn and welded steel, threaded at both ends, to BS 4568-1 , with class 4
protection to BS 4568-1, zinc coated inside and outside by hot-dip process or sherardizing, or rigid
metal / intermediate metal conduit to US Federal Specification, UL 6 and ANSI C80.1 or UL 1242
and ANSI C80.6 respectively.

B. Fittings Generally: Threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron for conduits
to BS standards and galvanized steel or die cast for conduits to UL 514B. Fittings used in
corrosive atmospheres shall be specially treated.

C. Locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure shall be heavy hexagonal or castellated pattern,
for fastening.

D. Bushings for terminating conduits shall be smooth rounded brass rings.

E. Miscellaneous fittings including reducers, chase nipples, three piece unions, split couplings and
plugs shall be standard fittings designed and manufactured for the particular application.

2.3 RIGID INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT

A. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): rigid high grade mild strip welded steel, hot dip galvanized
over the entire length including factory made treads after cutting with organic corrosion resistant
polymer inside coating and to US Federal Specification, UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6.

B. IMC Fittings Generally: threaded fittings and connectors and terminations with rigid coupling,
concrete tight where required, and with red lead coated threads where site cut. Factory made bands
shall be provided where site bending is not possible.

C. Corrosion Resistance: conduits used in corrosive atmospheres shall be copper silicon alloy or PVC
coated IMC conduits and highly resistant to corrosion.

2.4 ELECTRICAL METAL TUBING

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): welded steel, non-threaded type, galvanized externally and
protected internally with corrosion resistant enamel, and to U.S. Federal Specifications, UL 797
and ANSI C80.3.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 3 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. EMT Fittings Generally: thread-less pressure type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast
iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres shall be specially treated. Factory made bends shall be
provided where site bending is not possible.

C. Corrosion Resistance: conduits used in corrosive atmospheres shall be made of aluminum or PVC
coated EMT conduits and highly resistant to corrosion.

2.5 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT

A. Material: Steel, cold rolled and annealed, non-threaded type, formed from continuous length of
helically wound and interlocked strip steel, with fused zinc coating on inside and outside, and to
IEC 61386 or UL 1.

B. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in indoor wet areas and shall have PVCjacket extruded
over core.

C. Flexible steel conduits used outdoors shall be liquid tight, stainless steel grade 316, to UL360.

D. Fittings Generally: Threadless, hinged clamp type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast
iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres shall be specially treated.

E. Straight Connectors: One piece body, female end, having hinged clamp and deep slotted machine
screws for securing to conduit, male end having thread and locknut.

F. Angle connectors of 45 or 90 degree and terminal connectors shall be as specified for straight
connectors, except that body shall be two-piece with removable upper section.

2.6 RIGID PVC-U CONDUIT

A. Material: Rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) with high temperature resistance, flame
retardant, non-hygroscopic and non-porous, to BS 4607, IEC 61386-1 and IEC 61386-21 or DIN
49016, heavy grade, classification code 4421, compression force 1250 N, IEC 61386-21, DIN
49016-1 or other equal and approved standards conforming to IEC 60423.

B. Fittings Generally: Unbreakable, non-inflammable, self extinguishing, heavy moulded plastic.

Expansion couplings shall be telescoping double tube type, with at least two inner water-tight
neoprene rings.

C. Assembly: Conduits, boxes and accessories shall be assembled by cementing, using

manufacturer's recommended products and appropriate connectors or spouts. Where no spouts are
available use smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.

2.7 FLEXIBLE PVC-U CONDUIT

A. Material: flexible unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U), flame retardant, heat resistant, non-
hygroscopic, high resistance to impact, ribbed on circumference for flexibility to IEC 61386-1,
classification code 3321, compression force 750 N or other equal and approved standards.

B. Fittings Generally: unbreakable, non-inflammable, self extinguishing, heavy moulded plastic.

Expansion couplings shall be telescoping double tube type, with at least two inner water-tight
neoprene rings.

2.8 STEEL CONDUIT ACCESSORIES

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 4 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Sleeves Through Outside Walls / Water Tanks: Cast iron, with end and intermediate integral
flanges, and internal diameter larger than diameter of through-conduit. Length shall correspond to
wall thickness. Space between sleeve and conduit shall be packed with backer rod/oakum to
within 50 mm of both faces of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with plastic compound or lead,
held in place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to flanged ends of sleeve.
Alternatively, sleeves shall be O.Z/Gedney, Type WSK or other equal and approved, with cable or
conduit bolted pressure sealing components.

B. Sleeves Through Indoor Walls / Slabs: Similar to above but with cast iron or rigid heavy gauge
galvanized steel and plain ends.

C. Supports and Hangers: Galvanized malleable cast iron straps or structural steel sections with hot
dip galvanized bolts and nuts.

D. Expansion Joint for Embedded Steel Conduits - Type A: Watertight, flexible conduit with end
fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length shall allow movement within range of joint and shall not
be less than 20 times diameter of conduit. Conduit shall be covered with thick rubber tubing with
5 mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumper with earth clamp shall electrically connect
both sides of joint. Fitting shall be O.Z/Gedney, Type DX or other equal and approved.

E. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type B: Sleeve with fittings to permit telescoping of
one conduit into sleeve. Movable conduit shall be fitted with watertight bushing. Joint shall be
weatherproof, of galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding jumper with earth clamp shall
electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting shall be O.Z/Gedney, Type DXX or
other equal and approved.

F. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type C: PVC sheathed flexible steel conduit
terminating in pull boxes and securely fixed on each side of structural expansion joint. Bonding
jumper shall electrically connect both sides of joint.

G. Tags: 50 mm diameter steel with indented lettering, rust inhibiting treatment and baked enamel
finish.

2.9 WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING

A. Components shall include wire way base, clip-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall flanges, panel
to trunking rubber grommets, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary hangers, supports and
accessories.

B. Steel Trunking: To BS EN 50085-1 and BS EN 50085-2-1, galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.5
mm thick, protected internally and externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or
cadmium with top coat of enamel. Return edge shall be provided for body. Cover fixing with
simple arrangement. Stamped marking on lid and body by manufacturer. The galvanized sheet
steel shall comply with BS EN 10143.

C. PVC Trunking: to BS 4678 part 4 high impact, heavy duty, self-extinguishing, rigid PVC with
grooved double locking action of the clip-on cover. Design shall be approved by Engineer before
ordering materials. Trunking shall be capable of receiving functional slot-in hangers and
demountable separators to segregate wiring systems as needed.

D. Sizes: As required to accommodate number of conductors permitted by the Regulations and/or as

shown on the Drawings. Sizing shall ensure 25 percent spare capacity.

2.10 WEATHERPROOF WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 5 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Type: hot-dip galvanized sheet steel trunking of 1.5 mm thickness (minimum) with 1 mm thick
cover to BS EN 50085-1 and BS EN 50085-2 for trunking and ISO 1461 for galvanizing and rated
IP 54 to IEC 60529.

B. Construction: Trunking shall have outwardly turned flanges to receive cover, and internal sleeve
coupling between sections, permitting cutting of trunking on site.

C. Gaskets: Neoprene bonded cork gaskets shall be fitted throughout, between any two attached
surfaces.

D. Screws: Removable flanged covers shall be secured with galvanized steel holding screws.

2.11 SKIRTING TRUNKING

A. Type: Comprising wireway base, snap-on cover, couplings, end plates, wall flanges, elbows, tees,
adapters, if required, and necessary clamps, hangers, supports and accessories. Wires and cables
shall laid from front and held in place by clamps.

B. Steel Skirting Trunking: Sheet steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, protected internally and
externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium with top coat of enamel.

C. Aluminium Skirting Trunking: The raceway and all system components must be UL Listed in full
compliance with their standard for surface metal raceways and fittings (UL-5). All extrusions shall
be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy, with nominal wall thickness of 1.99mm throughout. The surface
finish shall be satin, anodized #204 Type clear, Class R1 Mil-Spec with minimum anodized finish
of 10mm.

D. UPVC Skirting Trunking: High impact resistant, flame retardant UPVC (unplasticized polyvinyl
chloride) to BS 476-6, BS 476-12 and BS 4678-4. Trunking shall be certified by approved Fire
Laboratories.

E. Type: The raceway shall be a two-piece design with a base and snap-on cover. The base shall be
furnished in 3m lengths and the cover sections shall be furnished in 1.5m lengths. The overall
dimensions of assembled raceway shall be as shown on Drawings.

1. Trunking shall be partitioned continuously into compartments for separate circuits through
extruded dividers separating the raceway into compartments.
2. The cover shall fit onto all compartments to allow access to only one compartment at a
time.
3. The compartments and their separate covers must be available to handle both power and
communications wiring.

F. Fittings: A full complement of fittings for the raceway shall be available. The available fittings
should include, but not be limited to the following: flat, internal and external elbows, tee and cross
fittings, wire clips, couplings for joining sections of raceway, grounding adapters as an NEC
approved secondary grounding method, and transition connectors to conduits.

G. Device Covers: Device cover plates for mounting the following commercially available devices
must be available: single devices, 40mm dia. socket, other rectangular faced devices and modular
voice and data jacks.

H. Devices and Accessories: The raceway manufacturer will provide a complete line of connectivity
outlets and modular inserts for socketoutlets, Unshielded Twisted Pair, Shielded Twisted Pair,
Fiber Optic, Coaxial and other cabling types with faceplates and bezels to facilitate mounting.

I. Dimensions: as shown on the Drawings and as required to accommodate specified wiring devices

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 6 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.12 PREWIRED PLUG-IN LIGHTING TRUNKING (HEAVY DUTY)

A. Type: overhead supported and prewired, supplied complete with 13 A, 3-pin special non-standard
socket outlet for each luminaire, at spacing required and shown on the Drawings. Lengths of
sections shall be determined by centers at which support brackets shall be mounted. Expansion
shall be taken up by expansion fittings, and spacing of sections where applicable, and as
recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Construction: 1.5 mm (16 b.g.) thick rigid mild steel sheet, with flanged cross-section to withstand
loads up to 180 lbs (vertical/horizontal) with negligible deflection when supported at 4.0 m, and
finished in stove enameled grey. Socket outlets shall be earth bonded. Purpose made support
brackets shall be provided at regular spacing. Connecting set between sections (lengths) shall
provide a stiffening joint and access into trunking through top plate. Flexible shall be provided
between trunking sections to enable trunking to be turned in the horizontal plane for negotiating
bends or curves.

C. Wiring and Plugs: each trunking length shall be wired with five single-core, 4 mm2 PVC cables
for alternate 3-phase, neutral and earth distribution, extended at least 150 mm beyond each end for
easy field wiring between sections, and supplied with one 30 A connector block per length. Plugs
shall be fused. End cable adapter on header shall be provided at each connection to a branch
circuit.

D. Lighting Fitting Suspension: underside of trunking shall be formed in a continuous edge from
which lighting fittings shall be suspended at two points, each by bolted hooks with locking screws
to prevent accidental unhooking of fixture.

2.13 PLUG-IN OVERHEAD LIGHTING TRUNKING (LIGHT DUTY)

A. Regulations: Trunking shall conform to the National Electrical Code for overhead distribution of
lighting circuits and low current circuits.

B. Components comprise wireway base, snap-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall flanges, panel to
wireway rubber grommet, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary hangers and supports.

C. Construction: 1 mm (0.04 inch) thick, galvanized steel, gray enameled (ANSI-61 gray). Sizes
shall be selected to comply with the NEC and provide at least 25% space for future wiring.

D. Laterals shall be supplied with 13 A, 230 V grounding socket outlets spaced to correspond with
equipment layout and wired to correspond with control requirements shown on the Drawings.

2.14 OUTLET BOXES, GENERAL

A. Wiring devices back boxes and conduits pull boxes shall comply with BS 4662 / IEC 60670.
Conduit circular pull boxes shall comply with BS 4607 / IEC 61386. Conduit junction boxes shall
comply with IEC 60670-22. Floor boxes shall comply with IEC 60670-23.

B. Surface or recessed boxes shall be suitable for type of related conduit or cable system. Shapes and
sizes of boxes shall be of compatible standards as switches and socket outlets specified under
Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices", and lighting fixtures selected and of various types and
mounting methods required.

C. Unused openings in outlet boxes shall be closed with molded caps or knock-out closers
manufactured for the purpose.

D. Floor outlets and plates shall be water-tight and impact resistant.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 7 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.15 METALIC OUTLET BOXES

A. Recessed and Concealed Boxes: Galvanized pressed steel, with knock-outs for easy field
installation. Special boxes shall be punched as required on Site.

B. Exposed Surface Mounted Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs. As an alternative, UL
listed boxes may be provided.

C. Outdoor Surface or Recessed Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and PVC gaskets to
ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non-ferrous, corrosion resistant screws. As an
alternative, UL listed boxes may be provided.

D. Floor Boxes - Type A: Watertight, cast iron or cast metal alloy with corrosion resistant finish,
adjustable mounting, standard duty, round or square, factory drilled and tapped for required
conduit sizes, and with brass cover and flange with brushed finish free from markings other than
required for mounting screws.

E. Floor Boxes - Type B: non-standard size, flush floor mounted, cast metal alloy, with watertight
neoprene gasket and hinged cover for each service. Box to be ready with factory drilled and
tapped conduit entries and adjustable mounting fittings. Metal barriers shall separate services for
power and low current.

F. Flame-Proof Boxes: Malleable iron or cast iron, with gas threaded hubs, special covers with
silicon rubber gaskets, gas tight, and water-tight. Boxes shall comply with the Regulations for
explosive areas.

G. Allow enough space for floor boxes lids to allow for the required finishing similar to the adjacent
areas and in coordination with the ID/Engineer and Drawings.

2.16 MOLDED PLASTIC OUTLET BOXES

A. Type: Boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems shall be heavy gauge pressure molded
plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self extinguishing, with softening point not less than 85 deg. C.
Boxes shall have provision for securely terminating conduits and shall be manufacturer's standard
for required application.

B. Fittings: Boxes shall have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting devices or
accessories, push-fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips to provide additional support for
pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets shall be provided for weatherproof
installations.

C. Molded plastic outlet boxes shall not be used outdoors.

2.17 FLUSH OUTLET BOXES

A. Factory designed, with accessories necessary to accommodate specific outlets shown on the
Drawings or cable outlets as required for signal or control services, with cord-grip nipples.
Finishes shall follow the corresponding application area.

2.18 TERMINAL COLORING AND LABELING

A. Phase identification shall be marked in an approved manner on cable boxes, tail ends and single
core cables and at all connecting points. Cable boxes shall be marked with stamped brass labels
indicating the purpose of the supply where such supply is not obvious.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 8 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.14 TERMINAL BOXES

A. The outer case of terminal boxes shall be constructed of steel sheet or weather resistant reinforced
plastic subject to Engineer’s approval and fitted with one or more hinged covers provided with
fasteners and padlocking facilities. The boxes shall be of IP56 for outdoor installations and IP51
for indoor installations.

B. The case shall be adequately ventilated also dust and vermin proof. Removable gland plates shall
be provided at the top and bottom. They shall be supplied complete with suitable insulating
material capable of withstanding the climatic conditions and test voltages specified herein where
the glands are required to be insulated from the terminal boxes. If the width of the box necessitates
the provision of 2 hinged front covers they shall close on to a center post which shall be removable
to facilitate cable termination. The depth of the outer case shall be not less than 200 mm unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.

C. The outer cases shall be treated before painting to prevent corrosion and shall be finished in glossy
enamel to an approved color externally and white internally. Where terminal boxes are required
for installation outdoors or in damp situations, they shall be of water tight construction and
galvanized.

D. Terminal boards shall comprise banks of rail mounted, screw clamp, spring loaded insertion,
solder lug or stud type terminals as required to suit the design and duty of the cables to be
terminated, arranged in pairs horizontally and grouped in vertical formation to provide a rigid
assembly. Each pair of terminals shall be connected together at the base with a fixed or plug type
link as specified. Insulating high temperature material of self-extinguishing or resistant to flame
propagation and substantially non-hygroscopic type shall be molded around the base of the screws
or studs, links connecting pairs of screws or studs or plug sockets to prevent exposure of live metal
at the back of the terminal boards and to secure the terminals against rotation and displacement.

E. Stud type terminal boards shall have screws or studs of 5 mm dia. for phosphor bronze or stainless
steel, and 6 mm dia. for high tensile brass, unless otherwise approved. They shall be complete with
the appropriate clamps, springs, nuts, locknuts and washers.

F. Terminal boards shall be complete with approved means for securing the wires, identification
ferrules, insulating barriers between pairs of terminals and removable transparent non-
inflammable terminal covers fitted with marker strips for identifying the terminals. All nuts,
washers, links and other components provided for securing the wires shall be electro-tinned.
Springs shall be aged and shall withstand corrosion.

G. The clearance between adjacent terminal boards and from the sides of the case shall not be less
than 100 mm. The minimum clearance between terminal boards and the top and bottom of the case
shall be 150 mm.

H. All terminal boxes and boards shall meet the associated cable site tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONDUIT, WIREWAYS, AND BOXES, GENERAL

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 9 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Use: Unless otherwise specifically indicated all light and power circuits, communications, signal
and low current systems wiring shall be drawn inside conduits or wireways up to the various
electric power consuming equipment as shown on the Drawings.

B. Separate conduits and wireway installations shall be used for medium voltage cables, low voltage
feeders and sub-feeders, normal light and power circuits, emergency light and power circuits and
communication, signal and other low current systems wiring. Cables of different voltages shall not
be mixed within the same conduit or wireway as per the regulations.

C. Boxes: Pull, and splice boxes of ample capacity shall be provided as indicated or required. Boxes
shall remain permanently accessible.

D. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or lead
anchors.

E. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of Engineer, allowing for
thickness of finishings, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishings to original
condition before installation of fittings or plates.

F. Boxes Mounting Heights and Location: As specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices",
and as shown on drawings.

G. Boxes: Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.

H. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.

I. Tools and accessories for forming and installing conduit and wireway systems shall be purpose
made for the particular application and used in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

J. Fixing: Conduits and wireway installations shall be concealed as much as possible.

K. Sizes of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, shall be selected in accordance with
the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of conductors and the space factor as
recommended by the regulations. Minimum outer diameter of conduit for all applications shall be
25 mm, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

L. Spare capacity shall not be less than 25 percent for all raceways.

M. Mechanical Continuity: Conduits and wireways shall be effectively joined together and connected
to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm mechanical assembly. Earthing jumpers
shall be installed on steel conduits where required to ensure effective electrical continuity
irrespective of whether a separate protective earth conductor is required or not.

N. Metal conduits and enclosures shall be mechanically fastened, and to be connected to electrical
boxes, fittings and cabinets to form low electrical resistance continuity and firm mechanical
assembly.

O. Dissimilar Metals: Use of dissimilar metals shall be avoided throughout the system to eliminate
possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, treat surfaces with corrosion
inhibiting compound before assembling.

P. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 – piece unions, split couplings and plugs
that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application shall be
installed as necessary.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 10 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

Q. Conduits shall be tested with a mandrel. Conduits that reject a mandrel shall be replaced. Restore
conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition.

R. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

S. No more than one wire is permitted to be terminated at one terminal.

T. Labeling of raceways and boxes; size of letters and color of labels, marking and references shall
be as per the relevant standard regulations. Expansion coupling and fittings are to be installed near
expansion joints.

3.3 CONDUITS AND WIREWAYS APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Conduits and wireways installations shall be as described below, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.

B. Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be used for medium
voltage cables & low voltage feeders installation where installed in non-accessible false ceiling
areas, indoor damp / wet areas (e.g. kitchen, laundry, boiler rooms, etc.), outdoor installations and
explosion-proof installations in hazardous areas.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for exposed installations over false ceilings when
the false ceiling is used as a return plenum.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for exposed and above false ceiling wiring
installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route lighting/central battery circuits, fire
alarm & security installations.

E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for all installations in elevator machine rooms and
shafts, electrical equipment rooms, mechanical rooms, parking floors, kitchen, laundry and solid
waste rooms.

F. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for concealed installations in dry / gypsum board
walls.

G. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for exposed installations in car park areas.

H. Conduit termination in sheet metal enclosures shall be fastened by lockouts, and terminate with
bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.

I. Rigid PVC-U conduit shall be used for lighting and power circuits, low current, communication
and signal system wiring, where embedded in concrete, masonry, underfloor, except where
otherwise shown on the Drawings or described in the particular section of the specification.

J. Rigid PVC-U conduit shall be used above false ceilings for lighting and power circuits, low
current, communication and signal system wiring, when the false ceiling is not used as return
plenum – and in furred walls. Use flexible PVC-U conduits from outlet boxes to fixtures in
conjunction with the use of PVC-U conduits.

K. Flexible conduit of same material as corresponding conduit system shall be used for connection to
motors, vibrating and non-rigidly fixed equipment and to fixtures installed in false ceilings.

L. Equipment requiring fixed connection or heavy electric power shall be supplied by means of
flexible cord housed in metallic conduit from suitable disconnect switch, mounted adjacent to the
equipment on the wall.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 11 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

M. Flexible steel conduit shall be used in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to fixture over
false ceilings when used as a return plenum. Conduits shall be liquid tight in damp areas.

N. Liquid-tight flexible steel galvanized conduit shall be used in one or more of the following
conditions:

1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmospheres where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.

O. Exposure to Damage: Conduit considered to be subject to undue risk of damage by shock or

corrosion shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Copper silicone alloy tubes may be
used in corrosive atmospheres.

P. Crossing: Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, vents or openings.

Q. Clearances: Install conduits at least, 150 mm clear of and preferably above pipes of other non-
electrical services. (Hot water pipes, etc.). Wherever possible, install horizontal conduit and
wireways runs above water and steam piping.

R. Sleeves: Obtain approval for positioning sleeves where conduits pass through reinforced concrete.
Additional opening may be allowed in finished slabs, but shall be drilled. Fix sleeves rigidly to
maintain position and alignment during construction work.

S. Waterproof Construction: Conduits shall not cross waterproof construction unless permitted by
Engineer. Specially designed and approved fittings shall be used.

T. Expansion Fittings: Provide in each conduit and wireways run every 30 meters, or wherever
structural expansion joints are crossed.

U. Make good all holes for conduits passing through walls, floors and ceilings with cement or similar
fire-resisting material to full thickness.

V. Bends: Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting or outlet and fitting shall not
contain more than the equivalent of 2 quarter bends (180 degree total).

W. Bending shall be made without damaging conduit or tubing and without reducing internal
diameter. Methods of field bending shall be approved.

X. Cut ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges.

Y. Conduits entering cold stores shall be made vapour tight, so that vapour from outside cannot enter
conduit.

Z. Draining: Arrange conduits so that condensed moisture can drain to screwed plug at lowest point.

AA. Before wiring, conduits shall be swabbed through. Do not draw cables into any section of system
until conduit and draw boxes are fixed in position, and the raceway installation is completed.

BB. Capping: Conduits shall be properly capped until wiring conductors are drawn in.

CC. Conduit and fittings installed outdoors shall be watertight and highly resistant to corrosion. Use
appropriate fittings, threaded and hubbed boxes, gaskets with screw on covers and the like.

DD. Terminations: Do not terminate or fasten rigid conduits to motor frame or base.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 12 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

EE. Length and radius of flexible conduit used for motors and vibrating equipment shall permit
bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or insulation.

FF. Flexible conduit for slide rail mounted motor shall have sufficient slack to allow for movement of
motor over entire slide rail length.

GG. Pulling Wire: Install 3 mm galvanized stranded steel wire or equivalent strength cord with wooden
blocks fastened at ends, in empty service conduits (power, low current and signal).

HH. Standard elbows shall be used for conduit sizes over 40 mm. For smaller sizes, field bends may be
used provided no damage occurs to conduit.

II. Tags: Fit to conduits entering or leaving floors, walls or ceilings for identification of conduit and
circuits. Tags are also to be placed at suitable intervals throughout the system.

JJ. Non – ferrous conduit shall be installed for circuits operating above 60 Hz.

3.4 STEEL CONDUITS

A. Termination: Conduit entering sheet metal enclosure or outlet boxes, when not terminated in a
threaded hub, shall be securely held in place by two lock-nuts, placed inside and outside enclosure,
and terminated with an insulating bushing.

B. Running Threads: Do not use running threads at joints and terminations, but use 3-piece unions or
split couplings.

C. Additional threaded cuts on galvanized steel conduits shall be painted with zinc based coating
resistant to corrosion.

D. Damage to protective coating of conduits shall be repaired to original degree of protection.

E. Outdoor Mounted Steel Conduit: Apply anti-corrosion coating of zinc-chromate based paint and
two weather resistant finish coats of enamel, of approved colour, or other equal and approved
coating.

F. Galvanized conduit run in screed shall be painted with heavy coat of emulsified bitumen.

G. Galvanized steel conduits buried in ground or placed in wet or damp locations shall be coated with
two heavy coats of hot bitumen. Conduits shall be covered by at least 600 mm of earth if buried in
planting soil and by 300 mm if under walkway.

H. Plugs: Use hardwood or threaded iron plugs for blanking ends of steel conduit not used.

3.5 PVC CONDUITS

A. Coupling of conduit and/or termination into spouted fittings shall be made watertight and
permanent using special cement.

B. Termination: Connect conduits terminating in switchgear, fuseboards, trunking, adaptable boxes

or other non-spouted enclosures etc. with smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.

C. Ends of conduit and conduit fittings shall be cleaned and jointed using PVC cement recommended
by manufacturer.

D. Semi-Permanent Adhesive: Use in joints requiring expansion couplers.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 13 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Bends: Conduits not exceeding 25 mm diameter may be cold bent using bending springs.
Conduits over 25 mm shall be hot bent by an approved method.

3.6 EMBEDDED CONDUITS

A. Conduits In Concrete Slabs: Place conduits parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing steel,
between bottom reinforcing and top reinforcing steel. Fasten conduits to reinforcing steel by
positive wire, fasteners at the proper distance from the concrete face. Embedded conduit diameter
shall not exceed 1/3 of slab thickness. Special cases shall be referred to Engineer.

B. Conduits In Partitions or Side Walls: Horizontal or cross runs shall be avoided.

C. Pull-boxes shall not be used except for concealed installations above false ceiling at accessible
locations. If unavoidable, pull-boxes may be approved if located inconspicuously.

D. Conduits in floor of beds on grade: Encase in concrete, minimum thickness 50 mm or to thickness

allowed by architectural detail.

E. PVC conduits in reinforced concrete structures are generally to be installed after placing
reinforcement and before concreting, if protected against damage, or shall be placed in grooves
formed in the concrete, if approved.

3.7 EXPOSED CONDUITS

A. Conduits on walls shall be run neatly, horizontally or vertically.

B. Supports: Use approved clamps, hangers or clips fastened by machine screws to expansion sleeves
in inserts or to lead anchors.

C. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting steel conduits shall not be greater than:

Conduit Size Maximum Spacing of Supports

mm (inches) metres (feet)

1. 20 (3/4) 3.00 (10)

2. 25 (1) 3.60 (12)
3. 32-38 (1-1/4 - 1-1/2) 4.25 (14)
4. 50-63 (2 - 2-1/2) 5.00 (16)
5. 75 (3) and larger 6.00 (20)

D. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting PVC conduits shall not be greater than:

Conduit Size Maximum Spacing of Supports

mm (inches) metres (feet)

1. 20 (3/4) 0.60 (2)

2. 25-50 (1 - 2) 0.75 (2-1/2)
3. 63-75 (2-1/2 - 3) 0.90 (3)
4. 90-125 (3-1/2 - 5) 1.00 (3-1/2)
5. 150 (6) 1.25 (4)

E. Bends and Fittings: Firmly fasten conduit at each side of bends and within 900 mm of each outlet
box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 14 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Outlets: Do not run more than the permissible numbers of conduits to any surface wall outlet.

G. Exposed conduit work shall be installed so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or
ventilation ducts or outlets.

3.8 CABLE TRUNKING

A. Installation: Secure trunking of all sizes at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. Joints shall not
overhang a fixing by more than 500 mm.

B. Trunking passing through walls and ceilings shall have the cover fixed solidly for 25 mm either
side of walls and for 150 mm either side of floors and ceilings.

C. Trunking passing through fire barrier walls shall be provided with approved fire stopping barrier
inside the trunking.

D. Vertical sections of trunking over 900 mm long shall have staggered insulated tie-off studs to
support weight of cables.

E. Cabling Provisions: Separation of power, low current and control circuits shall be by two channel
trunking or by barriers inserted in trunking before installation of cables. Cable retaining straps
shall be provided at not more than 600 mm centers. Openings in front of trunking shall facilitate
drawing-in cables.

F. Coupling: Trunking parts shall be mechanically and electrically coupled without causing abrasion
to wiring.

G. Connection of trunking to conduits shall be through circular boxes.

H. Earthing: Do not use metal trunking as earth continuity conductor. Provide protective conductor
in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding " of the Specification.

3.9 LABELING

A. All metal conduits and metal trunking shall be labeled with type of service, using approved color
and lettering labels, fixed at specified distances as specified in Division 16 Section “Basic
Electrical Material and Methods”.

3.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS

A. Lay and assemble ducts in accordance with Division 16 Section "Underground Ducts and
Raceways for Electrical Systems" and Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility
Structures".

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 15 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.12 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.

END OF SECTION 16130

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 / Page 16 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16138 - UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Description of Work: Raceways including wireways and related installations and accessories
necessary to support and protect feeders, branch circuit wiring and wiring of low current systems,
communications and signal cables.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Applied Fireproofing" for fireproofing cellular metal floor raceway.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for receptacles installed in service fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Manufacturers' catalogues with specifications of raceways and related accessories.

2. Samples of each type of raceway and accessory.

3. Samples: Service fittings and flush outlet covers with required finish, for approval.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Exact routing with indication of boxes, accessories and expansion joints, size and type of
boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection enclosure, connection of flexible conduits,
and earthing connections.
5. For prewired installations, submit drawings for approval showing the complete layout of all
products that make up the complete system for each floor prior to the installation of
raceway with the lengths, device type (power and data), locations and circuits identified.

C. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Identify components and
accessories such as expansion-joint assemblies, straight raceway lengths, inserts, outlets, and
fittings. Show underfloor raceway layout, connections between raceway elements, and
relationships between components and adjacent structural elements.

D. Record (As-Built) Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underfloor raceways, junction

boxes, and preset and after-set inserts. Include locations, types, and circuiting of service-outlet
fittings.

UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS 16138 / Page 1 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Maintenance Data: For underfloor raceways to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.

1. Include detailed manufacturer's written instructions on locating preset inserts and on

installing after-set inserts.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain underfloor raceway components through one source from a single
manufacturer.

B. Comply with related BS Standards.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of underfloor raceway products with structural work, including
slab reinforcement, and with floor finish work.

1. Coordinate height of preset inserts, junction boxes, access units, and raceways with depth
of concrete slab and floor fill.
2. Coordinate thickening of slabs where required for adequate encasement of raceway
components.
3. Coordinate exposed components with floor-covering materials to ensure fittings and trim
are suitable for floor-covering material furnished.
4. Revise locations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure
functioning layout, and as approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Dietzel-Univolt (UK)
2. EGA Tube/M.K./Honeywell (UK)
3. Schneider Electric (France)
4. Schneider Electric / Square D Co. (USA)
5. Thomas & Betts Corp. (USA)
6. Wiremold/Legrand (USA)
7. Wirenold/Legrand Walker (UK)
8. Ackerman (Germany)

2.2 UNDERFLOOR TRUNKING

A. Type: For installation in floor screed, laid on unfinished concrete floor, secured and grouted flush
with screed.

B. Material: 3.3 m (10-ft) lengths of 2 mm thick (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel, protected by
corrosion resistant coating on inside and outside surfaces. Single, double or triple systems, as
required, are to be as shown on the Drawings. Dimensions are to be as indicated.

UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS 16138 / Page 2 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Openings: Ducts are to have 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) openings spaced at 600 mm (24 inch) with screw
plugs for receiving initial or future installation of outlet boxes. Screw plugs are to be replaced by
brass ferrules, inserted and securely fastened by crimping tool, for installation of pedestal type
outlet boxes.

D. Fittings: Ducts are to be supplied with approved standard manufacturer's fittings, couplings,
adjustable duct supports, duct to conduit adapters, horizontal 45 and 90 degree bends, vertical 90
degree bends, terminal bushings to cabinets, cross-unders, offsets, plugs, ferrules and complete set
of tools for installation and maintenance after installation.

E. Junction Boxes: Flush, cast iron, or galvanized sheet steel or die-cast metal protected by corrosion
resistant coating and suitable for double or triple duct systems, as required, and shown on the
Drawings. Openings are to be provided for ducts and conduits. Interior of boxes is to be
partitioned for two or three services; completely isolating each duct system and providing straight
cross-junctions. Leveling and anchoring of boxes is to be by adjusting screws at four corners.
Flush cover plates are to form smooth surface with flooring.

F. Flush Outlet Boxes: Factory designed, with accessories necessary to accommodate specific outlets
shown on the Drawings or cable outlets as required for signal or control services, with cord-grip
nipples.

G. Supports are to be capable of adjustment for height and arranged for maintenance of alignment
and spacing of raceways during concreting.

H. Recessed Service Fittings: Modular fittings that match with preset inserts and include covers/
receptacles, outlets and associated device plates to provide service indicated at each location.
Covers are to be flush with floor and have a recess to match floor finish and level with the area.
Boxes' covers are to be firmly held in place and non-rocking. Coordinate with architectural
designs and materials approved for finishes and for electrical devices. Internally mounted
receptacle / outlets are to be as shown on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of underfloor raceways. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install underfloor raceways as indicated on the Drawings, in compliance with the Specification
and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install raceways aligned and leveled and, unless otherwise indicated, parallel or perpendicular to
building walls.

C. Arrange supports to attain proper elevation, alignment, and spacing of raceways. Install supports
securely at ends and at intervals not to exceed 1500 mm to prevent movement during concrete
pour.

D. Seal raceways, cells, and inserts to prevent water, concrete, or foreign matter from entering
raceways before and during pouring slab or placing fill. Provide tape or sealing compound at
joints as recommended by raceway manufacturer.

UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS 16138 / Page 3 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Remove burrs, sharp edges, dents, and mechanical defects.

F. Cap or plug boxes, openings, and open raceway ends.

G. Junction Boxes: Install tops level and flush with finished floor. Install blank closure plates or
plugs to close unused junction-box openings. Install boxes in place with grout to prevent
movement during construction. Install supports, couplings and locking and grounding devices with
screws tightened in accordance with raceway manufacturer's torquing values. Remove burs, which
may cause damage to insulation. Place top covers in inverted position to prevent damage to
surface of cover.

H. Install devices and service fittings at points of use indicated.

1. Cut; hole saw, and drill slab and raceways to allow wiring installation.

I. Install markers at each cell to identify service. Install markers flush at screed line before pouring
slab or placing fill. Extend marker with grommeted screw when floor covering is placed. Do not
extend through carpet. Install markers at inserts adjacent to junction boxes, on both sides of
permanent walls, and at end of each raceway run. Use slotted-head screw to identify electrical
power and Phillips-head screw to identify telephone.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground underfloor raceways and components.

1. Tighten connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening

values.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation, clean underfloor raceways, including outlet fittings and devices, and inspect
exposed finish.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Level raceway components with finished slab and make adjustments for floor finishes.

END OF SECTION 16138

UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS 16138 / Page 4 of 4

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16139 - CABLE TRAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cable trays, cable ladders and related installations and accessories necessary
to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders, branch circuit wiring and wiring of low current
systems, communications and signal cables. Supporting accessories shall include but not limited to
necessary carriage bolts with nut below head, roofing bolts with nut, channel withstanding
threaded rod, wall bracket, uni-strut, fish plate, washers, etc.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 07 Section " Through-Penetration Firestop Systems " for fire stopping materials
and installation requirements.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable tray / ladder
supports not specified in this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Manufacturers' catalogues with specifications of cable trays / ladders and related

accessories.
2. Samples of each type of tray / ladder and accessory.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Detail fabrication and installation of cable tray / ladder, including plans, elevations, and
sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate
connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, fittings and earthing connections.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Approved Third Party Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance with the IEC 61537 or
NEMA VE-1, as applicable.

E. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Include scaled cable tray
/ ladder layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements.

F. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations to verify the following:

1. Loading capacities for supports.
2. Perforation base area for cable trays according to the specified Class.

CABLE TRAYS 16139/ Page 1 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Free base area for cable ladders according to the specified Class.

G. Factory Test: Submit Factory tests including safe working load, deflection tests and measurement
of steel and galvanization thicknesses.

H. Maintenance Data: For cable trays to be included in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 01.

I. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed cable
trays in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 01.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components through one source from a single
manufacturer.

B. Comply with the following standards:

1. IEC 61537.
2. ISO 1461.
3. ISO 12944-2.

As an alternative, cable trays in compliance with NEMA VE1 are acceptable.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Materials shall not be stored in damp and open environment and shall be stored in covered places
only.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray / ladder with other installations to ensure clear
access to the cable trays to facilitate maintenance, checking and further pulling of cables.

1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and
as approved by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc. (U.S.A.)

2. Thomas & Betts (U.S.A.)
3. Swifts (U.K.)
4. Wibe (Sweden)

B. Locally manufactured cable trays / ladders are acceptable subject to compliance with design
requirements.

CABLE TRAYS 16139/ Page 2 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.2 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS

A. Cable trays and ladders shall comply with IEC 61537.

B. Cable trays shall meet Class C requirements for perforation free area as per IEC 61537 as a
minimum.

C. Cable ladders shall meet Class Y requirements for free base area as per IEC 61537 as a minimum.

D. Components: To include cable trays or ladders (as shown on the Drawings), bends, elbows, tees,
couplings and plates, rubber grommets, hangers, bracket supports and other system accessories
required for safety and protection of the cable installations. All fittings and accessories shall be
purpose made from the manufacturer. Field fabricated fittings and accessories are not acceptable.

E. Trays: Provide to carry the maximum load of cables with a factor of safety 300% or 90 kg
concentrated load whichever is more stringent.

F. Trays: Heavy gauge perforated sheet steel, heavy duty, hot-dip galvanized after manufacture,
minimum 1.5 mm thickness for cable trays up to 300 mm width and 2 mm thickness for cable
trays exceeding 300 mm width, with sides not less than 50 mm depth for cable trays up to 300 mm
width, 60 mm depth for cable trays exceeding 300 mm width and up to 600 mm width and 85 mm
depth for cable trays exceeding 600 mm width with outwards return flanges, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Fittings shall be made of the same
material as tray. Covers, where shown on the Drawings, shall be minimum 1.0 mm thick for cable
trays up to 600 mm width and 1.5 mm thick for cable trays exceeding 600 mm width and shall be
made of sheet steel hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, snap-on or bolt type, forming a rigid
assembly with the tray.

G. Trays Perforation: Cable trays perforation size and direction shall be properly designed to suit
cable ties or cleats to be used for cable fixation. Contractor shall submit method of cable fixation
for Engineer’s approval prior to installation.

H. Ladders: Hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, fabricated from 2 mm mild carbon steel. Ladder
side channels shall be minimum 125 x 22 mm, strengthened by reinforcing inserts for torsional
rigidity. Rungs shall be slotted to take cable cleats or ties and conduit clamps. Rungs shall be
minimum 50 x 25 mm channels, spaced at 300 mm centers.

I. Fully controlled, stringent pretreatment process including, alkaline de-greasing, rinsing, pickling,
fluxing and drying shall be carried out before hot dip galvanizing.

J. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with ISO 1461, applied after fabrication with local coat
thickness of 45 µm (local coating mass of 325 g/m2) and mean coat thickness of 55 µm (mean
coating mass of 395 g/m2). Cable trays manufactured to NEMA VE1 shall have galvanization in
accordance with NEMA VE 1 requirements.

K. Cable trays / ladders installed in corrosive atmosphere shall be provided with powder coating over
hot dip galvanization of high chemical resistant polyster / epoxy to meet the requireemnts of the
below classification. High bonding between the galvanizing and the paint finish shall be certified
by the manufacturer with a guaranteed life of 20 years.

1. For installations in outdoor industrial areas and coastal areas with moderate salinity and
indoor in swimming pools, chemical plants, coastal ship and boatyards; use galvanization
and powder coating in compliance with corrosion risk category C4 to ISO 12944-2.
2. For installations in outdoor industrial areas with high humidity and aggressive atmosphere
and in indoor areas with almost permanent condensation and with high pollution; use
galvanization and powder coating in compliance with corrosion risk category C5-I to ISO
12944-2.

CABLE TRAYS 16139/ Page 3 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

L. Bolts and Screws: Cadmium plated or electrolytically galvanized.

M. Sizes: Trays and ladders shall be standard metric sizes, 150, 300, 450, 600 and 900 mm wide, and
at least 3 m length of section. Size of tray or ladder shall be determined by number and sizes of
cables in accordance with the Regulations and / or as shown on the Drawings. Tray or ladder shall
have strength and rigidity to provide support for cables contained within. Deflection between
supports shall comply with IEC 61537 requirements.

N. Earthing connector for trays or ladders shall be provided on each coupling between adjacent
sections.

O. Products shall be provided with stamped markings by manufacturers.

P. Cable trays and ladders shall be provided with galvanized ventilated sunshade covers when
installed in outdoor locations. Sun shade and fixings shall be from the same manufacturer of cable
tray/ladder.

Q. Finish of the cable trays/ladders used outdoors shall be certified to be UV stabilized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cable tray / ladder level and supporting system according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Spare capacity shall be 25 % for vertical installations and 15% for horizontal installations.

C. Each run shall be completed before installation of cables. Submit calculations taking into
consideration the maximum cables load on cable trays with a factor of safety 300%.

D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays / ladders. Fix trays / ladders using approved
suspension rods or uni-struts or angle brackets at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m and as per the
approved supports calculations.

E. Cables Fixation: Secure cables to tray / ladder with purpose made straps, cleats or saddles as
specified in Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables" ". Cable cleats and ties shall be
correctly sized and tightened to secure the cable without indenting the insulation sheath.

F. Cables Arrangement: Arrange cables in one layer only, with minimum spacing of one diameter of
the larger of the two adjacent cables or of a trefoil formation of single core cable circuit, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.

G. Cables Bending Radius: Cables installation on trays / ladders shall ensure that the minimum cable
bending radius as recommended by the manufacturer is not violated.

H. Cables Installation on Trays / Ladders: Use necessary rollers and pulleys at proper spacing for
installation of large and long run cables. Pulleys / rollers shall be fixed to structural elements and
not cable trays / ladders. Necessary pulling tools such as basket grips or pulling eyes shall be used
with a proper force and speed to ensure not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommended maximum
cable pulling tension.

I. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray / ladder and to
equipment. Support cable tray / ladder independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable
tray / ladder on equipment enclosure.

CABLE TRAYS 16139/ Page 4 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J. Install expansion connectors where cable tray / ladder crosses a building expansion joint and in
cable tray / ladder runs that exceed 39 m, unless otherwise calculated by the manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer considering a maximum movement of 25 mm.

K. Make cable tray / ladder connections, changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
Fittings shall be properly curved / designed to satisfy the minimum bending radius requirements
and avoid sharp edges / corners.

L. Locate cable tray / ladder above piping, unless accessibility to cable tray / ladder is required or
unless otherwise indicated.

M. Seal penetrations through fire zones or smoke barriers as specified in Division 07 Section "
Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

N. If cable trays / ladders are sized for future cables, furnish necessary provisions for penetrations
with capped sleeves for future cables through fire-rated partitions, or use "repairable" fire
stopping-penetration sealing material.

O. Workspace: Install cable trays / ladders with sufficient space to permit access for installing cables.
Minimum clearance of 250 mm shall be maintained between top of tray / ladder and ceiling,
beams and other services and between tray / ladders in multi-tier formation.

P. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.

Q. Labeling of trays shall be provided at every change in direction and at every 12 meters on straight
runs. Size of letters and color of labels, marking and references shall be as per the relevant
standard regulations.

R. Cable trays/ladders shall not be installed in lengths below water/sewage pipes.

S. Electrical continuity strips / links shall be provided by the manufacturer of the tray/ladder.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground cable trays / ladders according to manufacturer's instructions.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values.

3.3 WARNING SIGNS

A. After installation of cable trays / ladders is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on
or near cable trays / ladders.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections in coordination with the contractor as proper and
applicable:

1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protrusions in cable
trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or
have caused damage.
2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays meet specification and the
approved Shop Drawings requirements. Verify that communications or data-processing
circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.

CABLE TRAYS 16139/ Page 5 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the
cable tray.
4. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
5. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and re-torque
in suspect areas.
6. Verify that no corroded units are present.
7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.
8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace
with specified hardware.
9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all
takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity.
Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.

B. Grounding: Do not use metal trays / ladders as earth continuity conductor. Connect trays / ladders
by flexible tinned copper straps to nearest bare earthing conductor and at maximum 30-m spacing.

C. Replace malfunctioning units and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

D. Prepare test and inspection method for Engineer’s approval. Submit test reports after completion
on site.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of cable tray / ladder installation, including fittings, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer that ensure cable tray / ladder is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray /
ladder manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
cable tray / ladder manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 16139

CABLE TRAYS 16139/ Page 6 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes wiring devices, lighting switches, socket outlets, cord outlets, automatic and
manual lighting control equipment, dimmers, outlet boxes and plates, etc.

B. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with one set
of approved Standards.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for boxes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature, manufacturer's
name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and special features, as
applicable for each item.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Exact indication of position of each item and outlet box and fitting on layout drawings,
with box and equipment types and sizes.
2. Installation details of special devices including fans etc.
3. Wiring diagrams of special items.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of device to be approved by the client and interior design.

D. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with related Standards.

B. Source Limitations for Front of House (FOH) wiring devices: Obtain all FOH wiring devices
(including data and low current devices) components and accessories from single source from
single manufacturer.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 1 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish 3 % (with minimum of four each) extra materials for all products that match those
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:
1. Schneider Electric
2. Schneider Electric / Square D
3. MK/Honeywell
4. Legrand
5. G.E.

2.2 PLATES, GENERALLY

A. Blank Plates: Blank plates are to be installed on outlet boxes, specified under Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes", on which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus installed does not
have suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be attached by a bridge with slots
for horizontal and vertical adjustment.

B. Floor outlets and plates are to be watertight and impact resistant.

2.3 PLATES AND CORD-OUTLETS

A. Design: Square, rectangular or round designed to cover outlet box and to closely fit electrical
device, and with polished chromium plated recessed head fixing screws. Combination plates are
to be used for grouped outlets and devices.

B. Cord extension plates are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material and finish as
plates.

C. Plastic Plates: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color, for general use
in BOH areas

1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Logic Plus

D. Steel Plates: Heavy gauge, brushed steel, satin finish, minimum 1 mm thick, for use as shown on
drawings

1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Aspect

E. All Cover plates (finish and material) shall be approved by the interior architect engineer and the
client /operator by a submitted sample.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 2 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Cable/cord outlet (flex outlet) is to be used for up to 45 A, 250 V rating for connection of
power/control cable of fixed appliances, as shown on the drawings. Plate is to have threaded cord
grip to anchor cable securely to cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable clamp for
termination of cable/cord within.

G. Electrical outlet is to consist of outlet box, cover plate, and necessary accessories ready for
connection to cable of fixed appliances.

H. Lighting outlet is to consist of outlet box, cover plate, and necessary accessories ready for
connection to lighting fixture.

I. Ceiling rose: similar to lighting outlet equipped with a decorative element affixed to the ceiling
from which a chandelier or lighting fitting is suspended. Ceiling rose to comply with BS 67.

2.4 SWITCHES

A. Generally: Quick-make, quick-break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting molded base,
with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive loads up to full rated
capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.

B. Types: Single, two-way or intermediate, single pole or double pole, as shown on the Drawings.

C. General Lighting Switch (S1): 10 A, 240 V a.c., rocker operated, grid-switch with plastic plate, for
indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Man: Legrand
2. Ref: Synergy 7300 00, or other equal and approved.

D. General Lighting Switch (S2): 10 A, 240 V a.c., rocker operated, grid-switch with decorative face
plate, for indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated. The material of the face plate
shall be lacquered brushed steel with beach pebble color for the inserts (this represents the design
intent approved by AI), however sample should be provided to be approved by ID engineer and
client /operator before approving the material submittal.

1. Man: MK/Honeywell
2. Ref: K24331LBS, or other equal and approved.

E. Weatherproof Switch (S3): 10 A, 250 V, for installation outdoors, with weatherproof plate,
synthetic gasket, weatherproof outlet box, on/off indication, IP 56 enclosure.

1. Man: MK
2. Ref: 56400 GRY or other equal and approved.

F. Dimmable Switch (S7): similar to S2 but with dimmable switch instead of rocker grid switch for
installation indoor, for indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Remote Lighting Control Panel For Contactor Control: Multiple two way momentary on/off push
switch assembly, with an 'on' pilot light for each circuit controlled (remote contactor). Panel and
box are to be sheet steel construction, with see-through steel-framed acrylic door and trim, handle
and lock. Enclosure protection IP 42 to IEC 60947-1 for indoor installation and IP 55 for outdoor
installation.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 3 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Staircase Time Lag Switch: Comprising 16 A magnetic contactor 240 V a.c., 50 Hz, withstanding
inductive and resistive loads, and holding timer relay adjustable 0.5 to 5 minutes. Pressing remote
pushbutton is to immediately reset timer to preset delay period, regardless of timer position. Over-
ride switch, rated 16 A, is to bridge contactor when permanent illumination is required.

I. Double Pole Switch (S20): Rated (as shown on the Drawings), 250 V a.c., tumbler operated, to
IEC 60669-1, with stainless steel or molded plastic plate (as required in application area), marked
(etched) with equipment controlled (i.e. cooker, air conditioner, water heater) and with red neon
pilot light for "on" position. Switch is to be mounted to flush or surface box, as required or as
shown on the Drawings, and provided with cord outlet and cord extension to equipment
controlled.
1. Man: MK/Honeywell
2. Ref: K5423 WHI, or other equal and approved.

J. Water heater outlet and 20 A double pole switch.

1. Man: MK/Honeywell
2. Ref: K5423 WH WHI, or other equal and approved.

2.5 SOCKET OUTLETS

A. Generally: To have injection molded plastic base with self-adjusting, non-expanding contacts to
prevent permanent distortion, arranged for side and/or back connection and with screw terminals
accepting at least three parallel branch-circuit wires.

B. Types: General-purpose socket outlets are to conform to standard British practice.

C. Duplex sockets are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with break-off feature for
two-circuit connection.

D. Weatherproof socket outlets are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in surface mounted cast
metal box and with cover comprising spring-retained gasket hinged flap. Enclosure is to be pre-
designed box and cover for type of socket outlet specified.

E. All sockets (for all types) supplied from UPS source shall be red colored.

F. Standard British Socket Outlet - Type R01 (230 V Service): To BS 1363, polarized, grounding
type, with three rectangular pin-holes (two poles and earth), rated 13 A, 250 V, switched, with
robust shutter mechanism operated by earth pin, used in with decorative finish used in FOH areas,
indoors. The material of the face plate shall be lacquered brushed steel with beach pebble color for
the inserts (this represents the design intent approved by AI), however sample should be provided
to be approved by ID engineer and client /operator before approving the material submittal.

1. Man: M.K./Honeywell or other approved equal.

2. Ref: Aspect K24357LBS with beach pebble insert color or other approved equal.

G. Standard British Socket Outlet - Type R02 (230 V Service): To BS 1363, polarized, grounding
type, with three rectangular pin-holes (two poles and earth), rated 13 A, 250 V, switched, with
white plastic plate and switch unless otherwise requested by the Engineer or interior designer, and
with robust shutter mechanism operated by earth pin, used in , used in BOH areas such as BOH
offices, meeting rooms and administrative areas, corridors storages and indoors and where shown
on Drawings, this is subject to the engineer approval . All sockets (for all types) supplied from
UPS source shall be red colored.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 4 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Man: M.K./Honeywell or other approved equal.

2. Ref: Logic Plus K2757 WHI or other equal and approved.

H. Universal socket outlets type R03 (230 V service): 13 A, 240V, three holes-pins with multiple pin
configuration, switched type, with decorative cover, to be used as shown on the drawings, finish
material and color should match R01 finishes and colors, however sample should be provided to
be approved by ID engineer and client /operator before approving the material submittal.

I. Weatherproof Socket Outlet - Type R05 (230 V SERVICE): 13 A, 250 V, switched, 2 pole plus
earth, to BS 1363, enclosed flush on wall cast-metal box and with cover comprising spring-
retained gasket hinged flap, with minimum IP56.

1. Man: M.K./Honeywell or other approved equal.

2. K56486 GRY with flush mounting frames / bezels or other approved.

J. Weatherproof Socket Outlet - Type R06 (230 V SERVICE): 13 A, 250 V, switched, 2 pole plus
earth, to BS 1363, enclosed surface mounted on wall cast-metal box and with cover comprising
spring- retained gasket hinged flap, with minimum IP56.

1. Man: M.K./Honeywell or other approved equal.

2. K56486 GRY or other approved.

K. USB socket outlets type R08 (230 V service): 2A, 5Vdc, charging module, with decorative finish,
to be used as shown on the drawings, finish material and color should match R01 finishes and
colors, however sample should be provided to be approved by ID engineer and client /operator
before approving the material submittal.

L. Weatherproof Socket Outlet Type R10 (230 V SERVICE): similar to R01 but provided with flush
mounted enclosed transparent /decorative IP55 cover (similar to MK - Guardian Weather shield GWS
IP55 or other approved equal) to be approved by ID engineer and client /operator before approving
the material submittal.

M. Overhead socket system Type R15 (230 V SERVICE): hanging service modules providing a
portable and convenient system, provided with Suspension bar, grab hand and capable of
positioning the unit easily, the unit should contain four polarized, grounding type, with three
rectangular pin-holes (two poles and earth), rated 13 A, 250 V, switched, IP55. The unit should be
provided with all related suspension accessories:

1. Man: M.K./Honeywell or other approved equal.

2. Hangmann SM49005 or other approved.

N. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R17 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used at bedside as shown on the drawings, housing one universal socket typeR03 and
one USB socket type R08, each socket should have its own dedicated line and neutral source/input
power point separate from other sockets within the face plate, finish material and color should
match R01 finishes and colors, however sample should be provided to be approved by ID engineer
and client /operator before approving the material submittal.

O. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R18 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used beside the guestroom desk as shown on the drawings, housing two universal
socket type R03 and one simplex USB socket type R08, and capable of housing one RJ45 data
outlet (as shown in CKR drawings), each socket should have its own dedicated line and neutral
source/input power point separate from other sockets within the face plate, finish material and
color should match R01 finishes and colors, however sample should be provided to be approved
by ID engineer and client /operator before approving the material submittal.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 5 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

P. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R19 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used beside guest room/apartments as shown on the drawings, housing two simplex
R01 sockets and capable of housing one RJ45 telephone outlet (as shown in CKR drawings), each
socket should have its own dedicated line and neutral source/input power point separate from other
sockets within the face plate, finish material and color should match R01 finishes and colors,
however sample should be provided to be approved by ID engineer and client before approving
the material submittal.

Q. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R20 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used beside guest room/apartments as shown on the drawings, housing two simplex
R01 sockets and one simplex R08 and capable of housing one RJ45 telephone outlet (as shown in
CKR drawings), each socket should have its own dedicated line and neutral source/input power
point separate from other sockets within the face plate, finish material and color should match R01
finishes and colors, however sample should be provided to be approved by ID engineer and client
before approving the material submittal.

R. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R21 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used beside guest room/apartments as shown on the drawings, housing two simplex
R01 sockets and one simplex R08 and one simplex R03 and capable of housing one RJ45
telephone outlet (as shown in CKR drawings), each socket should have its own dedicated line and
neutral source/input power point separate from other sockets within the face plate, finish material
and color should match R01 finishes and colors, however sample should be provided to be
approved by ID engineer and client before approving the material submittal.

S. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R22 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used beside guest room/apartments as shown on the drawings, housing three simplex
R01 sockets capable of housing one RJ45 telephone outlet (as shown in CKR drawings), each
socket should have its own dedicated line and neutral source/input power point separate from other
sockets within the face plate, finish material and color should match R01 finishes and colors,
however sample should be provided to be approved by ID engineer and client before approving
the material submittal.

T. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R23 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used beside guest room/apartments as shown on the drawings, housing two simplex
R01 sockets and capable of housing one RJ45 telephone outlet (as shown in CKR drawings), each
socket should have its own dedicated line and neutral source/input power point separate from other
sockets within the face plate, finish material and color should match R01 finishes and colors,
however sample should be provided to be approved by ID engineer and client before approving
the material submittal.

U. Combined wall sockets in one face plate type R24 (230 V service): flush mounted, with decorative
cover, to be used beside guest room/apartments as shown on the drawings, housing two simplex
R01 sockets and one simplex R08 socket, each socket should have its own dedicated line and
neutral source/input power point separate from other sockets within the face plate, finish material
and color should match R01 finishes and colors, however sample should be provided to be
approved by ID engineer and client before approving the material submittal.

V. Power Socket - Type R41: Single outlet, single phase, three wire, industrial power socket 16 A,
250 V, polarized with L-shaped earth contact, splash proof molded cast metal plate and matching
plug.

W. Power Socket - Type R42: Single outlet, single phase, three wire, industrial power socket 32 A,
250 V, polarized with L-shaped earth contact, splash proof molded cast metal plate and matching
plug.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 6 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

X. Power Socket - Type R45: Single outlet, single phase, three wire, industrial power socket 40 A,
250 V, polarized with L-shaped earth contact, splash proof molded cast metal plate and matching
plug.

Y. Industrial Socket Outlet - Type R43: 3 phase, 16 A, 3P+N+E, 380-415 V, industrial power socket ,
single, with aluminum alloy enclosure, interlocked switch and matching plug.

Z. Shaver Socket - Type R55: Specially designed for use with electric shavers, incorporating dual
voltage isolating transformer 110/220 V and voltage selector switch. Socket is to be universal
type, accepting round pin (Continental) and flat pin (American) plugs with disconnecting switch to
isolate transformer from supply. Transformer is to be protected by over-current, self-resetting
thermal device. Socket is to be molded plastic with flush plate as per ID approval marked with
available voltage and function of both selector and disconnecting switches. Marked with available
voltage and function of both selector and disconnecting switches. Finish material and color should
match R01 finishes and colors. The finish and color should be approved by ID engineer and client
before approving the material submittal.

Z.AA. Cooker Control Unit- R07: Comprising 40 A, double pole switch with pilot light and standard 30
A switched and shuttered socket outlet also with pilot light, both under common plate of ivory
colored impact resistant plastic engraved with indication of function and position of both switches.

AA.BB. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet (floor box) - Type R60 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor
mounted steel box housing one duplex socket outlet type R02 and one UPS duplex socket outlet
type R02, and capable of housing four RJ45/Dante/ HDMI/ broad Casting outlets as shown in
ELV drawings, with steel cover, cover final finish shall match the floor finish material, the floor
box shall include all related accessories to accommodate the required electrical fixtures.

BB.CC. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet ( floor box ) - Type R61 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor
mounted metal box housing one simplex socket outlet type R02 and capable of housing two
RJ45/Dante/ HDMI/ broad Casting outlets as shown in ELV drawings, with metal cover, cover
final finish shall match the floor finish material.

CC.DD. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet ( floor box ) - Type R62 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor
mounted metal box housing three simplex socket outlet type R02, with metal cover, and capable of
housing two RJ45/Dante/ HDMI/ broad Casting outlets as shown in ELV drawings cover final
finish shall match the floor finish material.

DD.EE. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet ( floor box ) - Type R63 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor
mounted metal box housing two simplex socket outlet type R02 each socket should have its
dedicated line and neutral source/input power point, and capable of housing six RJ45/Dante/
HDMI/ broad Casting outlets as shown in ELV drawings, with metal cover, cover final finish
shall match the floor finish material.

EE.FF. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet ( floor box ) - Type R64 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor mounted
metal box housing two duplex socket outlet type R02, and capable of housing six RJ45/Dante/
HDMI/ broad Casting outlets as shown in ELV drawings, with metal cover, cover final finish
shall match the floor finish material.

FF.GG. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet ( floor box ) - Type R65 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor
mounted metal box housing one simplex socket outlet type R03 and one simplex socket type R08,
and capable of housing four RJ45/Dante/ HDMI/ broad Casting outlets as shown in ELV
drawings, with metal cover, cover final finish shall match the floor finish material.

GG.HH. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet ( floor box ) - Type R66 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor
mounted metal box housing two simplex socket outlet type R07, with metal cover, cover final
finish shall match the floor finish material.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 7 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

HH.II. Floor Mounted Socket Outlet ( floor box ) - Type R67 (230 V SERVICE): Flush floor mounted
metal box housing two duplex socket outlet type R02, with metal cover, cover final finish shall
match the floor finish material.

II.JJ. Wiring devices located on each side of the guest room bed and beside the guest room desk should
be combined in one face plate as indicated/required on drawings.

2.6 PLUGS

A. Type: Compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact resistant molded
insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and cord grip and of shape
Providing Easy Hand-Grip For Removal.

B. Quantity: Supply number equal to 20% of total number of each type of socket outlet supplied.

C. Fuses for standard British type sockets are to be standard 13 A cartridge fuses fitted in plug.

2.7 SPECIAL DEVICES

A. Lighting Contactors

1. Type: Double pole for single phase and neutral circuits, and triple or four-pole for three
phase circuits, mechanically held, electrically operated, rated 500 V, of current ratings
shown on the Drawings, and complying with the appropriate category of IEC 60947-4-1
Table 1.

2. Contacts: Copper alloy, with silver cadmium alloy double break contacts designed for
switching inductive ballast loads and switching of tungsten lamp loads.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: As required to provide specified interlocks and signals as shown on the
Drawings, or required by the Specification, with one N.O. and one N.C. spare contacts.

4. Enclosure: Unless forming part of system housed in sheet steel panel, contactor is to be
provided with IP 42 enclosure for indoor use or IP 65 enclosure for outdoor use.

5. Control: Each contactor whether part of a system or separately enclosed is to have on/off
pilot lights and set of on/off push buttons mounted on cover.

B. Photoelectric Cells

1. Photoelectric Cells: Omnidirectional cadmium sulfide, hermetically sealed, with 2:1 on/off
adjustment possible by moving light level selector, set to operate at illuminance levels
shown on the Drawings. Unit is to include timer giving 3-minute delay to prevent false
switching. Temperature range is to be -10 deg. C to +80 deg. C.

2. Safety: Control is to be designed such that in case of failure, unit fails in the on position.

3. Contacts are to close or open as illumination level increases to set level with respect to
requirements shown on the Drawings.

4. Enclosure: Heavy duty cast metal, with translucent dome of 'Lexan' (by G.E.) or other
equal and approved, to protect against high ultra violet rays, and 180 deg. swivel base and
16 mm threaded conduit mounting. Enclosure is to be weatherproof and protected against
high winds and storms.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 8 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Time-Switch

1. Type And Rating: Clock is to be escapement mechanical type, electrically rewound, with
24 hours dial and time adjustment and rated 10 A, 250 V.

2. Spring reserve mechanism is to allow up to 12 hours operation in the event of power

failure.

3. Switching is to be capable of performing two on and two off operations, adjustable, over 24
hours.

D. Remote Lighting Relay Control System

1. Remote Lighting Relay Panel (RLRP): Comprise set of heavy duty long life service relays,
rated 20 A, 230 V a.c. for switching tungsten or fluorescent lighting loads, SPST
maintained (mechanically latched), with 24 V a.c. split-coil (1/2-on and 1/2-off) for control
by remote push button on/off switches, via 24 V control transformer.

2. Push Button Switch (LS): SPDT, momentary contact, normally open switch with pilot light
and red jewel Lens, Rated 3 A, 25 V A.C.

3. Master Selector Switch Panel (MSSP): Comprise set of push button switches type (LS),
assembled in one unit comprising box and cover, with individual switch per circuit
controlled, and one master switch for all-circuit control.

4. System is to allow local and remote centralized switching of group of lighting circuits and
from any number of individual points. System is to use low voltage (low current) control
circuitry to operate relay switches on branch circuits.

5. Manufacturers: System is to be by G.E. Remote Control Products or other equal and

approved.

E. Contactor Control Panels In Connection With CCMS

1. General: Control panels are to be of equivalent construction to panel boards with respect to
cabinet and interior standards of manufacture, and are to be surface mounted with see-
through door and lock.

2. Construction: Non-standard modular, factory assembled cabinets, designed to receive

appropriate contactors, measuring devices, terminals, relays and the like as required in
conformity with the Drawings for operation of system locally and remotely from central
control and monitoring system (CCMS) console.

3. Control: Switching relays controlled remotely by the CCMS are to be provided with over-
riding manual local individual controls. Appropriate interface components are to be
provided and coordinated with the CCMS described elsewhere in the Specification.

4. Relays, switching components, pilot lights, control transformers, fuses etc. are to be neatly
arranged and mounted inside dust-tight and, where necessary, water-tight cabinets. Control
and indication devices are to be continuously visible and accessible for monitoring and
control.

5. Equipment is to be electrically front shielded and enclosed by sheet metal barriers, readily
accessible and demountable. Wiring is to be neatly arranged, clipped and terminated in
pressure type terminals. Hardware is to be non-corroding and robust material, approved by
the Engineer.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 9 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

6. Control panels are to incorporate three ammeters, one per phase for local readings.

7. Current transformers are to have auxiliaries to enable connection to CCMS.

8. Contactors are to be of the appropriate category, Table 1 to IEC 60947-4-1 generally as

described under paragraph 2.7A hereof. Each contactor is to be protected by an equally
rated circuit breaker of suitable short-circuit capacity at point of application.

9. Overcurrent relay is to be provided with all other accessories. Upon detecting fault on
monitored control panel, corresponding plug-in breaker unit is to trip, and fault signal is to
be sent to CCMS.

10. Instrument and instrument transformers are to be provided as required and/or as indicated
on the Drawings.

11. Current Transformers: Bar primary type to IEC 60044-1 class 0.5 for metering. Current
rating is to be the next higher standard value above maximum demand load current.

12. Ammeters and Voltmeters: Long scale, switchboard type, with shadow proof covers for
semi-flush mounting. Meters are to be approximately 100 mm square with scale covering
approximately 250 degrees.

13. Voltmeter Selector Switches: Rotary type with cam operated contacts, and having 7
positions (off, R-Y, Y-B, B- R, R-N, Y-N, B-N).

14. Test blocks and plugs are to be provided for testing all instruments and instrument
transformers.

F. Door Entrance Systems

1. Door Bell Push Button: Momentary contact, low voltage, with illuminated label holder
under glassene, flush box and stainless steel plate, and electronic microphone for two-way
communication.

2. Chime: Electronic, with built-in double-wound transformer, 8V - 12V secondary protected

by fuses; primary voltage to correspond with building power supply voltage at location.
Chime is to be two-tone, double insulated, 80 dB at 1-m distance, adjustable output. It is to
be possible to operate chime by 9 V alkaline battery.

3. Wiring: Minimum 1 mm2, PVC insulated copper conductor, run in separate conduit from
all other services. Multi-core cable to each apartment is to be supplied as required by
system.

4. Multi push button outdoor station is to comprise flush wall box, anodized aluminum front
plate gasket to box, with number of push buttons and corresponding illuminated labels
shown on the Drawings, and with electronic microphone unit (talk and listen), amplifier,
transformer and power package with output at 24 V d.c. operated from building power
supply.

5. CCTV Door Entry Kit is to comprise fixed adjustable focus and tilt video camera and
ambient lighting device, in addition to the call button and label holder.

6. Indoor Apartment Receiver Unit: Wall mounted, with built-in chime, intercom handset,
door release push button, and push-to-talk button.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 10 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

7. Indoor Apartment CCTV Unit: Wall mounted, with built-in chime, intercom handset, door
release push button, 4.5-inch TV monitor (picture dimensions 93 x 74 mm), with contrast
and brightness buttons and press-to-talk button. Upon pressing outdoor station button,
camera's ambient lighting device is to switch on the camera. Image of visitor is to
immediately appear on TV monitor when push-to-talk button is pressed, and is to switch
off automatically 90 seconds after release of button.

8. Door Release: Weather-proof, suitably designed for left or right opening, fitted with
manual release and key lock, and operated from low voltage supply (8V - 12V d.c.)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment. Exact
locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any condition that
would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer. Locate switches
at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or not. In locating outlets allow for
overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of finishing, window trim, paneling
and other engineering features.

B. Mounting heights for outlet boxes and similar equipment are to be uniform within the same or
similar areas. Mounting is to be as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Unless
otherwise shown or instructed, mount lighting switches and socket outlets generally at 1200 mm
and 300 mm from finished floor level respectively. Mount switches with long dimension vertical
and operating handle, if of the toggle type, up when in the on position.

C. Additional outlets to those shown on the Drawings are to be provided as required by equipment
manufacturers for control or other wiring.

D. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, allowing for
thickness of finishing, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishing to original
condition before installation of fittings or plates.

E. Appearance: Install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished wall surface.
Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface without gaps, and fully
covering the box.

F. Grouped Outlets: Arrange neatly so that use of fittings is convenient and clear.

G. Waterproof and Explosion-Proof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and
connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.

H. Damaged Fittings: Reject damaged fittings or plates with damaged finish. Protect fittings and
plates against damage after installation and until handed over.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify
each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 11 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use machine-
printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire
markers or tags within outlet boxes.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Single pole switches are to switch the phase wire. Do not run neutral wire through switches
having neutral shunt or bridge.

B. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or lead
anchors.

C. Connection Of Appliances:

1. Where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring to
incoming terminals inside appliance.
2. Where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install the connecting wiring in
flexible conduit firmly fixed to outlet box cover plate and to terminal box on appliance.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-

tightening values.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Visual Inspection: Fittings and equipment are to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.

B. Megger tests are to include switch and socket outlet tests together with insulation resistance of
wiring installations.

C. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.

D. Equipment is to be insulation tested and observed, under full-load for not less than 3 days
operation, with respect to undue heating and performance in general.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.

END OF SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES 16140 / Page 12 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole
lighting relays and contactors.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for lighting
control devices.

B. Samples: Occupancy sensors for color selection and evaluation of technical features.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total responsibility
for compatibility of lighting control system components specified in this Section, in Division 16,.."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components specified in
other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components. Match components and
interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions. Include coordination with the
following:

1. Division 16 Section "Lighting Controls."

2. Division 16 Section "Panelboards."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 / Page 1 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Contactors and Relays:

a. Automatic Switch Co. (ASCO)/Emerson Electric (USA)

b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.
c. Cutler-Hammer /Eaton Corporation (USA)
d. Siemens-Furnas Controls (USA)
e. GE Lighting Controls (USA)
f. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. (USA)
g. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. (Germany)
h. Schneider Electric (France)
i. Schneider Electric / Square D (USA)
j. GE/Zenith Controls, Inc.
k. ABB (USA)

2. Time Switches:

a. Diversified Electronics, Inc.

b. Grasslin Controls Corp.
c. Intermatic, Inc.
d. Leviton Manufacturing.
e. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
f. Tork, Inc.
g. GE/Zenith Controls, Inc.

3. Photoelectric Relays:

a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. (USA)

b. Area Lighting Research, Inc./Tyco Inc. (USA)
c. Fisher Pierce. (USA)
d. Grasslin Controls, Corp. (USA)
e. Intermatic, Inc. (USA)
f. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. (USA)
g. M H Rhodes/Cranes Co. (USA)
h. SSAC, Inc. (USA)
i. Tork, Inc. (USA)

4. Occupancy Sensors:

a. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices. (USA)

b. BRK Electronics. (USA)
c. Bryant Electric. (USA)
d. Honeywell, Inc.; Home and Building Controls. (USA)
e. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. (USA)
f. Lightolier. (USA)
g. Lithonia Control Systems. (USA)
h. MyTech Corporation. (USA)
i. Novitas, Inc. (USA)
j. RAB Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. (USA)
k. SenTec, Inc. (USA)
l. Sterner Lighting Systems, Inc. (USA)
m. Tork, Inc. (USA)
n. Touch-plate Lighting Inc.. (USA)

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 / Page 2 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

o. Unenco Electronics (A Hubbell Co.). (USA)

p. Watt Stopper, Inc. / Legrand. (USA)

2.2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all line voltage solid-state equipment.

2.3 TIME SWITCHES

A. Description: Solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display.

B. Description: Electromechanical-dial type.

1. Astronomic dial.
2. Two contacts, rated 30-A unless otherwise indicated.
3. Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2-A unless otherwise indicated.
4. Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
5. Skip-day mode.

2.4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Description: Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate connected
relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input.

B. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 37 673 lx, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn-off levels.

C. Time Delay: Prevents false operation.

D. Indoor Ceiling- or Wall-Mounting Units: Adjustable for turn-on/turn-off levels, semiflush,

calibrated to detect adequacy of daylighting in perimeter locations, and arranged to turn artificial
illumination on and off to suit varying intensities of available daylighting.

E. Indoor Skylight Units: Housed in a threaded plastic fitting for mounting under skylight.

F. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with
sun-glare shield and ice preventer.

2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives control power from a separately mounted auxiliary power
and control unit, and operates power-switching contacts in that unit.

B. Operation: Turns lights on when room or covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied,
unless otherwise indicated.

1. Time Delay for Turning Lights Off: Adjustable over a range from 1 to 15 minutes,
minimum.
2. Manual Override Switch: Turns lights off manually regardless of elapsed time delay.

C. Auxiliary Power and Control Units: As follows:

1. Relays rated for a minimum of 20-A normal ballast load or 13-A tungsten filament or high-
inrush ballast load.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 / Page 3 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Sensor Power Supply: Rated to supply the number of connected sensors.

D. Passive-Infrared Type: Detects occupancy by a combination of heat and movement in zone of

coverage. Each sensor detects occupancy anywhere in an area of 93 sq. m by detecting occurrence
of 150-mm minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a minimum target
of 232 sq. cm to the sensor.

E. Ultrasonic Type: Emits a beam of ultrasonic energy and detects occupancy through use of
Doppler's principle in discerning movement in zone of coverage by sensing a change in pattern of
reflected ultrasonic energy.

F. Dual-Technology Type: Uses a combination of passive-infrared and ultrasonic detection methods

to distinguish between occupied and unoccupied conditions for area covered. Particular
technology or combination of technologies that controls each function (on or off) is selectable in
the field by operating controls on unit.

2.6 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS

A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Consistent with type of load served, including tungsten
filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total harmonic
distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements
in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit for
wall-mounting devices.

3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions
and as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for low-voltage connections and
Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Systems" for digital circuits.

B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes."

C. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes," unless run in accessible ceiling space and gypsum board partitions.

D. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

E. Ground equipment.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 / Page 4 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

F. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days' advance
notice.

B. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six months.

D. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components.
Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Continuity tests of circuits.

2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions.

a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational

conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional observations.

E. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements
are met.

F. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship
and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three
Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes, and adjust
sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

END OF SECTION 16145

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 / Page 5 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16231 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes emergency power plant installation comprising the following:

1. Diesel generating set(s), with associated auxiliaries, exhaust system, start-up system,
cooling system, fuel system, batteries and charger etc.
2. Fuel storage and transfer system
3. Instrumentation, protection and control equipment
4. Outdoor enclosure
5. Manually operated overhead hoist
6. Inter-plant cabling and wiring
7. Earthing.
8. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. .
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for muffler and exhaust pipe insulation.
3. Division 15 Section "Fuel Oil Piping" for interior fuel piping and fuel storage tank.
4. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping" for coolant piping external to engine generator.
5. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for combustion air and radiator fan discharge
connections.
6. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"
7. Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches, including sensors and relays
to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generator sets.
8. Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables"
9. Division 16 section "Grounding and Bonding"

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not limited to,
the following:

1. General description and characteristics of engine- generating sets, standards with which
components comply, site rating and overload capability, overall efficiency, and fuel and
lubricant consumption at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% of rated load.
2. Description and operating criteria of engine; type, model, manufacturer, fuel and
lubricating oil types and specific consumption, starting conditions and starting periods from
cold to full-load pick-up, governor and response characteristics due to sudden load
changes, super-charger, fuel injection system, cooling system and radiator, air filters, fuel
filters, soot filters, oil filters and pumps.
3. Description and operating criteria of generator, exciter and voltage regulator, with loading
response and short-circuit characteristics, insulation, cooling and accessories.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 1 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

4. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and other
components specified, weights and forces, mounting methods, vibration protection etc.
5. Battery type, make, charge/discharge characteristics, capacity and constructional features.
6. Battery charger, method of charging, equalizing and trickle charging.
7. Daily fuel tanks, pipes and accessories; materials and construction.
8. Exhaust system and silencers; materials and construction.
9. Control instruments, protection, alarms, cut-outs, indicating lamps, indicating instruments
and all other devices or components.
10. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
11. Synchronization system where specified for two or more sets are in parallel, including
technical data, instruments, governor and voltage regulation, with characteristic curves etc.
12. Calculation of noise levels in dBA at typical points within engine room and at various
locations inside and outside.
13. Calculation of static pressure on radiator fan including indication of Manufacturer’s
required C.F.M. and fan static pressure.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Certified manufacturers' dimensional drawings, templates and installation instructions for

equipment and accessories, showing weights and distribution of forces, location and size of
cabling (power and control), piping connections to equipment, and other pertinent data.
2. Plans and elevations of all equipment.
3. Separate unit wiring diagrams, schematics and interconnecting wiring diagrams.
4. Constructional details of daily service fuel tank, including outline drawings showing piping
arrangements, connections and dimensions.
5. Complete execution drawings of associated auxiliaries.
6. Overall Single Line Diagram of the plant, indicating ratings of different equipment and
metering & protection devices.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Routine Tests and Factory Test Reports: Fully assembled plant or equipment shall be tested at the
factory, before shipping. Complete performance tests shall be carried out under site simulated
conditions, in accordance with the Standards and as described in the Specification, showing
evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

F. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection records
relative to compliance with performance requirements.

G. Sound measurement test report.

H. Generator sizing calculation and stepping criteria as per the design drawings and loads to comply
that the provided size is sufficient for the design load.

I. Supplier to verify and confirm that the available design/ site spaces for the generator are adequate
for generators installation and ventilation..etc. and will not affect the generator capacity
performance and life time.

J. Field test report of tests specified in Part 3.

K. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Detail operating instructions for both normal and abnormal conditions.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 2 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice and
maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to support day to
day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer may disqualify a
manufacturer.

B. Standards: Equipment and component parts shall comply with ISO 3046, ISO 8528, IEC 60034,
IEC 60085 and CISPR, or equivalent NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and DIN Standards and
recommendations of ABGSM (Association of British Set Manufacturers) where such standards
meet with or supersede the ISO and IEC Standards.

C. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain all system components and accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective
wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent
damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from such
hazards.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Taking Over certificateSubstantial Completion.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the generator Installer. Include monthly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper generator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use
parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.
2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.

a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation of the
plant. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation together with current
prices. Pack with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents.

B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection,
testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the manufacturer.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 3 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.9 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Factory testing units for 20% of the total number of the generators to be supplied, minimum one
unit shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Selection of generators for witness test shall be randomly
carried out by the Engineer and shall cover all ratings to be delivered. Witness test shall include
complete routine and function testing. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for approval
prior to test conduction, by at least 14 days. The Contractor shall include in his price the costs for
one factory witness test visit in manufacturer premises for two persons from the
Engineer/Employer side, including travel on business class flights and all costs of five stars hotel
accommodation, local transportation and test expenses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Caterpillar (U.S.A.)
2. Cummins (Onan) (U.S.A./ U.K.)
3. Deutz (Germany)
4. Kohler (U.S.A.)
5. M.T.U. (Germany)
6. MAN-B&W (Germany)
7. Volvo (Sweden)
8. Wartsila (Finland)
9. Perkins (UK)
10. Pet bow (UK)

2.2 PLANT DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Class: Diesel generator set shall be class G2 (20% voltage drop / free drop at 100%
loading) to ISO 8528-1.

B. Generator Set Assembly: Compact package type, with all equipment mounted on one rigid steel
bed frame suitable for skidding. Radiator shall be mounted on the set or remotely as shown on the
Drawings. Design shall permit easy operation, maintenance and repair.

C. Vibration reduction shall be achieved by appropriate design and careful balancing at factory.
Compact set shall have approved anti-vibration isolators of steel spring or resilient neoprene
between rotating equipment and bed-frame, limiting transmission of vibration to building to a
maximum of 0.04 mm amplitude throughout the operating vibration frequency range.

D. Noise reduction shall be achieved by approved methods at source of noise, including all necessary
acoustic louvers, inlet and outlet air attenuators, residential exhaust silencer(s), acoustic treatment
of the room walls, floors, doors and ceiling, etc. with sound level measured at 1 m in any direction
outside the room/enclosure limited to 80 dBA in accordance with ISO standards for residential
areas. Generator supplier to coordinate with the main contractor for the required installations.

E. Sand trap louvers: generator room louvers shall be of approved sand trap type if required on the
drawings or recommended by the Manufacturer. Contractor to coordinate with the building works
for the required installations.

F. Cold Starting: Engine shall be fully equipped to start and pick up initial load specified at specified
minimum ambient temperature. Provide coolant heater.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 4 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Equipment ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings or the next higher standard ratings provided
by the manufacturer. Ratings shall be net Standby, limited time running power (LTP, excluding
fan and any auxiliaries, auxiliary drives and losses, delivered at specified frequency, voltage and
power factor and under worst climatic conditions on site.

2.3 DIESEL GENERATOR SET

A. Components: Set shall basically consist of diesel engine, brushless synchronous generator with
direct flexible coupling to engine and single or parallel control cubicle as required and shown on
the Drawings.

B. Governing shall conform with ISO 3046-4, electronic type governor with limits of speed control
as specified below.

C. Starting and Stopping: When in the automatic mode the set shall start and stop automatically by a
signal sensed through an auxiliary contact in the load transfer switchgear. The set shall stop, after
an adjustable cool- down period (2 - 30 minutes).

D. Duty: Plant shall reach full speed within 10 seconds from start impulse and accept immediately 60
% of net rated output (load being mixed, steady and inductive, with motor starting loads as shown
on the Drawings). Transient voltage variation shall not exceed 20 % under any step-load
application for which the system is intended, up to full rated load, recovering to within +/-2%
within a few cycles.

E. Failure To Start: Should engine fail to start following a start impulse, the system shall come to rest
for a few seconds. Two further starting attempts shall be automatically made with intermediate 20-
second maximum periods of rest. Should the set fail to start after three attempts, an alarm shall
sound and a 'start failure' signal illuminate.

F. Hand operation shall be possible for testing or normal operation through a test/manual/off/auto
selector switch.

G. Regular Exercising: While on 'auto', the set shall start regularly and automatically every week and
shall operate for 30 minutes before stopping.

2.4 DIESEL ENGINE AND AUXILIARIES

A. Design: Diesel engine shall be designed for type of load and application required. Engine and
governor shall be selected to meet operating requirements and response specified.

B. Engine Type: Compression-ignition type, with direct solid-injection, turbo-charged after-cooled,

for ratings over 100 kW, water cooled, with air-cooled radiator inline or V-type cylinder
arrangement suitable for direct coupling to driven machine.

C. Engine Cycle: 4-stroke cycle.

D. Engine Speed: 1500 rpm.

E. Type of Fuel: Light fuel diesel oil.

F. Flywheel shall be suitably sized for type of service and constraints specified, and capable of being
rotated at 125% of rated speed without failure. Torsion vibration dampers shall be provided.

G. Engine rating shall be such that alternator can deliver net specified rated output as specified
earlier, with temperature rise not exceeding rise allowed by the Standards.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 5 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Accessibility: It shall be possible to:

1. Remove rocker-box covers without disturbing fuel injection pipes or other components.
2. Remove and replace pistons and piston rods, liners, big and small end shells and caps
without dismounting engine.
3. Bar engine over by hand for spill timing check and adjustment.

I. Measuring Instruments: Engine mounted instruments shall include, at least, water temperature
gauge, lubricating oil temperature gauge and pressure gauge, speedometer and running time meter.
It shall be possible to measure, with extra instrumentation, coolant temperature at lower end of
radiator, air depression after air filter, air boost and temperature using methods recommended by
manufacturer. Instrument accesses shall be normally sealed by threaded blanking caps. Speed
shall be sensed via a magnetic.

J. Cooling System: Engine shall be water cooled with gear- driven water pumps. System shall be
pressurized, with heavy-duty tropical radiator cooled by reverse flow fan. Radiator shall be set
mounted or remote as shown on drawings. Remote radiators, if used, can be horizontal or vertical
as recommended by the Manufacturer or shown on the drawings. Fan cowl and hand protection
guards shall be fitted. Coolant temperature shall be controlled by one or more thermostats as
determined by design of system. Radiator shall be sized for continuous performance at 100 %
rated load at worst operating ambient conditions with a 10 deg. C temperature differential.
Radiator shall be non-ferrous metal, incorporating pressure valve, radiator cap and drain cock and
with integral expansion tank. Direct acting modulating thermostatic diversion valve shall control
engine cooling water temperature. Under normal operation, by-pass shall not be fully closed.
Treated or fresh cooling water and anti-corrosion and anti-freeze additives shall be used as
recommended by Manufacturer for Specific Conditions of Installation. Coordinate with the
plumbing works for the provisions/piping needed for coolant drain.

K. Cooling Airflow: Obstructions in path of cooling air flow (openings, louvers, attenuators, grilles,
mesh, ducts, bends etc.) shall not reduce air flow below that needed at full rated output. Fan and
radiator characteristics shall be selected accordingly. Advise if additional booster fans are
required and provide necessary control gear for automatic operation. Submit static pressure
calculation vs. fan capacity to substantiate the Selection.

L. Cylinders shall have removable liners. Wet type liners shall have witness hole between liner
sealing rings of each cylinder for early detection of coolant or oil leakage. Each cylinder shall
have drilled and tapped hole and valve for connections of pressure indicator, unless other wise
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

M. Lubricating Oil System: Pressurized circulating type, using two engine-driven, gear type
lubricating oil pumps with full flow filters and replaceable elements and lubricating oil heat
exchanger. Filter system shall have spring loaded by-pass valve to permit oil circulation if filters
become clogged. Audible and visual alarms shall cut-in when valve starts opening. Lubricating
oil cooler shall be shell and tube heat exchanger with water from engine radiator as the cooling
medium. Direct acting thermostatic diversion valve shall control oil temperature. Under normal
operation by-pass shall not be fully closed. Coordinate with the plumbing works for the
provisions/piping needed for proper and neat oil change.

N. Each Generator set shall have soot filter to reduce the soot emission of the gen set, the
performance of the soot filter shall be approved by electrical engineer.

O. Fuel system shall have injection pump and injectors that are easily removable and replaceable for
servicing. Engine shall have integral, gear type, engine driven transfer pump to lift fuel against a
head of 2.5 m and supply it through filters to injection pump at constant pressure. Fuel filter
elements shall be easily replaceable.

P. Exhaust system shall be complete with flanged, bolted, black steel pipe sections, long sweep
elbows, flexible steel expansion sections, clean-outs, silencer, wall thimbles and supporting

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 6 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

steelwork. Silencer shall be independently supported. Indoor hot exhaust parts shall be insulated
with mineral rock wool material, not less than 50 mm thick, retained by wire ties and cladded with
sheet metal aluminum (22 - SWG) covers to protect insulation. Exhaust piping shall be fitted with
rain cap, drain measures (condensate traps, drain plugs/valves, etc.) to avoid rain ingress and
internal corrosion. Exhaust system shall be designed to reduce back-pressure to below maximum
specified by the manufacturer, in relation to exhaust pipe length shown on the Drawings.
Manufacturer’s calculations for exhaust pipe sizing shall be submitted for approval including back
pressure temperature and necessary measures to be applied against corrosion and to ensure
efficient operation.

Q. Electric Starting System: Engine starting shall be manual by push-button or automatic through
control system at control panel. System shall consist of heavy-duty 24 V D.C. starter motor,
heavy-duty battery and battery charger. Cranking motor and battery shall be rated for cranking the
engine when cold and at lowest temperature recorded. Starting pinion shall automatically
disengage when engine fires.

R. Storage Battery: Lead-acid, sealed-in-plastic type, complete with battery rack and inter-cell
connectors. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to provide minimum four cranking periods.

S. Battery Charger: 25% over-rated, solid state, full-wave rectifier type, adequate to fully recharge
depleted battery in not more than 8 hours and to automatically control rate of charge (providing a
high-charge rate to a depleted battery and reducing to a trickle-charge rate when battery is fully
charged). Ammeter shall be provided to indicate charging rate, which shall be adjustable. Battery
charger shall be mounted in control cubicle, unless otherwise approved.

T. Electronic Governor shall provide isochronous governing, (and paralleling and load sharing of
generator sets in the case of paralleled generators). Governor shall have zero percent
(isochronous) setting and adjustable droop from zero percent to 10% droop. System shall include
power supply unit, magnetic speed pick-up, control module and actuator using fast response D.C.
motor drive or equally approved alternative. Governor shall be designed for fast-response and
high precision of speed (frequency) control, automatic paralleling and load sharing and shall
include speed adjustment to +/-5% of normal, while running, and with remote control interface.

U. Governor over-speed trip shall automatically close fuel pump racks in event of engine over-speed.
Device shall be separate and independent from governing mechanism.

V. Protective system shall comprise automatic engine shut- down and generator trip with visual and
audible alarms in event of over-speed, low lubricating oil pressure, high cooling water temperature
and over cranking.

2.5 GENERATOR (ALTERNATOR)

A. Type: Synchronous, low reactance, high efficiency, revolving field type, with brushless exciter
and flexible coupling, sized to pick up effective load without exceeding transient and steady-state
voltage deviation limits specified up to its full nominal rating and designed for the performance
stipulated in the Specification. It shall be one for ratings up to 2000KVA and two for ratings
above 2000KVA bearing construction with bearings of the sleeve or sealed ball type.

B. Leads and Cables: Phase leads shall be brought out fully insulated to a terminal cable box of heavy
gauge sheet steel, protection IP 44. Control and protection cables shall be brought out to a
separate terminal box.

C. Maximum voltage difference between the three phases at 100%-balanced load shall not exceed
1%. With unbalanced load up to 30% on one phase at unity power factor and zero load on other
phases, the line-to-neutral voltages shall not differ by more than 5%.

D. Characteristics:

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 7 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Number of Phases: 3 phases, 4-wires.

2. Rated Voltage, Frequency, and Net Rated Output: As shown on the Drawings. Rated power
factor: 0.8.
3. Winding Connection: Re-connectable with ends brought out and fully insulated.
4. Maximum Unbalanced Load Current, (negative sequence component of current) with None
of the Phase Currents Exceeding Rated Current: 8% of the rated current.
5. Rotor: Salient pole type, incorporating damping grid.
6. Excitation: Brushless, with rotating armature rectifiers and discharge resistors.
7. Voltage Regulator: Automatic, with readily accessible controls for voltage level.
8. Insulation: Class H for stator and class H for rotor & exciter, with class F temperature rise,
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
9. Enclosure: Drip proof and screen protected (IP 21 to IEC 60529).
10. Cooling: Built-in centrifugal fans.
11. Maintained Short Circuit: 250% for 3 seconds.
12. Over-speed: 120% (minimum) for 2 minutes.

E. Voltage Regulation: Overall voltage deviation within normal speed variations shall be within
limits specified from no-load to full-load, from hot to cold and with load power factor from 0.8
lagging to unity. Regulator shall automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds capacity of
generator. Voltage build-up shall be positive and rapid even when full load is suddenly applied.
Line-to-line voltage waveform deviation factor shall not exceed +/-5%. Total harmonic content
shall not exceed 5% and that of one harmonic not to exceed 3%. Radio interference suppression
shall be within the limits set by the Standards, grade (N).

F. Exciter: Armature shall be 3-phase, directly mounted to generator shaft and connected to generator
field windings through six solid state, hermetically sealed, silicon rectifiers, accessible for
maintenance or repair. Exciter shall have field suppression system to eliminate any source of
diode failure resulting from high inductive loads and surges. Exciter field windings shall be
stationary. Exciter-regulator combination shall maintain output voltage within limits specified for
any load up to full generator rating and under any sudden load changes specified.

G. Voltage Regulator: Solid state, volts/Hz type, utilizing silicon semi-conductor devices in control
and power stages, with built-in Electro-magnetic interference suppression and designed for single
or parallel operation. Manual adjustment to +/-5% of regulated voltage level shall be possible by a
potentiometer at control panel. All components shall be sealed, moisture and heat resistant, with a
suitable environmentally protected enclosure. Voltage regulator shall automatically reduce
voltage if load exceeds capacity of generator and shall sustain a 3-phase short- circuit current at
the generator terminals for the period for which the short-circuit protection operates and at least
for 3 seconds. Voltage regulator power shall be supported by generator voltage and current to
maintain excitation field power.

H. Two-position switch shall be provided for selection of manual or automatic mode of regulated
voltage control.

I. Sets Operating In Parallel: Cross-current compensation and necessary paralleling modules shall be
provided to effect sharing of active and reactive loads equally between generators.

2.6 INSTRUMENTATION, PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. Generating Set Instruments, Protection And Controls: Control relays, sensing equipment,
switchgear protective relays and devices and start, stop and shutdown controls shall be provided as
necessary for operation specified. Generating set, instruments, protection and controls shall be
mounted preferably in one control cubicle.

B. Generator controls, metering, monitoring and protection shall be carried out via modular solid
state, microprocessor based units, with digital display facility

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 8 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Instruments and controls for a non-paralleled set shall include at least the following:
1. Line and phase voltage metering on the 3 phases.
2. Current metering on the 3 phases.
3. Frequency meter.
4. Off/test/manual/auto duty switch.
5. Manual-start and stop push buttons.
6. Kilowatt-hour meter.
7. Power factor meter.
8. Service-hour running counter.
9. Plant exerciser.
10. Potentiometer for voltage level control.
11. Speed raise/lower device.
12. Cool-down time setting controls.
13. Over cranking monitoring and alarm
14. Illuminated indicator panel with LEDs at least for low oil pressure, high water temperature,
over-speed, fail-to-start, generator overload, reverse-power, generator on load, battery low
charge state
15. Lamp test push-button.
16. Indicating gauge and low level fuel alarm.
17. Battery charger, on/off switch, pilot lights.
18. D.C. ammeter.
19. Alarm sounder and reset controls.
20. Anti-condensation heater.

D. Protective gear shall ensure orderly engine stop or shutdown with reset relays, as required for
safety and operational reliability, and shall include the following:

1. Output molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) for ratings up to 1250A and air-break metal
enclosed circuit breaker (ACB) fro ratings above 1250A with solid state trip unit, in
accordance with Division 16 Section "Switchboards", (electrically operated and electrically
tripped by shunt release) for over-current and external earth fault protection.
2. Over-voltage protection with voltage and time lag adjustment.
3. Loss-of-field protection.
4. Negative phase sequence protection.
5. Restricted earth-fault protection, with current adjustable settings between 0 and 20% of
rated current, and time adjustable settings 0 to 3 seconds.

E. Control and Protective Gear Cubicles: Generator set mounted instrument and/or control cubicles
shall be resiliently mounted, preventing transmission of vibration to the components. Separately
mounted instrument and control cubicles shall be self-supporting, floor mounted and free-
standing. Cubicles shall be sheet steel construction, ventilated indoor type, vermin and dust-proof,
(IP 42 to IEC 60529), with lockable hinged doors and instrument panels, separate compartments
for control devices, protective relays, circuit breaker(s) and neutral earthing device. Inner and
outer surfaces of steel enclosures shall be cleaned, phosphatized, primed with heavy-duty rust
inhibiting primer and finished with two coats of enamel. Wiring shall be 600/1000 V, modularly
arranged, with connections made at front terminal blocks with no live conductors exposed. Wires
shall have approved numbered ferrules at each terminal. Printed circuit plug-in boards, where
applicable, shall be of industry standards, accessible and withdrawable, mounted in standard racks.

F. Load Shedding: An automatic microprocessor based load shedding system shall be provided for
load connection / disconnection according to load priorities and generator power availability as
described on the drawings.

G. Step Loading : An automatic step loading system shall be provided for sequential application of
emergency loads with an adjustable (0- 30 sec) time delay between each two steps as described on
the drawings. The system shall comprise all necessary control equipment including under over/
voltage sensing relays, time delay relays, interface devices and wiring with respective circuit
breakers.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 9 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Relays: electronic, microprocessor based front settable / programmable, sealed type, with dust-
tight enclosures, removable covers, test terminal blocks and plugs for testing relay without
removal from case. Removal from casing shall automatically short-circuit respective current
transformer secondary windings.

I. Instruments shall be housed in enameled metal cases for switchboard flush installation and shall be
grounded in accordance with the approved standards.

J. Current Transformers: Class 2 for measuring and protection. Refer to switchgear sections for
particulars.

K. Voltage Transformers: Single phase, dry type, 0.5 accuracy class. Refer to switchgear sections for
particulars.

L. KWH Meter: digital (part of microprocessor unit) for unbalanced 3-phase, 4- wire loads.

2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Prefabricated or pre-engineered enclosure with the following features:

1. Construction: Galvanized steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed housing

erected on concrete foundation, corrosion proof and painted against all weather conditions
with life guarantee of 10 years minimum.

2. Full accessibility to all parts of the complete set.

3. Structural Design and Anchorage: Adequate to resist loads imposed by 160km/h wind. In
addition to other structural loads, including roof, seismic, and auxiliary loads, are as
indicated.
4. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled to prevent condensation.
5. Louvers: Equipped with insect/rodent screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation
when engine is not running while excluding exterior dust and rodents.
6. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
7. Two-coats enamel finish over cleaned and primed surfaces.

8. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with insect/rodent screen and filter arranged to permit air
circulation while excluding exterior dust and rodents.
9. Thermal Insulation: As required to maintain winter interior temperature within limits
required by components.
10. Finish: Two-coat enamel finish over cleaned and primed surfaces.

B. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise of system
components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for two hours
with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

D. Louvers: shall prevent entry of rain and snow.

E. Automatic Dampers: dampers ,if used, shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold
weather when unit is not operating.

F. Interior Lights: With switch. Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to
illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external circuit supply.

G. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired. Arrange for external circuit supply.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 10 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.8 FUEL STORAGE AND TRANSFER

A. Day-tank Construction: Closed cylindrical steel, inclined at least 3 degrees from horizontal and
fitted with drain plug, inlet and outlet pipe connectors and breather pipe.

B. Day-tank breather pipe shall have replaceable paper air filter or breather caps with air filters.

C. Day-tank instruments shall include float switch, solenoid valve and dial-type level indicator to
give alarm on over-fill and low-level, stainless steel electronic multi-point magnetic float diesel
tank level switch/sensor for high/low level with switch signal output

D. Day-tank Filling Pumps: Electrically operated, automatically started and stopped, duplex pumps
and standby manual pump, installed on piping system between storage tank and one or more day-
tanks for fuel transfer. Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled, squirrel-cage induction type,
with integrally coupled pump-rotor contained on one base. Pump shall be self-priming type against
the specific head shown on the Drawings. Priming plug, sealed and protected bearings and
combination starter with thermal overload protection and circuit breaker for short-circuit
protection shall be provided. Operation shall be interlocked with float switches in day-tank. All
necessary check valves, by- pass valves, float valves and maintenance valves on piping system
shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.

E. Day-tank Connections: Female threaded, black forged steel pipe couplings, fitted through holes in
top of tank and welded all around inside and outside. Connections, except vent connection, shall
extend inside tank to within 150 mm of bottom and shall be seamless black steel pipes of same
size as connection and braced to tank walls. Vent connection shall not extend inside tank more
than 20 mm. A manual valve shall be provided on the fuel supply line to the genset.

F. Fuel Lines: Heavy gauge, black seamless steel, to ISO/65 or equal, treated internally with
corrosion resistant paint and with joints sealed with PTEE tape. Plumber's twine or gasket sealing
compound shall not be used. Changes in direction and branching and jointing shall be with regular
pipefitting. Field fabricated and bent fittings shall not be used.

G. Fuel Lines: Fuel feed line to day-tank shall have by- pass with stopcock. Size of fuel return line
from day-tank to main fuel tank shall be to manufacturer's recommendations.

H. Valves Generally: 827.4 kPa (125 psi) steam working pressure rating and 1380 kPa (200 psi) cold
water non-shock pressure rating and type that can be repacked under pressure.

I. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Galvanized steel.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

A. Manually Operated Overhead Hoist: Chain operated, self aligning, low headroom type, comprising
trolley with gear mechanism combined into a compact unit, designed to run on lower flanges of I-
beam runway. Hoist shall have shock resistant suspension, positive action Western type local
brake; lifetime lubricated sealed bearings and load safety hook. Trolley shall have four alloy cast
iron wheels. Safety factor shall be minimum of 5. Capacity of hoist shall be as indicated on the
Drawings, and shall be tested to 1.5 times rated capacity.

B. Power And Control Cables: Comply with Division 16 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables", and Section " Control/Signal Transmission Media" of the Specification
and as shown on the Drawings.

C. Earthing Equipment: Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 11 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator
performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine roughing-in of cooling-system piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual
locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation.

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required for packaged engine
generators. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
manufacturers' equipment drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of
cables etc. are provided as required.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal
of drivers and accessories.

C. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage of
feeders and cables which shall be built into concrete foundations, bases or building structure are
provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.

D. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations, particularly in
making connections and adjustments.

E. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into satisfactory
operation shall be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.

F. Generating Set: Install to maintain alignment and minimize engine and generator stresses. Protect
instrumentation and control equipment including engine mounted instruments from machine
vibration. Mountings and method of mounting shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and
approved by Engineer.

G. Engine exhaust piping shall be slightly sloped away from engine to avoid condensation returning
to engine and shall have drain plugs or clean-out at lower end as required.

H. Engine Hot-Air Exhaust Duct: Install approved canvas duct with metal frames between radiator
and louvered opening in wall for radiator exhaust air.

I. Tank Vent Pipe: Extend to nearest outside wall of building and carry up to at least 2 m above
ground level with end at least 1 m away from any building opening. Slope vent pipe back to tank
without traps and support securely. Provide replaceable dust filter and gooseneck bend or
approved weatherproof vent cap at top of pipe.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 12 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J. Pipe Hangers And Supports: Fasten securely to building structure with approved masonry
expansion bolts, minimum 20 mm diameter and install in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.

K. Earthing: Install earthing system in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding" of the Specification.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.
2. Connect water supply to cooling system.
3. Connect cooling-system water supply and drain piping to diesel engine heat exchangers.
Install flexible connectors at connections to engine generator and remote radiator.
4. Connect exhaust-system piping to diesel engines.

B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

C. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
applicable Standards.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (APPLICABLE FOR GENERATORS’ RATINGS UP TO 1000

kVA)

A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any loss or damage to Engineer.

B. Earthing resistance tests if any shall be carried out to verify specified requirements.

C. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each
element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust,
and fluid leaks.

D. Load tests shall be carried out at low loads to overload conditions, at various power factors.
Measurements shall include voltage and frequency deviations and regulating time under various
step loading conditions, temperature measurements and pressure measurements at various
locations, and in accordance with an approved plan under conditions equal to worst site ambient
conditions.

E. Tests shall include:

1. Full load test for 30 minutes at each of 25%, 50%, 75% load and load test for 3 hours at
100% load immediately followed (in case of prime generators) by 10% overload test,
without interruption.
2. Insulation measurement.
3. Functional tests for voltage sensing, automatic start and synchronization (if applicable),
transfer of load and load sharing as requested and shown on electrical design drawings.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 13 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

4. Operation of engine shutdown and alarm signaling and indication, under simulated fault
conditions.
5. Measurement of vibration transmission to building structure.

F. Load Banks: If actual loads are not made available at time of acceptance testing, provide load
banks to carry out complete test cycle of the system under loading and switching conditions
necessary to prove compliance with the Specification.

G. Piping System: Using carbon dioxide or nitrogen from pressurized cylinder, test each system to
1.5 times normal operating pressure. Do not subject equipment, apparatus or to pressure
exceeding prescribed test pressure obtained from nameplate data or from manufacturers' published
data. Apply tests before connecting piping to equipment. Remove or disconnect and blank off
relief valves, instruments and devices that might be damaged by test pressure. Maintain test
pressure on system for 24 hours during which time there shall be no noticeable drop in pressure.
Check for leaks using soap solution. Isolate source of pressure during testing.

H. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

K. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to applicable
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records
available for examination on request.

3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE (applicable generators’ for ratings more than 1000 KVA)

A. Supervised Adjusting and Pretesting: under supervision of factory-authorized service

representative, pretest all system functions, operations, and protective features. Provide all
instruments and equipment required for tests. Adjust to ensure operation is according to
Specifications. Load system using a variable resistive and reactive load bank to be provided
during testing only simulating kW, and power factor of loads for which unit is rated.

B. Tests: provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform the tests listed
below according to manufacturer's recommendations upon completion of installation of system.
Use instruments bearing records of calibration within the last 12 months, traceable to approved
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Include the following
tests:
1. Insulation Tests: test generator windings using 500 V d.c. for units rated up to 250 volts
and 1000 V d.c. for units rated between 250 and 600 volts. Verify minimum insulation
resistance is 25 megaohms for units up to 250 volts, and 100 megaohms for units 251 to
600 volts. Verify by dielectric absorption test that polarization index levels are according
to manufacturer's industry standards approved.
2. Battery Tests: measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals
for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an
integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. Verify acceptance of charge for
each element of battery after discharge. Verify measurements are within manufacturer's
specifications.
3. Battery Charger Tests: verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 14 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

4. System Integrity Tests: methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of
each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for
air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
5. Simulation of malfunctions to verify proper operation of local and remote protective,
alarm, and monitoring devices.
6. Load Test: use variable load bank capable of simulating kVA, kW, and power factor of
load for which unit is rated. Run unit at 25, 50, and 75 percent of rated capacity for 30
minutes each, and at 100 percent for 3 hours immediately followed ( in case of prime
generators ) by 10 % overload test for 30 minutes. Make the 100-percent load run at 80
percent power factor. Record voltage, frequency, load current, battery-charging current,
power output, oil pressure, and coolant temperature periodically during the test.
7. Vibration Baseline Test: measure amplitude for nominal frequency and for frequencies 5,
10, 15, and 20 percent above and below nominal at each main bearing cap. Vibration
levels not exceeding those specified in NEMA MG1, "Motors and Generators," are
acceptable.
8. Exhaust System Back-Pressure Test: use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40 inches of
water. Connect to the exhaust line close to the engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back
pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's published allowable limits for the
engine.
9. Exhaust Emissions Test: conform to applicable government test criteria.
10. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50-percent and 100-percent step-load increases and
decreases and verify that performance is as specified.
11. Harmonic Content Tests: measure harmonic content of input and output current under 25
percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within
specified limits.
12. Efficiency Tests: perform at 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of rated load.

C. Retest: correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to applicable
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records
available for examination on request.

3.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Battery Equalization: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

3.9 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Clean components
internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 15 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

END OF SECTION 16231

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 / Page 16 of 16

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16264 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, on-line, static-type, continuous duty, solid state, double conversion
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system installation and static transfer switch, comprising the
following:

1. Complete rectifier/charger-battery-inverter system with 100% rated for continuous

automatic static switch and maintenance manual by-pass switch.
2. Input harmonic filter.
3. Output isolation transformer.
4. Power conditioner.
5. Interplant power and control cabling.
6. Connection of normal AC power from assigned terminals/switch/circuit breaker, as shown
on the Drawings.
7. Earthing system.
8. Connection to BMS system for full monitoring, including proper interface digital software
link for remote monitoring from BMS for the points specified in this Section and as
detailed in BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings as a minimum.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables".
4. Division 15 Section "Building Management System".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

C. LED: Light-emitting diode.

D. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 1 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Manufacturers’ catalogues, detailed description, compliance with the Standards,

dimensions and weights, system operation, operating characteristics, methods of operation,
protective and control provisions, heat losses, ambient conditions and limitations on
electronic components, inverter cut-off voltage, battery calculation to IEEE 485, etc.
beyond which such components may suffer partial or permanent damage.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control and indicating
devices and instruments, exact dimensions and weights, cabling etc.
2. One-line diagram with ratings of each piece of equipment, cabling, grounding etc.
3. Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and the like.
4. Installation and mounting details.
5. Batteries arrangement and mounting details.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with

requirements.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain all system components and accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.

E.F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

F.G. Test Certificates: Submit type test and routine test certificates. System shall undergo a functional
and load test program approved by the Engineer, and shall undergo a minimum 8 hours 'burn-in'
test, under site simulated conditions, prior to shipment.

G.H. Field Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements, and
provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.

H.I. Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
Include the following and to the satisfaction of Employer’s requirements:

1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at Project site
for ready access.
2. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s Certification: The manufacturer shall be specialized in manufacturing of on line,

double conversion three phase UPS modules specified in this document with a minimum of twenty
years documented worldwide experience and shall have a nationwide first party service
organization. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall design to internationally
accepted standard.

B. Factory Testing: Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test procedure
to test all functions of the UPS modules and batteries (via a discharge test), when supplied by the
UPS manufacturer and guarantee compliance with the specification. The manufacturer shall
provide a copy of the test report upon request. Tests shall comply to IEC 62040-3 and include but
not necessarily limited to the following:

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 2 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Light load test.

2. AC input failure test.
3. AC input return test.
4. Transfer test.
5. Full load test.
6. UPS efficiency test.
7. Unbalanced load test.
8. Balanced load test.
9. Short-circuit test.
10. Harmonic components test.

C. Materials and Assemblies: All materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current
manufacture, and have not been in prior service, except as required during factory testing. All
active electronic devices shall be solid state and not exceed the manufacturers recommended
specified tolerances for temperature or current to ensure maximum reliability. All semiconductor
devices shall be sealed. All relays shall be provided with dust covers. The manufacturer shall
conduct inspection on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final products.

D. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of UPS

manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

E. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice and
maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to support day to
day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer may disqualify a
manufacturer.

F. Standards: Installation shall comply with the following standards:

1. IEC 62040-1,2&3 “Uninterruptible Power Systems”.

2. IEC 61000-3-4 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-4: Limits - Limitation of
emission of harmonic currents in low-voltage power supply systems for equipment with
rated current greater than 16 A”.
3. IEC 61000-4 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Testing and Measurement
Techniques”.
4. IEEE 485 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary
Applications”.
5. IEC 62310 “Static Transfer Systems”.
6. IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-4: Limits - Limitation of
emission of harmonic currents in low-voltage power supply systems for equipment with
rated current greater than 16 A”.
7. IEC 61000-3-3 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limits - Limitation of
voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems, for
equipment with rated current ≤16 A per phase and not subject to conditional connection”.
8. IEC 61000-6-2 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards -
Immunity for industrial environments”.
9. IEC 61000-6-3 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-3: Generic standards -
Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments”.

G. Materials and components shall be manufacturer's latest design, and Standards used shall be
approved prior to manufacture.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment shall be placed.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 3 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Prior to shipping all products shall be inspected at the factory for damage.

C. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers' ambient

temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.

D. Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding 3 months without
powering up the equipment for a period of 8 hours to recharge the batteries. . Relevant Certificate
for the batteries production date shall be submitted to the engineer.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temperature limits within which equipment shall be designed to operate are zero to +40 deg. C at
100% rated output. Equipment shall be capable of operating under up to 55 deg. C ambient
conditions with derating factor of 1.25% per deg. C over 40 deg. C.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of substantial completiontaking over certificate.

B. Battery: The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final customer and
shall have a minimum period of one year.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Spare Parts: Provide and deliver to client stores manufacturer's recommended spare parts for one
year operation of UPS system. Spare parts shall include as a minimum complete set of fuses for all
types and ratings along with cooling fans.

B. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for five years operation together with current prices.

C. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection,
testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:
1. Eaton / Powerware (U.S.A.)
2. GE (Switzerland)
3. APC/Schneider Electric (France)
4. Siemens (Germany)
5. Socomec (France)
6. Emerson – Libert (U.S.A)
7. ABB / Newave (Switzerland)

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 4 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System: UPS system shall be online, continuous duty, double conversion, class VFI-SS-111 to
IEC 62040-3.

B. System shall be of the programmable type, microprocessor based with CPU and memory
capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status change, etc. The UPS shall permit setting
parameters for the environment and type of usage to be specified by the Engineer. UPS shall be of
the self-diagnostic type, equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system operation. The
self-test shall identify the parts of the UPS requiring repair in case of a fault. The system shall be
provided with multi-password levels to limit access to software and data.

C. General: System shall be interposed between normal AC power supply and critical load, to secure
a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up for the time shown on Drawings in
case of failure of normal AC supply and maintain output voltage, frequency and phase deviation
within specified tolerances.

D. System shall be 100% fully rated, single, dual or “n+1” multi-unit parallel redundant for number
and capacity as shown on drawings; which implies complete UPS unit(s) with two sets of battery
strings operating in parallel for each unit for ratings up to 80 kVA and two to four sets of battery
strings in parallel for each unit for ratings above 80 kVA unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. UPS shall be maintained (continuously supplying
load through the inverter), with automatic no-break transfer to or retransfer from alternate source
(bypass) in case of failure or overload on rectifier- battery-inverter system. System shall employ
decentralized bypass technique so that each UPS unit shall be provided with its own static bypass
transfer switch. Each UPS unit shall be provided with its own master controller. Master and slave
configuration is not acceptable.

E. Normal AC power supply will be available from one protected source fed from either normal AC
network or from AC Characteristics of output of generator set (when provided) and UPS system
shall be coordinated for best results. Study and advise on special requirements of generator
characteristic output and stability.

F. Redundant Systems: have parallel units interconnected so that normal AC power feeds two or
more inverters in parallel, to give required power output at critical load. Load sharing circuits shall
ensure real and reactive load sharing and provide reverse power protection between parallel units.
Full rated capacity of UPS, in case of failure of one of the rectifiers or one of the inverter units
shall be equally shared by other healthy units without overloading these units or disturbing
operation.

G. Separate filters shall be provided for each rectifier/charger unit separately to limit the THD to less
than 7% this applies for all load currents from 25 to 100% of full load.

H. System overall efficiency shall not be less than 92 % at full load and 90 % at half load for ratings
between 10-40kVA and 93 % at full load and 91 % at half load for ratings between 60-500kVA .

I. Noise level of complete assembly shall not exceed 65 dB(A) for ratings up to 125kVA and 70 for
ratings above 125kVA measured at 1.0 m distance anywhere within UPS room.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Under normal conditions inverter(s) shall be synchronized and phase locked to normal AC supply.
Upon loss of normal AC supply, battery shall continue supply of no-break power to inverters,
which then free-run on self- generated UPS frequency reference. Upon restoration of normal AC
supply, inverters shall re-synchronize to AC line, gradually (at slew rate), if frequency and voltage
deviation of normal AC supply is within preset limits specified.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 5 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Automatic Transfer To Bypass: Static transfer switch shall automatically transfer critical (100%)
load from inverter to by-pass source (which is normal AC supply) if:

1. Inverter output voltage characteristics fall outside specified limits.

2. Critical load exceeds overload rating of UPS.
3. Over-temperature is sensed.
4. Manual (push button) command is given.
5. Transfer to by-pass mode shall be inhibited, and an alarm initiated if voltage, frequency
and/or phase shift of by- pass power is outside acceptable tolerances.

C. Re-Transfer To Inverter: Re-transfer of critical load from auto by-pass source to inverter (UPS
mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:

1. Inverter output voltage characteristics return to within specified tolerances.

2. Original load current reduces to within rated full load capacity of UPS.
3. Re-transfer selector switch is in automatic position.

D. Lock-out feature shall inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside preset tolerances
or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase locked or if UPS output is not
restored to normal conditions.

E. Normal Power Restored: When normal power is restored following an outage, rectifier/charger
shall initially draw no power except for transformer in-rush current and shall gradually continue
providing power to the inverter and recharging the battery. After approximately 15 seconds (walk-
in time), input power requirements shall rise to power level to drive critical load and recharge
battery.

F. Automatic Restart: When normal power is restored to normal conditions following an outage and
after a complete battery discharge, the UPS shall automatically restart and resume supplying
power to the connected load via the inverter.

G. Provide maintenance disconnecting switch fully rated to carry the full load input current of the
UPS.

2.4 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS

A. Rectifier/Charger Input:

1. Nominal Input Voltage: 400V, three phase, 4 wire, 50Hz.

2. Voltage input variation: +10%, -15% from nominal.
3. Frequency: +/-5% from nominal.
4. Transformer Exciting Current In Rush: Less than 600 % nominal current.
5. Power Factor: minimum 0.9 lagging at full load and nominal input voltage.
6. Total Feedback Current Harmonics: Maximum 7 % for UPS ratings above 20kVA and 8%
for UPS ratings 20kVA and below.
7. Current Limiting: 115% max. of that required to operate inverters and charge battery at
full rated load, adjustment possible between 100% and 125%.
8. Walk-in Current in Rush: 25% to 100% FLC in 15 seconds.

B. Rectifier/Charger Output:

1. Float and Equalize Operation: Adjustable, automatic, compatible with battery.

2. Regulation: +/-1% max. from 0-100% load.
3. Ripple: +/-2% rms. (0 to 100% resistive load).

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 6 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Static Inverters:

1. Nominal net system power output rating in kVA: as shown on drawings with load power
factor 0.8 lag.
2. Nominal output voltage: 400 V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, adjustable +/-5% of nominal.
3. Output voltage regulation:
a. Balanced load: +/-2% (0 - 100% load)
b. Unbalanced load (3-phase output only): +/-3% (at each 10% of load)
4. Phase Displacement: 120 deg. (+/-3 deg.) at 100% load unbalance.
5. Output Voltage Waveform: 5% max. total harmonic, 3% max. single harmonic.
6. Frequency Stability: Normally synchronized to input line frequency over +/-2 adjustable
ranges; free running at +/-0.5. Full battery voltage variation, load and p.f. range; slew rate
shall not exceed 0.1 Hz/sec.
7. Dynamic Output Voltage Tolerance Sudden Full Load Removal: +10,-8% max. recovering
application or to within 1% in less than 40] milliseconds.
8. Over-load Rating: 125% for 10 minutes, 150% for 60 seconds, 1000% for 5 cycles, 105%
continuous.
9. Load crest factor without derating (Ipk/Irms): 3:1

D. Automatic Static Bypass Transfer Switch:

1. Transfer Time: 150 microsecond (overlapping) maximum.

2. Total Sensing and Transfer/Retransfer Time: 2 milliseconds, maximum.
3. Retransfer Mode: automatic/inhibit (selectable).
4. Retransfer Delay: 2 - 32 secs. in auto mode (selectable).
5. Transfer Point: +/-10% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
6. Retransfer Point: +/-5% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
7. Transfer Inhibit Point: +/-20% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
8. Bypass circuit shall be provided with backfeed protection to IEC 62040-1 through internal
backfeed contactor to prevent feedback to the mains from the inverter in case of mains
failure and a fault in bypass circuit.

2.5 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Materials and Parts: Electronic devices shall be solid state, hermetically sealed. Indicator lights
shall be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions shall be seen by operator without
removing panels or opening cabinet doors. Power connections and remote alarm and control
wiring shall be accessible at terminal boards. Power semi- conductors shall be fused. Metal
surfaces including copper and aluminium heat sinks and busbars shall be treated with permanent
protective coating. Electro-mechanical power devices and relays shall be vacuum impregnated,
insulated for maximum operating voltage conditions, and enclosed in dust-tight enclosures.
Cables shall be fire resistant high temperature grade.

B. UPS shall be provided with a socket connection for a serial interface to be linked to a portable PC,
to a modem or to the BMS system for communication with the UPS. It shall enable interrogation
of the UPS about status, faults, data stored, reprogramming, etc.

C. Housing: Equipment shall be housed in a free-standing, well ventilated, totally enclosed modular
assembly with front accessible lockable doors, giving easy access for maintenance, inspection and
adjustments, and with provisions for handling and lifting during and after installation. Enclosures
shall be suitable for industrial, tropical environments, protection IP 21 to IEC 60529, of
galvanized sheet steel construction treated against corrosion and with light grey RAL7032 baked
paint or epoxy finish to approved standard.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 7 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite or
Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.

E. Sub-assemblies and components shall be mounted on pull- out and/or swing-out trays, of the plug-
in type where possible. Where it is not possible to mount components in pull-out or swing-out
trays, they shall be easily accessible inside the enclosure. Assemblies shall be replaceable without
requiring any adjustments or settings in the UPS.

F. Ventilation: For units rated over 3 kVA, an integral, forced-air, cooling system shall be provided
in each UPS module to remove dissipated heat efficiently, and ensure components operate within
environmental ratings. Air shall enter bottom of cabinet through replaceable filters, and exhaust
through the top. At least two fans shall be provided for ventilating each enclosure. No
degradation of performance shall occur in the event of a single fan failure. Temperature sensors,
mounted on semi-conductor heat sinks, shall initiate alarm if maximum working temperature is
exceeded.

G. Rectifier/charger unit shall be as follows:

1. Active front end (AFE) Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) or 6-pulse silicon
controlled rectifier (SCR) type for UPS ratings up to 40 kVA.
2. IGBT type UPS ratings 40 kVA and up to 200 kVA.
3. IGBT or 12 pulse SCR type with filter for UPS ratings above 200 kVA.

The unit shall have mainline circuit breaker and a rectifier input transformer for 12 pulse UPS, and
shall be automatic with soft start-up (walk-in) feature, using IGBT with vector control design or
silicon controlled rectifiers (SCR) with control logic circuitry to control firing angles to SCR to
suit power output requirements and protect against primary power surges, lightning transients,
under-voltage and over-voltage conditions. Output shall be passed through LC filters to DC bus.

H. Rectifier/charger unit shall be microprocessor based and capable of supplying full load power to
inverter, and to charge the battery from a discharge condition to 90% charge within ten to twelve
hours, and maintain full charge at floating voltage until next operation. The rectifier/battery
charger shall employ input AC current limiting as well as battery charge current limiting for
battery protection. Charger current shall be voltage regulated and current limited. The control of
the optimum charging method shall be completely controlled by the charger’s microprocessor.

I. Inverter shall employ IGBT technology in three leg, vector control or high frequency switching
and real time control technique, and complete with output transformer and filters. Inverter start-up
shall be automatic, to reach full voltage within milliseconds and deliver power to the load within 2
seconds. Inverter shall start at any load including short-circuit. Inverter shall be provided with an
inverter output transformer. For UPS ratings 200kVA and below transformer-less technique may
be used, subject to Engineer’s approval.

J. Inverter oscillator shall operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within specified
tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase-locking to normal power supply
frequency. When inverter is phase-locked to normal power supply, and latter fails, oscillator shall
automatically revert to free running state (quartz oscillator) and maintain specified limits.

K. Modular UPS system where shown on the Drawings shall consist of multiple units with equal
capacities, each not exceeding 50 kVA, connected in parallel architecture and share one common
frame or more according to the required number of modules, each frame shall have common input
and output busses and separate battery system consisting of two parallel strings as a minimum.
Modular UPS system shall be online, double conversion, IGBT rectifier, IGBT inverter with
transformerless technique. The modular UPS system shall have the following features as a
minimum:

1. Each module shall be provided with fully rated static and maintenance bypass.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 8 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. The modular system shall be expandable by adding modules without shutting down the
system (hot pluggable).
3. Modules shall be replaceable without shutting down the system during the replacement
process (hot swappable).
4. The modular system shall not have a single point of failure. Fault on any of the modules
shall not affect the whole system.
5. Sufficient space for the number modules for future expansion shall be provided as shown
on the Drawings.
6. Redundancy, if required on the Drawings, shall be achieved by adding a number of
modules with total power capacity shown on the Drawings.
7. Battery capacity shall be expandable by adding independent battery strings to cater for the
increase in the system power. Adding battery strings shall be done without shutting down
the system.

L. Automatic static bybass transfer switch shall be continuously rated at full load (100% FL), hybrid
type (make-before-break), solid state transfer device with logic thyristor assembly isolatable or
completely removable for maintenance. When signal to close switch is initiated, thyristors shall
instantaneously conduct power to prevent deviations and breaks in load voltage outside specified
tolerances.

M. Maintenance By-Pass Switching: Manual (make-before- break) by-pass switch shall allow load to
be transferred to by-pass source without interruption of output, and provide isolation of UPS and
static switch during maintenance. Test position shall permit testing of static switch while load is
being fed from bypass power circuit. Transfer inhibited warning circuit shall be provided to give
an alarm indication in case by-pass supply is beyond acceptable tolerances.

N. Rectifier input and bypass isolating transformers shall be provided for all UPS ratings 80 kVA and
above.

O. UPS inverter output, IGBT rectifier input and bypass input transformers shall be two-winding
type, while 12 pulse rectifier input transformers shall be three winding type.

P. Transformers shall be galvanically isolated dry-type, Class H insulated, with metallic electrostatic
shielding, and high efficiency (98% or higher) type. Transformers shall be installed either within
the UPS enclosure or in a separate enclosure as applicable and approved by engineer.

Q. Protection: UPS modules shall have built-in or inherent electronic current-limiting protection
against permanent self damage effective down to short-circuits. Fast acting, current limiting
devices shall protect against failure of any solid state component. Internal failure in any UPS
module shall cause immediate isolation from input and output by operation of static interrupters or
causing shut down of faulty module. Protection shall be provided against, but is not limited to, the
following:

1. Input over and under voltage and power line surges

2. Output over voltage and voltage surges
3. Sudden abnormal changes in output load conditions
4. Short-circuits at output terminals
5. Inverter and rectifier overcurrent
6. Auxiliary Control Circuit Overcurrent.

R. UPS Bypass and Output Neutral: Designed to continuously carry twice the full load phase current.

S. Input Passive Filter Disconnection: UPS control system shall not disconnect the input passive
filters unless the UPS is operating at light loads (less than 25%).

T. Battery: High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic encased,
sealed lead- acid (gas recombination) type cells with automatically re-closing explosion proof

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 9 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

safety vents. Electrolyte specific gravity shall not exceed 1.25 when fully charged at 25 deg. C.
Ampere-hour rating shall be sufficient for emergency period specified with all inverters operating
at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.75 V per cell. Cells shall be normally
maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life shall not be less than 10 years, with a capacity drop
down to not less than 80% under normal expected service.

U. Battery Cabinet: shall be factory assembled from UPS manufacturer, of welded construction and
formed from heavy gauge steel with added supports to retain cabinet squareness and integrity
during harsh shipping and handling conditions, Adjustable battery rails or trays shall be provided
to allow for multiple battery configurations and facilitate battery upgrades in the future, Heavy
duty polyester strapping material shall be used to tie down batteries, Cabling shall be routed down
the sides of the cabinet, away from the front of the batteries allowing full access for easy
maintenance, series wiring shall be routed efficiently and neatly with tier to tier jumpers located at
front batteries allowing for safe and easy maintenance, Cabinets shall be top coated with a hybrid
epoxy-polyester powder coat and oven cured for a chip and corrosion resistant long lasting finish,
All circuit breakers used on the cabinets shall be rated to 600 VDC. Each battery string shall be
provided with its own circuit breaker for the individual string fault protection and disconnecting
means. Battery cabinet enclosure degree of protection shall be IP 20.

V. Battery checking system shall be provided for each UPS to check the battery continuity and
improve life time through regular automatic test and measurements for battery status, voltage and
current. System shall provide a predictive and automatic diagnostics of battery health, optimize the
recharge time and provide an advance warning about the end of battery life upon detection of a
weak / defective battery.

W. The battery cells age, at the time of delivery into site, shall be less than three months.

X. Battery calculations according to IEEE 485 shall be carried out by UPS supplier and submitted for
approval, based on the following:

1. Nominal active power factor of not less than 0.8 Lag.

2. Temperature factor for operation at 25 Deg C.
3. Aging factor of 1.25.
4. Design margin factor of 1.15.
5. Recharge time up to 90% of its capacity within 10 to 12 hours.

Y. Mimic Panel: UPS assembly shall include a mimic diagram with digital and LED displays,
indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.

Z. Local panel instruments shall include at least the following (digital readings):

1. Inverter input voltage: measuring DC bus voltage.

2. Battery current: measuring charge / discharge currents.
3. AC voltage: measuring inverter output voltage, normal supply voltage or system output.
4. UPS output measurements: for current, voltage and frequency.
5. Remaining battery backup time.
6. Input voltages.
7. Input current.
8. Total power.
9. Total harmonic distortion on input feedback current (THDi).
10. Total harmonic distortion on input voltage (THDv).

AA. Local Panel Indicators shall include at least the following:

1. System on battery supply.

2. Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output and normal AC
supply input.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 10 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Static switch on normal AC supply (bypass mode).

4. Static switch inhibited.
5. Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for transformers,
rectifier/charger and inverter (alarm to automatically transfer load to by-pass circuit).
6. Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified rating failure of any
stage, DC bus earth fault, inverter output earth fault.

BB. Local built-in controls shall include at least the following:

1. Inverter on/off.
2. Battery input circuit breaker.
3. Auto/manual reset-test switch.
4. Manual reset switch.
5. Hybrid switch transfer test push-button.
6. Re-transfer auto/inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of load to inverter
after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-transfer of load to inverter until
hybrid switch is in auto-mode.
7. Battery automatic/equalize recharge timer, 0 - 30 hours adjustable, with
automatic/boost/equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel only and to be used
only with manufacturer's recommendation for type of battery specified).
8. Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices (accessible to maintenance
personnel only).
9. Indicator test/reset switch.
10. Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only).
11. Alarm test-accept-reset.

CC. Local built-in alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if required, shall include at
least the following:

1. Fan failure: Alarm only.

2. Over Temperature: Alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a safe preset
period.
3. DC Volts out of Limits: Alarm with indication.
4. Fuse Failure: Alarm.
5. Battery on Load/Disconnected: Alarm only.
6. Overloads: Alarm only with a trip command if pro- longed, for each rectifier/inverter unit.
7. Normal AC Supply Failure: Alarm only.
8. Hybrid Switch Operation to by-pass Mode: Alarm only.
9. Low and High Output Voltage: Alarm only.

DD. Input active harmonic filter shall be provided to limit input current harmonic distortion to less than
7% THD at all load currents from 0 to 100% of full load and improve power factor to not less than
0.9. The input filter shall be mounted inside the UPS cabinet or in a separate enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of
cables etc. are provided as required.

B. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage of
feeders and cables which shall be built into concrete foundations, bases or building structure are
provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 11 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations, particularly in
making connections and adjustments.

D. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into satisfactory
operation shall be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Provide direct interference free grounding circuit in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."

3.4 BATTERY EQUALIZATION

A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record

individual-cell voltages.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to manufacturer's
written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and performance of each
component of the UPS:

1. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.
b. Component type and labeling verification.
c. Ratings of installed components.
2. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm functions.
3. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.

B. Power Supply Output Disturbance: Provide microprocessor based instrument, and monitor and
record power supply output disturbance of voltage and frequency. Instrument details shall be
submitted for approval.

C. Test Periods shall be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by Engineer, to verify and obtain
realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and switching conditions within the
criteria specified.

D. Data logging shall include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes and spike bursts,
drop-outs, high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on cassette tape for subsequent
re-entry into instrument's memory for display or print-out.

E. Tests shall include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload condition, and
measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave shape, and harmonic content and
frequency stability.

F. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 12 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections,
including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria.
Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.

END OF SECTION 16264

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 / Page 13 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16265– CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes central battery system for emergency lighting that monitors individual
luminaires, automatically sense loss of normal AC supply and transfer loads from normal AC to
battery DC supply on supply power failure, and that automatically retransfer to normal supply
when normal power is restored along with central monitoring and automatic testing for all system
components.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section “Interior Lighting”.
3. Division 16 Section “Panelboards”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BMS: Building management system.

B. CBS: Central battery system.

C. LED: Light-emitting diode.

D. VRLA: Valve-regulated lead acid.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: for each type and rating of central battery equipment unit include dimensions and
data on features and components for each product specified. Include data on electrical ratings,
operating characteristics, operating weights, furnished options, specialties and accessories. Include
a detailed description of operating modes and any load limitations that may apply.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: For each type and rating of central battery equipment unit
include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. Include details of equipment assemblies.
Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, ventilation requirements, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include block diagram for
BMS interface points. Include system one-line diagram, internal and interconnecting wiring; and
diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include elevation, details, and legends of control
and indication displays. Include circuit current (withstand) rating of unit.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 1 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required
working clearances, and required area above and around central battery equipment. Show central
battery equipment layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural
and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
Indicate field measurements.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article..

F. Product Certificates: For each type of central battery equipment.

G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

H. Guarantee certification for 10 years battery operation as a minimum.

I. Source Limitations: Obtain all system components and accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.

I.J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For central battery equipment to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 01:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

control modules.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for selecting and setting field-adjustable controls
and status and alarm points.

J.K. Source quality-control reports.

K.L. Field quality control report.

L.M. Records and Reporting: on completion of the work, drawings of the emergency escape lighting
installation shall be provided and retained on the premises. The drawings shall be made in
accordance with EN 50171 requirements. In particular, they shall identify all luminaires and the
main components, and shall be regularly updated with any subsequent changes to the system.
These drawings shall be signed by a competent person to verify that the design meets the
requirements of this standard.

M.N. Log Book: a log book shall be provided for the recording of routine examinations, tests, defects
and alteration. These shall be available as a hard copy automatically printed from an automatic
testing device.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to
client stores.

1. Fuses: 25 percent of each type and rating, but no fewer than 3 of each type.
2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters where applicable: One complete set.
3. Change Over Modules: 10% percent, minimum one unit of each type.
4. Circuit Board: One spare circuit board for each critical circuit.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 2 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Manufacture’s Certification: The manufacturer shall be specialized in manufacturing of central

battery system as specified in this document. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and
shall design to internationally accepted standard.

B. Factory Testing: Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test procedure
to test all functions of the central battery system and batteries (via a discharge test), when supplied
by the CBS manufacturer and guarantee compliance with the specification. The manufacturer shall
submit a copy of the test report. Tests shall comply with EN 50171 for the central battery system
and with IEC 62034 for the automatic test system.

C. Materials and Assemblies: All materials and parts comprising the CBS shall be new, of current
manufacture, and have not been in prior service, except as required during factory testing. All
active electronic devices shall be solid state and not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended
specified tolerances for temperature or current to ensure maximum reliability. All semiconductor
devices shall be sealed. The manufacturer shall conduct inspection on incoming parts, modular
assemblies, and final products. Materials and components shall be manufacturer's latest design,
and Standards used shall be approved prior to manufacture.

D. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of CBS

manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of system required for this Project.

E. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice and
maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to support day to
day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer may disqualify a
manufacturer.

F. Standards: the emergency lighting system shall comply with the following standards:

1. DIN/VDE 0108-100 “Sicherheitsbeleuchtungsanlagen”.

2. EN 50171 “Central Power Supply Systems”.
3. EN 50172 “Emergency Escape Lighting Systems”.
4. EN 50272-2 “Safety Requirements for Secondary Batteries and Battery Installations – Part
2: Stationary Batteries”.
5. IEC 62034 “Automatic Test Systems for Battery Powered Emergency Escape Lighting”.
6. IEC 60896 “Stationary Lead Acid Batteries”.
7. IEEE 485 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary
Applications”.
8. IEC 61347-1 “Lamp Controlgear - Part 1: General and Safety Requirements”.
9. IEC 61347-2-11 “Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-11: Particular Requirements For
Miscellaneous Electronic Circuits Used with Luminaires”.
10. IEC 61000-6-2 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards -
Immunity for industrial environments”.
11. IEC 61000-6-3 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-3: Generic standards -
Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments”.
12. NFPA 101 “Life Safety Code”.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles.

B. Prior to shipping all products shall be inspected at the factory for damage.

C. Store equipment in spaces having environments controlled within manufacturers' written

instructions for ambient temperature and humidity conditions for non-operating equipment.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 3 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding 3 months without
powering up the equipment for a period of 8 hours to recharge the batteries. Relevant Certificate
for the batteries production date shall be submitted to the Engineer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace central battery system and replace
batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Onetwo year warranty from the date of taking over certificate .substantial
completion for central battery system and batteries.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Cooper Ceag (Germany)

2. Teknoware (Finland)
3. Inotec (Germany)

2.2 GENERAL REUIREMENTS

A. Emergency lighting system shall provide an average of 10.8 lux illumination level with a
maximum to minimum illumination uniformity of 40:1, throughout the facility unless otherwise
required by the local codes, whichever is more stringent.

B. Emergency lighting system shall operate for [1.5 hour(s) duration while achieving the illuminance
level stated in paragraph 2.2A above at the end of the battery discharge period.

C. Emergency lighting system shall be able to control each individual fixture’s switching mode as
maintained, non-maintained or switched maintained modes connected to the same circuit without
additional dataline.

D. The battery and system design shall be capable of meeting the declared performance initially,
during and at the end of the stated life.

E. In general, emergency lighting shall be provided by using lamps from the luminaires used for the
main normal illumination, unless otherwise shown on drawings.

F. BMS Interface: CBS shall interface to the Management Level Network through a BACnet/IP to
third party gateway. The gateway shall be provided by the CBS supplier and shall be connected
into the Management Level Network by the BMS contractor. The BMS contractor shall obtain a
list of the BACnet object IDs/names from the CBS supplier.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Under normal conditions the load shall be fed from the normal AC power supply through the
change-over switch and the battery is re-charged up to full charge state via the battery charger.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 4 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

The battery is maintained in an idle condition ready to feed the load, with continuous monitoring
of its output for healthy conditions with an alarm to be initiated in case of malfunction.

B. Upon loss of normal power supply, the load shall be automatically transferred to DC battery
supply through the change-over switch and power shall be supplied from the batteries until the
normal supply returns, upon normal power supply restoration then the load is retransferred to the
normal supply.

C. If the normal power supply failure period exceeds the rated duration of the battery, the load shall
be automatically shut down to protect the battery from deep discharge. The system shall
automatically reset itself upon normal power supply return.

2.4 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION

A. The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP 21 with removable screwed
front, rear and top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The electronics section shall
have IP 21 sheet steel enclosure with transparent polycarbonate window for all central systems and
IP 21 sheet steel enclosure with full metal door for all substations. Doors and removable panels
shall be so fastened that access to dangerous live parts is not possible without the use of a tool or
key. Wireways shall be smooth and free from sharp edges, burrs, flashes, etc. which might cause
damage to the insulation of the wiring parts. Metal screws shall not protrude into wireways.

B. The enclosures shall be resistant to heat and fire and tested in accordance with EN 50171
requirements.

C. The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries from top via
multiple undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables and looping circuits shall
be connected on protected and fused terminals. All outgoing luminaire circuits shall be connected
direct to relevant components via plug-in type terminals not less than 2.5 sq.m.

2.5 ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION

A. The system shall be built-up in a modular with all modules being plug-in-type design. The
outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. 1 module shall be used for circuits
with maximum load of 6 Amps as per DIN/VDE 0108. Each circuit shall be protected within the
system on mains and battery side via screw-in type cartridge fuses on each module. The fuses
shall be accessible via front plate of the module. The mains supply and battery mains cable shall
be protected by knife edge fuses. The fuse holders shall have handles for simple removal of the
fuses, 25 percent spare capacity shall be available in terms of circuits and modules.

B. The main panel incoming shall be switch disconnector provided with current limiting HRC fuse
type, complying with IEC 60269-2, with rated breaking capacity 120kA and manufactured by an
approved firm.

C. Each panel shall have a spare fuse carrier with at least 3 fuses for each size used in respective
panel.

2.6 CONTROL MODULE

A. The control module shall be composed of a microprocessor control module with plain text 4 line
displays with a minimum of 20 characters per line, to provide operative status and luminaire
failures.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 5 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. The central battery equipment shall include facilities for monitoring the system function. The
following shall be measured:

1. Battery voltage.
2. Battery/charger/discharge current.

C. The following test and monitoring equipment shall be provided:

1. Devices with automatic reset e.g. push button, to simulate a normal supply failure.
2. Isolating devices to isolate the AC supply for checking the duration of the system.
3. Indication of the actual power supply source (normal supply or battery).
4. Indication of the following faults and system condition:

a. Float charge voltage out of the permissible range.

b. Interruption of the battery charging circuit.
c. Failure in charge equipment; no charge current, although normal supply is available.
d. Supply from the battery, although normal supply is available.
e. Warning to be given at least 10 min before deep discharge protection is initiated.
f. Deep discharge protection initiated.
g. Failure of a powered ventilation system for battery cabinet or battery option.

D. LEDs shall indicate as a minimum:

1. Mains operation.
2. Battery operation.
3. Fault.
4. Deep discharge.

E. Potential free indicator contacts shall be provided for:

1. Operation.
2. Battery operation.
3. Summary fault.

F. Centronic interface for the connection of standard printers shall be provided on the front of the
control module. An electronically controlled 24 V output for the voltage monitoring of lighting
sub distribution panels shall be provided.

G. Electronically isolated mains monitoring shall be provided for maintained and non maintained
light circuits, with forced changeover in case of mains failure from mains to emergency light
operation. As a standard following programming modes shall be available.

1. Manual reset.
2. Time delay of mains return.
3. Stair well light timer adjustable from 1 to 15 minutes, where shown on Drawings.
4. Acoustic alarm in case of mains failure, manual reset or summation.

H. Individual changeover shall be provided per emergency circuit with free programming for
maintained, non-maintained or switched maintained light and 2 pole fusing conforming to VDE.

I. Failure recognition for each individual safety/exit luminaire in conjunction with proprietary
electronic ballasts including 2 wire monitoring module without additional data line.

2.7 CHANGEOVER MODULE

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 6 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Each changeover module shall be freely programmable to suit type of luminaires connected on
outgoing circuits and switching mode of each individual luminaire i.e. maintained, non-maintained
or switch maintained. The individual luminaires monitoring circuits shall be included in the
changeover module. Each circuit in the changeover module shall have LED indications for circuit
on and lamp failure and shall be fit to monitor 20 luminaires as a minimum. All outgoing circuit
terminals shall be provided to monitor the sub distribution boards. As an alternative, modules
constructed using printed circuit may be provided.

2.8 MONITORING / ADDRESS MODULE

A. Monitoring module shall be provided for luminaire with standard electronic ballast and connected
to the central battery system. Monitoring module shall be compatible with electronic ballasts from
any manufacturer with the following features: it must be able to operate with both AC and DC
voltage, it must shut itself off in an event of a lamp failure, input current in shut off mode must be
less than 10mA and must have constant power output high frequency electronic control gear /
transformer. The electronic ballast shall be “CE” marked and shall comply with IEC 60929.

B. Monitoring / address modules shall comply with IEC 61347-1 and IEC 61347-2-11.

C. Monitoring modules shall be able to accept 230V AC at 50 Hz and 220 V +25/-20 % DC.
Monitoring / address modules shall be protected against reverse polarity. Monitoring / address
module shall have IP 20 degree of protection to IEC 60529 and a flame retardant housing.

D. Monitoring / address modules shall have selector switches for 20 addresses as a minimum and
shall have a 230V AC control input connected to the branch circuit from a node after the switch in
case of switched maintained fixtures. Fixtures fed from two sources where shown on drawings
such as a dimmed general lighting or switched maintained circuits shall be provided with
monitoring module with an integrated changeover or a separate switch controller such that in case
of battery operation either in mains failure or testing the fixture is fed from the battery source.
Emergency fixtures controlled through DALI protocol shall be provided with monitoring module
with DALI control input.

2.9 ELECTRONIC ADDRESSABLE BALLASTS AND LED CONTROL GEARS FOR EXIT
SIGNS

A. Safety and exit luminaires shall be provided with high frequency electronic addressable ballast
without monitoring module or LED electronic gear in case of LED luminaires, with 20 addresses
as a minimum for function monitoring in DC-operation without additional data line and free
programmable switching mode as maintained, non-maintained or switched maintained luminaires
in one circuit without additional data line. Ballasts shall able to operate with both AC and DC
voltage and shall have automatic lamp detection including automatic switch-off in the event of a
lamp defect and automatic restart after lamp replacement.

B. Electronic addressable ballast shall comply with IEC 60929, IEC 61347-2-3 and IEC 61347-2-4.
Electronic LED control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC 62384

C. Electronic addressable ballast and LED control gear shall meet the limits of main harmonic
content as defined in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with radio interference suppression limits
defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of IEC 61547. Ballasts shall have Efficiency
Index EEI=A2, power factor corrected to above 0.9. The electronic ballast shall be “CE” marked
and shall comply with IEC 60929. All electronic addressable ballasts and LED control gear for the
exit luminaires shall be manufactured by the emergency central battery system manufacturer.

D. LED electronic control gear shall be high efficiency, high power factor, suitable for operation at
the ambient conditions specified for the project. Control gear shall have constant output current or

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 7 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

constant output voltage over the whole wattage range independent of mains supply fluctuations as
shown on drawings and sufficient for operating the number and wattage of LEDs connected.

E. Control gear shall have electrical insulation between primary and secondary sides. Maximum
length between control gear and LED module shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Electronic addressable ballasts and LED control gear shall be able to accept 230V AC at 50 Hz
and 220 V +25/-20 % DC. Ballasts shall be protected against reverse polarity. Ballasts shall have
IP 20 degree of protection to IEC 60529 and a flame retardant housing.

G. Whenever the main lighting fixtures are used as emergency lighting or exit signs are obtained
from manufacturer different than that of the CBS, the Contractor shall ensure coordination
between both manufacturers. Central battery supplier shall provide necessary addressable modules
for each fixture.

2.10 LOCAL CONTROLLER / BRANCH CIRCUITS MONITORING MODULE

A. Final branch lighting circuits feeding non maintained or switched maintained emergency fixtures
shall be monitored for operation through single or 3 phase voltage monitor, as the case may be,
installed in the lighting sub-distribution boards or a single phase control relay shall be installed in
final circuit when required. The non-maintained and switched maintained luminaires shall be lit
during a local supply failure. However the emergency supply panel shall not switch to battery use
as long as its own mains supply is available. The Local Controllers should comply with IEC
61347-1 and IEC 61347-2-11.

2.11 CHARGER

A. Charger module shall be micro processor controlled module with temperature controlled voltage
charging to IU characteristics. Automatic boost charging facility shall be built in to the system
depending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging and supervising method
for failure indication of battery circuits as well as battery charger. Battery chargers shall be
capable of automatically charging their batteries that have been discharged so that they can
perform at least 80 % of their specified duration within 12 h of commencement of charge in
accordance with EN 50171. The charger shall have built in deep discharge protection and shall be
provided with LED indications for:

1. Operation.
2. Charger on.
3. Booster on.
4. Mains operation.
5. Battery capacity >10 percent, >50 percent, 100 percent.
6. Charging failure.
7. Insulation fault.

B. Charger shall have potential free indicator contacts for:

1. Charging failure.
2. Fast charge.
3. Insulation fault.

C. The battery charger shall be so designed that a short circuit on its output will not cause damage.

D. Charger shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures. Charger shall include plug-in-
type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains and battery accessible via the front plate of
the charger.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 8 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.12 BATTERIES

A. Batteries shall be maintenance free, VRLA sealed leak proof 220 V and in compliance with IEC
60896. Batteries shall have extremely low gas generation, low self discharge and have
permanently sealed pressure release vents.

B. Battery ampere-hour rating shall be sufficient for emergency period specified with all luminaires
operating at full luminous output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.75 V per cell. Cells shall
be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life shall not be less than 10 years, with a
capacity drop down to not less than 80% under normal expected service. At the end of the
specified duration for the system, the output voltage shall be not less than 90% of the nominal
voltage at the nominal load. Battery strings shall consist of 18 blocks of 12 V batteries. Batteries
shall consist of one string for ratings up to 10 kVA and of two strings for rating above 10 kVA.

C. Batteries shall be installed and provision for maintenance made in accordance with EN 50272-2
and manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Date of manufacture shall be stamped on each battery and shall be less than 3 months from the
date of delivery to the site.

E. Battery calculations according to IEEE 485 shall be carried out by the CBS supplier and submitted
for approval, based on the following:

1. Nominal active power factor of not less than 0.9 Lag

2. Temperature factor for operation at 25 Deg C.
3. Aging factor of 1.25.
4. Design margin factor of 1.15.
5. Recharge time not exceeding 12 hours so that the battery can perform at least 80 % of their
specified duration.

2.13 CENTRAL MONITORING DEVICE

A. The central monitoring shall be via central group monitoring hardware and software, monitoring
and programming unit. The unit shall operate with latest visualization software to give detailed
text, address and information of all luminaires connected to system. It shall have
programming/automatic testing facility for time duration test, function test, location of luminaire,
manual rest and acoustic alarm. It shall have facility for software interface to the BMS to provide
transmission of all data records as desired.

2.14 AUTOMATIC AND CYCLIC FUNCTION MONITORING AND LOGGING FACILITY

A. Automatic test system shall comply with IEC 62034.

B. An automatic test unit with a recording facility shall be installed with the following features as a
minimum:

1. Constant monitoring of the charge, the intervals shall be less than 5 minutes where
monitoring is periodic.
2. Cyclical monitoring of switching and functional capacity of the connected load for the
emergency power supply. Test shall be carried at least once every week with a test duration
between 10 seconds and 5 minutes provided that the total is less than 10 minutes per week.
3. Recording of any faults in the central power supply system and any fault in the test
equipment or central monitoring.
4. Fault notification where there is a fault in the transmission route to the central monitoring
point.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 9 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

5. A facility for manual initiation of the test on the central power supply or on the central
monitoring unit.

C. If a mains supply failure occurs up to four hours before a programmed functional test, the test shall
be postponed and rescheduled for between 4 h and 24 h after restoration of the mains supply. In
the event that a functional test is postponed, indication of the pending test shall be given on the
remote panel. If a mains supply failure occurs up to 24 h before a programmed rated duration test,
the start of the test shall be postponed and rescheduled within seven days after restoration of the
mains supply.

D. The limited duration test shall be performed for two thirds of the rated duration. The central
emergency power supply system shall be automatically checked to ensure that the battery has not
discharged to a lower voltage than is required for a discharge of two thirds of the rated duration.

2.15 WIRING

A. Internal wiring used to carry AC supply and safety equipment circuits shall be separated from each
other by running through separate compartments or by double insulation.

B. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of Division 16 Section “Conductors and Cables”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store central battery equipment according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.

B. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive central battery equipment, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, structural support, ventilation,
temperature, humidity and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment will be installed, before installation
begins.

C. Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.

D. Examine routing layout for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Clearance: According to manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than 900 mm in front of
unit.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 10 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment and components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials
and Methods" and shall comply with EN 50171.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Supervision of unit installation, connections, and adjustments by a

factory-authorized service representative. Report results in writing.

B. Tests: Perform tests listed below according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test unit
functions, operations, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation complies with
Specifications. Perform tests on completion of unit installation and after building circuits have
been energized. Provide instruments to permit accurate observation of tests. Include the
following tests:

1. Simulate Malfunctions: Verify protective device operation.

2. Demonstrate low-battery-voltage shutdowns, and transfers due to normal source failure and
restoration.
3. Verify emergency-supply duration.
4. Test for Successful Supply: Operate each type of load served by the unit for this Project
without symptoms of abnormal supply such as noise, vibration, or pulsation of the load or
its output.

C. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and abrasions in finish to match original finish. Clean unit
internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace central battery equipment whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids
prior to Substantial Completion.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Battery Equalization: Manually equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 11 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16265

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265/ Page 12 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16280 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes automatic power factor correction equipment rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and
operating weights of multiple capacitor cells or elements; and data on features, ratings, and
performance.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and
workspace requirements and required clearances.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail internal and interconnecting wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Factory Test Reports: Evidence of product's compliance with specified requirements.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
Include the following:

1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at Project site.
2. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal conditions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with:

1. IEC 60831-1&-2, IEC 60871-1&-2 and IEC 60931-1&-2.

2. IEEE 18.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all system components and accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 16280 / Page 1 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate power factor automatic regulator communication module with BMS data network for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of taking over certificate.Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
materials to Employer.

1. Fuses: 1 for every 5of each type and rating, but not less than 3 of each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Schneider Electric. (France)

2. Schneider Electric / Square D. (USA)
3. ABB (Germany / USA)
4. Siemens (Finland / USA)
5. General Electric Co.; Business Information Center (USA)
6. Eaton (USA)

2.2 CAPACITORS, GENERAL

A. Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase groups and
mounted in metal enclosures.

B. Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated in
thermosetting resin inside plastic container.

C. Capacitors shall comply with IEC 60831, with an internal loss factor not exceeding 0.5 x 10(-3) (a
consumption of about 0.5 watts per kVAR).

D. Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 16280 / Page 2 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

E. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in each phase
and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the following:

1. Interrupting Capacity: 120,000 A, minimum.

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor manufacturer.
3. Fuses shall be provided with a monitoring facility for an immediate tripping after any fuse
is blown to prevent single phasing. The monitoring shall reset automatically after the
replacement of the blown fuse(s).
4. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has opened, but is
still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the enclosure.

F. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.

G. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid leakage from capacitor
cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated.

1. Indoor Enclosures: IP 21 to IEC 60529 or NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.

2. Outdoor Enclosures: IP 54 to IEC 60529 or NEMA 250, Type 4, equipped with watertight
conduit connections.

H. Anti Harmonic Reactors shall be provided in series with the capacitors and properly tuned to limit
the harmonic currents in order to avoid over loading the capacitors. The reactor rating shall not
exceed 7% of the capacitors to be protected.

I. Capacitor rating voltage shall not be less than 470 V at design indicated kVAR rating.

2.3 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION UNITS

A. Comply with IEC 60831-1,2 and IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA ICS 2.

B. Description: Capacitor banks, contactors, controls, and accessories factory installed in

independent enclosures as close as possible to/or within nominated switchboard requiring PF
improvement. Units include a separately mounted current transformer to sense current in the
power circuit being corrected and to provide input to unit controls.

C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any
value between unity and 0.80 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on circuits
being corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10
seconds, operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are
opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting.
Switch only one capacitor bank at a time.

D. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:

1. Undervoltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for power
supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually controlled
capacitor-bank switching.

E. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the capacitor
application.

F. Buses: Plated copper.

G. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting wiring, and
capacitors.

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 16280 / Page 3 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Inductors: Iron-core-type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching surges to within
contactor ratings.

I. Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum fault
current to which they may be exposed.

J. Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel.

K. Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with controls or
main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.

L. Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure.

1. Indicated target and actual power factors.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
3. Mounting: Flush or semiflush in unit door.

M. Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting conditions.

N. Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit.

1. Operating handle can be padlocked.

O. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication modules, and network

interface units, matched to and compatible withBMS. Communication module transmits data to
remote monitoring devices. Data includes actual corrected power factor and number of capacitor
steps connected.

2.4 FACTORY FINISH

A. Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with IEC 60831-1,2 and
IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA CP 1. Include the following:

1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, leak, and
dissipation-factor tests.
2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in

Division 3.

B. Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written instructions.

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 16280 / Page 4 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Connect remote monitoring communication module to electrical power monitoring and control
data network through appropriate network interface unit.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

automatic power factor correction equipment installation and connections. Report results in
writing. Include the following:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuits have been energized, connect and observe units
to confirm proper operation.
2. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Inspection: Perform external and internal inspections of capacitor equipment for damage and for
compliance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's documentation. Check electrical and
mechanical bolted connections for required torquing.

C. Testing: Perform the following and certify compliance with test parameters:

1. Test insulation resistance between capacitor terminals and case. Follow manufacturer's
written instructions or those below:

a. Use test voltages 500 V minimum, for equipment rated 250 V and less, and 1000 V
minimum, for equipment rated more than 250 V.
b. Apply test voltage for 60 seconds.
c. Investigate, report, and resolve insulation resistance less than that stated by
manufacturer's literature or less than allowable 25 megohms for equipment rated
250 V and less and 100 megohms for equipment rated more than 250 V.

2. Measure capacitance of pole-to-pole capacitor combinations and compare with

manufacturer's published values. Report readings, and investigate and resolve
discrepancies more than 10 percent of manufacturer's nominal values.
3. Energize circuits and demonstrate electrical operating features of automatic power factor
correction units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Verify accuracy of remotely monitored parameters transmitted from automatic power
factor correction units by communication module.

D. Correct deficiencies shown by inspections and tests on site where possible, and retest; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units and retest.

E. Report of Tests and Inspections: Written record including adjustment settings.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for optimum automatic power factor correction.

3.5 CLEANING

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 16280 / Page 5 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean components internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16280

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 16280 / Page 6 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16289 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes factory installed or field-mounted SPDs for:

1. Low-voltage (up to 1000 V) power distribution and control equipment whose specific
requirements are covered under Articles 2.2 to 2.7 inclusive.
2. Telecommunications and Signal Processing Equipment whose specific requirements are covered
under Articles 2.8 to 2.11 inclusive.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. In: Nominal discharge current.

B. Iimp: Impulse current.

C. Imax: Maximum discharge current.

D. Icw: Combination wave generator short-circuit current.

E. Uc: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

F. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-voltage

characteristic.

G. GDT: Gas discharge tube.

H. SAD: Silicon avalanche diode.

I. SPD: Surge protective device.

J. TOV: Temporary overvoltage.

K. Up: Voltage protection level.

L. Uoc: Open circuit voltage.

M. UT: Temporary overvoltage test value.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 1 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

N. fG: Cut-off frequency is equivalent to the frequency which induces an insertion loss of 3 dB under certain
test conditions as per IEC 61643-21. Unless otherwise indicated, this value refers to a 50 Ω system

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.
2. Copy of type test certificate in accordance with IEC 61643.

B. Energy coordination study between SPDs installed at different levels.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

E. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals and to the satisfaction of Employer’s
requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of surge protective devices, of
types and capacities required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than five years.

B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following standards:

1. IEC 61643-11.
2. IEC 61643-12.
3. IEC 61643-21.
4. IEC 61643-22.
5. BS 7671 (IET Wiring Regulations – Latest Edition).
6. IEC 61000-6-3.
7. IEC 61000-4-5.

As an alternative, SPDs in compliance with UL 1449 may be considered subject to Engineer’s approval.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Install certified “shock-guards’ on the equipment before shipping from the factory and shall be retained in
place till unpacked at site and inspected by Engineer, to ascertain whether the “shock-guard” has been
activated by any shock/impact during shipment.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair,
restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified warranty period

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 2 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of substantial completiontaking over certificate .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following or approved equal:

1. ABB. (France)
2. Eaton / Moeller (Germany)
3. Eaton. (U.S.A)
4. Emerson Electric. (U.S.A)
5. GE Zenith Controls. (U.S.A)
6. Leviton. (U.S.A)
7. Siemens. (Germany)
8. Dehn. (Germany)
9. Furse. (U.K)
10. Schneider Electric. (France)
11. Lovato (Italy)

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AC POWER SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Maximum continuous operating voltage (U c) of the SPD shall be equal to 110% of the nominal system
voltage as a minimum or the next higher rating to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary
r.m.s overvoltage (swell conditions), unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

B. The SPD shall be suitable for a supply main’s frequency between 47 Hz and 63 Hz.

C. All installed SPDs shall be connected in common mode to eliminate overvoltage between each phase and
earth and between neutral and earth, unless otherwise specified.

D. SPDs shall have the following features and accessories:

1. Integral or external fused-disconnect switch. Fuses shall be current limiting type to IEC 60269
with short circuit interrupting capacity 120 kA as a minimum.
2. Indicator light display for protection status and end of life.
3. Control interface: SPD shall be equipped with dry contacts for monitoring and displaying the
SPD’s status and alarms from the BMS. As an alternative, software interface with BMSmay be
provided. Coordinate with BMS supplier for interface requirements.
4. Surge counter, for SPDs in compliance with ANSI/UL Standards.

E. SPDs shall comply with IEC 61000 For EMC.

F. SPDs installed adjacent to the protected equipment shall have galvanized and electrostatic painted
enclosure with IP 54 degree of protection to IEC 60529 and provided with suitable DIN rails for SPD and
fused-disconnect switch fixation, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer.

G. Generally, SPDs shall be installed as follows, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings:

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 3 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Class I+II SPDs shall be installed at:

a. Incomer(s) of all MDB(s).

b. Incomer(s) of EMDB(s) / Synchronization switchboards.
c. Incomer of all MCC(s) fed directly from transformer.
d. Utility incomer of ATS(s) fed directly from transformer.

2. Class I SPDs shall be installed at:

a. Roof mounted / outdoor equipment control panel, unless otherwise recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.

3. Class II SPDs shall be installed at:

a. Distribution panels.
b. Utility incomer of ATS(s) fed from main distribution board / distribution panels.
c. Incomer of MCCs / MCPs fed from main distribution board / distribution panels.
d. Foundation distribution cabinets for data centers.

4. Class III SPDs shall be installed at:

a. Power distribution units for data centers.

b. Final distribution panelboards feeding sensitive equipment.
c. Outdoor luminaires installed at high masts and street lighting poles, unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer.

H. All SPDs shall be installed within or adjacent to the protected equipment within a distance not exceeding
10 m. Where distance between two consecutive SPDs is less than 10 m, the downstream SPD is not
required.

2.3 COMBINED CLASS I + II OR TYPE 1 HYBRID SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Combined surge protective devices shall utilize MOV and GDT technologies and shall provide common
mode and differential mode protection to eliminate overvoltage between each phase and neutral and
between neutral and earth.

B. Class I + II surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the Drawings.

C. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, combined Class I + Class II.

D. SPD shall be tested for Iimp simulated with 10/350 microseconds waveform, with the following parameters
for common mode: Iimp 100 kA within 50 micro seconds, charge (Q) 50 As within 5 ms and energy (W/R)
2500 kJ/Ohm within 5 ms, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.

E. SPD shall be tested for Iimp simulated with 10/350 microseconds waveform, with the following parameters
for differential mode: Iimp 25 kA within 50 micro seconds, charge (Q) 12.5 As within 5 ms and energy
(W/R) 156 kJ/Ohm within 5 ms, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.

F. Voltage protection level (Up) shall not exceed 1500 V.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 4 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Short Circuit Withstand Capability (Isccr): Match the Switchboard short circuit level as a minimum.

H. Common Mode Nominal Discharge Current (In): 100 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

I. Differential Mode Nominal Discharge Current (In): 25 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

J. Maximum Discharge Current (Imax): 100 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform.

K. SPDs temporary overvoltage withstand shall comply with IEC 61643-11 requirements.

L. As an alternative to combined Class I+II SPD, hybrid surge protective devices may be used. Hybrid SPDs
shall be constructed using a primary and secondary stage hybrid transient suppression system separated
by suitable line inductive impedance to ANSI/UL 1449. The primary stage shall utilize SAD technology,
while the secondary stage shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules utilizing
MOV technology and tested for manufacturing defects. The SAD module shall not be self-sacrificing to
protect the system; rather it shall provide immediate transition to the secondary stage when subjected to
potentially harmful levels. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner that ensures surge
current sharing.

2.4 CLASS I SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Class I surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology.

B. Class I surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the Drawings.

C. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Class I.

D. SPD shall be tested for Iimp simulated with 10/350 microseconds waveform, with the following
parameters: Iimp 25 kA within 50 micro seconds, charge (Q) 12.5 As within 5 ms and energy (W/R) 156
kJ/Ohm within 5 ms.

E. Voltage protection level (Up) shall not exceed 2500 V.

F. Short Circuit Withstand Capability (Isccr): 100 kArms (220 kApeak) as a minimum.

G. Nominal Discharge Current (In): 25 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform, unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer and approve by the Engineer.

H. SPDs temporary overvoltage withstand shall comply with IEC 61643-11 requirements.

2.5 CLASS II SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Class II surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology.

B. Class II surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the Drawings.

C. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Class II.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 5 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. SPD shall be tested with simulated 8/20 microseconds waveform, with In 12.5 kA.

E. Voltage protection level (Up) shall not exceed 1500 V.

F. Short Circuit Withstand Capability (Isccr): 50 kArms as a minimum.

G. Maximum Discharge Current (Imax): 25 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform.

H. SPDs temporary overvoltage withstand shall comply with IEC 61643-11 requirements.

2.6 CLASS III SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Class III surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology and shall provide common mode and
differential mode protection to eliminate overvoltage between each phase and neutral and between neutral
and earth.

B. Class III surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the Drawings.

C. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Class III.

D. SPD shall be tested with a simulated combination wave of 8/20 microseconds waveform for short circuit
current and 1.2/50 microseconds waveform for open circuit voltage with Uoc 6 kV.

E. Voltage protection level (Up) shall not exceed 1500 V.

F. Short Circuit Withstand Capability (Isccr): 6 kArms as a minimum.

G. Nominal Discharge Current (In): 3 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform.

H. SPDs temporary overvoltage withstand shall comply with IEC 61643-11 requirements.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. The following information shall be provided by the manufacturer on the nameplate as a minimum:

1. Manufacturer’s name and model number.

2. Maximum continuous operating voltage.
3. SPD class and discharge parameters for each mode of protection declared by the manufacturer:

a. Class I+II, Iimp in kA and In in kA.

b. Class I and Iimp in kA.
c. Class II and In in kA.
d. Class III and Uoc in kV

4. Nominal discharge current.

5. Voltage protection level.
6. Identification of terminals.
7. Compliance standards.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 6 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.8 PROTECTION OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING EQUIPMENT

A. Telecommunications and signal processing equipment, being sensitive devices susceptible to destruction
by surge voltages induced by lightning or by electrical switching operations, shall be protected by SPD’s.

B. The SPD’s shall be deployed based on the source of the surge and its intensity at the boundary of each
lightning protection zone (LPZ 0 A/0B/1/2) as defined by IEC 62305-4.

C. SPD’s shall be properly designed to take into account the surge energy that they will be subjected to and
to limit the transient over-voltages to safe levels for equipment within the protected zone.

D. SPD’s shall be able to limit conducted interference to a safe level so that the immunity of the protected
terminal equipment is not exceeded in accordance with the requirements of the immunity and the test set-
up described in EN 61000-4-5. The voltage protection level has to be adapted to the immunity of the
equipment to be protected.

E. SPD’s shall comply with the standardized test waveforms with peak currents used to test SPD’s at each
LPZ boundary given in IEC 61634-21 Table 3. Accordingly, each protective device shall be labeled and
tested to multiple categories and performance classes.

F. Identification, Documentation and Marking

1. Identification, documentation and marking shall be in accordance with IEC 61643-21:

2. The SPDs shall be clearly marked with the following items:

a. The Manufacturer's name or trademark.
b. Model number.
c. Manufacturing traceability.
d. The maximum continuous operating voltage.

3. The following information shall be either marked on the body of the SPD or included in the
submittals for review. For each test performed on the SPD, the test conditions shall be stated in the
documentation:
a. Manufacturer’s name or trademark
b. Year and week of manufacture, or serial number.
c. Model number.
d. Service conditions.
e. Maximum continuous operating voltage Uc (AC and/or DC).
f. Rated current.
g. Voltage protection level Up.
h. Impulse reset (if applicable).
i. AC durability.
j. Impulse rating (according to IEC 61643-21 Table 3 - category and corresponding
parameters e.g. C2: 2k V/ 1kA).
k. Transmission characteristics (appropriate to the intended SPD use).
l. Additional information such as surge currents In, Iimp, series resistance.
m. SPD Category and rating.

G. SPD’s for telecommunications and signal processing equipment may be classified into three basic
application groups:
1. Telephone and data transmission equipment.
2. Data processing networks.
3. Radio communication equipment.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 7 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.9 SPD’S FOR TELEPHONE AND DATA TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT

A. Surge protectors for telephone and data transmission equipment are divided into three types :
1. Surge protectors for telecom networks.
2. Surge protectors for Local Area Networks (LANs).

B. Surge protectors for telecom networks.

1. Designed to protect telecom transmission devices such as PBX, modems, data terminals.
2. Designed and selected to fit into the existing installations such as:
a. Mounting on DIN rail.
b. Insertion in connection strips.
c. Wall mounting.
d. Mounting on telecom Main Distribution Frames.
e. Plug-in on termination outlets.

C. General Features of SPD’s for telephone and data transmission equipment:

1. SPD’s shall be based on a multi-stage hybrid design that combines a high discharge current
capacity with fast response time to provide:
a. A nominal discharge current greater than 5 kA at 8/20 µs impulse.
b. An ultra-fast response time < 1 ns.
c. Safe operation in end of life scenarios (fail-safe behavior: short circuit in case of removal
of device with no line-cut-off).
d. Low insertion loss.

D. Protection Configurations

1. Protection configurations shall be selected based on the type of network being protected:
a. Standard Protection: Used mainly for the analog telecom network (PSTN):
1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, line resistors and fast clamping
diode.

b. Enhanced Protection: For very low voltage transmission lines.

1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, line resistors and 3-pole
clamping diode.

c. Line + Shield Protection: Transmission and protection for the shield wire.

d. K20 Protection: Complying with the ITU-T K20 International recommendation:

1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, fast clamping diodes and
thermistors.

e. Low Capacitance Protection: For high bit rate links (> 1 Mbit/s):
1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, line resistors and 3-pole low
capacitance diodes.

f. Cat 6/Cat6A Protection: Designed for very high bit rate LAN (up to 1000 Mbit/s):
1) A combination of a 3-pole low capacitance diode and MOV.

2. Below Table shows characteristics of typical protection configurations of combined lightning

protection and surge arresters that shall be required at Service Entrances (LPZ 0A-LPZ 2 or higher)
of common building services. Final selected configuration shall be based on type of line to be

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 8 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

protected, number of lines to be protected and type of installation in addition to the

recommendations of the protected equipment manufacturer.

Characteristic Application
Telecom Industrial Industrial Industrial
Telecom RS232 Modbus / LON-Bus
systems, RS485 / (Echelon)
ADSL, etc. Profibus
DP/FMS
Nominal Voltage (Un) 180V 12V 5V 5V
Maximum Continuous Operating DC Voltage (Uc) 180V 15V 6V 6V
Maximum Continuous Operating AC Voltage (Uc) 127V 10.6V 4.2V 4.2V
Maximum Current at 45 Deg. C (IL) 750mA 750mA 1000mA 1000mA
D1: Total lightning impulse current (10/350 µs) 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
(Iimp)
D1: Lightning impulse current (10/350 µs) per line 2.5 kA 2.5 kA 2.5 kA 2.5 kA
(Iimp)
C2: Total nominal discharge current (8/20 µs) (In) 20 kA 20 kA 20 kA 20 kA
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20 µs) per line 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
(I n)
Voltage protection level line-line for Iimp D1 (Up) ≤270V ≤50V ≤25V ≤25V
Voltage protection level line-earth for Iimp D1 (Up) ≤550V ≤37V ≤550V ≤550V
Voltage protection level line-line at 1 kV/µs C3 ≤250V ≤38V ≤11 ≤9
(Up)
Voltage protection level line-earth at 1 kV/µs C3 ≤550V ≤19V ≤550 ≤550
(Up)
In-line resistance 1.8 ohms 1.8 ohms 1.0 ohms 1.0 ohms
Cut-off frequency line-line (fG) 25 MHz 2.7 MHz 100 MHz 1 MHz
Wiring 2 pairs 4 wires 2 pairs 2 pairs

2.10 DATA PROCESSING NETWORKS

A. Ethernet network surge protectors shall be designed for computer networks with very fast data transfer
speeds, up to 1 Gbit/s networks of Category 5E/6/6A and PoE / PoE+ installations.

B. Surge protectors for Local Area Networks (LAN’s) shall be based on a combination of 3-pole gas tubes
and fast clamping diodes.

C. Surge protectors shall be equipped with standard data processing connectors (such as RJ45 connectors)
and shall be available in either a single enclosure to protect terminal equipment or to fit in a 19’’ rack to
protect at the switch level.

D. Video Transmission

1. Video Transmission shall be protected at the remote equipment level as well as at the local digital
recording devices.

2. Surge protectors for video transmission shall be designed to support different configurations:
a. Analog Cameras: combining analog video and power supply protection into a single unit.
b. IP Camera: combining Ethernet and power supply protection in a single unit.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 9 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

c. Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Video: designed for Power Over Ethernet applications.

E. The installation of surge protectors on data-processing networks shall be applied in accordance with IEC
61643-21 in areas of high electromagnetic disturbance, inter-building networks and wide area networks.

F. Below Table shows characteristics of typical protection configuration for SPD’s at transition from
lightning protection zone (LPZ 0B to LPZ 2 and higher). Final selected configuration shall be based on
type of network, application voltage level and data transmission speed.in addition to the
recommendations of the protected equipment manufacturer.

Characteristic Application
Industrial Ethernet,
PoE+, Cat 6, Class E A
Nominal Voltage (Un) 48V
Maximum Operating DC Voltage (Uc) 48V
Maximum Operating AC Voltage (Uc) 34V
Maximum Continuous DC Voltage Pair-Pair 57V
(PoE) (Uc)
Nominal Current (I L) 1A
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20 µs) line- 150A
line (I n)
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20 µs) line- 2.5 kA
earth (In)
C2: Total nominal discharge current (8/20 10 kA
µs) line-earth (In)
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20 µs) 150A
pair-pair (PoE) (I n)
Voltage protection level line-line for In C2 ≤190V
(Up)
Voltage protection level line-earth for I n C2 ≤600
(Up)
Voltage protection level line-line for In C2 ≤600
(PoE) (Up)
Voltage protection level line-line at 1 kV/µs ≤145V
C3 (Up)
Voltage protection level line-earth at 1 kV/µs ≤500V
C3 (Up)
Voltage protection level pair-pair at 1 kV/µs ≤600V
C3 (PoE) (Up)
Insertion loss at 250MHz ≤2.0 dB
Transmission class to EN50173-1 Class E A
Wiring 8 wires + shield

2.11 RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

A. General features of surge protectors for radio communication equipment:

1. Generally, SPD’s shall employ Gas Discharge Tube (GDT) technology for the following reasons:
a. GDT’s have very low capacitance at very high frequency transmission lines (several GHz).
b. Following an overvoltage incidence, the GDT will return to its original condition of high
isolation and will become operational again. This occurs since the GDT is connected in
parallel between the central conductor and the external shield of a coaxial type installation.
c. The GDT’s have a very wide bandwidth from DC to 6GHz.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 10 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. “Quarter-Wave” SPD’s shall be used as ‘band-pass” filters to act as a short circuit between the
conducting core and the external ground for the tuned frequencies. They filter out the lightning
low-frequency spectrum from the operating frequencies.

3. Connector Types: N, TNC, SMA, F, BNC, etc. as required by the protected installation.

B. SPD’s for outdoor use shall be suitable for the prevailing outdoor environmental conditions described in
Division 16, Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

C. Material:
1. Housing: Brass, with white bronze tri-metal alloy.
2. Contacts: Bronze with gold/silver plating.

D. SPD’s shall be installed at the Service Entrance of the installation, to limit the propagation of lightning
currents, and also near sensitive equipment.

E. Below Table shows characteristics of typical protection configurations of combined lightning protection
and surge arresters that shall be required at Service Entrances (LPZ0A-LPZ2 or higher). Final selected
configuration shall be based on type of line to be protected, number of lines to be protected and type of
installation in addition to the recommendations of the protected equipment manufacturer.

Characteristic Application
TETRA Wireless LAN 5GHz Analogue & Digital TV
Band
Frequency Range 380-512MHz 2-6 GHz DC, 5-2400 MHz
(1/4 wave technology)
Maximum Continuous Operating 0V 0V 24V
DC Voltage (Uc)
Nominal Current (I L) 0A 0A 2A
Max. transmission capacity 3000W 300W -
D1 Lightning impulse current 25kA 25kA 2.5kA
(10/350 µs) (Iimp)
C2 Nominal discharge current (8/20 50kA 50kA 10kA
µs) (I n)
Voltage protection level for Iimp D1 ≤ 18 V ≤ 230 V
(UP)
Voltage protection level for In C2 ≤ 130 V ≤ 30 V ≤ 300 V
(UP)
Voltage protection level at 1 kV/µs - - ≤ 60 V
C3 (Up)
Insertion Loss 0.1dB ≤0.2dB 1.7dB (5-862MHz)
1.9dB (862-2400MHz)
Return Loss ≥20dB ≥20dB ≥14dB(8-47MHz)
≥18(47-2400MHz))
Surge Impedance 50 ohms 50 ohms 75 ohms

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with IEC 61643-11, IEC 61643-21 and BS 7671.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 11 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. For equipment installed at the roof / outdoor, coordinate with the equipment manufacturer for surge
protection requirements according to the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer.

C. Leads / wires shall be routed through the shortest straight parallel path. Wires shall be twisted type to
reduce conductor’s inductance.

D. Install SPDs such that the total SPD lead length(s) and size(s) along with the distance between the SPD
and the protected equipment does not exceed the values required by IEC 60364-5-53 or recommended by
manufacturer for proper operation whichever is more stringent.

E. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to manufacturer’s
published torque-tightening values and / or recommendations. If manufacturer’s torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

G. Wiring:

1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables."
2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Division 16 Section " Power Conductors and Cables."

H. Telecommunications and Signal Processing Equipment

1. To be effective, surge protectors shall be installed in accordance with the following principles:

a. The grounding point of the surge protector and that of the protected equipment shall be
inter-connected.

b. Protection shall be installed at the network entrance to divert impulse currents as fast as
possible.

c. The protected equipment shall be located near the surge protector (less than 10m). If this
rule cannot be achieved, secondary protection shall be installed near the equipment for
coordinated surge protection.

d. The grounding conductor between the ground output of the protector and the installation
bonding circuit shall be as short as possible (less than 50 cm) and shall have a cross-
sectional area of at least 2.5 mm².

e. The ground resistance shall comply with Project Specifications.

f. Protected and unprotected wires shall be kept apart to limit the potential for coupling.

2. In an equipotential bonding network and to reduce the residual voltages during lightning discharge
currents, the connection of Radio communications protector to the bonding network shall be as
short as possible (less than 50 cm) and shall have a proper cross sectional area of at least 4 mm².

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 12 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation
requirements.

B. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,
replace with new units and retest.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed.
Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the
testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer’s maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16289

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 16289 / Page 13 of 13

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16410- ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the
following:

1. Service disconnecting means.

2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle
switches used for disconnecting means.
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for circuit breakers.

C. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with one set
of approved Standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature, manufacturer's
name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and special features, as
applicable for each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment
features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Current and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
e. Cable terminal size.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 / Page 1 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

4. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
5. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.

C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.

D. Samples: Submit samples of each type of equipment for approval, unless otherwise agreed in
writing by the Engineer.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components
to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. In addition to requirements specified
in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following and to the satisfaction of
Employer’s requirements:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with UL98.

B. Comply with NEMA KS1.

C. Comply with NEMA 250.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the conditions
specified in Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.”

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other
construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of taking over certificate.Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 / Page 2 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:
1. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)
2. GE (U.S.A.)
3. ABB (U.S.A.)
4. Schneider Electric / Square D (U.S.A.)

2.2 SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (DISCONNECTING SWITCH)

A. Type: Heavy duty, non-fused, air break, single throw, 600-V AC, suitable for motor circuits or for
service entrance disconnecting applications, 2, 3, 4 or 6 poles as shown on the drawings.
Disconnecting switches shall comply with UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, with ampere rating as shown
on the Drawings ensuring its suitability for equipment horsepower rating where disconnecting
switch is used for switching motors or other highly inductive loads.

B. Design: Safety type, housed in separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on each
pole.

C. Short Circuit Withstand: Switch disconnectors shall be capable of withstanding the maximum
short circuit current at the point of installation in combination with the upstream protective device.

D. Operating Handle: A suitable handle made of conducting material shall be provided for safety and
convenient operation of the switch and it shall be in electrical connection with the enclosure. In
case the position of the switch contacts is indicated by the position of the operating handle, then
there shall be definite off and on indicated positions for the handle, and the design of the operating
mechanism shall be such that the handle cannot be left readily at or near the off position when the
switch is on. A handle indicating the position of the switch contacts either closed or open shall be
designed such that the door cannot be closed and secured in place with the handle indicating off
while the switch contacts are in the on position.

E. Operating Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break, double contact rotary blade mechanism,

independent manual operation. The design of the operating mechanism in conjunction with the
contact structure shall be such that, in normal operation, the persons operating the switch cannot
restrain the operations of the contacts after they have initially touched or parted when closing or
opening the switch. The design and construction of the operating mechanism shall assure ample
strength and rigidity. Screws and nuts serving to attach operating parts to cross bars or other
movable members shall be upset or otherwise locked to prevent loosening under the jarring of
continued use. Stops shall be provided as necessary to remove undue strain from switch parts.
Materials shall be suited for the particular application. Contacts and terminals shall be made of tin
plated copper of 99.5% purity.

F. Mechanical Interlock: the box, cover and switch operating mechanism shall be mechanically
interlocked so that the door is normally prevented from being opened when the switch contacts are
in the closed position and the switch contacts are normally prevented from being closed when the
door is open. Switch disconnector shall be provided with a defeatable interlock by which a
qualified person using the necessary tools can open the door while the switch is in the on position
or close the contacts when the door is open. Interlock shall be reactivated automatically when the
enclosure door is closed.

G. Padlocking: Means shall be provided for padlocking enclosures shut, they shall be provided to
positively lock the switch with the contacts in the off position with a padlock and shall
accommodate at least three padlocks. Any single padlock shall be capable of providing locking.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 / Page 3 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Switch Disconnectors for Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Motors: Switch Disconnectors
connected to VFD motors shall have an auxiliary contact that interfaces with the motor’s VFD to
switch off the VFD drive before disconnecting the motor.

I. Enclosure: Enclosures shall be made of steel material, properly anti-corrosion treated and
electrostatic coated unless otherwise specified. Enclosures shall comply with NEMA 250 type 1A
for indoor general use installations, NEMA 250 type 12 for indoor industrial / mechanical rooms
installations, NEMA 250 type 4X with stainless grade 304 for indoor wet areas; such as kitchen,
laundry and hospital’s central sterile supply department (CSSD) and clean rooms, and NEMA 250
type 3R for outdoor installations, unless otherwise required or shown on the Drawings. Enclosures
shall be used with the appropriate conductor entry fittings; such as knockouts and bolt on hub kit
in order to maintain the specified environmental capability after installation. External operating
mechanisms mounted on or through the enclosure shall pass the applicable test for the enclosure as
specified in NEMA 250.

J. Spacing in enclosed switches shall meet the requirements of NEMA KS-1.

K. Terminals: A switch shall have suitable wiring terminals for connection of conductors having an
ampacity not less than the switch’s current rating for only current rated switches.

L. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit Breaker: Refer to respective type specifications in Division 16 Section "Switchboards".

B. Enclosures: Meet environmental conditions of installed location in accordance with IEC 60529.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard black/gray/white paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

enclosures before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 / Page 4 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of equipment. Exact locations are to
be determined from detail drawings. Any condition that would place equipment in an unsuitable
location is to be referred to the Engineer.

B. Waterproof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and connection to conduit
system to fully achieve required degree of protection.

C. Damaged Equipment: Reject damaged equipment. Protect equipment against damage after
installation and until handed over.

D. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground continuity
to main electrical ground bus.

B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and
indication devices.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Visual Inspection: Equipment is to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.

B. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.

C. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and control
circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in the relevant
standards. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 / Page 5 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges to fulfill the coordination study requirements.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters
and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair
exposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 / Page 6 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switch.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division13 Section "Electric-Drive, horizontal Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer switches
for fire pumps.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for circuit breakers.
4. Division 16 Section "Surge Protection For Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits".
5. Division 15 Section "Building Management System".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and
material lists for each switch specified.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply with
requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit closing and
withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.

1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance with
performance requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 01 and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements. Include all features and
operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List all factory settings of relays and provide
relay setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable.

TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 / Page 1 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice and
maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to support day to
day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy the Engineer may disqualify a
manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch and related control
panels through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Comply with IEC 60947-6.

D. Comply with UL 1008 and NFPA 110.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of taking over certificate.Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Asco/Emerson Electric (U.S.A.)

2. Caterpillar, Inc.; Engine Division. (U.S.A.)
3. Cummins Corp. (U.S.A.)
4. Schneider Electric / Square D (U.S.A.)
5. Kohler Co. (U.S.A.)
6. Russelectric, Inc. (U.S.A.)
7. GE/Zenith Controls, Inc. (U.S.A.)
8. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)
9. GE/Zenith Controls, Inc. (U.S.A.)

B. Locally assembled transfer switches meeting the Specification are not acceptable.

2.2 MAINS FAILURE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)

A. Type: Conforming to IEC 60947-6 and to applicable standards, capable of frequently switching
mixed motors and resistive loads with utilization category AC33A to IEC 60947-6-1 or equivalent.
Wall or floor mounted, galvanized sheet steel cubicle of equal construction to control cubicle,
comprising switching and controls necessary for automatic transfer of power supply from normal
source to stand-by source, voltage sensing control relay and time delay relays to signal generator
start and stop, auxiliary switches and indicating lights etc. as necessary for the required operation
of the system.

TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 / Page 2 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. ATS shall be class PC with double throw single switch and having rated short time withstand and
short circuit making current to IEC 60947-6-1, based on short circuit level of the network at
equipment location. As an alternative, two single throw contactors ATS may be used subject to
Engineer’s approval if obtained from a reputable manufacturer and fulfils the test requirements of
class PC to IEC 60947-6-1.

C. Operation: When voltage and/or frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable setting (80-
100%) of normal supply, for an adjustable period of 1 - 300 seconds, power failure relay shall
actuate engine starting control. After an adjustable period of 0 - 10 seconds from sensing stabilized
rated voltage and frequency of generator at the ATS, (Voltage pick-up adjustable from 85% to
100% nominal), frequency pick-up adjustable from 90% to 100% nominal, the ATS shall transfer
to the emergency position. Upon restoration of normal mains supply to above the preset limits,
adjustable between 90% and 100% of rated voltage and/or frequency, for an adjustable preset
period of 2 - 30 minutes, the ATS shall transfer the load to normal position.

D. Engine Shutdown: Initiate after retransfer of the load to normal source. (Refer to generator set
controls upon shut-down).

E. Mechanical and Electrical Interlocks: shall be provided in C.B. type ATS to prevent circuit
breakers from being closed simultaneously at any time. Transfer mechanism shall be powered
from the source to which the load is being transferred.

F. Utility to utility or two energized sources ATS shall automatically operate as described in clause
2.2C above except that no generator start signal is required. The ATS shall be provided with a
preferred source selector switch marked “source 1”, “source 2”.

G. ATS dedicated for fire pumps shall meet the requirement of NFPA 20, “Installation of Central Fire
Pumps”, NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”, listed by the Underwriter Laboratories UL 1008,
“Transfer Switch Equipment” for use with electric driven fire pumps, FM approved and shall be as
specified under Division 13 Section “Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps”.

H. Selector Switches shall be provided as follows:

1. Operating selector switch shall include the following positions:

a. Normal: Generator set is set for automatic operation and the generator set starts if a
power outage occurs, as described above.
b. Test: Stimulates a power outage, starts and runs the generating set as Normal
position.
c. Stop: Shuts down the generating set and prevents it from starting. This is used
when servicing the generator.

2. Another selector switch shall be provided for two positions, "With load" and "Without
load" for testing or exercising:
a. "With Load": the generating set shall carry the load during testing or exercising
periods.
b. "Without Load": generating set shall start but not assume the load.

I. Pilot Lights shall indicate all ATS positions and sources available.

J. Instruments shall include voltmeter and ammeter with selector switches.

K. Automatic Retransfer: automatic retransfer selector switch marked “AUTO”, “MANUAL” shall
be provided. On manual position, automatic retransfer is disabled, while it is enabled in the auto
position.

TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 / Page 3 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

L. Circuit Breakers shall be electrically and manually operated non-automatic type, conforming to
IEC 60947-2 utilization category B, sequence II (service rating), with two N.O and two N.C spare
contacts each.

M. Degree of Protection: ATS shall have an IP31 degree of protection to IEC 60529 for indoor
installations, IP54 degree of protection for installations in wet areas and for ATS serving life
safety and firefighting equipment and IP55 degree of protection for outdoor installations.

N. Wiring: Moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper conductors,
modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with suitable numbering strips and
appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Flexible wiring shall be used on all hinged/draw-
out components.

O. Connections shall be made at front insulating terminal blocks with no live metal exposed. Power
cables shall terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized to receive specified
cables. Cable glands and gland plates shall be provided.

P. Metal Cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. shall be connected by flexible protective
conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar or terminal.

Q. Earthing: Earthing bar shall be provided for connection of protective earthing conductors, using
set-screw or bolted anti-turn pressure terminations.

R. Ferrules: Wire ends shall be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each termination.

S. All automatic transfer switches fed directly from transformer shall be equipped at the utility
incomer with class I+II surge protective devices as specified under Division 16 Section "Surge
Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits". SPDs along with their fused-disconnect
switch shall be integrated within the ATS’s enclosure.

T. All automatic transfer switches fed main distribution board / distribution panel shall be equipped
at the utility incomer with class II surge protective devices as specified under Division 16 Section
"Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits". SPDs along with their fused-
disconnect switch shall be integrated within the ATS’s enclosure.

2.3 ATS WITH MANUAL BYPASS SWITCHES

A. Provide Manual Bypass Switches to combine manual and automatic transfer operation with a
drawout isolation system. Bypass switch shall consist of non-automatic Kirk-key interlocked
switches or circuit breakers, fully rated, manually operated and rated for same loads as automatic
transfer switch.

B. Bypass switch shall provide bypass to either normal or emergency source by use of a selector
switch and a permanently mounted external lever, mechanically interlocked to prevent paralleling
of sources.

C. An engine start switch shall be provided to allow generator set to be started when bypass is on
emergency sources.

D. Bypass switch shall be of the make-before-break type. A dead source lockout shall prevent any
possibility of bypassing the load to an unenergized source.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 / Page 4 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Floor-Mounted Switch: Level and anchor unit to floor.

B. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

3.2 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS

A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications requirements of
transfer switches as recommended by the manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional
cost to Employer if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment as indicated and as required by the Standards.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing in addition to tests recommended by
the manufacturer:

1. Before energizing equipment, after transfer-switch products have been installed:

a. Measure insulation resistance phase-to phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-
resistance tester. Include control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure
recommended by manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified minimum
resistance.
b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
c. Inspect For:
1) Physical damage.
2) Proper installation and connection
3) Integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
d. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
e. Perform manual transfer operation.

2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for
each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
b. Verify time-delay settings.
c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.
d. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch
operations.
e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-
down and shutdown sequence.

B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.

C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component
indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 / Page 5 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean equipment internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16415

TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 / Page 6 of 6

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Main Distribution Board(s) work for low voltage (LV) distribution, ancillary
mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and supports.

B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables".
4. Division 16 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits".
5. Division 15 Section "Building Management System".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MDB: Main distribution board.

B. CT: Current Transformer.

C. VT: Voltage Transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. RMS: Root mean square.

F. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and may be
used interchangeably: "Switchboard" and "Main Distribution Board".

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards including all
components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating compliance with the Standards
specified under "Quality Assurance" Article, equipment characteristics, details of construction,
operating data, dimensions and weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous items including
incoming and outgoing feeder terminal arrangement, connections at busbars, isolating, earthing,
interlocks, control devices, indicating and metering instruments etc. Boards shall be factory
assembled and tested and shipped as complete package (s).

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 1 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Plans and elevations with indication of built-on equipment, exact dimensions, and weights.
2. Arrangement of boards inside rooms allocated, indicating spaces and clearances.
3. Arrangement of equipment inside board.
4. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and busbars and
types and locations of protective gear (relays, instruments, CTs, VTs etc.)
5. Schematics and wiring diagrams of control circuits. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
6. Foundation details and grouting holes installation details.
7. Arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, terminal fittings, instruments, busbar
connections etc.
8. Utility Company’s metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to placing orders for equipment
manufacture:

1. Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range, features and characteristics,
short- circuit ratings, time-current curves etc.
2. Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-fault currents
as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based on specific coordination
curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective short-circuit currents
at various points.
3. Test methods on site and references, including testing equipment for microprocessor
controlled trip units.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide
evidence of applicable registration or certification.

F. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer’s type and routine test records, in
accordance with the Standards specified in "Quality assurance" Article.

G. Source Limitations: Obtain all components and devices related to switch boards including all
related accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

G.H. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.

H.I. Manufacturer’s field service report.

I.J. Maintenance Data: For main distribution boards and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 01. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01 include the
following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for main distribution boards and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 2 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J.K. Coordination Study: Submit coordination study along with setting of protective devices for
overload, short-circuit and earth-fault currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream
systems based on specific coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated
prospective short-circuit currents at various points.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with minimum five years of successful
installation experience on projects utilizing main distribution boards units similar to those required
for this project.

B. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of main distribution

boards, of types, sizes, and capacities required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than five years.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:

1. IEC 61439-1 & IEC 61439-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies.
2. IEC 60947-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 1: General Rules.
3. IEC 60947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 2: Circuit Breakers.
4. Relevant IEC Standard for other components, where not otherwise specified.

D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable local regulations/code

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These will have precedence over other
codes/standards nominated for the project, unless otherwise approved in writing.

E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for main
distribution boards, including clearances between main distribution boards, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. Deliver MDBs
and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate handling of
heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for MDBs and components to
protect equipment from damage. Inspect equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred during
shipment.

B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect from
exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

C. Handle MDBs carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Remove
packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of excessive
hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained therein. Do not
install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of taking over certificate.Substantial Completion.

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 3 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to
provide pathway for moving main distribution boards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following, unless
otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000 m.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of main distribution boards and components with other
construction and electrical work, including conduit, piping, equipment, adjacent surfaces,
raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency replacement and/or
one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:

1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable (consumable) contact
set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and similar
devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.

B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as appropriate for type of
switchgear supplied.

1.11 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed by the
Engineer for locally assembled equipment. Witness test shall include complete routine and
function testing on all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for
approval prior to test conduction. Allow for test expenses including business class transportation
and hotel accommodation as necessary for two persons from the Engineer’s/ Employer’s side.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 4 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. ABB (Germany/Italy)
2. Cutler – Hammer / Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)
3. G.E. (U.S.A.)
4. Schneider Electric (France)
5. Siemens (Germany)
6. Schneider Electric / Square D (U.S.A)

B. Locally assembled products by one of the above approved manufacturers are acceptable subject to
compliance with design requirements and adequacy of reference list and quality control of the
local factory.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Generally: Main distribution boards shall be dead-front type, metal enclosed, multi-cubicle, floor
mounted, free standing, with 1000V rated insulation voltage, 600 V rated operational voltage, and
with 12 kV impulse withstand voltage, with fixed or draw-out switchgear, manually or manually
and electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings, with matching vertical sections to form a
continuous integral and rigid structure. Outgoing sections shall be of equal width.

B. Generally: Coordinate with Building Management System (BMS) supplier and provide all
necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, etc, necessary for the functions specified in the BMS
schedules and/or shown on the Drawings.

C. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet steel enclosures,
phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with thermal polymerized polyester
epoxy powder coating, gray colour (RAL 7035 ANSI 61) or standard manufacturer’s colour
subject to Engineer’s approval. Switchgear shall be vermin, dust and rodent proof, IP 31
protection to IEC 60529 for indoor installations and IP 54 protection for installations in wet areas
including fire sprinkled Electrical rooms and IP55 degree of protection for outdoor installations,
with adequate lifting means and base-frames and capable of being moved into position and
directly bolted to floor without additional sills. For ratings up to 3200A, enclosures shall have
mechanical impact resistance of IK10 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree IP 54 and
higher, and IK08 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree lower than IP 54. Test certificates
for mechanical impact shall be submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure thickness shall not be
less than 1.5mm. For rating larger than 3200A, enclosures shall have minimum thickness of 2mm.

D. Ventilation: Compartments shall be ventilated, by approved methods complying with the

Standards.

E. Main Distribution Boards shall have a short circuit withstand current of the rating shown on the
Drawings for 1 sec.

F. Fastenings between structural members shall be bolted.

G. Extension of structure and busbars shall be possible at either end of switchboard for form 3 and
form 4 type switchboards.

H. Arrangement shall permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to enter enclosure as
indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without inconvenience to
installation or maintenance.

I. Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment shall be provided for
extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from enclosures as appropriate for type of switchgear.

J. Spare and space positions are defined as follows:

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 5 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Spare position: Fully equipped enclosure with switchgear

2. Space position: Fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear.

K. Busbars: Site rated to same rating of main circuit breaker frame size as a minimum unless
otherwise shown on drawings, and braced for a symmetrical rms short-circuit duty as specified.
Busbars shall be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable equipment
temperature ratings, and not exceeding IEC 61439-1&-2 limits. Connections and buswork shall be
bolted with compatible hardware material as per manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be
accessible for inspection and maintenance. Contact surfaces shall be properly tin or Electro-silver
plated as necessary.

L. Connections from busbar to switching element shall be rated to carry full continuous current rating
of switching element frame as a minimum, unless otherwise shown on drawings.

M. Main horizontal busbars and vertical distribution busbars shall be insulated unless bare busbars are
recommended by the manufacturer and used in the type test.

N. Full size neutral shall be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus shall be insulated and
separate from earth bus and connected to it with removable links, at every bus section. Links shall
be of the same cross-section of the earth bus.

O. Earth bus shall extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance with the
Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at each end), and required
number of feeder protective earth connectors.

P. Earth bus shall be half size of phase buses, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

Q. Switchboard Type: Switchboard(s) shall be of the following type(s):

1. Form 3b.
2. Incoming: Withdrawable type – Air Circuit Breaker (ACB).
3. Outgoing: Fixed type Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) for ratings up to 1250A and
Withdrawabletype ACB for ratings greater than 1250A.

R. Withdrawable metal enclosed circuit breaker section shall consist of compartmented unit(s),
stationary part with rear busbar and cable connection compartments and front draw-out circuit
breaker assembly. Partitions between sections shall be bolted steel plate and partitions between
compartments shall be tough solid insulating removable bolted barriers. Each unit shall have
hinged lockable front door with grip-handle and door mounted instrumentation.

S. Drawout circuit breaker assembly shall have disconnecting contacts, wheels and interlocks to
prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open position, and to prevent
closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three positions (connect, test, disconnect).
Racking mechanism and rail assembly shall be approved worm and lever mechanism. It shall be
possible to close the unit door with breaker in any of the three positions and when removed.
External position indicator shall be provided. Fixed disconnecting primary contacts shall be
accessible and replaceable from front and shall be silver plated copper. Moving primary
disconnect contacts shall consist of self-aligning, silver plated, spring pressure, finger-cluster,
copper contact fitted on line and load studs of circuit breaker.

T. Fixed main circuit breaker section shall individually accommodate main circuit breaker, main
cable entry with terminal fitting assembly and metering compartment. Where placed against a
wall, accessibility shall be possible from front and sides or only from front of section.

U. Pull Sections: An additional cable pull section shall be provided, depending on actual
configuration shown on the Drawing, and subject to Engineer’s approval.

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 6 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

V. Where busway is used as an incoming or outgoing feeder of the switchboard, the switchboard
manufacturer shall provide all necessary accessories as recommended by the busway manufacturer
such as adaptor box for the switchboard to be able to accept the busway flange. The contractor is
responsible for coordination between the two manufacturers.

W. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite or
Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.

X. Form 1 and form 2 switchboards shall be front accessible, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings; front, rear or front and rear aligned as recommended by the manufacturer and approved
by the Engineer, fixed group mounted MCCB distribution sections, with all devices removable
from the front and mounted on a panelboard type base. Construction shall allow all connections
and maintenance to be made without rear access. Cables shall be accommodated in extra wide
vertical gutters. Sides, top and rear shall be covered with removable screw-on plates having
formed edges all around. Front plates shall be sectionalized and removable, covered by trims, and
secured by self-tapping screws.

Y. Form 3 and form 4 switchboards shall be front and rear accessible unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings; front, rear or front and rear aligned as recommended by the manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer, individually mounted fixed MCCB or ACB distribution sections, with
compartmentalized construction, consisting of front modular circuit breaker compartments, busbar
system compartments and rear cable termination compartments unless otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, with insulating barriers between front
compartments and busbar compartments and between rear compartments and busbar compartment
(removable for maintenance). MCCBs shall be closely coupled to busbars (to minimize chances of
bus-side faults), and to rear cable terminals, through compatibly frame-sized insulated connectors.
MCCB modules shall be covered on the front, by recessed frame-type bolted covers, 1.5 mm
minimum thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides and rear shall be covered with
removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.

Z. THDi and THDv at the main distribution board section of each transformer (Point of Common
Coupling) shall not exceed 10% with 8% individual harmonic order and 5% with 3% individual
harmonic order respectively. Necessary supporting calculations based on actual nonlinear loads
including VFD, UPS, lighting ballasts, etc. and all other linear loads on the same transformer shall
be submitted for Engineer’s approval. In case the specified harmonic limits cannot be achieved,
the contractor is responsible for achieving the specified limits by providing necessary filters on
MDB bus. Adopted solution shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval prior to implementation.

AA. All main distribution boards shall be equipped with combined Class I + II surge protective devices
as specified under Division 16 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits". SPDs along with their fused-disconnect switch shall be integrated within or adjacent to
the MDB’s enclosure.

2.3 AIR-BREAK METAL ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER (ACBs)

A. Type: Enclosed in steel structure, air ventilated, air break, for normal operation at maximum
temperature within enclosure at point of application, tested to approved standards, manually
operated for normal functions, and automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Trip
power shall be derived from main power circuit, with sufficient tripping energy to reliably trip
circuit breaker. Fixed mounted circuit breaker shall be rear connected.

B. Construction: Manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings, with
two-step, spring charged, stored energy mechanism, quick-make, quick-break type, electrically
and mechanically trip-free, to prevent maintaining circuit breaker closed against over-current
condition whether under manual or automatic operation. Electrically operated circuit breakers
shall have integrally mounted, spring charging motor mechanism automatically recharged upon

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 7 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

closing. Both manually or manually and electrically operated circuit breakers shall have
mechanical built-in charging lever and shall include open and close direct acting push buttons.
Stored energy provision shall allow open/close/open sequence of operation without use of external
energy. Circuit breaker shall have arc-quenching device on each pole and replaceable arcing
contacts.

C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip device, where
required, control power shall be 110V or 120V AC as recommended by the manufacturer obtained
from in-built MDB control power transformer connected and fused on line-side of circuit breaker.
Where shunt trip and/or under voltage release are required, a sufficient capacitor trip device to
cover any temporary loss or excessive drop of supply voltage shall be provided.

D. Rating: 3-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. With continuous current rating (frame
size) as shown on the Drawings, ranging between 1600 A and 5000 A (1600, 2000, 2500, 3000,
4000 and 5000 A), fully rated (100%) for service under worst site conditions. Breakers shall be
rated for a symmetrical rms service short-circuit breaking capacity as shown on the Drawings, to
IEC 60947-2 sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity) at specified voltage and
frequency, meeting IEC 60947-2, sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of utilization
category B), tested in an enclosure substantially the same as the enclosure in which they shall be
installed.

E. Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for compatible
frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and with transparent, sealable
cover. Trip unit shall measure sinusoidal and non–sinusoidal current wave forms (fundamental to
thirteenth harmonic) by continuously sampling each phase through out every cycle. Trip unit shall
be direct acting trip device, current transformer operated, with flux transfer shunt trip that requires
no external power. It shall have adjustable current setting (0.5 - 1.0 times trip unit rating) with
adjustable long-time delay up to 24 seconds, short-time pick-up and short-time delay, earth-fault
pick-up and time delay instantaneous over current pickup. Current setting range shall be by means
of replaceable trip-units within the maximum frame size rating. Once removed, circuit breaker
shall remain in the trip-free position. Earth-fault trip shall be adjustable, range 10% to 60% of
normal current rating of the circuit breaker and a maximum of 1200A, with adjustable time delay
between 0.1 and 0.5 seconds. Short time delay shall be adjustable in steps, 2 - 9 times current
setting, with adjustable time delay having maximum delay of up to 0.4 seconds. Instantaneous trip
shall be adjustable in steps at least 2 – 13 times the trip unit rating. Over-ride protection shall
allow full sensitivity up to interrupting capacity of circuit breaker. Slight difference in setting
ranges according to manufacturers standard products may be accepted subject to engineer’s
approval.

F. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker operation, long time
over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short time over current trip, ground fault
trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to count long time, short time, instantaneous and
ground fault trips.

G. Position Indicators: Positive with trip indication target. Target indicator shall be mechanical and
shall give indication even when control power has been lost.

H. Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for every phase. Current
sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall be encased in epoxy filled plastic
housing to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally mounted in breakers.

I. Neutral current transformer: Provide on the neutral conductor of each main, tie or outgoing circuit
having earth fault protection, located after the link connecting neutral and earth busbars from load
side. Rating and characteristics of the neutral current transformer shall be suitable for proper
operation of the earth fault protection system.

J. Circuit breaker accessories shall include the following:

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 8 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Padlocking or keylocking provisions for all positions (disconnected, test, connected,

closing blocking, open)
2. Overload, short-circuit, and ground fault trip LEDS
3. Trip indicator and reset button
4. On/off pilot lights.
5. Shunt-trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control.

K. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for remote
monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.

L. Electrical Interlock: If electrical interlock is required between power air circuit breakers (as shown
on the drawings), the mechanical closing button of the circuit breaker shall be disabled in the
connect position and an additional electrical push button shall be provided for the closing of the
circuit breaker through the breaker’s shunt close coil. The electrical interlock shall be provided on
both shunt trip and close coils of the circuit breaker in order to perform simultaneous tripping and
inhibit closing functions on the interlocked breaker.

2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

A. Type: Tested to approved standards, , totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high
quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation
at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and provided with front
operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation of main contacts in addition to
automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers shall have common
integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Ampere rating shall be clearly visible. All
terminals shall be box lug or clamp type with set screws, suitable for copper or aluminum
conductors.

B. MCCBs shall be 160 A minimum frame size, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

C. MCCBs generally shall be thermal-magnetic type for ratings below 250 A frame size, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. MCCBs 250 A and larger shall be electronic solid-state trip
type. All circuit breakers shall be 3-pole unless otherwise shown on drawings.

D. Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: shall have bi-metallic inverse time delay over-current
element for small overloads and instantaneous magnetic over-current trip element for operation
under short-circuit conditions on each pole. Circuit breakers rated 150/160 A shall have adjustable
instantaneous trips.

E. Electronic trip circuit breakers shall have solid state trip units with long time delay setting range at
least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating with adjustable time delay up to 24 seconds,
short time delay range 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with maximum clearing time of 0.2
seconds, and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid state
trip units shall be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +55 deg. C.
Earth fault protection shall be provided or built into trip unit where specified or shown on
drawings, and shall be adjustable between 0.2 and 0.6 normal phase current pick-up with
maximum time delay of 0.2 seconds, and shall be suitable for connection to external current
sensor. Push-to-trip button shall be provided on cover for testing the trip unit. Short time over
current protection is only required for circuit breakers 630A and above.

F. Deration: Thermal and electronic over-current trips shall be ambient temperature derated at
specified ambient temperature. In case of adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment shall not
exceed maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings. MCCB shall not be derated if the space
where the switch boards are installed is air-conditioned.

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 9 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation so that
contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or automatic operation.
Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-quenching devices of metallic grid
construction.

H. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is set to
operate.

I. MCCBs: MCCBs frames rated 800 A and above shall have utilization category B (with an
intended short time withstand capability), and shall have rated service short circuit breaking
capacities (sequence II) with suitably selected frame sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical
requirements at the distribution panelboard location and schedules shown on the drawings, with
declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or 50%) of the ultimate ratings as quoted by the circuit
breaker manufacturer marked on the circuit breaker rating plate. MCCBs frames up to 630 A shall
have utilization category A with rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (sequence III) to
meet the electrical requirements at the switchboards locations.

J. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over current condition, operating mechanism of
circuit breaker shall assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the handle between on
and off positions.

K. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal magnetic circuit breakers of 150/160 A frame size shall have
interchangeable trip units.

L. Sealing: Non-interchangeable trip circuit breakers shall have sealed covers. Circuit breakers with
interchangeable trips shall have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.

M. Accessories: Circuit breaker design shall allow addition of open / close electrical motor operator,
control and interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and auxiliary
switches, padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and the like.

2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS

A. Generally: Instruments shall be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush installation.
Scales and markings shall be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments shall be within 2%
unless otherwise specified.

B. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal system voltage,
90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.

C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.

D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit amperage,
90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.

E. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.

F. Provide p.f. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.

G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary current,
core size and accuracy shall be determined in accordance with nominal current of plant protected,
short-circuit level and burden.

H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and secondary fuses
and disconnecting device.

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 10 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.6 DIGITAL METERING UNITS

A. Metering unit shall be provided on the incoming and outgoing feeders having the following
functions for each phase:

1. Voltage.
2. Current.
3. Frequency.
4. Energy.
5. Total power.
6. Peak power demand.
7. P.F
8. Total Harmonic Distortion
9. Reactive Power
10. Apparent Power

B. The metering unit shall be provided by adequate interface link with the BMS system.

2.7 DIGITAL VOLTAGE RELAY

A. This unit shall be provided on the incoming and coupler section to perform the following
functions, for connection to the automatic transfer system and monitoring by BMSsystem:

1. Over-voltage (adjustable from 90 to 120%, with time delay adjustable from 0.5-5 Sec).
2. Under-voltage (adjustable from 75 to 95%, with time delay adjustable from 0.5-5 Sec).
3. Phase Voltage unbalance (detect voltage unbalances over 10%).
4. Phase reversal.

2.8 WIRING

A. Arrangement: Wiring shall be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards with
suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.

B. Connections shall be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal exposed.

C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. shall be connected, by bare copper
conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar.

D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed for multi-core
cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables shall be used in
proximity to higher temperature components and as flexible cable.

E. Ferrules: Wires shall be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each termination.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp shall be provided in switchboard,
controlled by thermostat and/or hygrostat.

B. Schematic and wiring diagram shall be provided suitably located within each cubicle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 11 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive main distribution boards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify Engineer in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install main distribution boards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable requirements of
applicable standards or codes approved.

B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturers’ drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of
cables etc. are provided as required.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from main distribution board units and components.

D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of power and
control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.

E. Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage of
feeders and cables which shall be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable trenches or building
structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.

F. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level, before
grouting in holding-down bolts.

G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends and
termination fittings required for power and control cables.

H. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with an approved
scheme.

I. Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat and two finishing
coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site, or as required by Engineer.

J. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for main
distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount
on front of main distribution boards.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Main Distribution Board Nameplates: Label each main distribution board compartment with
engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 12 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment-grounding connections for main distribution boards with ground continuity to
main electrical ground bus.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values and / or recommendations. If manufacturer’s
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to Engineer.

B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings, types, sizes, and
wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and clearances.

C. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer’s torque

tightening specification.

D. Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical inspection and
electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests the Engineer may require to
check compliance of installation with the Specification, including, but not limited to, the
following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.

E. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check insulation
resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and between neutral and earth.

F. Primary Injection Tests: Provide portable test equipment to test time-delay characteristics of
circuit breakers by simulating an overload or fault condition. Measure and record all test results
and ambient conditions and compare with manufacturer’s data.

G. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-current primary
injection test-sets and reports all readings.

H. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance with the Standard
specified (IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-2) for FBAs assembled from standardized components
outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine tests are also to be carried out on every FBA,
delivered to site, if requested by Engineer.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of main distribution boards. Remove
paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 13 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16441

SWITCHBOARDS 16441 / Page 14 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Panelboards for distribution and subdistribution of electric power and for protection of circuits,
including fixing and supporting materials and materials for termination of feeders, sub-circuits and
branch circuits for the following types:

1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

2. Distribution panelboards.
3. Feeder pillars for power distribution and external lighting.

B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits".
3. Division 15 Section "Building Management System".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MCB: Miniature circuit breaker.

B. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.

C. LP, PP, SDP: Final branch circuit panelboards, power panelboards and subdistribution
panelboards respectively, for secondary lighting and power distribution with either miniature
circuit breaker (MCB) or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) protection on sub-feeder or branch
circuits, as shown on the Drawings.

D. DP: Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCCB protection on main incoming and
outgoing feeder circuit breakers Type 1 or Type 2.

E. Distribution panelboards or final branch circuit panelboards supplied from emergency source are
prefixed with the letter “E” if supplied from emergency source, and with letter “U” if supplied
from UPS source. Isolated power panels shall be identified as “IPP”.

F. ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker.

G. RMS: Root mean square.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 1 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected.

2. Types of panelboards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and deration at
specified ambient conditions and corresponding temperatures within the enclosures, MCB
shall not be derated if the space where the panels are installed is air-conditioned.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panelboard.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short- circuit series combinations of
circuit breakers.

B. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test records
in accordance with the Standards.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Exact composition of each panelboard, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip ratings of
circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panelboards, indicating main feeder and branch circuit
conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and materials
used.

E. Coordination Study: Submit coordination study along with setting of protective devices for
overload, short-circuit and earth-fault currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream
systems based on specific coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated
prospective short-circuit currents at various points.

F. Details of Electrical Closets: Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and ventilation of the
installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting construction.

G. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.

H. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards submit final versions after load balancing.

I. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 01 and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 01 include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current protective

devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over-current protective
device.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with

1. IEC 61439-1 & IEC61439-2 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies".

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 2 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. IEC 61439-3 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies - Distribution boards
intended to be operated by ordinary persons (DBO)".
3. IEC 60947-1 "Low Voltage switchgear and control Gear- General Rules".
4. IEC 60947-2 "Low Voltage switchgear and control gear - circuit breakers".
5. IEC 60947-3 "Low Voltage switchgear and control gear - Switches, disconnectors, switch-
disconnectors and fuse-combination units circuit breakers".
6. IEC 60947-4-1 "Low Voltage switchgear and control gear - Contactors and motor-starters
— Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters".
7. IEC 60898-1 "Miniature circuit breakers".
8. IEC 61009 "Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection
for household and similar uses (RCBOs)".
9. Other components where not specified shall comply with the relevant IEC standards.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components and devices related to distribution and panel boards
including all related accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of taking over certificate.Substantial Completion.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.

1.8 SCHEDULES

A. Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of panelboard using the
following criteria:

1. Type of construction (MCB or MCCB), referring to type of branch circuit breakers.

2. Voltage, number of phases and wires.
3. Branch circuit breaker trip rating and wire size.
4. Main circuit breaker trip rating and frame size (maximum continuous rating) for MCCB
and MCB.
5. Short-circuit interrupting capacity (IC) in kA.
6. Special arrangement or provisions.

1.9 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed by the
Engineer for locally assembled equipment. Witness test shall include complete routine and
function testing on all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for
approval prior to test conduction. Allow for test expenses including business class transportation
and hotel accommodation as necessary for two persons from the Engineer’s/ Employer’s side.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 3 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)

2. General Electric Co (U.S.A.)
3. Schneider Electric (France)
4. Siemens - ITE (Germany or USA)
5. Schneider Electric / Square D Co. (USA)
6. ABB (Germany/Italy)

B. Locally assembled products by one of the above approved manufacturers are acceptable subject to
compliance with design requirements and adequacy of reference list and quality control of the
local factory.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Rated insulation voltage shall be in accordance with the respective standards.

B. Panelboards shall be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 31 for indoor
installations, IP54 for installations in wet areas including fire sprinkled Electrical rooms and IP 55
for outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 60529, and shall be factory designed and
assembled.

C. Earthing bar shall be half size the phase busbars.

D. Neutral bar shall be sized as the phase bus bars.

E. Protection shall be fully rated throughout the systems.

F. Circuit breakers shall be non-fused type.

G. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panelboards shall have one main incoming circuit breaker or switch
and the required number of branch circuit breakers, arranged as shown on the schedules, including
spare circuit breakers and spaces for future expansion. Three-phase panelboards shall be designed
for sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices.

H. Branch Circuit Numbering: On 3-phase panelboard schedules, [circuits 1 and 2 shall be connected
to red (R) phase, 3 and 4 to yellow (Y) phase, 5 and 6 to blue (B) phase etc., to conform with
branch circuit numbering shown on the drawings.

2.3 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES

A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface mounted as
shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved manufacturer's
standards and sizes.

B. Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, shall be Electro-galvanized sheet steel of
gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the standards. Welded joints shall be
galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces shall conform to the standards, adequate for the
utilized cables/wires subject to the Engineers’ approval and in no case less than 100 mm on all
sides. Enclosure shall have pre-designed angles or threaded end studs to support and adjust
mounting of interior panelboard assembly.

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 4 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Trims shall cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus compartments, to form a
dead front panel. Trims shall be fixed to cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps engaging flange of
box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable). Screws where used shall be
oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims for flush mounted panelboards shall overlap box and
front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for surface mounted panelboards shall be exactly sized to
form flush fit to box.

D. Doors shall have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder lock and
catch. Doors over 1000 mm high shall have vault-type handle and multiple point latch mechanism.
Locks shall be keyed alike.

E. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Shall be cleaned, phosphatized,
chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder modified by polyester resins
providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and alkali solvents, grease, aging and
corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of Engineer.

F. Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, shall be provided on

inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors are specified. Directories
shall be typed to identify panelboards and clearly indicate circuit number and description of load.

G. Outdoor enclosures shall be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, suitable for mechanical impact
resistance of IK10 to IEC 62262, fully weatherproofed (IP 54), without knockouts, but with
removable sealed/gasketed bottom gland plates and gasketed doors.

H. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite or
Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.

2.4 BUSBARS

A. Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, tin-plated, based on total maximum operating
temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted or clamped
contact surfaces shall be properly tin or silver plated as necessary, and shall have maximum
current density not exceeding requirements of the approved standards. Aluminum shall not be
used for busbars or panelboard parts.

B. Design: Busbars shall be rigidly designed so that branch circuit devices can be removed without
disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional machining, drilling or tapping. Busing
shall be full size without reduction. Busing and blank plates shall allow installation of future
circuit devices, where indicated on the drawings.

C. Main horizontal busbars and vertical distribution busbars shall be insulated unless bare busbars are
recommended by the manufacturer and used in the type test.

D. Rating: Busbar rating shall be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame size. Where no main
circuit breaker is required, busbars shall have main lugs or disconnect switch, with nominal rating
equal to 1.25 times the up stream circuit breaker trip rating, and as shown on the drawings.

E. Short-circuit Duty: Busbars shall carry at least 125% of the maximum short-circuit level at point
of application for one second, without showing any signs of degradation.

F. Terminals and connections shall be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure type. Screws and bolts
used for making copper/copper connections shall be hard copper alloy with lock washers (riveted
bus connections are not acceptable).

G. Neutral bar shall be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-less box type set-
screw connector shall be provided for neutral wire of each branch circuit and one bolted clamp-

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 5 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw for main incoming neutral wire. Neutral shall be
fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.

H. Earthing bar shall be copper, brazed to panelboard cabinet, with bolted pressure connector for
main conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel terminal for each outgoing conductor, to provide
secure and reliable contact with all metal parts and enclosure.

2.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

A. Type: Tested to approved standards, , totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high
quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation
at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and provided with front
operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation of main contacts in addition to
automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers shall have common
integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Ampere rating shall be clearly visible.
All terminals shall be box lug or clamp type with set screws, suitable for copper or aluminum
conductors.

B. MCCBs shall be 160 A minimum frame size, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

C. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, moulded case
circuit breakers of final branch circuit panel boards (LPs), power panel boards (PPs) and
subdistribution panel boards (SDPs) shall be thermal magnetic type, while moulded case ciruit
breakers of distribution panel boards (DPs) shall be thermal magnetic for frame sizes up to 160
amperes and electronic type for higher frame sizes.

D. Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: shall have bi-metallic inverse time delay over-current
element for small overloads and instantaneous magnetic over-current trip element for operation
under short-circuit conditions on each pole. Circuit breakers rated 150/160 A shall have
adjustable instantaneous trips.

E. Deration: Thermal and Electronic over-current trips shall be ambient temperature derated at
specified ambient conditions and corresponding temperature within the enclosures. MCCB shall
not be derated if the space where the panels are installed is air-conditioned.

F. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers 250 A frame size and larger, shall be solid
state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short time
delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds,
and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip units
shall be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +55 deg C. Earth fault
protection shall be built into trip unit where specified, and shall be suitable for connection to
external current sensor. Push-to-trip button shall be provided on cover for testing the trip unit.
Short time over current protection is only required for circuit breakers 630A and above.

G. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation so that
contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or automatic operation.
Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-quenching devices of metallic grid
construction.

H. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is set to
operate.

I. MCCBs for LPs, PPs, SDPs, DPs Type 2 and feeder pillars: Comply with IEC 60947-2 test
sequences I, II, utilization category A, and shall have rated ultimate short circuit breaking
capacities (sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panelboard location, with
preferred ratings in accordance with following tables.

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 6 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J. MCCBs for DP Type 1: MCCBs frames rated 800 A and above shall have utilization category B
(with an intended short time withstand capability), and shall have rated service short circuit
breaking capacities (sequence II) with suitably selected frame sizes and trip ranges to meet the
electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard location and schedules shown on the
drawings, with declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or 50%) of the ultimate ratings as
quoted by the circuit breaker manufacturer marked on the circuit breaker rating plate. MCCBs
frames up to 630 A shall have utilization category A with rated ultimate short circuit breaking
capacity (sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panel boards locations with
preferred ratings in accordance with the below tables.

K. Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which corresponds
with its maximum trip range listed below and which shall be related to minimum acceptable short-
circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully rated interrupting duties: normal duty (N), high break
(H), or current limiting (L), as specified.

L. Frame sizes are generally to be selected with minimum interrupting capacities at specified
voltages and rated frequency, in accordance with the following table:

Thermal-magnetic
15-100 or 160 (1,2p) 18 - - 220/240
15-100 or 160 (2,3,4p) 18 - - 380/415
15-160 (2,3,4p) 35 60 100 380/415
Electronic
100-250 (2,3,4p) 35 60 150 380/415
160-400 (3,4p) 35 60 150 380/415
250-630 (3,4p) 40 60 150 380/415
320-800 (3,4p) 50 60 150 380/415
500-1250 (3,4p) 50 70 150 380/415

M. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating mechanism of

circuit breaker shall assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the handle between on
and off positions.

N. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers of 150/160 A frame size shall have
interchangeable trip units.

O. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units shall be sealed. Circuit breakers with
interchangeable trip units shall have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.

P. Accessories: Circuit breakers shall be designed to accommodate standard attachments including

shunt-trip, under-voltage release, combined auxiliary and alarm switches, and open / close
electrical motor operator to any circuit breaker of rating (frame size) 100 A and over. Padlocking
devices shall be provided, where shown on the Drawings.

Q. Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection (RCBOs) type A to
IEC 61009 are provided as add-on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where required and as
shown on the Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-current and
short-circuit protection, shall be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip current sensitivity on
breakers for branch circuits shall be as shown on the Drawings, and for main breakers ratings shall
be as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers shall include current transformer with tripping coil
assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to ensure circuit breaker cannot be held closed
against earth faults.

R. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements. When operating
within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current shall be less than 1/2 cycle wave of
symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with breaker construction.

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 7 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

S. Current limiting circuit breakers shall have, on each pole, adjustable inverse time-delay over-
current characteristics for overload protection and instantaneous trip for short-circuit protection.
Operation of main contacts shall be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces between contacts
created by fault current. Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms value of prospective
short-circuit current.

2.6 MOLDED CASE SWITCHES (MCSs)

A. Molded Case Switch: Similar to circuit breakers but without overload/short circuit protection.
Short time rating of switches shall not be less than twelve times the maximum rated operational
current for 1 second. Switches shall comply with IEC 60947-3. Switches shall have utilization
category AC-22B to IEC 60947-3.

2.7 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)

A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 60898-1 .

B. Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities to IEC 60898-1shall be as follows:

1. 6 - 125A MCB :

10 or 15 kAat 220/240 - 380/415 V A.C.

C. Construction: MCBs shall be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up to 70 degree C

within panelboard enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and shall be constructed from high quality,
high temperature, molded insulating materials. Guaranteed duties and characteristics shall be
submitted for temperatures at and above 40 deg C.

D. MCBs and combination devices shall be modular, of unified profile and suitable for mounting
either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.

E. Operation: Under overload conditions, thermal tripping shall provide close protection of insulated
conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic trip shall operate at 5 - 10 times normal
rated current (Curve C). Magnetic operation shall be in the current limiting region and opening
time shall not exceed 5 milliseconds.

F. Ratings: Preferred rated currents shall be 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100 and 125 A,
calibrated at 40deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. De-rating above 40 deg C
shall not exceed 1% per deg C and loading shall not exceed 70% of circuit breaker rating.

G. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers shall be add-on devices, or
built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable sensitivities of 30 mA, 100
mA and 300 mA shall be available for all ratings of 2-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers.

H. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, shall include alarm switch, auxiliary switch, shunt trip,
under voltage trip and similar units which shall be modular additions to the circuit breakers.

2.8 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (DP)

A. DP Type 1: Form 2b to IEC 61439-1&-2, and have a minimum rated insulation voltage of 750V
and with 8 kV impulse withstand voltage, free standing , with doors (unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings), suitable for ratings of main breaker and busbars ranging from 630 A to 1250 A, 3-
phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire where specifically indicated), suitably and orderly arranged for any
selected combination of branch MCCBs ranging from 150/160 A to 1250 A frame size and short-

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 8 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

circuit interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers smaller than 250 A frame
size, where indicated, may be grouped on an integral sub-assembly mounted to main chassis.

B. DP Type 2: Form 2a to IEC 61439-1&-2, and have a minimum rated insulation voltage of 690V
and with 8 kV impulse withstand voltage. Panelboard shall be recessed or surface mounted type,
as shown on the Drawings, complete with trim and door, adjustable trim fixation for flush panels,
and with ratings of main circuit breaker and busbars up to 400 A, 3-phase, 4-wire, with 2 or 3-pole
branch circuit breakers, 100 A or 150/160 A or 250 A frame size.

C. Circuit breakers for DP’s shall be fitted with a plug-in base type of modular construction complete
with its accessories; non draw-out type.

D. Construction: Sheet steel, for cabinet/box; suitable for mechanical impact resistance of IK10 to
IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree IP54 and higher and IK08 to IEC 62262 for
enclosures protection degree lower than IP54. Test certificates for mechanical impact shall be
submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure thickness shall not be less than 1.5mm. Fronts shall
be single or twin covers to shield circuit breakers, terminals and live ends.

E. All distribution panelboards shall be equipped with Class II surge protective devices as specified
under Division 16 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits". SPDs
along with their fused-disconnect switch shall be integrated within or adjacent to the DP’s
enclosure.

F. Interior of panelboard shall be pan assembly consisting of galvanized sheet steel chassis , folded,
flanged and reinforced, with busbars vertically arranged and mounted on molded insulators.

G. Molded insulators shall have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and insulation grade of
3.5 kV for one minute.

H. Circuit breakers shall be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit breakers) and
bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus connectors.

I. Metering Instruments: Instruments shall be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush
installation. Scales and markings shall be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments shall be
within 2% unless otherwise specified.

1. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal system
voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
2. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.
3. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit
amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
4. Ammeter Selector Switch: 4-position rotary type.
5. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
6. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary
current, core size and accuracy shall be determined in accordance with nominal current of
plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
7. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and secondary
fuses and disconnecting device.

J. Digital metering units ( M.U.): Metering unit shall be provided only where required and shown on
the drawings on some outgoing feeders having the following functions for each phase:

1. Voltage.
2. Current.
3. Frequency.
4. Energy.
5. Total power.
6. Peak power demand.

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 9 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

7. P.F
8. Total Harmonic Distortion
9. Reactive Power
10. Apparent Power

The metering unit shall be provided by adequate interface link with the BMS system.

2.9 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT, POWER AND SUB-DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS -

GENERALLY

A. Arrangement: Comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with unified profile and base,
and one main circuit breaker or switch as shown on drawings. Single and multi-pole circuit
breakers or other devices shall occupy modular spaces. Accommodation of contactors and split-
bus arrangement or other devices shall not change regularity of standard box width.

B. Indoor Enclosure: Sheet steel, minimum 0.8 mm thick for box/cabinet and minimum 1.5 mm thick
for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim shall be adjustable to allow for mis-alignment
between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces (gutters) shall be at least 100 mm wide. Larger
gutters shall be provided where tap-off insulated split connectors are required. Knockouts shall be
provided in top or bottom of enclosures and shall provide a neat and uniform conduit/cable
terminal arrangement.

C. Contactors: 2 or 3-pole, Electro-magnetic type, class AC 5a for discharge lamps, class AC 5b for
tungsten halogen lamps and class AC 3 for motors to IEC 60947-4, and rated not less than
overload setting of protective device upstream. Contacts shall be double break, silver cadmium
plated, having self-cleaning wiping action. Control shall be provided by phase-neutral (maximum
230 V) split-coil, for on/off activation by local and/or by remote direct-wired, on/off push buttons.
Contactor shall be mechanically latched. Control circuit shall be fused. Auxiliaries shall include
local pilot light, parallel remote indicating circuit, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.

D. All final branch circuits feeding sensitive electronic equipment such as: electronic equipment and
telecom racks shall be equipped with class III surge protective devices as specified under Division
16 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits". SPDs along with their
fused-disconnect switch shall be integrated within the panelboard’s enclosure.

2.10 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT, POWER AND SUBDISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS - TYPE

MCCB

A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 690V as a minimum. single-phase and neutral (SPN) or 3-
phase and neutral (TPN), with bolted 1, 2, or 3-pole MCCBs on branch circuits and 2, 3 or 4-pole
MCCB on main incoming.

B. Branch circuit breakers shall be 1, 2 or 3-pole, rated 100 A frame size, with trip ratings between
15 A and 100 A, and compatible ICs, selected from normal (N), high-break (H) or current-limiting
(L) range.

C. Main incoming circuit breaker shall be 100 A or 160 A frame size as shown on the drawings, with
trip ratings and fully rated non-current limiting ICs of normal (N) or high-break (H) ranges, with
or without residual current device (RCBO) as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Assembly: Busbars shall be rigidly fixed on molded insulators to back pan in vertical arrangement.
Branch circuit breakers shall be bolted in twin arrangement to rigid copper cross and center bus
connectors. Back pan assembly shall be removable and fixed to four threaded studs integral with
cabinet.

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 10 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2.11 FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB

A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating of 500V as a minimum.

B. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction, attached to
enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with DIN rails in
horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN panels. Assembly
shall be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one piece insulated bolt-on/comb-
type phase busbar. Busbars shall be single-phase or 3-phase with spade connectors for fixing by
tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation shall be high thermal rating, capable of
carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second without overheating beyond acceptable
limits required by the Standards. Panelboards shall comply with IEC 61439-3.

C. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction, attached to
enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with busbars in horizontal
arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN panels. Assembly shall be
complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one-piece insulated phase busbar. Busbars
shall be single-phase or 3-phase with spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on
circuit breaker. Insulation shall be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit
current for one second without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards.

D. SPN type panelboards shall be suitable for 240 V maximum service voltage, single-phase and
neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main incoming.

E. SPN type main circuit breaker shall be double-pole MCB, with or without earth leakage device
(RCBO), as shown on the Schedules.

F. Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, shall have trip ratings between 6 A and 125
A, with ICs as required in the Schedules.

G. TPN type panelboards shall be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum service voltage, 3-phase
and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or 4-pole MCCB or MCS main incoming, as
shown in the Schedules or on the Drawings.

H. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers shall have trip ratings between 6 A and 125 A, with IC as
required in the Schedules.

I. TPN type panelboard main circuit breakers shall be MCCB or MCS as shown on the drawings,
100A or 160A frame size as shown on the Drawings, with trip range from 32 A to 160A, normal
(N) or high-break (H) duty with/without RCBO as shown on the Drawings.

2.12 FEEDER PILLARS FOR POWER DISTRIBUTION AND EXTERNAL LIGHTING

A. Low voltage feeder pillars shall comply with IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-5.

B. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 690V as a minimum. 3-phase and neutral (TPN), with bolted
1, or 3-pole MCCBs on outgoings and 3-pole MCCB on main incoming.

C. Construction: the feeder pillar shall be totally enclosed, dead front type, fully self-contained, dust-
proof, weather proof and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to dust, rain and sunlight with
IP55 degree of protection to IEC 60529.

D. Cabinets: Reinforced free standing structure with high mechanical impact resistance IK10 to IEC
62262, manufactured from 2 mm nominal thickness galvanized sheet steel, electrostatically
powder coated and corrosion resistant internally and externally. Feeder pillars shall be provided
with bolted reinforcement corner construction and shall be of the dwarf type with a bolting down
root for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 11 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

from below ground level directly buried or in a duct system. Feeder pillars shall have suitable
extension cable box for cable entry from below. Cabinets shall have two hinged lockable opening
doors to provide full front access to the cabinet and shall be sized according to the equipment
being installed. The roof of the cabinet shall be slanted and shall have water drip edges.

E. Lighting Contactors: 2 or 3-pole, Electro-magnetic type, class AC 5a for discharge lamps or AC

5b for tungsten halogen lamps to IEC 60947-4, and rated not less than the frame size of the
upstream protective device. Contacts shall be double break, silver cadmium plated, having self-
cleaning wiping action. Control shall be provided by phase-neutral (maximum 230 V) split-coil,
for on/off activation by local and/or by remote direct-wired, on/off push buttons. Contactor shall
be mechanically latched. Control circuit shall be fused. Auxiliaries shall include local pilot light,
parallel remote indicating circuit, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.

F. Internal Cabling: PVC/PVC single core 600/1000 volt grade with copper conductors and rated as
required taking into account manufacturers recommended temperature and bunching derating
factors. All internal wiring shall be suitably laced or clipped.

G. Control: LV panel circuits serving the street and outdoor lighting shall be supplied through triple
pole contactors which shall be photo-electric, timer controlled along with BMS control, where
shown on the Drawings. The contactors shall be operated through either timer or photoelectric cell
or remote signal from BMS. An over-ride facility shall be provided for maintenance.

H. The photo-electric relays shall be solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to
operate connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, with light level monitoring
ranging from 0 to 37000 lux, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn-off levels and with time delay to
prevent false operation. Relays shall have weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and
equipped with sun-glare shield and ice preventer. Relays shall be adjusted to switch on lights when
the daylight illumination reduces to 70 lux, unless otherwise required by the Engineer.

I. Timers shall be solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display and have the following
features:

1. Astronomic dial.
2. Two contacts, rated 30-A unless otherwise indicated.
3. Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2-A unless otherwise indicated.

J. Feeder pillars shall have a 50 mm x 6 mm full length high conductivity copper main earth bar for
grounding purposes complete with test.

K. A distribution diagram shall be permanently fixed to the inside of the door showing all circuit
connections, MCCB ratings, cable sizes and references, etc.

L. Feeder pillars shall be vandal proof and secured against unauthorized access by means of wedge
locks protected by brass plugs and operated by a special key as approved by the Engineer or as
required by the local authority.

M. Feeder pillars’ final finish and final color shall be approved by the Engineer and shall have color
similar to that of power distribution boards.

N. Feeder pillars used for external lighting or combined external lighting and power distribution shall
have single or multi split bus arrangement as shown on the Drawings with uncontrolled bus
section to provide necessary power supply through single pole MCCBs for internal lighting, socket
outlets and lighting control system.

O. Feeder pillars used for external lighting shall be provided with compact fluorescent lamp for
integrated internal inspection lighting with wire guard and adequate cord length and two weather
proof socket outlets type R05 as specified in Division 16 Section “Wiring Devices”.

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 12 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fixing Generally:

1. Align, level and securely fasten panelboards to structure.

2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panelboards at least 25mm from wall ensuring supporting
members do not prevent flow of air.
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panelboards.
4. Close unused openings in panelboard cabinets.

B. Panelboard Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet have been
completed.

C. Wiring Inside Panelboards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent tension on circuit
breaker terminals. Tap-off connections shall be split and bolted type, fully insulated.

D. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush with wall
surface finish.

E. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 1880 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.

G. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard
loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory;
handwritten directories are not acceptable.

H. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of
waterproof compound prior to installation.

I. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

J. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: if asked by the engineer, stub four empty
conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in
the future. Stub four empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment-grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical
ground bus.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values and / or recommendations. If manufacturer’s
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 13 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on
panelboards after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and standards. Inspect
conditions within panelboards and verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.

B. Circuit Breakers: Tests shall include operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check automatic
operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by applying necessary short-circuit,
overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as applicable and compare with
manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and report ambient temperature inside
enclosure.

C. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and between
phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth. Record all readings, using 500 V megger
for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment on systems up to 600 V, for
1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.

D. Routine tests on site shall be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all panelboards
assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the works of the
manufacturer.

E. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.

F. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.

3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters
and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair
exposed surfaces to match original finish.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16442

PANELBOARDS 16442 / Page 14 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16450 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes busway assemblies and fittings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables" for bus drop cables.
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for busway termination provisions.
4. Division 16 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting position, mounting method,
vertical supports, materials, firestops, and weatherstops for each component.

B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of enclosed bus assemblies including plans,
elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other construction elements. Detail
connections to switchboards, transformers, panel boards and other electrical equipment. Detail
supports and connections to building.

D. Coordination and Construction Drawings: Include floor plans and sections to show enclosed bus-
assembly layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.

E. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of the system with the relevant Standards.

F. Supporting System: Submit the following:

1. Detail supporting system, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to

supported equipment.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.

G. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed enclosed
bus assemblies, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 01.

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 1 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed bus assemblies to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus-assembly components and fittings through one source
from a single manufacturer.

B. Standards: Comply with the following standards:

1. NEMA BU1, BU1.1, BU 1.2.

2. UL 857.
3. ANSI/IEEE C37.23.
4. IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-6.
5. IEC 60529.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle bus assemblies according to Standards recommendations.

B. Products shall be suitably rated for Project conditions.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify existing dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances and
locate obstructions within manufacturing and installation tolerances of enclosed bus assemblies.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of busway with other installations.

1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and
as approved by the Engineer.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Plug-in Units: 3 percent of installed units, but not less than one unit of each type installed.
2. Hookstick operator for plug-in units.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 2 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of Substantial CompletionTaking over certificate .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. EATON / Cutler-Hammer. (U.S.A.)

2. G. E. (U.S.A.)
3. Siemens / Sentron Busway (U.S.A.)
4. Schneider Electric / SquareD (U.S.A.)
5. Power Bar (PB) (U.A.E.)
6. LS (Korea)
7. EAE (Turkey)

2.2 GENERAL

A. Busway shall be Plug-in type for tap off applications and feeder type for non tapped straight runs
and direct connections between equipment, as applicable and / or shown on the Drawings,
[indoor] [outdoor], complete with manufacturer's recommended fittings and accessories where
indicated and as required for a complete, functioning and safe installation .

B. Busway shall include bus bars, electrical insulators, enclosures, switchboard flange, elbows,
offsets, cable tap boxes, transformer flange connections with flexible copper braid link, generator
flange connection with flexible copper braid link and vibration absorber, power take-off sections,
busway reducers with built-in circuit breaker, phase transposition, expansion joints, end closures,
supports, and other components and accessories needed to form complete systems.

C. Ratings: three phase with voltage and current ratings and requirements for neutral and ground
conductors as indicated and specified.

D. Busway Conductor Material: hard drawn Copper with not less than 98 percent conductivity.

E. Busways: tin plated for copper and insulated over entire length, with flame retardant 130 deg C
class epoxy insulation.

F. Hot Spot Temperature Rise: not to exceed limits specified in the Standards which the busway is
designed to at any point in the busway when busway is operated at rated load current and system
frequency.

G. Current Densities of Busway Conductors: Rated current carrying capacities of the Busway shall
not exceed the following:

1. 2.5A/mm2 for copper conductors rated below 2000A and 2.25A/mm2 for copper
conductors rated 2000A and above.
2. 1.75A/mm2 for aluminum conductors rated below 2000A and 1.55A/mm2 for Aluminum
conductors rated 2000A and above.

2.3 BUSWAY (225 to 5000A)

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 3 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Type: Indoor, 600 V grade L-N, 3-phase, 4-wire (3P+N) for feeder busway from transformer to
switchboard and 5-wire (3P+N+E) for other feeder type busways and for all plug in type busways,
insulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated and of compact design to provide degree of protection
of IP54] to IEC 60529, with ratings as shown on the Drawings at site maximum ambient
temperature conditions. Where indoor busway is partially running through outdoor / wet areas,
these portions shall be IP65 rated. Neutral shall be fully sized as per the phase conductor, unless
double neutral is required on the Drawings while internal earth bar shall be half sized the phase
conductor without considering the contribution of the enclosure as earthing means. Short-circuit
capacity shall be certified by an approved third party and shall be at least equal to the value at the
upstream point of connection or as shown on the Drawings, whichever is greater, for 1 second.

B. Construction: Prefabricated, insulated flat copper conductors with purity not less than 98%, with
minimum 2.5 mm extruded aluminum housing, totally enclosed, non-ventilated, sandwich type.
Housing shall be bonderized inside and outside and finished with gray baked electrostatic paint,
unless otherwise proposed by the supplier and approved by Engineer. Busbars shall be provided
with extra insulation between busbars and housing along the full length. Joints between sections
shall have special insulation, flanged and pressure bolted, easily dismantled and giving equally
strong mechanical connection to busway sections. Any section of the busway shall be removable
without disturbing adjacent sections. The busbar joint shall be of an approved type assembly, to
maintain proper pressure over a large contact area.

C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next shall be silver plated and arranged in joint
stacks incorporating busway conductors, and each joint stack shall be arranged for tightening with
a single bolt. Joint design shall be such that any length or fitting of a run may be removed without
disturbing the connecting lengths.

D. Reactance: Busway shall be specially built and assembled to provide low reactance.

E. Accessories: Busway shall be complete with necessary factory made adaptor boxes, junction
boxes, bends, expansion connections, fittings, fire barriers etc. as may be required to provide
complete system between terminal points indicated on the Drawings. Fixing and mounting
materials shall be galvanized steel. For vertically mounted busways, spring suspension type
hangers shall be used for equalizing weight of trunking between all supports.

F. Cable Tap Boxes: Busways connected to cables at either ends or at plug-ins shall be provided with
cable tap boxes to connect electrical cable to the busway distribution system.

G. Terminal adaptors or chambers shall be factory made. Coordinated components at both ends shall
match equipment connected thereto. Connections shall be made with insulated copper bars of
equivalent sections and of exact shapes to fit and be fixed with bolts and spring washers. The
contractor is responsible for coordination between the two manufacturers.

H. Busway shall be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths and shapes. Busway
cutting on site is not acceptable.

I. Plug-In Openings: five, dead-front, hinged cover openings per side of each 3 m (10 ft) length of
busway. Openings shall be useable simultaneously.

J. Phase Transposition: Busways intended to change the relative positions of the phase conductors in
order to balance the inductive reactances or to transpose the phases shall be provided with phase
transposition unit.

2.4 PLUG-IN DEVICES AND BUSWAY REDUCERS

A. General: Compatible with the connected busway and of types as indicated. Plug-in devices and
reducers shall be equipped with spring reinforced contact fingers arranged so they will not make

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 4 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

contact with busways during plug insertion until the device housing is positively earthed to the
busway. Plug-in devices and reducers shall be locked in position mechanically and make positive
earthing contact before to the power connection when in the fully inserted position. Safety
interlocks (releasable) shall be provided on busway plugs and reducers having "on" and "off"
positions to prevent insertion or removal of unit when the circuit breaker is in the closed position,
prevent opening the cover when the circuit breaker is in the closed position and to prevent closing
the circuit breaker when the cover is opened. Alignment tabs shall be provided to prevent the plug-
in device or reducer from being installed 180o out of position. Mounting hardware shall be captive
on bus plug housing.

B. Plug-in units (tap off units) shall be of rating shown on the Drawings, and comprise circuit breaker
made by same manufacturer of the busway, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, complete
with stabs, stab shields and earthing stab. No cables are permitted for connection of the breaker to
the busway stabs. Circuit breakers shall be as specified in Division 16 Section "Panelboards".

C. Busway reducers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings and with the rating shown on
the Drawings, and comprise circuit breaker made by same manufacturer of the busway, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer, complete with stabs, stab shields and earthing stab. No cables
are permitted for connection of the breaker to the busway stabs. Circuit breakers shall be as
specified in Division 16 Section "Switchboards".

2.5 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: as recommended by busway manufacturer and conforming to Division 16 Section "Basic

Electrical Materials and Methods".

B. Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: Adjustable for leveling and spring tension and arranged
to permit relative movement between floor and busway.

C. Rigid Floor Supports: Adjustable for leveling.

D. Expansion Section: Capacity and conductor provisions same as adjacent busway section.
Arranged to absorb expansion and contraction of bus bars and housing.

E. Fasteners to connect busway supports to the building structure as follows:

1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

2. Toggle Bolts: All steel spring head type.
3. Powder Driven Threaded Studs: Heat treated steel, designed specifically for the intended
service.

2.6 FIRE STOPPING

A. General: Materials approved for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers. Refer to Division
16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" and Division 07 Section " Fire Stopping".

B. Wall and Floor Flanges: Sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum thickness close fitting to busway
arranged to close the wall or floor opening at the busway penetration.

C. Two-Part Sealant: Formed-in-place sealant matching the type used during the fire resistance in
building penetrations test in accordance with IEC 61439-6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 5 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install busways and accessories as indicated and in compliance with applicable requirements of
applicable codes/regulations. Conform to manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in the approved applicable standards. Tighten joints
again after bus assemblies have been energized for 30 days.

C. Install expansion fittings at locations where bus assembly crosses building expansion joints.
Install at other locations so distance between expansion fittings does not exceed 90 percent of
manufacturer's recommended distance between fittings for the type and material of busway
installed.

D. Fire Stops: Install fire stops where busway penetrates fire rated walls and floors. Seal between
busway and opening and around opening with sealant or sealing mortar having fire rating not less
than that of the penetrated wall or floor. Comply with Division 07 Section " Fire Stopping".

E. Weather Seal: Install integral weather seal where busway penetrates exterior wall or roof. Provide
appropriate flange and seal around openings to make weather tight.

F. Floor Penetrations: Provide a minimum 100 mm (4-inch-high) curb around busway penetrations of
floors to prevent water from spills and leaks from contacting busway.

G. Support busway from the building structure independently from other suspended items.

1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection, spacing, and installation of

supports.
2. Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be adequate to support
busway load multiplied by a safety factor of three or 90 kg (200 lb), whichever is greater.
3. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
4. Support bus assembly with not less than 10-mm steel rods for horizontal installations and
with spring supports for vertical installations, unless otherwise by the Manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer. Modify supports after completion to eliminate strains and
stresses on bus bars and housings.
5. Fasten supports securely to building structure according to Division 26 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."

H. Fastening Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten supports securely to the building structure
as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

I. Support at Connections to Equipment: Where busways connect to equipment, provide flanged

fittings fastened to the busway and to the equipment. Support the busway separately. Do not carry
the weight of the busway on the equipment enclosure.

J. Coordinate bus-assembly terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing,

connection, and closure.

3.2 EARTHING

A. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for busways as indicated and
specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 6 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Tighten bonding and earthing connections to comply with tightening torques specified in
applicable Standard or to assure permanent and effective earthing.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test busway runs prior to energizing as follows and provide written report of tests.

1. Phasing: verify that proper phase relationships exist between source, busway, and
connected equipment using phase rotation meter and verifying phase continuity from
source to equipment.
2. Insulation Resistance: measure IR for all busway components with 1000 Volt d.c.
megohmmeter and compare in report with manufacturer's stated acceptable values.
Measure each phase to phase and each phase to earth. Any reading should be better than
100 megohm.

B. Energize busway and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.

C. Test Failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest. Verify that
equipment meets the specified requirements.

3.4 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR

A. Upon completion of installation of busways, remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair
damaged finish including chips, scratches and abrasions.

B. Galvanized Finish: repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Paint Finish: repair damage using matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.

3.5 ADJUSTMENT

A. Align busway runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists. Provide support
stiffeners at locations where indicated and where there is excessive movement.

B. Check bus plug circuit breaker trip settings against connected loads and revise as required to
conform to recommended values.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion perform an infrared scan of bus
assembly including joints and plug-in units.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of bus assembly, one at four months and the other at
11 months after Substantial Completion.

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 7 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3. Prepare a certified report identifying bus assembly checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and scanning
observations after remedial action.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16450

ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 / Page 8 of 8

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16482 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes motor control centers and panels for use on ac circuits rated 600 V and less.
It includes a Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers,
etc. as detailed in the mechanical specifications, BMS schedules and/or shown on drawings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for electric motors.

2. Division 15 Section "Building Management system.
3. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
4. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for circuit breakers.
5. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for conduits.
6. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for wires and cables.
7. Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for switch disconnectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Technical Data: Include dimensions, ratings and data on features and components.

B. For Variable Frequency Drives: Submit manufacturer's performance data including dimensional
drawings, customer connection drawings, power circuit diagrams, installation and maintenance
manuals, warranty description, VFDs FLA rating, certification agency file numbers and catalogue
information.

C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Shop and Installation Drawings: Submit for each motor control center, and prior to ordering
materials and equipment, specified in this Section. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and
component lists. Show ratings, including short time and short-circuit ratings, and horizontal and
vertical bus ampacities.

1. Complete technical schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings on all
motor starters, motor protection relays, sensing units, control accessories, etc.
2. Instructional details of equipment, particularly motor control centers and panels.
3. Installation details of motor control centers and panels and of control and sensing
accessories.
4. Exact routing of power and control cables, wiring and conduits.
5. Feeder termination details at motor control centers, starters, motors, isolating switches,
control and sensing accessories etc.
6. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting wiring diagrams (of all power and control circuits)
pertinent to class and type specified for motor control center. Schematic diagram of each
type of controller unit indicated.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 1 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

7. Wiring Diagrams: Submit for approval detailed control wiring diagrams and a list of
control equipment with descriptive literature.
8. Free hand field wiring diagrams or sketches will not be accepted.
9. Factory certified routine test certificates to be submitted with each product delivered on
site.

E. Maintenance Data: For products to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.

F. Submit certified protection relay coordination settings for review, along with certified “As-built”
connection drawings, before energisation of equipment.

G. As-built (Record) Drawings: At project close-out, submit certified record drawings of installed
electrical motor control centers, in accordance with requirements of the specifications, Division
01.

H. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test records
in accordance with the Standards.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain motor control devices through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Comply with the Following Standards:

1. IEC 61439-1.
2. IEC 61439-2.
3. IEC 60204.

As an alternative, MCCs / MCPs in compliance with NEMA standards may be considered subject
to Engineer’s approval.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 12 year from date of taking over certificate.Substantial Completion.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated.

B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in motor control centers. Provide temporary heaters as
required to prevent condensation.

C. Handle motor control centers according to Standards recommendations. Use factory-installed

lifting provisions.

1.7 COORDINATION

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 2 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to
which they connect.

B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and
characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty cycle of
the motor and load.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spare Indicating Lights: Furnish 6 of each type required.

2. Control Fuses: Furnish 10% of the total quantity of each rating used, with a minimum of
one per type.
3. VFD Drives: For VFDs 50 HP and less, furnish one unit of each frame for quantities
greater than five drives per frame, unless drives are provided with built-in manual bypass.

1.9 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed by the
Engineer for locally assembled equipment. Witness test shall include complete routine and
function testing on all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for
approval prior to test conduction. Allow for test expenses including business class transportation
and hotel accommodation as necessary for two persons from the Engineer’s/ Employer’s side.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:

1. Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Co. (U.S.A.)

2. Cutler Hammer/Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)
3. General Electric (U.S.A.)
4. Moeller/Eaton corp. (Germany)
5. Schneider Electric (France)
6. Siemens (Germany)
7. Schneider Electric / Square D Co. (U.S.A.)
8. ABB (Germany/Italy)

B. Locally assembled products by one of the above approved manufacturers are acceptable subject to
compliance with design requirements and adequacy of reference list and quality control of the
local factory.

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

A. Furnish complete variable frequency drives as specified herein for the fans and pumps designated
to be variable speed. All standards and optional features shall be included within the VFD
enclosure, unless otherwise specified. VFD enclosure shall be IP 54 to IEC 60529 with inlet air
filters. Drive shall be mounted on a floor stand.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 3 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. VFD shall be provided for motor starting and speed control where specified or shown on electrical
or mechanical drawings.

C. VFD shall convert three-phase, 50] hertz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency, three
phase power for stepless motor speed control from 10% to 100% of the motor's 50 hertz speed.
Input voltage shall be as specified on the drawing schedules.

D. VFD shall include a converter and an inverter section. The converter section shall convert fixed
frequency and voltage AC utility power to DC voltage. All VFDs shall include input line reactors
or an isolation transformer as required. The inverter section of the VFD shall invert the DC
voltage into a quality output waveform, with adjustable voltage and frequency for stepless motor
speed control. The VFD shall maintain a constant V/Hz ratio. The VFD and options shall be tested
to IEC 60947-4-1.

E. Power line noise shall be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch as defined in IEC
61000 as follows:

1. For motors with full load current below 16 A, comply with IEC 61000-3-2, and as a
minimum use 6-pulse rectifier with DC buffer.
2. For motors with full load current below 75 A, comply with IEC 61000-3-4, and as a
minimum use 6-pulse rectifier with 3% AC line reactor and DC buffer.
3. For motors with full load current exceeding 75 A and up to 450 A, comply with IEC
61000-3-4, and as a minimum use 6-pulse rectifier with 5% AC line reactor and DC buffer.
4. For motors with full load current exceeding 450 A, comply with IEC 61000-3-4, and as a
minimum use 12-pulse rectifier with two secondaries galvanic isolating transformer to
provide the necessary phase shift and 5% AC line reactor and DC buffer; as an alternative,
active front end technique with LCL filter may be used.

F. The VFD shall comply with EMC directive and standard IEC 61800-3 category C2 (1st
environment), the VFD shall include EMC filter.

G. Motor noise as a result of the VFD shall be limited to 3 dB over across the line operation
measured at 1 meter from the motor's centerline.

H. VFD's full load amp rating shall meet or exceed NFPA 70, NEC Table 430-250.

I. Protective Features shall include the following:

1. Individual motor overload protection for each motor controlled.

2. Protection against input power under-voltage (for non-emergency motors only), over-
voltage, and phase loss.
3. Protection against output current overload and instantaneous over-current.
4. Protection against over-temperature within the VFD enclosure.
5. Protection against over-voltage on the DC bus.
6. Thermistor motor protection relay interface.
7. Protect VFD from sustained power of phase loss. Under-voltage trip activates
automatically when line voltage drops more than 10 percent below rated input voltage.
8. Automatically reset faults due to under-voltage, over-voltage, phase loss, or over-
temperature.
9. Protection against output short circuit and motor winding shorting to case faults.
10. Status lights or digital display for indication of individual fault conditions.
11. Controller capable of operating without a motor or any other equipment connected to the
drive output to facilitate start-up and troubleshooting.
12. Input line reactors shall be provided to minimize harmonics introduced to the AC line and
to provide additional protection to AC line transients.

J. Interface Features for the VFD will include:

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 4 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Door mounted Hand/Off/Auto selector switch to start and stop the VFD. In the Auto
position, the VFD will start/stop from the controller. In the Hand position, the VFD will
run regardless of the remote contact position.
2. Manual speed control capability.
3. Local/Remote selector switch. In the Remote position, motor speed is determined by the
follower signal. In the local position, motor speed is determined by the manual speed
control.
4. Power/On light to indicate that the VFD has tripped on a fault condition.
5. Digital meter with selector switch to indicate percent speed and percent load.
6. A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Run mode.
7. A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Fault mode.
8. A 0 to 10 V output signal to vary in direct proportion to the controller's speed.
9. VFD to have terminal strip and N.C. safety contacts such as freezstats, smoke alarms, etc.
VFD to safety shut down in drive or bypass mode when contacts open.

K. Adjustments will include the following:

1. Maximum speed, adjustable 15 to 100 percent base speed.

2. Acceleration time, adjustable 3 to 60 seconds.
3. Deceleration time, adjustable 3 to 60 seconds with override circuit to prevent nuisance trips
if decal time is set too short.
4. Current limit, adjustable 0 to 105 percent.
5. Overload trip set point.
6. Offset and gain to condition the input speed signal.

L. Service conditions will cover:

1. Ambient temperature, 0 to 50 deg C.

2. 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.
3. Elevation to 1,000 meters without derating.
4. AC line voltage variation, -10 to +10 percent of nominal.

M. Control interface: VFD shall be equipped with field-bus module for remote control, monitor and
display VFD status and alarmsfrom the BMS. Coordinate with BMS for the interface protocol to
be adapted and provide the necessary adapter modules accordingly.

2.3 STARTERS

A. Starters for three phase motors to be magnetic type to automatically disconnect motor from power
supply in case of supply failure, excessive voltage drop, overcurrent and lack of balance in phases.
Overload trips to be provided for three phases.

B. Motor Data: Obtain from equipment supplier before ordering any motor starter, or check motor
nameplate for full load current rating and allowable temperature rise in order to select proper
overload thermal element for motor starter.

C. Short circuit protection device fitted to starter to be independent of controller and overload
protection.

D. Control voltage for starters and control circuits shall not exceed 110 V.

E. Step Down Control Circuit Transformers: Two winding isolating type.

F. Control Circuit Protection: Use high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers.

G. Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated by
auxiliary contacts on main isolator.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 5 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Control devices on starters to be as follows unless otherwise indicated or required by driven

equipment: start stop push buttons, one red pilot light for "running", one green pilot light for
"stopped", one amber pilot light for overload trip, and one reset push button.

I. All motors shall be protected with overload protection class 10 to IEC 60947-4-1, unless otherwise
required by the motor manufacturer.

J. Starter type A for single phase motors not exceeding 1 HP to be surface or flush mounted, manual
two pole toggle type, for non reversing across the line starting, fitted with one overload element.

K. Starter type B for three phase motors not exceeding 10 HP to be direct on line, non reversing,
magnetic type, with manual reset, 3 pole overload relay and under voltage protection (for non-
emergency motors only), unless otherwise required by local regulations or shown on drawings.

L. Starter type C for three phase motors over 10 HP, but not exceeding 50 HP, to be automatic star
delta magnetic non reversing type, with 3 pole overload relay and under voltage protection (for
non-emergency motors only), unless otherwise required by local regulations or shown on
drawings.

M. Starter type D for three phase motors over 50 HP to be multiple step auto transformer non
reversing magnetic type, with 3 pole overload relay, under voltage protection (for non-emergency
motors only), unless otherwise required by local regulations or shown on drawings.

N. Electronic Solid State Reduced Voltage Motor Soft Starter shall be provided where specified or
shown on the electrical or mechanical Drawings. Soft Starter shall be UL listed, consisting of
silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) based power section, digital logic board and paralleling bypass
contractor to provide smooth, stepless acceleration for AC, 3-phase, [400] V, 50 Hz induction
motors. Soft starter shall be provided for soft starting of motors where required on drawings. The
minimum peak inverse voltage rating of the SCR's to be 1500 V. Contactor shall be rated for full
voltage across the line motor starting duty. Starter enclosure shall be NEMA 12 for indoor
installation and NEMA 3 for installations in wet and outdoor areas and provided with necessary
ventilation fans. Where shown on the drawings or indicated in the motor center schedules, starter
shall be incorporated within motor control center. The starter shall provide the following
protections and adjustments:

1. Adjustable electronic overload.

2. Overhead protection for the starter.
3. Phase sequence protection.
4. Phase loss/unbalance protection.
5. Under-voltage protection (For Non-Emergency motors only).
6. Ramp time.
7. Initial torque.
8. Start current limit.
9. Motor full load current.
10. Starter shall comprise molded case motor circuit protector (with magnetic trip only) for
short circuit protection. Starter shall be rated for 125% of the continuous current rating of
the motor. Short circuit rating of start shall be at least 110% of the short circuit level at
starter location, or as shown on the electrical drawings or indicated in the motor control
center schedules. Soft starters for pumps shall comprise smooth soft facility for linear
voltage deceleration with adjustable deceleration time.

O. Individually mounted starters to be totally enclosed in sheet steel enclosure with baked enamel
finish. Design shall suit location and application. It shall be impossible to open enclosure door
unless isolator is in open position.

P. Nameplates: Starters and controls to have engraved nameplates identifying system or defining its
function.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 6 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

Q. Contactors: Comply with IEC 60947-4, utilization category AC3, and be 3-phase, 3-pole,
magnetic type, 600 V rating, capable of interrupting at least ten times rated current inductive or
non-inductive loads under normal service conditions and shall have replaceable main arcing
contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors shall withstand, without welding or burning of
contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal rating for 4 seconds upon closing and shall be
capable of closing on the heaviest short-circuit of the system and withstand the short-circuit for
period required by upstream short-circuit protective device to operate. Three N.O. and three N.C.
spare contacts shall be provided on each contactor.

R. Starter Co-Ordination: Motor starter devices shall be of type 2 co-ordination to IEC 60947-4-1.
For variable frequency drives, fast acting semiconducting fuse category gR to IEC 60269-4 or
approved equal shall be provided in case type 2 coordination cannot be achieved, to limit the let-
through energy.

S. Fuses shall be provided with a monitoring facility for an immediate tripping after any fuse is
blown to prevent single phasing. The monitoring shall reset automatically after the replacement of
the blown fuse(s).

2.4 SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

A. Switch Disconnectors: non fusible, single throw type, with AC-23 utilization category to IEC
60947-3 for AC motors, housed in separate metallic enclosure, with arc quenching devices on each
pole capable of interrupting at least six times its rated current. They shall simultaneously interrupt
power supply to all line conductors, any neutral and control circuits.

B. Isolating Switches for single phase fractional horsepower motors to be double pole, dolly operated
type, rated 15/20 A at 250 V AC, quick make, quick break, with silver alloy contacts, flush or
surface mounted to suit application.

C. Operating Mechanism to be quick make quick break type, with external operating handle
mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover to necessitate disconnecting switch to be in OFF
position for access to inside of enclosure. Means shall be provided for by passing interlocks.
Position of isolating switch shall be clearly indicated on cover.

D. Enclosure to be general purpose type, unless otherwise indicated or required, with provision for
locking operating handle in OPEN and CLOSED positions.

E. Enclosures where indicated or required by location to be weatherproof totally sealed water and
dustproof type.

2.5 COMBINATION STARTER SWITCH DISCONNECTOR

A. Components to comprise magnetic starter switch disconnector and short circuit protection devices
required by the Standards, in approved sheet metal enclosure to suit application.

B. Switch Disconnector Operating Mechanism: Quick make, quick break, with external operating
handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover necessitating disconnecting switch to be in
OFF position for access to inside of enclosure. Means shall be provided for by passing interlocks.
Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover.

C. Short circuit protection gear shall be HRC fused cartridges or molded case circuit breakers of
appropriate current rupturing capacity. Switch disconnectors are not required if circuit breakers are
used for the short circuit protection. In this case the circuit breaker will perform the disconnection
function.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 7 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

D. Operation of circuit breaker to be possible from outside of enclosure. Position of breaker

ON/OFF/TRIPPED to be clearly indicated by position of handle.

2.6 PUSH BUTTONS

A. Push buttons to be one unit momentary contact START/STOP with normally open or normally
closed contacts as required by wiring diagrams and with lockout attachments. Heads to be color-
coded and STOP button to be protected. Push buttons controlling one piece of equipment to be
housed in separate enclosure.

2.7 RELAYS

A. Relays to be multi-pole with normally open or normally closed contacts, electrically operated at
110 V maximum, and magnetically held. Contacts to be double break silvered type,
interchangeable from normally open to normally closed without additional parts. Relays shall be
rated at 10 A, 600 V.

2.8 CIRCUIT PROTECTORS AND SWITCHES / CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit Breakers to give positive trip free operation on abnormal overloads, with quick make quick
break contacts under both manual and automatic operation. Stationary and movable contacts to be
non welding silver alloy adequately protected with effective and rapid arc interruption.

B. Motor Circuit Protector: Molded case, magnetic break type with adjustable instantaneous setting
suitable for motor protection.

C. Molded Case Switch: Similar to circuit breakers but without overload/short circuit protection.
Short time rating of switches shall not be less than twelve times the maximum rated operational
current for 1 second. Switches shall comply with IEC 60947-3. Switches shall have utilization
category AC-23B to IEC 60947-3.

D. Branch Circuit Breakers to be 160 A minimum frame size, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings.

E. Circuit Breakers And Motor Circuit Protectors shall be in compliance with IEC 60947-2,
utilization category B (for frame ratings 800A and above), utilization category A (for ratings up to
630A), sequence II (service capacity) for motor control centers and sequence III (ultimate
capacity) for motor control panels and combination starters unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.

F. Electronic Trip Unit: circuit breaker electronic trip unit shall be provided with adjustable long
time, short time and instantaneous current setting. In addition adjustable earth fault protection
shall be provided on trip units for main incoming circuit breakers.

G. Main incoming breakers/switches to be equipped to provide earth fault phase failure and phase
sequence protection through shunt trip coil. Earth fault detection and interruption to be time
coordinated with those of main incoming breaker on main distribution board.

H. Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) for ratings up to 1250A and Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) for
ratings greater than 1250A.

I. Multiple Pole Breakers to have single handle mechanism. Each pole to have inverse time delay
thermal overcurrent trip element and magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip element for
simultaneous tripping of all poles.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 8 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

J. Trip Elements to be ambient temperature compensated type.

2.9 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC)

A. Type: Totally enclosed, free-standing sectionalized type, modular, compartmented suitable for
frame ratings of main circuit breaker and busbars of 630 A or above, form 3b to IEC 61439-1 & -2
with separate withdrawable section for each motor starter and separate fixed section for main
incoming breaker / switch and each outgoing feeder circuit breaker. Sections to be designed to
allow other sections to be easily added or removed.

B. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet steel enclosures,
phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with thermal polymerized polyester
epoxy powder coating, gray color (RAL 7035 ANSI 61) to approval. Motor control center shall be
vermin, dust and rodent proof, IP 31 protection to IEC 60529 for indoor installations, IP 54
protection for installations in wet areas (e.g. pump rooms) and for motor control centers serving
life safety and firefighting equipment and IP 55 protection for outdoor installations, with adequate
lifting means and base-frames and capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to
floor without additional sills. For ratings up to 3200A, enclosures shall have mechanical impact
resistance of IK10 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree IP 54 and higher, and IK08 to
IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree lower than IP 54. Test certificates for mechanical
impact shall be submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure thickness shall not be less than
1.5mm. For ratings larger than 3200A, enclosures shall have minimum thickness of 2mm. Fronts
shall be single or twin covers to shield circuit breakers, terminals and live ends.

C. Components: Motor control center shall include the following:

1. Main incoming circuit breaker or isolating switch as shown on the Drawings for
terminating incoming supply cables and isolating the busbar system.
2. Main copper horizontal full-length busbars.
3. Branch copper vertical full height busbars.
4. Neutral copper busbar rated at half capacity of main busbar and distributed throughout
whole motor control center.
5. Earth copper busbars minimum 25 x 6 mm extending full length of motor control center.
6. Digital multimeter unit with necessary current transformers at incoming feeder(s) as
specified under Division 16 Section “Switchboards”.
7. Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating lights, switches, relays, contactors and
accessories as shown on the Drawings.
8. Interconnecting and interlock wiring.

D. Wiring: Motor control center in compliance with NEMA standards shall be class II, factory wired
with type B wiring to NEMA ICS-18. The same shall be implemented to motor control centers in
compliance with IEC standard.

E. Busbars: Site rated to same rating of main circuit breaker frame size as a minimum unless
otherwise shown on drawings, and braced for a symmetrical rms short-circuit duty as specified.
Busbars shall be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable equipment
temperature ratings, and not exceeding IEC 61439-1&-2 limits. Connections and buswork shall be
bolted with compatible hardware material as per manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be
accessible for inspection and maintenance. Contact surfaces shall be properly tin or Electro-silver
plated as necessary.

F. Connections from busbar to switching element and starter shall be rated to carry full continuous
current rating of switching element frame as a minimum, unless otherwise shown on drawings.

G. Main horizontal busbars and vertical distribution busbars shall be insulated unless bare busbars are
recommended by the manufacturer and used in the type test.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 9 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. All motor control centers fed directly from transformer shall be equipped with Class I+II surge
protective devices as specified under Division 16 Section “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Circuits”. SPDs along with their fused-disconnect switch shall be integrated
within or adjacent to the MCC’s enclosure.

I. All motor control centers fed from MDB shall be equipped with Class II surge protective devices
as specified under Division 16 Section “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits”. SPDs along with their fused-disconnect switch shall be integrated within or adjacent to
the MCC’s enclosure.

J. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite or
Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.

K. Compartment doors to be interlocked so that isolators or breakers must be in OFF position before
door can be opened.

L. Spare Positions: Fully equipped cells, ready for connection to motors, shall be provided in
adequate number.

M. Space Positions: Fully equipped cells ready to receive control unit shall be provided in adequate
number. Space positions to have blank cover plates.

N. Starters, switches, other components and electrical devices to be clearly labeled in English as to
number and function, with incised letters on black Bakelite with white laminated core. Labels to
be permanently fixed under each component.

O. Incoming line connections to be made with solderless, terminal four bolt type clamps.

P. Labels: Starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in English as to
function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.

Q. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be firmly fixed within motor control center, showing each
component and cross- referenced with component labels.

R. Submit for approval electrical schematic diagram of whole installation suggested layout of motor
control center, interior wiring details and complete technical literature on all proposed
components, prior to fabrication or purchase.

2.10 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS (MCP)

A. Type: Wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type, IP 31 for indoor installation and IP 54 for
installation in wet areas and for motor control panels serving life safety and firefighting
equipment and IP 55 for outdoor installations, with ratings of main breaker and busbars up to
400A, form 2a to IEC 61439-1 & -2.

B. Construction: hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with one coat etch primer and one coat stove
enamel internally and externally for cabinet/box; suitable for mechanical impact resistance of
IK10 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree IP 54 and higher and IK08 to IEC 62262 for
enclosures protection degree lower than IP 54. Test certificates for mechanical impact shall be
submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure thickness shall not be less than 1.5mm.

C. Components: Motor control panel shall include the following:

1. Main incoming circuit breaker or isolating switch as shown on the Drawings for
terminating incoming supply cables and isolating the busbar system.
2. Copper main and branch busbars.
3. Neutral copper busbar rated at half capacity of main busbar.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 10 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

4. Earth copper busbars rated at half capacity of main busbar.

5. Digital multimeter unit with necessary current transformers at incoming feeder(s) as
specified under Division 16 Section “Switchboards”.
6. Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating lights, switches, relays, contactors and
accessories as shown on the Drawings.
7. Interconnecting and interlock wiring.

D. Wiring: Motor control panel in compliance with NEMA standards shall be class II, factory wired
with type B wiring to NEMA ICS-18. The same shall be implemented to motor control panels in
compliance with IEC standard.

E. Busbars: Site rated to same rating of main circuit breaker frame size as a minimum unless
otherwise shown on drawings, and braced for a symmetrical rms short-circuit duty as specified.
Busbars shall be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable equipment
temperature ratings, and not exceeding IEC 61439-1&-2 limits. Connections and buswork shall be
bolted with compatible hardware material as per manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be
accessible for inspection and maintenance. Contact surfaces shall be properly tin or Electro-silver
plated as necessary.

F. Connections from busbar to switching element and starter shall be rated to carry full continuous
current rating of switching element frame as a minimum, unless otherwise shown on drawings.

G. Main horizontal busbars and vertical distribution busbars shall be insulated unless bare busbars are
recommended by the manufacturer and used in the type test.

H. All motor control panels shall be equipped with Class II surge protective devices as specified
under Division 16 Section “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits”. SPDs
along with their fused-disconnect switch shall be integrated within or adjacent to the MCP’s
enclosure.

I. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite or
Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.

J. Components: Panels shall contain necessary breakers, starters, push button switches, selector
switches, relays, indicating lights, interconnecting and interlock wiring and all devices and
accessories required for automatic or manual operation of equipment as specified under equipment
concerned.

K. Labels: Starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in English as to
function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.

L. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be mounted in permanent approved manner on inside of panel
door. Diagrams shall show each component cross referenced with component labels.

2.11 CONTROL SWITCHES

A. Float Switch: Level operated, heavy duty, bracket mounted type, suitable for application in open
tanks, complete with 178 mm spun copper float, brass rod, two stops, floor mounting stand, lever
and counterweight. Switch to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure and 2 pole double throw silver
contacts that open on liquid rise.

B. Pressure Switch: Industrial, heavy-duty bellows actuated type, suitable for water service, with
contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to 8 kg/cm2. Switch to be good for 1720 kPa
operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It shall have oil tight and dust
tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts and setting adjustment.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 11 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

C. Low Suction Pressure Switch: Industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm actuated type, suitable
for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling pressure, preset at factory to 3 kPa. Switch
to be good for 690 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It shall
have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts, range adjustment knob,
sealing cap and range locking nut.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and
configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

C. Push-Button Stations: In covers of magnetic controllers for manually started motors where
indicated, start contact connected in parallel with sealing auxiliary contact for low-voltage
protection.

D. Hand-off-automatic Selector Switches: In covers of manual and magnetic controllers of motors

started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with other equipment.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install motor control centers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Anchor each motor control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and grout sills flush
with motor control center mounting surface.

C. Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch as indicated.

D. Power and Control Wiring: Run in separate conduits unless otherwise specified.

E. Rigid conduits shall not terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame or base.

F. Flexible conduits to be used at motor connections. Allow sufficient slack to permit motor to slide
over adjustable length of motor base.

G. Flexible Conduits: Length and radius to be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables without
damage to conductor or its insulation.

H. Flexible Conduits: Do not use in place of rigid conduits except at motor connections, unless
otherwise specified.

I. Support conduit with conduit supports in an adequate approved manner.

J. Conduits shall not cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They shall be run a minimum 100
mm away from pipes of non-electrical services.

K. Conduits: Install so that moisture can drain to lowest point. Provide screw plug at all low points
for draining.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 12 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs according to Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor control centers, including
control sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and
cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor control centers.

C. Starters: Fix detailed wiring diagram inside enclosure cover to clearly indicate circuits.

D. Starters: Identify control and power wires either by distinctive colored insulation, engraved tags or
other approved method.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

B. Protect circuits with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers. Auxiliary supply for controls
other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main
isolator.

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic control devices according to an indicated
wiring diagram or one that is manufacturer approved, where available.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices that
have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor control circuit in both hand and automatic positions
for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature
cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.

3.5 EARTHING

A. Earth motors by connecting green insulated conductor from earthing bushing in starter to motor
frame. Run earth conductor together with circuit wiring and terminate in motor terminal box,
provided earth terminal in box is connected to motor frame. If this is not feasible, extend earth
conductor through insulated bushed opening in terminal box and connect to motor base.

B. Earth equipment by connecting non-current carrying metal parts of system to earth source. Non-
currents carrying metal parts include conduits, cable trays, outlet boxes, cabinets, enclosures,
doors, grilles, and barriers protecting or shielding electrical equipment from direct access.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten motor control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: After installing motor control center and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

1. Procedures: Perform recommended visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test.
Certify compliance with test parameters.

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 13 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.

B. Circuit Breakers: Co-ordinate earth fault detection and interruption with those of main incoming
breaker on main distribution panel.

C. Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and correct setting.

D. Low Suction Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and correct
setting.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor control centers. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices
internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 16482

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16482 / Page 14 of 14

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16511- INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building
surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, mounting provisions and connection to circuit
wiring and to corresponding lighting control equipment.

B. Appendix A1 for this section includes the interior lighting fixtures used in Front Of House (FOH)
areas and facade lighting system. In addition lighting control system for Front of House (FOH)
areas and facade lighting system are specified under the appendix (MBLD documents).

B.C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including manufacturer's name,
catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions, operating
characteristics and principles
2. Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of installation and to the
Specification
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution curves,
coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation factors etc.
4. Dimensions of fixtures.
5. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings
and photometric data.
6. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance.
7. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
8. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
9. Cold cathode and LEDs control gears.
10. Energy-efficiency data.
11. Life, output (lumens, Color temperature, and CRI) and energy efficiency data for lamps.
12. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Furnish data required in
"Submittals" Article in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
13. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound
transmission class.
14. Types of lamps.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit Drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 / Page 1 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling features,
structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and pertinent to the
installation.
2. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
3. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
4. Wiring details, circuit and panelboard references, special lighting control arrangements etc.
5. Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details
and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, features, location and size of each field connection
and accessories. Detail wiring for power, signal and control wiring for fixtures and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Samples: Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required, together with
color and texture samples of each fixture.

D. Installation instructions.

E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating
fixture installation with ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and other components in the vicinity.
Include work of all trades that shall be installed near lighting equipment.

F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that products comply
with requirements.

G. Dimming Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast certifying that

ballasts are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are used.

H. Addressable Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast certifying that

ballasts are compatible with the central battery systems and equipment with which they are used.

I. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fixture Design and Standards: The Specification and the Drawings are a guide to the selection of
lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of construction, materials,
method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless otherwise specified, fixtures shall be
manufacturer's standard series, designed and manufactured for the purpose and application
required, generally in accordance with the Schedule of Lighting Fixtures and complying with IEC
60598 and BS EN 55015.

B. Mockups: Provide lighting fixtures for room or module mockups. Install fixtures for mockups
with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Engineer's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.

2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
3. Remove mockups when directed. Fixtures may be reinstalled in the Work with approval of
Engineer.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Design Layout: Fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified fixtures to
achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans shall be checked to
ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural members, ducts, pipes, other

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 / Page 2 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required. Certain fixtures are shown in provisional
positions, pending preparation of final equipment layout drawings. Such fixtures shall be located
in coordination with final equipment layout so that illumination is as intended by the design.

B. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures
with ceiling system and other construction.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Spare Parts: Provide extra fixtures and drivers up to 4% (or nearest whole unit with minimum four
for each type).

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period

1. Warranty Period: 5 year from date of taking over certificate.substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each
designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on Drawings or approved equal.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL

A. Generally: Construction and wiring of fixtures shall comply with the Regulations and Standards.
Fixtures shall be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory. Manufacturer's name, factory
inspection stamp and official quality label shall be fixed to each fixture supplied.

B. Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires): Manufacturer's standard, as given in Lighting Fixture Schedules

shown on the Drawings, or equal.

C. Sheet Steel Housings: Not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker when required by the Specification
or the Standards.

D. Sheet Steel Reflectors: Not less than 0.5 mm thick.

E. Aluminum Reflectors: Not less than 99.5 % purity and not less than 0.7 mm thick, unless
otherwise approved.

F. Fabrication: Metalwork shall be mitred, welded and ground smooth without tool marks or burrs.
Flat metal parts shall be stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication. Metal parts
shall have finish free from irregularities.

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 / Page 3 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

G. Rust-proof Ferrous Base: Ferrous metal parts shall be bonderized (treated with corrosion resistant
phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat before application of final
finish.

H. Finish for Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: Approved baked enamel paint. Paint color on fixture
frames and trims shall be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.

I. Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: White baked enamel paint having reflection factor not less
than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, shall be highly polished, anodized aluminum with
reflection factors not less than 97%.

J. Mechanical Resistance of Finish: After finish has been applied on steel surfaces and cured, it shall
withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or loosening from base
metal.

K. Resistance of Finish to Ultra-Violet: Finish shall withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultra-violet RS

lamp placed 100 mm from surface without discoloring, hardening or warping, and shall retain the
same reflection factor after exposure.

L. Heat Resistance: Finishes, wires and components inside fixtures shall be certified materials to
resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.

M. Lamp Cap Temperature Rise Test: Comply with IEC 60360 when testing incandescent or
discharge lamps for compliance with the limits for each type of lamp.

N. Wiring Inside Fixtures: Not less than 0.5 mm2, and insulated for 240 V application. Insulation
shall have acceptable characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside fixtures. Wiring shall
be terminated on screw type, fixed, insulating, terminal blocks.

O. Hinges: Fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers shall have concealed hinges and catches,
and stain-less steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally durable products may be submitted
for approval.

P. Suspension Aligners: Provide for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and horizontal alignment.
Vertical adjustment shall be minimum 25 mm.

Q. Recessed Fixtures: Construct to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting fixture or ceiling.
Plaster rings shall be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.

R. Recessed down light fixtures shall be provided with “trims” to architectural approval and shall not
have visible fixing screws or clips.

S. Outdoor Fixtures: Non-ferrous metal or specially molded material for outdoor use.

T. Removal of parts for maintenance shall be possible without removing fixture housing.

U. All down lights shall be provided with heat tempered safety glass.

PART 3 - LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LIGHTING SYSTEM

A. Light emitting diode shall be a solid state device embodying a p-n junction, emitting optical
radiation when excited by an electric current. It shall be part of the LED module which is supplied
as a light source. Output color consistency shall be guaranteed and have a Color Rendering Index
(CRI) greater than 90. LEDs shall have an efficacy of 60 lumens per watt as a minimum.
Guaranteed rated life shall be above 50000 hours.

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 / Page 4 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Housing shall incorporate an adequate heat sink which ensures the overall fittings and the LEDs
are kept relatively cool,

C. Electronic control gear for LED modules: high efficiency, high power factor, suitable for
operation at the ambient conditions specified for the project. Control gear shall have constant
output current or constant output voltage over the whole wattage range independent of mains
supply fluctuations as shown on drawings and sufficient for operating the number and wattage of
LEDs connected. Guaranteed rated life of the control gear shall be above 50000 hours.

D. Control gear shall have electrical insulation between primary and secondary sides. Secondary
cables from the control gear to LED modules shall be provided by the LED supplier. Maximum
length between control gear and LED module shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. LED control gear shall be protected against electric shock, accidental contact with live parts, short
circuit, overload and shall be earthed (protection class I).

F. Dimmable control gear, where required, shall be compatible with the dimming system used.

G. Control gears shall be compatible with the lighting control system used such as; 1-10V, DALI,
DMX , etc..

H. Control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC 62384 and shall meet the
limits of main harmonic content as defined in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with radio interference
suppression limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of IEC 61547.

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 INSTALLATION

A. Generally: Install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at uniform
heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Make final height adjustment after
installation.

B. Fixture Support: Provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets and flanged
bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers etc. and
method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on outlet boxes to fixture
studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when required, for proper installation. Provide one point
of support in addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually mounted fixtures longer than
600 mm.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that
recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance
between ballast and luminaire.

D. Stem Hangers: Provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures. Stems shall
have suspension aligners and shall be of suitable length for suspending fixtures at required height.

E. Suspended Ceilings: If ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures without strain or
deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure.

F. Solid Ceilings: Coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture dimensions and
structural elements.

G. Continuous Rows: Arrange fixtures so that individual fixture can be removed without dismantling
remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 / Page 5 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

H. Cover Plates: Install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or structure when
left unused.

I. Flush Recessed Fixtures: Install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture and between
fixture and adjacent finished surface.

J. Ventilation: Keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the design of the
fixture. Ensure that the final circuit connection is adequately protected against heat transfer from
fixtures.

K. Earth metal frames as described in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".

L. Tightness: Ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when installed, and
completely weather- proof for installations subject to weather conditions. Installation of fitting and
termination of circuit wiring should not invalidate the ingress protection rating.

M. Lamps for Permanent Installation: Place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to hand-over and
when instructed by Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service shall not be used for final
lamping of fixtures.

N. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to
manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture.

4.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE

A. Visual Inspection: Check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and nameplates etc.

B. Illumination Measurements: Taken at selected locations, to determine level and uniformity.

C. Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation equipment.

D. Electrical Data: Measure power factor, current and voltage at start for installations with discharge
lamps.

E. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

F. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.

G. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

H. Tests: As follows:

1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.
3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Report results in writing.

I. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until
units operate properly.

J. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.

4.3 STARTUP SERVICE

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 / Page 6 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by
Employer. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least
100 hours at full voltage.

4.4 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.

4.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable fixtures to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide
up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of
this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

END OF SECTION 16511

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 / Page 7 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts, poles/support
structures, and accessories and related power distribution and control, protective earthing and
related builder's work including column foundations, cable pits, cable trenches and ductwork.

B. Appendix A2 for this section includes the Exterior lighting fixtures used in landscape lighting. In
addition lighting control system for landscape lighting areas is specified under the appendix
(MBLD documents).

B.C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency
lighting units, and accessories; and for exterior luminaires normally mounted on buildings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support,

including pole, post, or other structure, and mounting and support accessories.

B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s), when
applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position and protect lamps, and to
connect lamps to power supply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete data for approval
including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaire or fixture, lamp and control gear
including manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall
dimensions, operating characteristics and principles, and any modification to a standard
product if applicable
2. Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including shape, base/mounting
flanges, bolts, nuts etc, cross-sections, design criteria and calculations, brackets, finishes,
provisions for cabling, cut-out or circuit-breaker etc.
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar curves, coefficients of utilization,
efficiency and depreciation factors.
4. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
5. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and
photometric data.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 / Page 1 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

6. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance.
7. High-intensity-discharge luminaire ballasts.

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:

1. Layout of equipment in exact positions with mounting and construction details, concrete
foundation dimensions and reinforcement, routing and sections of duct-banks and trenches,
backfill and packing material, earthing rods etc.
2. Cabling and wiring diagrams, single line drawings, loads, phase distribution, protection and
control, earthing and the like.
3. Calculations of illumination and glare levels, based on CIE methods.

C. Samples: submit fully equipped sample of luminaire or other materials or components if required
by Engineer.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying that products comply
with requirements.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards: Luminaires generally are to comply with IEC 60598 and the applicable CISPR
recommendations. Manufacturer is to verify compliance with these standards and the applicable
local regulations and design standards.

B. Technical Requirements: Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for
improvement in construction details, but no changes are to be made without the written approval
of the Engineer.

C. Ambient Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, equipment is to be designed and derated for
continuous and trouble-free service at 50 deg. C ambient temperature and 100% relative humidity,
with temperature reaching 70 deg. C in direct sunlight and with high content of ultra-violet rays.
Equipment is to withstand full load operation whilst exposed to sun.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

A. Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 300 mm above grade and vegetation. Support
poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on poles until just before pole installation. Handle poles
with web fabric straps.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Spare Parts: Provide items necessary for maintenance, and up to 5% (or nearest whole unit) of
installed quantities of each type of lamp, control gear/driver, fuses, luminaire covers, special bolts
or nuts, lamp-holders and the like which are subject to burning, breakage or failure.

B. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 / Page 2 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 2 year from date of taking over certificate..

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each
designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on plans.

2.2 LIGHTING COLUMNS

A. Construction: Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet steel, electrically welded,
and of height specified. Columns up to 12-m height are to be one piece section. Columns above
12 m and up to 20-m height may be supplied in two piece sections, of the slip joint type with
sufficient overlap to ensure correct vertical alignment of column after assembly. Columns are to
have minimum wall thickness of 3 mm at base. Sheet steel is to have minimum rupturing
resistance of 37 kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24 kg/mm2.

B. Top of column is to be designed to receive single or double arm brackets or other arrangement
required, supporting number of luminaires shown on the Drawings. Bracket arrangement is to be
designed to ensure that failure, due to wind induced oscillations, does not occur and that rotation
from desired alignment is not possible.

C. Column Design: Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints, welds, bolts etc. are to be
designed to withstand gust wind velocity of 160 km/hr blowing in the most unfavorable direction
at a height 10 m above ground level, with column fully equipped. Fatigue of steel is in no case to
exceed half elasticity limit, taking into account dynamic stresses due to vibrations. Steel flange
plate, of adequate thickness, is to be solidly welded onto lower edge of column as shown on the
Drawings, and is to have specified number of holes for holding down bolts together with central
cable access hole not less than 150 mm diameter.

D. Access door of weatherproof construction is to be positioned at column base and is to be suitably

sized to insert and service the supply cable terminations and protective device. Door is to be flush
fitting with retaining mechanism and positive locking arrangement with removable hexagonal key.
Column is to be reinforced at door opening. Opposite each door, a non-hygroscopic baseboard of
suitable size to accept appropriate equipment is to be fixed to inside of column by purpose-made
brackets. Stainless steel earthing stud with washers and nuts is to be welded inside the column
near the access door.

E. Finish: Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed, inside and outside surfaces of column are to
be cleaned by pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel components of columns to be
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness of zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2 on both
inside and outside surfaces of column. Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91 / 121 or BS EN ISO 1461 .
Any damage to galvanizing is to be rectified during erection by wire brushing affected area and
treating with approved rust converter to the satisfaction of Engineer. Flange plate and inside and
outside of column base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.

F. Protection and Wiring: Columns with one or two luminaires are to be connected over one phase
and neutral. Columns with three or more luminaires are to be connected over 3 phases and neutral,

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 / Page 3 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bolted terminals and cable lugs are to be provided with
3 phases and neutral terminals, for incoming and outgoing 3 phase 4-wire cable, and of the sizes
shown on Drawings. One circuit breaker, single pole 6 A is to be provided for each phase leading
to a luminaire. Circuit breakers are to be compensated and rated for 50 deg. C ambient with
interrupting capacity of at least 9 kA, and are to be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at
baseboard. Wiring is to be PVC insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor temperature.
Cable is to be at least 4 mm2 copper conductor.

2.3 ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

A. Construction: Totally enclosed, dust protected and splash proof, conforming to at least IP 54 of
IEC 60529, shock resistant and specially designed to house required lamps, electrical gear and
accessories. Body is to be corrosion resistant, extruded, pressure die-cast or fabricated aluminum
alloy.

B. Finish: Exposed metal parts of luminaires are to be factory finished, stove enameled, with suitable
corrosion resisting paint capable of resisting heat emitted by lamp during continuous operation,
and under full sunlight conditions. Color is to be agreed with Engineer.

C. Mirror Reflectors: 99.5% purity, glazed and anodized aluminum or die-cast, super-purity
aluminum vapor-deposited, and coated with transparent layer of silicon protection against wiping.

D. Luminaire Protectors: Heat and shock resistant glass, mounted into suitable frame assembly fixed
to body by captive screws, and secured by extra safety clamps to allow replacement of protector
and reflector. Ozone resistant ethylene propylene or approved equivalent rubber is to ensure
sealing of the front glass.

E. Lamp Sockets: High-grade porcelain, mounted in support brackets with provision to adjust lamps
vertically and axially. Lamp support and locking system are to grip and prevent lamp movement
in operation.

F. Ballast and control-gear are to be mounted in luminaire in separate compartment isolated from
lamp, and with encloterminal blocks fitted with quick-disconnect electrical leads. Where required,
control gear is to be contained in the pre-wired box, having an enclosure of IP 65, and mounted on
luminaire ring separately from luminaires. Control gear is to be plug in type for operation at
230V, a.c. single phase, 50 Hz. Ballast is to be specially selected for particular type of lamps
used, and lamps are to be able to start with at least +/-10% variation of nominal voltage and
continue in normal operation with dips attaining 20% for four seconds. Control gear losses are not
to exceed 10% of normal lamp wattage. RFI suppression device is to be provided. Power factor is
to be compensated to at least 0.9 lagging.

G. HRC fuse cartridges, suitably rated and conforming to IEC 60269 or BS 88, are to be provided,
complete with base, for protection of the luminaire. Fuse is to be rated to withstand starting
current and is to be preferably located in control gear enclosure.

H. Terminal Blocks: Suitable screw-tunnel type, clearly marked with arrangement to facilitate
maintenance, quick replacement and easy disconnection of individual components.

I. Lamps: Number and types shown on the Drawings and as described in Division 16 Section
"Interior Lighting".

2.4 FLOODLIGHTS

A. Type: Totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant, IP 64 of IEC 60529.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 / Page 4 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

B. Housing: High pressure die-cast aluminum alloy, closed on front by hinged framed protector
highly resistant to thermal and mechanical shocks, and set in position by at least eight heavy duty
stainless steel spring clamps with silicon sealing gasket. Enclosure is to be in accordance with
IEC 60598-2-5, and is to be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature of 70 deg. C.

C. Reflectors: High purity (over 99% reflectance) anodized aluminum, secured in precision aligned
internal tracks to provide beam distribution required.

D. Connection box is to be located at rear of floodlight body with gland connections to accept 4 mm2
PVC/PVC three core cable. Lamp and control gear to be mounted in two separate and isolated
compartments.

E. Control Gear: Plug-in type, 230V, 50 Hz, power factor compensated to at least 0.9 lagging.
Ballasts and ignitors are to be type specially adapted for make of lamps selected. Ignitors are to be
electronic thyristor type. Lamp is to be able to start with at least +/-10% line voltage, and with
normal operation dips up to 20% for four seconds. Compensation is to ensure that there is no
large increase in operating current during starting. Control gear losses are not to exceed 10%.
Cables for internal wiring in control gear compartments are to be single core 2.5 mm2 copper
conductors with high temperature insulation and sheath.

F. Finish: Exposed metal parts of floodlights are to be painted with corrosion and heat resistant paint,
resisting operating temperatures attained in direct sunlight while lamp is burning.

G. Mounting: Floodlights are to be located as shown on the Drawings and mounted on specially
designed brackets to allow swiveling in any desired direction and locking firmly in final position.
Protractor scale is to be provided for accurate setting.

H. Earthing Terminals: Bolted earthing terminal is to be provided in each fitting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment: Install equipment to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this but no changes are to be
made without the approval of Engineer.

B. Column Bases: Install columns on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. Before
commencement of construction, ensure that bases are suitable for column installation.

C. Holding Down and Plumb Adjusting Nuts, Washers, Locknuts or Nyloc Nuts: Stainless steel or
cadmium plated.

D. Columns: Erect columns so that luminaires are located on a line parallel to theoretical profile of
road. Alignment of columns, both horizontally and vertically, is to be secured to the satisfaction
of Engineer. Brackets are to be set at 90 degrees to longitudinal axis of road.

E. Install poles as follows:

1. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
2. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
3. Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
4. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or expanding concrete
grout firmly packed in entire void space.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 / Page 5 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

5. Use a short piece of 13-mm diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to
drain condensation from interior of pole.

F. Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach luminaires and supports to
allow aiming for indicated light distribution.

G. Mounting Adjustments: After demonstrating to Engineer that specified lighting requirements have
been met, carry out final setting and locking in position of the floodlights.

H. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.

I. Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Replace
malfunctioning lamps.

J. Cabling Conduits and Ductwork: Carry out in accordance with Division 16 Section "Conductors
and Cabling". Cable ducts are to be directly buried except at crossings with other service work or
roads.

3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE

A. Visual inspection is to include inspection of condition of each piece of equipment, quality of

workmanship, alignment, perpendicularity, labeling and the like, all in conformance with the
Specification.

B. Insulation resistance and continuity tests are to be carried out on each circuit and piece of
equipment before energization, with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps not installed.

C. Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with lamps installed,
including recording voltage at terminals of ballasts on final columns of each circuit and at
distribution panel or the like.

D. Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation, and are to include
measurement of lighting and uniformity levels on required illuminated surfaces.

E. Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with the
Specification.

F. Earthing resistance tests are to include measurement of earth electrode resistance at final points of
circuits and continuity of protective conductors.

G. Results of tests are to be recorded on site and signed by witnessing parties.

H. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

I. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and
energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows:

1. Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination performance is indicated. Use

calibrated photometers.
2. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
3. Check excessively noisy ballasts.

J. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating and
interpreting results.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 / Page 6 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018

K. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until
units operate properly.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground Equipment:

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values.

B. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and

Bonding."

1. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and foundations.

Connect luminaires to grounding system with conductor as shown on plans or in
accordance with Regulations.

3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust amiable luminaires and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide required light
distributions and intensities.

END OF SECTION 16521

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 / Page 7 of 7

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-EL-01 R02
© Copyright protected